WO2022253274A1 - Closable device and index information management method and system - Google Patents
Closable device and index information management method and system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022253274A1 WO2022253274A1 PCT/CN2022/096621 CN2022096621W WO2022253274A1 WO 2022253274 A1 WO2022253274 A1 WO 2022253274A1 CN 2022096621 W CN2022096621 W CN 2022096621W WO 2022253274 A1 WO2022253274 A1 WO 2022253274A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- unlocking
- locking
- lock
- information
- assembly
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 155
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 103
- 238000012795 verification Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 59
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 245
- 210000002105 tongue Anatomy 0.000 claims description 123
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims description 113
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 claims description 75
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 claims description 74
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 claims description 52
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims description 47
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 43
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims description 41
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 claims description 20
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 claims description 19
- 238000013016 damping Methods 0.000 claims description 18
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims description 17
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 claims description 14
- 210000003462 vein Anatomy 0.000 claims description 11
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000005489 elastic deformation Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 claims description 9
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 7
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 6
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 claims description 6
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 claims description 5
- 229910000838 Al alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 2
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 claims 1
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 39
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 33
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 28
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 20
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 15
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000003139 buffering effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000000887 face Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000010437 gem Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000010801 machine learning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000003466 welding Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002079 cooperative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001125 extrusion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910001751 gemstone Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000007779 soft material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005336 cracking Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003066 decision tree Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000003370 grooming effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002329 infrared spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010977 jade Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001795 light effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009347 mechanical transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003607 modifier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003062 neural network model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010422 painting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000123 paper Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006187 pill Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 210000001525 retina Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000002207 retinal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012706 support-vector machine Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004753 textile Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- E—FIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
- E05—LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
- E05B—LOCKS; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR; HANDCUFFS
- E05B47/00—Operating or controlling locks or other fastening devices by electric or magnetic means
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F16/00—Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor
- G06F16/90—Details of database functions independent of the retrieved data types
- G06F16/901—Indexing; Data structures therefor; Storage structures
Definitions
- This specification relates to the technical field of item management devices, in particular to a method and system for managing a closeable device and index information.
- One of the embodiments of the present specification provides a closeable device, the device includes at least two relatively movable parts, and the two relatively movable parts can form a closed space through at least one connecting piece.
- the two relatively movable parts can be locked by locking means.
- the locking device includes a mounting bracket, a first locking member, a locking component, a mechanical unlocking component and an intelligent unlocking component;
- the mounting bracket is arranged on one of the two relatively movable parts ;
- the first locking member is provided on the other of the two relatively movable parts;
- the locking assembly is movably arranged on the mounting bracket and can be adapted to the first locking member to Forming a lock, the locking component can be switched between a locked state and an unlocked state;
- the mechanical unlocking component is arranged on the mounting bracket, and the mechanical unlocking component can output a mechanical unlocking action to unlock the locking component;
- the The intelligent unlocking component is arranged on the installation bracket, and the intelligent unlocking component can output an intelligent unlocking action to unlock the locking component.
- the locking device further includes a first transmission assembly and a second transmission assembly; the first transmission assembly can be connected to the intelligent unlocking assembly and the locking assembly; the second transmission assembly can It is connected with the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component in transmission; when the intelligent unlocking component outputs a smart unlocking action, the first transmission component is in transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking component and the locking component, and the second The transmission component is separated from the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component; when the mechanical unlocking component outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the first transmission component is separated from the intelligent unlocking component and the locking component, and the The second transmission assembly is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly and the locking assembly.
- the locking assembly includes a rotating piece, a second locking piece and a traction piece, wherein the rotating piece is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through a first rotation center; the second locking piece The second locking part is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through the second rotation center, and the second locking part has a first locking tongue adapted to form locking with the first locking part; the first pulling point of the pulling part is set On the rotating piece, a second pulling point of the pulling member is arranged on the second locking member, and the pulling member pulls the rotating piece and the second locking member to switch between a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the first rotation center coincides with the center of gravity of the rotating piece.
- the rotating piece includes a first limiting part, a first force applying part and a transmission part, wherein the first limiting part and the first force applying part can be locked with the second
- the parts are adapted to switch between the locked state and the unlocked state of the first bolt, and different parts of the transmission part are respectively connected with the transmission of the first transmission assembly and the second transmission assembly.
- a limiting portion and the first force applying portion are located on a side of a line connecting the first rotation center and the first pulling point close to the second locking member.
- the transmission part includes a first push part and a second push part, the first push part can be in drive connection with the first transmission assembly, and the second push part can be connected with the second push part
- the transmission assembly is in transmission connection; the first pushing part and the second pushing part are located on the side of the line connecting the first rotation center and the first traction point away from the second locking part.
- the first pulling point is set on the first force application part.
- the side of the second locking member close to the rotating piece is provided with a second limiting portion and a second force applying portion, and the second limiting portion can cooperate with the first limiting portion
- the second force application part can be compatible with the first force application part.
- the first lock tongue, the second limiting portion and the second force applying portion are all located on the line connecting the second rotation center and the second pulling point close to the rotation side of the slice.
- the locking assembly further includes a buffer pad, and the buffer pad is located between the rotating piece and the mounting bracket and/or between the second locking piece and the mounting bracket, The rotating piece and the second locking piece are rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through the buffer plate.
- the locking assembly further includes a limiting sleeve, and when the locking assembly is in an unlocked state, the limiting sleeve abuts against the second locking member.
- the limiting sleeve is arranged on the cushion plate.
- the first transmission assembly includes a rotary dial, and the rotary dial is arranged at the power output end of the intelligent unlocking assembly.
- the power output end of the intelligent unlocking assembly outputs an intelligent unlocking action
- the rotating dial rotates in a first direction, and pushes the first pushing part so that the rotating piece rotates in an unlocking direction.
- the second transmission assembly includes a rotating paddle and a first connecting rod, wherein the rotating paddle is arranged at the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly, and the first connecting rod is arranged along the second The direction is slidably arranged on the mounting bracket, and when the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the rotating paddle moves the first connecting rod to move in the second direction, and pulls the The transmission part makes the rotating piece rotate in the unlocking direction.
- the rotating plectrum includes a first fixing portion fixed at the power output end of the mechanical lock assembly and a raised portion eccentrically arranged with the first fixing portion;
- the first connecting rod includes sequentially A connected power part, a sliding part and a pulling part, wherein the power part is provided with a first chute, and the protruding part is slidably arranged in the first chute; the pulling part can pull the The second pushing part; one of the sliding part and the mounting bracket is provided with a second chute extending along the second direction, and the other of the sliding part and the mounting bracket is provided with the second sliding groove.
- a plurality of guide pieces matched with the second chute, and the plurality of guide pieces are arranged along the second direction.
- the smart unlocking component is detachably arranged on the mounting bracket.
- the intelligent unlocking component includes a driver, a controller, and a verification information collection component, wherein the driver is fixed on the mounting bracket, and when the unlock information collected by the verification information collection component passes the verification Afterwards, the controller controls the driver to output an intelligent unlocking action.
- the verification information collection component is a keyboard and/or a biometric collection component.
- the driving member is detachably mounted on the mounting bracket through a fixing plate.
- the smart unlocking component further includes a battery compartment that provides power for the smart unlocking component, and the battery in the battery compartment is a replacement structure or a rechargeable structure.
- the smart unlocking component further includes a communication part, and after the communication part receives the verification of the unlocking information from the verification information collection part, the controller controls the driver to output a smart unlocking action.
- the mechanical unlocking assembly includes a lock cylinder assembly
- the lock cylinder assembly includes a mounting part, a lock head and a lock cylinder, wherein the installation part is detachably mounted on the mounting bracket, and the lock head
- the lock core is fixed on the installation part, the lock core is located inside the lock head, and the part of the lock core exposed from the lock head is used as the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly.
- the mounting bracket includes a top board, a side board, a first support board and a second support board, wherein the top board and the side board are connected at an angle, and the first support board and the second support board
- the plates are oppositely arranged at the two ends of the top plate and the side plate, and the joint part of the top plate and the side plate is provided with a locking channel for accommodating the passage of the first locking member, and the top plate, the side plate , the first support plate and the second support plate enclose an installation space for installing the intelligent unlocking component, the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component.
- the mechanical unlocking component is disposed on the top plate.
- the smart unlocking component and the locking component are arranged on the side panel, and the locking component corresponds to the locking channel.
- the installation bracket further includes an emergency charging port compatible with the power supply.
- the mounting bracket further includes a cover plate, at least one end of which is detachably connected to the mounting part or the mounting bracket, and the cover plate can cover the lock of the mechanical unlocking assembly hole and/or the emergency charging port.
- the two relatively movable parts include a box body and a door body, the box body and the door body enclose an internal compartment for storing items; the door body has the first A locking piece; the locking device is arranged inside the box body, and the box body and the door body are locked by fitting with the first locking piece through the locking device.
- the two relatively movable parts are made of sheet metal, aluminum alloy and/or plastic.
- the locking device includes a transmission output member, and the transmission output member has an unlocking output end and an unlocking output end capable of transmitting an unlocking force;
- the locking assembly includes a matching rotating piece and a second locking part, and both can pivot in the first plane respectively;
- the rotating piece has a transmission part, a first force application part and a stop part, and the second locking part has a second force application part and a first lock tongue , the locking assembly is configured such that: when the rotating piece is in the locking working position, the first bolt of the second locking piece can form a locking limit pair with the first locking piece, and the locking position of the rotating piece
- the first force application portion and the second force application portion of the second locking member are opposed to form a lock stopper to limit the rotation of the second locking member to the unlocking position;
- the transmission of the rotating piece part is in transmission connection with the unlocking output end of the transmission output member, so as to drive the first force applying part of the rotating piece to disengage from the second force applying part of the second locking member, and switch to unlock
- the locking assembly further includes a traction member, which is respectively connected to the rotating piece and the second locking member; and is configured to: when the rotating piece rotates to the unlocking position, The member can generate deformation reserve elastic deformation energy, and can release the elastic deformation energy after the first force application part is separated from the second force application part, so as to drive the second locking member to rotate to the unlocking working position.
- a traction member which is respectively connected to the rotating piece and the second locking member; and is configured to: when the rotating piece rotates to the unlocking position, The member can generate deformation reserve elastic deformation energy, and can release the elastic deformation energy after the first force application part is separated from the second force application part, so as to drive the second locking member to rotate to the unlocking working position.
- the first force application part includes an inner concave arc surface and a locking plane, and the two are connected by an arc transition;
- the second force application part includes a tightening plane and an outer convex arc surface, and The two are connected by a circular arc transition; when the rotating piece is in the lock working position, the locking and locking pair is formed by the contact between the locking plane and the tightening plane, and when the rotating piece is in the unlocking working position , the concave arc surface of the first force application part is engaged with the convex arc surface of the second force application part.
- the stop part is a stop plane, and in a projected plane parallel to the first plane, when the rotating piece is in the locked working position, the locking and limiting pairs are applied to the rotating piece
- the extension line of the active force is located on the side of the pivot center of the rotating piece, so as to limit the turning of the rotating piece to switch to the unlocking working position.
- the body of the second locking member is provided with an avoidance groove, and the avoidance groove is arranged on the inner side of the first lock tongue.
- the traction member is a tension spring.
- the locking device further includes a lock cylinder assembly and a drive assembly
- the transmission output member includes a lock dial and a lock dial
- the lock dial is in transmission connection with the lock cylinder assembly, And it has a mechanical unlocking output end and a mechanical unlocking output end
- the lock shifter is connected to the driving assembly in transmission, and has an electronic unlocking output end and an electronic unlocking output end
- the striker plate has a mechanical unlocking transmission part and an electronic unlocking transmission part, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is used for transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking transmission part is used for transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end
- the lock limit stop The board has a mechanical unlocking linkage part and an electronic unlocking linkage part, the mechanical unlocking linkage part is used for driving connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking linkage part is used for driving connection with the electronic unlocking output end.
- the lock dial driven by the lock cylinder assembly, can be slid along the second direction to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the lock dial is self-unlocking.
- the stroke from the sliding position to the lock working position includes an unlocking sliding stroke and an unlocking sliding stroke in sequence, and is configured as follows: in the unlocking sliding stroke, the mechanical unlocking linkage part is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end; The unlocking sliding stroke, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end; driven by the drive assembly, the lock shift block can be rotated and switched between the unlocking working position and the locking working position.
- the stroke of the lock shift block from the unlocking working position to the locking working position includes an unlocking rotation stroke and an unlocking rotation stroke in sequence, and is configured such that: in the unlocking rotation stroke, the electronic unlocking linkage part and the electronic unlocking output end transmission connection; during the unlocking rotation stroke, the electronic unlocking transmission part is in transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end.
- the lock dial includes a pressing inclined surface and a toggle head, the pressing inclined surface is set toward the lock limit baffle to form the mechanical unlocking output end, and the toggle head Extending along the first direction to form the mechanical unlock output end
- the lock shifter includes a guide chamfer surface and a dial column, the guide chamfer surface is set toward the lock limit baffle to form the electronic The unlocking output end, the shifting column extends along the second direction to form the electronic unlocking output end;
- the lock plate includes a retaining rib and a concave arc surface, and the retaining rib extends in the first surface to form the electronic unlocking output end.
- a mechanical unlocking transmission part is formed, and the concave arc surface of the toggle is set towards the drive assembly to form an electronic unlocking transmission part;
- the lock limit baffle includes a jacking guide column and a jacking slope, and the jacking The guide post extends in the first plane to form the mechanical unlocking linkage part, and the jacking slope is arranged toward the driving assembly to form the electronic unlocking linkage part.
- the limit sleeve further includes a return torsion spring, a guide column and a positioning column, the guide column and the positioning column are fixedly arranged, and the plate body of the locking limit baffle has a The guide groove and positioning groove opened in the direction, and the two side plates in the fourth direction have supporting parts respectively; the guide column is inserted into the guide groove to form a sliding adapter pair, and the positioning column is inserted In the positioning groove and its end protrudes from the positioning groove, the spring body of the reset torsion spring is sleeved on the end of the positioning column, and the spring bodies on both ends of the spring are respectively abutted against two On the supporting part, it is configured such that when the lock limit baffle slides to switch to the unlocking position, the return torsion spring deforms and reserves elastic deformation energy to provide the lock limit baffle reset force.
- the connecting member includes an opening and closing device, and the two relatively movable parts are pivotally connected through the opening and closing device, and the opening and closing device includes: a first hinge that is pivotally connected and The second hinge; a first elastic member disposed between the first hinge and the second hinge, the first elastic member can drive the first hinge and/or the second hinge The page rotates in the opening direction or the closing direction; and a buffer structure, the buffer structure is arranged on all or part of the outer surface of the first hinge, and the buffer structure extends out of the outer surface of the first hinge The part can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge and produce recoverable deformation.
- the buffer structure includes a second fixing part and a third limiting part, wherein the second fixing part is installed on the first hinge, and the third limiting part is separated from the The second fixing part extends outwards, and can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge and produce recoverable deformation.
- the thickness of the third limiting portion is greater than the thickness of the second fixing portion.
- the inner surface of the junction of the third limiting portion and the second fixing portion is in contact with the outer surface of the junction of the first hinge and the second hinge.
- the inner surface of the junction of the third limiting portion and the second fixing portion is in contact with the outer surface of the junction of the first hinge and the second hinge.
- a wrapping part is provided on the edge of the second fixing part close to the first hinge.
- the cushioning structure is made of elastic material, so that the cushioning structure deforms when contacting the second hinge, and gradually recovers to its original shape after the contact disappears.
- the first hinge and the second hinge are pivotally connected by a rotating shaft
- the first elastic member is at least one torsion spring sleeved on the rotating shaft
- the first elastic The first end of the first elastic member abuts against the inner surface of the first hinge, and the second end of the first elastic member abuts against the inner surface of the second hinge.
- the first hinge has a first rotating sleeve sleeved on the rotating shaft
- the second hinge has a second rotating sleeve sleeved on the rotating shaft
- the first hinge includes a first mounting portion, and a first bending portion bent from the first mounting portion at a first angle, and the first rotating sleeve is disposed on the on the first bend.
- the second hinge includes a second installation part, and a second bending part bent from the second installation part at a second angle, and the second rotating sleeve is arranged on the on the second bend.
- the closable device is an intelligent lock box, and the two relatively movable parts include a first housing component, and a second housing component that can jointly enclose an accommodating cavity with the first housing component.
- Housing assembly the locking device includes an intelligent lock, and the intelligent lock is arranged on the second housing assembly for unlocking and locking between the second housing assembly and the first housing assembly ;
- the smart lock has a key set on the second housing component for inputting the unlock password, and an electrical interface set on the second housing component, and the electrical interface is in The inside of the second housing assembly is isolated by a spacer.
- the first housing assembly is provided with a motor
- the smart lock includes a driving assembly and a second deadbolt connected to the driving assembly, and the second deadbolt can Driven by the assembly, the motor enters and exits to realize the locking and unlocking of the first housing assembly and the second housing assembly.
- the drive assembly includes: a motor; a transmission member connected to the output shaft of the motor; a moving member connected to the transmission member and reciprocatingly driven by the transmission member, the first Two lock tongues are arranged on the moving part; wherein, the motor drives the moving part to move away from the motor, so that the second lock tongue can enter the motor; and, the The electric motor drives the moving member to move toward the electric motor, so that the second lock tongue can be moved out of the electric motor.
- the transmission part is a screw rod
- the moving part is sleeved on the screw rod and threadedly connected with the screw rod, and the moving part only Can reciprocate along the axial direction of the screw;
- the motor drives the screw to rotate forward to make the moving part away from the motor, and drives the screw to rotate in reverse to make the moving part close to the motor .
- the second locking tongue is slidably arranged on the moving part through the second connecting rod, the sliding direction of the second connecting rod is the same as the moving direction of the moving part, and the moving A second elastic member is arranged on the member, and the second elastic member is compressed by the second connecting rod when the second lock tongue approaches the moving member.
- the smart lock includes a detection component
- the detection component includes: a detection part fixedly arranged relative to the motor; a follower connected to the moving part and moving with the moving part, The detection member can obtain the position of the second lock tongue by detecting the position of the follower.
- the detection element has a contact element, and a contact groove is opened on the follower element, and the contact element is located in the contact groove and makes the contact element contact with different side walls of the contact groove.
- the detecting member is capable of detecting whether the second locking bolt is located in the electric motor.
- the smart lock includes a control component disposed on the second housing component and electrically connected to the button and the electrical interface, the driving component and the detection element are disposed on the and electrically connected to the control assembly.
- the smart lock includes a biological information identification part, the biological information identification part is electrically connected to the control component, and cooperates with the control component to realize the verification of the control command carrying the biological information.
- the biological information identification includes at least one of a fingerprint identification, a face identification, a finger vein identification and a palmprint identification.
- control assembly includes a wireless communication module communicatively coupled with an electronic device to enable the electronic device to control the removal of the second deadbolt from the motor.
- the second housing assembly includes: an outer housing on which the button and the biometric identification member are disposed; a mounting plate provided with a mounting groove, and the second The deadbolt, the drive assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly are all located in the installation groove; they are connected with the installation board and cover the control assembly to fix the control assembly on the installation board a fixed cover plate; connected with the outer shell to accommodate the installation plate, the second lock tongue, the drive assembly, the detection assembly, the control assembly and the fixed cover plate an inner housing within the second housing assembly.
- the motor is a lock provided protruding from the first housing assembly, and the inner housing is provided with a through hole allowing the lock to pass through.
- the first housing component is provided with a hinge
- the second housing component is rotatably connected to the first housing component through the hinge, and The rotation of the component realizes the opening and closing of the accommodating cavity.
- the closable device is an intelligent lock box, and the two relatively movable parts may include a first housing component having a storage space, and can be combined with the first housing component Locked second housing assembly;
- the locking device includes a smart lock, the smart lock is arranged on the second housing assembly, the second housing assembly includes an outer housing and a mounting plate, the smart The lock includes a driving assembly arranged between the outer casing and the mounting plate and a second deadbolt driven by the driving assembly, and the first casing assembly is provided with a The lock buckle matched with the second lock tongue, an anti-knock device for dispersing impact force is provided inside the outer casing, and the anti-knock device is located inside the top end of the outer casing.
- the anti-knock device includes a mounting block and a vibration-dissipating pin
- the mounting block is provided with a vertical mounting hole
- the bottom end of the vibration-dissipating pin is inserted into the mounting hole
- the vibration-dissipating pin The top end of the top protrudes from the mounting hole
- a damping spring fitted on the vibration-scattering pin is provided in the mounting hole to elastically support the vibration-scattering pin.
- the vibration dissipating pin is in the shape of a "T"
- the top end of the damping spring is supported on the stepped portion of the vibration dissipating pin
- the bottom end of the damping spring is supported on the bottom of the installation hole.
- the mounting block is provided with a left-right symmetrical first mounting hole and a second mounting hole
- the first mounting hole is provided with a first vibration-dissipating pin and a first damping spring
- the second A second vibration-dissipating pin and a second damping spring are arranged in the mounting hole.
- the bottom of the mounting block is provided with a protruding portion capable of abutting against the upper end of the second lock tongue in a locked state, and the protruding portion is vertically connected to the scattered Vibration pin corresponding.
- the tail of the second lock tongue has a lock handle extending downward.
- the main body of the second lock tongue is in the shape of a block, and its upper end is in the shape of a bevel.
- the lock is in a "U" shape perpendicular to the fastening surface of the first housing component.
- the top of the first housing component is provided with a locking beam.
- the drive assembly includes a motor, a motor pressing block, a moving part and a latch spring, the motor is positioned on the outer casing by the motor pressing block, and the moving part is connected to the motor.
- the power output end is transmission-connected and can move vertically under the drive of the motor, and the lock tongue spring is arranged between the moving part and the second lock tongue.
- One of the embodiments of this specification provides an index information management method, which is used for index information management of the closeable device as described in any one of the above, wherein the method includes: acquiring a user's request for accessing the item management area, and the The item management area is at least surrounded by the two relatively movable parts; based on the access request, the identity of the user is safely verified, and access information is generated, and the item management area is a closable space; The item information of the item management area and/or the access information of the item during the access of the trusted user; based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, determine index information, the index information at least Also determined based on the access information.
- the determining index information based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, and determining the index information based at least on the access information includes: when the created index is not detected When information is provided, the index information is created based on the item information and/or access information of the item, and the index information is created based at least on the access information and preset rules.
- the determining index information based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, the determining of the index information based at least on the access information further includes: when the created index is detected information, the index information is updated based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, and the index information is at least updated based on the access information.
- the method further includes: performing query display based on the index information.
- the acquiring item information and/or item access information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit includes: acquiring detection information of the item management area; based on the detection information, determining The item information and/or the access information of the item.
- the item information includes at least the attribute of the item and/or the value of the item.
- the detection information is collected by a sensor, and the sensor includes at least one of an image sensor, a laser sensor, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, and a pressure sensor.
- the method before determining the index information based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, the method further includes: at least based on the access information and/or the detection information, Determine the ownership information of the item.
- said determining the ownership information of the item based at least on the access information and/or the detection information further comprises: determining the ownership information of the deposited item based on the access information and the detection information .
- determining the ownership information of the item further includes: obtaining the historical ownership information of the item in the item management area; based on the detection information and the historical ownership information to determine the ownership information of the retrieved item.
- the index information is also determined based on the ownership information.
- the access request carries user information corresponding to the identity of the user; the security verification of the identity of the user includes: judging whether the user is trusted based on the user information of the user The user sends an alert message when the judgment result is negative.
- an index information management system the system includes: a security module configured to: obtain a user's request for accessing an item management area; based on the access request, perform security on the user's identity Verifying and generating access information, the item management area is a closable space; and a management module configured to: acquire item information of the item management area and/or access information of the item during the trusted user's visit ; Based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, determine index information, the index information is determined based at least on the access information.
- One of the embodiments of the present specification provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, wherein, when the program is executed by a processor, the method described in any implementation manner in the first aspect is implemented.
- One of the embodiments of this specification provides a processor, where the processor is configured to run a program, where the program implements the method described in any of the above implementation manners when running.
- One of the embodiments of this specification proposes an electronic device, including: one or more processors; a storage device, on which one or more programs are stored; when the one or more programs are used by the one or more When the processors are executed, the one or more processors are made to implement the method described in any implementation manner in the first aspect.
- Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an exemplary closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary structure of a closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 4 is an exploded view of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 5 is a perspective view of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 6 is a schematic front structural view of a locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 7 is a schematic bottom view of the locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 8 is a schematic front view of a locking device in an unlocked state according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 9 is a schematic bottom view of the locking device in an unlocked state according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 10 is another perspective view of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an intelligent unlocking component according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Fig. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of the locked state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of the unlocking state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 15 is a schematic structural view of a lock and limit baffle according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of the mechanical unlocking process of the locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of an intelligent unlocking process of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 18 is a perspective view of an opening and closing structure according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 19 is an exploded view of an opening and closing structure according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 20 is a front view of a buffer structure according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 21 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in a closed state according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 22 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 23 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in a closed state according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Fig. 24 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Figure 25 is an exploded view of a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present description.
- Figure 26 is a sectional view of Figure 24;
- Figure 27 is a sectional view of Figure 25;
- Fig. 28 is a schematic structural view of a contact member in contact with the left side wall of a contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 29 is a structural schematic diagram showing that the contact element is not in contact with the left side wall and the right side wall of the contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification;
- Fig. 30 is a schematic structural view of a contact member in contact with a right side wall of a contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 31 is a schematic structural view of an electrical interface and an isolator disposed on a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 32 is a control logic diagram of locking according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 33 is a control logic diagram of unlocking according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Fig. 34 is a schematic structural view of another exemplary smart lock box in an open state according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Figure 35 is an exploded view of a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- 36 is a cross-sectional view of a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of an anti-knock device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Fig. 39 is a block diagram of an exemplary index information management device according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Fig. 40 is a block diagram of an exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 41 is a block diagram of another exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Fig. 42 is an exemplary flowchart of index information management according to some embodiments of this specification.
- Fig. 43 is an exemplary flowchart of determining the ownership information of an item according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Fig. 44 is an exemplary application scenario diagram of the index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification.
- 100 closeable device; 110, first component; 120, connector; 130, second component; 140, locking device; 300, locking device; 302, first locking member; 310, mounting bracket; 311, top plate; 312, side plate; 313, first support plate; 314, second support plate; 315, locking channel; 320, locking assembly; 321, rotating piece; 321a, first rotation center; 321b, first traction 3211, the first push part; 3212, the second push part; 3213, the first force application part; 3214, the first limit part; 322, the second locking part; 322a, the second rotation center; 322b, the second Traction point; 3221, first lock bolt; 3222, second force application part; 3223, second limit part; 323, traction part; 324, cushion plate; 325, limit sleeve; 330, intelligent unlocking component; 331 , driving part; 332, fixed plate; 340, mechanical unlocking component; 341, lock head; 342, lock cylinder; 342a, lock hole; 34
- system means for distinguishing different components, elements, parts, parts or assemblies of different levels.
- said words may be replaced by other expressions if other words can achieve the same purpose.
- Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an exemplary closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- the closable device 100 mainly includes at least two relatively movable parts, and these two relatively movable parts can form a closed space. Opening and closing of the closeable device 100 can be achieved by relative movement of two relatively movable parts. The relative movement of the two components may be relative translation or relative rotation or the like.
- a closed space can be understood as a space that is isolated from the external environment and can accommodate and store items.
- the two relatively moving parts may be a box body and a cover of a box (such as a key box, a jewelry box, etc.) respectively.
- the two relatively moving parts may be a box body and a door body of a box (such as a safe, a suitcase, etc.) respectively.
- the two relatively moving parts may be a door and a wall of a house (such as a warehouse or a residence) respectively.
- the closable device 100 can be of various types.
- the closable device 100 can be a box as shown in FIG. 2 or an intelligent lock box as shown in FIGS. 23-37 below.
- FIGS. 2 and 23- 27 The related description presents specific examples of closeable devices.
- two relatively movable parts can form a closed space through at least one connecting piece 120 .
- At least one connecting piece 120 can connect two relatively movable parts, and ensure that the two parts can realize relative movement, so as to realize the opening and closing of the closeable device 100 .
- the structure of the connecting piece 120 may be various, for example, the connecting piece 120 may include a component (such as a connecting shaft), and the connecting piece 120 may also include a connecting structure (such as a snap-fit structure). Specific examples of connectors 120 are described below in relation to FIGS. 18-22 .
- two relatively movable parts can be locked by a locking device.
- the locking device when the locking device locks the two relatively movable parts, the two movable parts can no longer move relative to each other, and the closeable device 100 is closed and can maintain the closed state.
- the locking device when the locking device unlocks the two relatively movable parts, the two movable parts can move relatively, and the closeable device 100 can be opened from the closed state to the open state.
- the locking device may include a locking assembly for locking the relative movement of two relatively movable parts.
- the locking mechanism may include an unlocking assembly capable of unlocking the relative movement of the two relatively movable parts by the locking assembly.
- the locking device may comprise a mechanical lock.
- a mechanical lock may include a locking component (ie, a mechanical locking component) and an unlocking component (ie, a mechanical unlocking component).
- the locking device may comprise a smart lock.
- a smart lock may include a locking component (ie, a smart locking component) and an unlocking component (ie, a smart unlocking component).
- the closeable device 100 may include a first part 110 and a second part 130 , and the first part 110 and the second part 130 may be combined to form a closed space through a connecting piece 120 . Relative movement of the first part 110 and the second part 130 may cause the closeable device 100 to be opened or closed.
- the closed space formed by the first part 110 and the second part 130 through the connecting piece 120 can be used for storing articles.
- the first component 110 and/or the second component 130 may have a concave structure to form a receiving cavity.
- the closable device 100 further includes a locking device 140.
- the first part 110 and the second part 130 can move relative to each other, so that the closable device 100 can be opened or closed for convenience. Store or retrieve items.
- the closeable device 100 can be closed and the locking device is controlled to be in the locked state. At this time, the relative movement between the first part 110 and the second part 130 is locked, and the inside of the closeable device 100 is The closed space can be stably maintained in a closed state to realize the storage and management of items. It should be noted that the positions of the locking device and the connecting parts shown in FIG. 1 and subsequent figures are only examples and not limiting.
- Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary structure of a closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- the closeable device 100 can be a box structure, and the two relatively movable parts can include a box body and a door body, for example, the first part 110 can be a door body, and the second part 110 can be a door body.
- 130 may be a box body.
- the box and door enclose an interior compartment for storing items.
- the box body and the door body can be pivotally connected, and the locking device 140 realizes the locking of the box body and the door body; Door locking.
- the box body and the door body can be processed from sheet metal.
- the material of the box body and the door body can be a durable shell formed by one or more hardened materials such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, plastic, etc., but is not limited to the above materials.
- the form of the box structure of the closeable device 100 may include, but not limited to, a safe, a smart safe, a storage cabinet, a gun safe, or a portable safe.
- FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a locking device according to some embodiments of this specification
- Fig. 4 is an exploded view of a locking device according to some embodiments of this specification
- Fig. 5 is a perspective view of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification Stereoscopic view
- FIG. 6 is a front structural schematic view of the locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification
- FIG. 7 is a bottom view structural schematic view of the locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification
- FIG. 8 is a According to some embodiments of this specification, a schematic front view of a locking device in an unlocked state
- FIG. 9 is a schematic bottom view of a locking device in an unlocked state according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a bottom view of a locking device according to some embodiments of this specification. Another perspective view of the locking device shown in the example;
- FIG. 11 is a schematic structural view of an intelligent unlocking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 12 is a schematic structural view of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 13 It is a schematic diagram of the locked state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the unlocked state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the unlocked state according to some embodiments of this specification Fig.
- FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of the mechanical unlocking process of the locking device according to some embodiments of this specification
- Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of the intelligent unlocking process of the locking device according to some embodiments of this specification .
- the locking device will be described below in conjunction with FIGS. 3-17 .
- this embodiment provides a locking device 300, which can be used on the closeable device 100 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. The locking and unlocking of the relative movement of the cabinet and the door).
- the locking device 300 mainly includes a mounting bracket 310 , a first locking member 302 and a locking component 320 .
- the mounting bracket 310 can be arranged on one of the two relatively movable parts (ie, the first part 110 and the second part 130), and the first locking member 302 is arranged on the two relatively movable parts (ie, the second part 130). On the other of the first part 110 and the second part 130).
- the first locking member 302 may be disposed on the door body (ie, the first component 110), the mounting bracket 310 may be disposed inside the box body (ie, the second component 130), and the locking assembly 320 may be movably disposed on the mounting bracket 310 and can fit with the first locking member 302 to form a lock, and the lock assembly 320 can be switched between a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the locking device 300 may further include an intelligent unlocking component 330 and a mechanical unlocking component 340 .
- the intelligent unlocking component 330 is arranged on the mounting bracket 310, and the intelligent unlocking component 330 can output an intelligent unlocking action to unlock the locking component 320; the mechanical unlocking component 340 is arranged on the mounting bracket 310, and the mechanical unlocking component 340 can output a mechanical unlocking action to make the locking Component 320 is unlocked.
- the installation of the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 on the mounting bracket 310 may be independent of each other without affecting each other.
- the smart unlocking component 330 may refer to the smart lock in this specification, or a part of the smart lock in this specification; the mechanical unlocking component 340 may refer to the mechanical lock in this specification, or it may be a part of the smart lock in this specification. part of the mechanical lock.
- the locking device 300 may further include a first transmission assembly 350 and a second transmission assembly 360 .
- the first transmission assembly 350 can be connected in transmission with the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320 ; the second transmission assembly 360 can be in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320 .
- the first transmission assembly 350 is in transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320, and the second transmission assembly 360 is out of transmission with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320; when the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 When the mechanical unlocking action is output, the first transmission assembly 350 is out of transmission with the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320 , and the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320 .
- the locking device 1000 mainly includes a first locking component 1002 , a locking component 1020 , a mechanical unlocking component 1040 , an intelligent unlocking component 1030 and a transmission output component.
- the arrangement and cooperation of the locking assembly 1020 and the first locking member 1002 are the same as the arrangement and cooperation of the locking assembly 320 and the first locking member 302 .
- the transmission output member may include a structure similar to the first transmission assembly 350 and the second transmission assembly 360 described above, and the mechanical unlocking assembly 1040, the intelligent unlocking assembly 1030, the locking assembly 1020, and the working principle of the transmission output member are the same as those of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 , the smart unlocking component 330, the locking component 320, the first transmission component 350, and the second transmission component 360 have the same working principle.
- the working principle of the smart unlocking mode of the locking device 300 is: the smart unlocking component 330 outputs a smart unlocking action, and the first transmission component 350 and the smart unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320 drive connected, the second transmission assembly 360 is out of transmission with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320, and the first transmission assembly 350 drives the locking assembly 320 to switch to an unlocked state, thereby completing intelligent unlocking.
- the working principle of the mechanical unlocking mode of the locking device 300 is as follows: the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the first transmission component 350 is separated from the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320, and the second transmission component 360 and the mechanical The unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 are connected by transmission, and the second transmission component 360 drives the locking component 320 to switch to the unlocked state, thereby completing the mechanical unlocking.
- the locking device 300 realizes the functions of automatically locking the door when it is closed and automatically opening it when it is unlocked.
- the second transmission component 360 since the second transmission component 360 is out of transmission with the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 during the above intelligent unlocking process, the second transmission component 360 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 will not affect the intelligent unlocking; during the above mechanical unlocking process, The first transmission assembly 350 is separated from the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320. Therefore, the first transmission assembly 350 and the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 will not affect the mechanical unlocking, thereby realizing that the intelligent unlocking and the mechanical unlocking do not affect each other. Therefore, when any one of the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 fails, it will not affect the normal use of the locking device 300 for the closeable device 100, reducing the failure rate and improving the safety performance.
- the initial state of the locking component 320 may be a locked state, the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 do not output an unlocking action, and the locking component 320 is always in the locked state. In some other embodiments, the initial state of the locking component 320 may also be an unlocked state, and then the locking is performed when the first locking member 302 needs to be locked.
- the locking component 320 can be used to lock the first locking member 302 , and the first locking member 302 can be a hook, a groove, etc. that have a structure that can be adapted to the locking component 320 .
- the locking assembly 320 realizes switching between the locking state and the unlocking state by moving, wherein, the movement of the locking assembly 320 can be a reciprocating linear motion or a reciprocating rotational motion.
- the locking assembly 320 may include a rotating piece 321 , a second locking piece 322 and a pulling piece 323 .
- the role of the rotating piece 321 is to receive the driving force output by the first transmission assembly 350 and the second transmission assembly 360 to drive the second locking member 322 to rotate in the unlocking direction.
- the function of the traction member 323 is to realize the traction of the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 .
- the function of the second locking member 322 is to lock the first locking member 302 by hooking the first locking tongue 3221 .
- the locking assembly 320 can adopt the first configuration method: the rotating piece 321 is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 through the first rotation center 321a; the second locking member 322 is rotatable through the second rotation center 322a Set on the mounting bracket 310, the second locking piece 322 has a first locking tongue 3221 adapted to form a lock with the first locking piece 302; the first pulling point 321b of the pulling piece 323 is set on the rotating piece 321, and the pulling piece 323 The second pulling point 322b is disposed on the second locking member 322, and the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 to switch between the locked state and the unlocked state.
- the first pulling point 321b of the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321, and the second pulling point 322b of the pulling member 323 pulls the second locking member 322, so that the locking assembly 320 is maintained in the locked state, that is, between the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the mechanical unlocking assembly.
- the locking assembly 320 is maintained in a locked state under the action of the pulling member 323 .
- the intelligent unlocking component 330 When the intelligent unlocking component 330 outputs an intelligent unlocking action or the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, under the driving action of the first transmission component 350 or the second transmission component 360, the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction, and the second locking member 322 Under the traction of the traction member 323, follow the rotating piece 321 to rotate in the unlocking direction until the first lock tongue 3221 breaks away from the first locking member 302 to achieve the purpose of unlocking; when the intelligent unlocking component 330 or the mechanical unlocking component 340 does not output the unlocking action , under the action of the traction member 323, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 rotate in the locking direction until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
- the locking assembly 1020 mainly includes a matching rotating piece 1021 and a second locking member 1022 , and both of them can pivot in the first plane respectively.
- the rotating piece 1021 has a transmission part, a first force application part 10213 and a stopper part 10215
- the second locking part 1022 has a second force application part 10222 and a first lock tongue 10221, and is configured such that the rotation piece 1021 is located at the locking working position
- the first lock tongue 10221 of the second locking piece 1022 can form a locking limit pair with the first locking piece 1002, and the first force applying part 10213 of the rotating piece 1021 and the second force applying part of the second locking piece 1022 10222 offset each other to form a locking and limiting pair to limit the rotation of the second locking member 1022 to the unlocking working position.
- the transmission part of the rotating piece 1021 is connected to the unlocking output end of the transmission output part, so as to drive the first force applying part 10213 of the rotating piece 1021 to disengage from the second force applying part 10222 of the second locking part 1022, and switch to the unlocking working position.
- the locking device 1000 may further include a rotating piece limiting mechanism for limiting the rotating piece 1021 .
- the rotating piece limiting mechanism mainly includes a lock limit baffle 1070, and the lock limit baffle 1070 can slide along the third direction to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position.
- the lock limit baffle 1070 has a stop part 1072 and a linkage part, and is configured as follows: when the lock limit baffle 1070 is in the lock working position, the stop part 1072 on it and the stop part 10215 of the rotating piece 1021 Counteract to form a stop limit pair to limit the rotation of the rotating piece 1021 to the unlocking position; the linkage part of the lock limit baffle 1070 can be connected with the unlocking output end of the transmission output to drive the lock limit baffle 1070 The stop part 1072 of the rotating piece 1021 disengages from the stop part 10215, and switches to the unlocked working position.
- the mechanical unlocking component 1040 of the locking device 1000 can be connected to the locking component 1020 through the lock dial 1044 of the transmission output part, and the intelligent unlocking component 1030 can be connected to the locking component 1020 through the rotary dial 1033 of the transmission output part.
- the transmission connection controls the unlocking and locking of the lock cylinder assembly 1040 .
- the mechanical unlocking component 1040 and the intelligent unlocking component 1030 can respectively establish a force transmission path with the locking component 1020 and the rotating piece limit mechanism to achieve respective independent mechanical unlocking modes and intelligent unlocking modes.
- the realization of the mechanical unlocking mode is composed of three modules: the mechanical unlocking component 1040, the locking component 1020, and the rotating plate limiting mechanism; the realization of the intelligent unlocking mode is composed of the intelligent unlocking component 1030, the locking component 1020 and the rotating plate limiting mechanism.
- the locking device 1000 can be configured with either a mechanical unlocking component 1040 or an intelligent unlocking component 1030 .
- the first rotation center 321a of the rotating piece 321 coincides with the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321, so even if the locking device 300 is impacted from multiple directions, the rotating piece 321 itself is difficult to produce The displacement in the rotation direction can effectively prevent the second locking member 322 from loosening, thereby preventing the door body from bouncing open, which has higher safety.
- the first rotation center 321 a of the rotating piece 321 and the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321 may not coincide.
- the locking assembly 320 can also adopt the second arrangement mode, at this time, the locking assembly 320 can include a rotating piece 321, a second locking piece 322 and a traction piece 323, wherein the rotating piece 321 passes through the first rotation center 321a is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket 310, and there is a locking opening between the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 for accommodating the first locking member 302 to enter and exit; the second locking member 322 is rotatably arranged on the On the mounting bracket 310, the part of the second locking member 322 corresponding to the locking opening has a first lock tongue 3221 that fits with the first locking member 302 to form a lock; the first pulling point 321b of the pulling member 323 is set on the rotating piece 321 , the second pulling point 322b of the pulling member 323 is disposed on the second locking member 322, and the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 close to each other.
- the first pulling point 321b of the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321, and the second pulling point 322b of the pulling member 323 pulls the second locking member 322 so that the locking assembly 320 is maintained in the locked state, that is, when the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 are not locked.
- the unlocking action is output, the locking assembly 320 is maintained in a locked state under the action of the pulling member 323 .
- the intelligent unlocking component 330 When the intelligent unlocking component 330 outputs an intelligent unlocking action or the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, under the driving action of the first transmission component 350 or the second transmission component 360, the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction, and the second locking member 322 Under the traction of the traction member 323, it follows the rotating piece 321 and rotates in the unlocking direction.
- the distance between the locking opening becomes larger until the first lock tongue 3221 is separated from the first locking member 302 to achieve the purpose of unlocking; when the smart unlock
- the assembly 330 or the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 does not output the unlocking action, under the action of the traction member 323, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 rotate in the locking direction, and the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller until the second locking member 322 is in the locked position. state.
- the first rotation center 321a of the rotating piece 321 coincides with the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321, so even if the locking device 300 is impacted by multiple directions, the rotating piece 321 itself is difficult to produce displacement in the direction of rotation, which can effectively Preventing the second locking member 322 from getting loose, thereby preventing the door body from bouncing open, which has higher safety.
- the first rotation center 321 a of the rotating piece 321 and the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321 may not coincide.
- the rotating piece 321 has various setting modes when it is set specifically.
- the rotating piece 321 may include a first force application part 3213 and a transmission part, wherein the first force application part 3213 can be adapted to the second locking part 322, and the transmission part Different parts of the first transmission assembly 350 and the second transmission assembly 360 are respectively in transmission connection.
- the first force applying portion 3213 is located on a side of the line O1 connecting the first rotation center 321 a and the first pulling point 321 b close to the second locking member 322 .
- the transmission part may include a first pushing part 3211 and a second pushing part 3212 .
- the first pushing part 3211 can be connected to the first transmission assembly 350, and the second pushing part 3212 can be connected to the second transmission assembly 360; the first pushing part 3211 and the second pushing part 3212 are located between the first rotation center 321a and the first The line O1 connecting the pulling point 321b is away from the side of the second locking member 322 , as shown in FIG. 5 .
- the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the smart unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320 .
- the first transmission assembly 350 is in transmission connection with the first pushing part 3211 , the first transmission assembly 350 pushes the first pushing part 3211 , and the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction after overcoming the traction force of the traction member 323 .
- the second transmission component 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 .
- the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the second pushing part 3212 , the second transmission assembly 360 pushes the second pushing part 3212 , and the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction after overcoming the pulling force of the traction member 323 .
- the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
- the rotating piece 321 may further include a first limiting portion 3214, wherein the first limiting portion 3214 and The first force applying portion 3213 can be adapted to the second locking member 322 ; the first limiting portion 3214 is located on a side of the line connecting the first rotation center 321 a and the first pulling point 321 b close to the second locking member 322 .
- the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller, and the locking opening is maintained at a reasonable distance under the action of the first limiting portion 3214 until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
- the traction member 323 can be understood as being processed from materials with elastic properties, such as rubber strips and springs.
- the first traction point 321b can also be set on the first pushing part 3211, the second pushing part 3212 or the first force applying part 3213, preferably, it is set on the first force applying part 3213, at a distance from the second locking part 322 The smallest, the most efficient transmission.
- the original state of the second locking member 322 is the state of locking the first locking member 302 , and when it is rotated in the unlocking direction, it can disengage from the first locking member 302 .
- a second force application part 3222 can be provided on the side of the second locking member 322 close to the rotating piece 321, and the second force application part 3222 can be combined with the first force application part 3222. part 3213, as shown in Figure 5.
- the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320, specifically, the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the first pushing part 3211, and the first transmission component 350
- the rotating piece 321 will rotate in the unlocking direction after the rotating piece 321 overcomes the traction force of the pulling member 323 and the force between the second force applying part 3222 and the first force applying part 3213 .
- the second transmission component 360 When the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the second transmission component 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 . Specifically, the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the second pushing part 3212, the second transmission assembly 360 pushes the second pushing part 3212, the rotating piece 321 overcomes the traction force of the traction member 323 and the second force application part 3222 and the first force application After the force between the parts 3213, the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
- the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
- the side of the second locking member 322 close to the rotating piece 321 can also be provided with a second limiting portion 3223, the second The second limiting portion 3223 can match the first limiting portion 3214 .
- the first transmission component 350 is connected in transmission with the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320. Specifically, the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the first pusher 3211, and the first transmission component 350 pushes After the first pushing part 3211 and the rotating piece 321 overcome the pulling force of the pulling member 323 and the force between the second force applying part 3222 and the first force applying part 3213 , the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
- the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320. Specifically, the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the second pusher 3212, and the second transmission assembly 360 pushes After the second pushing part 3212 and the rotating piece 321 overcome the traction force of the pulling member 323 and the force between the second force applying part 3222 and the first force applying part 3213 , the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
- the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller, and under the action of the first limiting portion 3214 and the second limiting portion 3223, the locking opening is maintained at a reasonable distance until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
- the first lock tongue 3221 , the second limiting portion 3223 and the second force applying portion 3222 can be arranged in two ways.
- the first arrangement can be adopted: the first locking tongue 3221, the second limiting portion 3223 and the second force applying portion 3222 are all located on the line O2 connecting the second rotation center 322a and the second pulling point 322b Close to the side of the rotating piece 321 .
- the second arrangement can also be adopted: the first locking tongue 3221, the second limiting portion 3223 and the second force applying portion 3222 are all located at the connection between the second rotation center 322a and the second pulling point 322b.
- the line O2 is away from the side of the rotating piece 321 .
- a locking opening can be formed between the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322, effectively preventing the first locking member 302 from detaching from the first locking tongue 3221, thereby improving safety performance.
- the locking assembly 320 may further include a buffer pad 324, the buffer pad 324 is located between the rotating piece 321 and the mounting bracket 310 and/or between the second locking piece 322 and the mounting bracket 310, the rotating piece 321 and the mounting bracket 310
- the second locking member 322 is rotatably disposed on the mounting bracket 310 through the buffer plate 324 .
- the buffer plate 324 can be made of elastic material, which can reduce the noise during the reciprocating movement or rotation of the locking assembly 320, or in the process of collision, the locking assembly 320 It plays a role of buffering with the mounting bracket 310 .
- the locking assembly 320 may further include a limiting sleeve 325 , and when the locking assembly 320 is in an unlocked state, the limiting sleeve 325 abuts against the second locking member 322 . Thereby effectively reducing the excessive rotation of the second locking member 322 in the unlocking direction.
- the limiting sleeve 325 is disposed on the buffer pad 324 or the mounting bracket 310 .
- the function of the first transmission assembly 350 is to realize power transmission between the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320 , and there are many configurations of the first transmission assembly 350 .
- the first transmission assembly 350 can adopt the above-mentioned first setting method: the first transmission assembly 350 can include a rotary dial 351, and the rotary dial 351 is arranged at the power output end of the smart unlocking assembly 330.
- the rotary dial 351 rotates in the first direction, and pushes the first pushing part 3211 so that the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
- the first transmission assembly 350 can also adopt the second setting method: the first transmission assembly 350 can include a rotary paddle 361 and a first connecting rod 362, wherein the rotary paddle 361 is arranged on the smart unlocking assembly At the power output end of 330, the first connecting rod 362 is slidably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 along the first direction.
- the power output end of the smart unlocking component 330 outputs the smart unlocking action, turn the paddle 361 to move the first connecting rod 362 Move in the first direction, and pull the first pushing part 3211 to make the rotating piece 321 rotate in the unlocking direction.
- the rotating paddle 361 includes a first fixing portion 3611 fixed on the power output end of the smart unlocking assembly 330 and a protrusion 3612 eccentrically arranged with the first fixing portion 3611 .
- the first connecting rod 362 includes a power part 3621, a sliding part 3622 and a pulling part 3623 connected in sequence, wherein the power part 3621 is provided with a first sliding groove 3621a, and the protruding part 3612 is slidably arranged in the first sliding groove 3621a;
- the pulling part 3623 can pull the second pushing part 3212; one of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310 is provided with a second sliding groove 3622a extending along the second direction ox, and the other of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310
- a plurality of guide pieces matched with the second slide groove 3622a are provided, and the plurality of guide pieces are arranged along the second direction ox.
- the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 When the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 outputs a rotary motion, it drives the rotary paddle 361 to rotate, and the raised portion 3612 is eccentrically arranged. Therefore, the first connecting rod 362 cooperates with the raised portion 3612 and the first chute 3621a and the guide member and the first slide groove 3621a Under the cooperative action of the second slide groove 3622a, the linear motion is performed, thereby realizing the conversion of the rotary motion into the linear motion.
- the function of the second transmission assembly 360 is to realize the power transmission between the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320 , and there are many arrangements of the second transmission assembly 360 .
- the second transmission assembly 360 can adopt the first arrangement mode: the second transmission assembly 360 includes a rotary paddle 361 and a first connecting rod 362 , wherein the rotary paddle 361 is set at the power of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 At the output end, the first connecting rod 362 is slidably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 along the second direction ox.
- the rotating paddle 361 includes a first fixing portion 3611 fixed on the power output end of the mechanical lock assembly and a protrusion 3612 eccentrically arranged with the first fixing portion 3611 .
- the first connecting rod 362 includes a power part 3621, a sliding part 3622 and a pulling part 3623 connected in sequence, wherein the power part 3621 is provided with a first sliding groove 3621a, and the protruding part 3612 is slidably arranged in the first sliding groove 3621a;
- the pulling part 3623 can pull the second pushing part 3212; one of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310 is provided with a second sliding groove 3622a extending along the second direction ox, and the other of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310
- a plurality of guide pieces matched with the second slide groove 3622a are provided, and the plurality of guide pieces are arranged along the second direction ox.
- the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 When the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 outputs a rotary motion, it drives the rotating plectrum 361 to rotate, and the raised portion 3612 is eccentrically arranged. Therefore, the first connecting rod 362 cooperates with the raised portion 3612 and the first slide groove 3621a and the guide member and the first slide groove 3621a Under the cooperative action of the second slide groove 3622a, the linear motion is performed, thereby realizing the conversion of the rotary motion into the linear motion.
- the second transmission assembly 360 can also adopt the second arrangement: the second transmission assembly 360 can include a rotary dial 351, and the rotary dial 351 is arranged at the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340, when the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 When the power output end of the unlocking assembly 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the rotary dial 351 rotates in the second direction ox, and pushes the second pushing part 3212 so that the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
- the arrangement manner of the first transmission assembly 350 and the arrangement manner of the second transmission assembly 360 may be the same or different.
- the pivot plane of the rotating piece 1021 and the second locking member 1022 is defined as the first plane, and the first plane is defined as The sliding displacement direction of the locking stopper 1070 is the third direction X, the third direction X is perpendicular to the first surface, the sliding displacement direction of the locking dial 1044 is defined as the fourth direction Y, and the first surface and The direction perpendicular to the fourth direction Y is the fifth direction Z.
- the locking assembly 1020 mainly includes a matching rotating piece 1021 and a second locking member 1022, and the two can pivot in the first plane respectively; the rotating piece 1021
- the first rotation center 1021a of the second locking member 1022 and the second rotation center 1022a of the second locking member 1022 are arranged at intervals.
- the rotating piece 1021, the second locking member 1022 and the corresponding pivot shaft are integrally installed on the plastic base 1010, and then the plastic base 1010 is installed and fixed on the housing (ie, the corresponding second part 130 in FIG.
- the plastic base 1010 is provided with a bumper sleeve 1011 for adapting to the limiting structure 10224 of the second locking member 1022 to construct a reliable positioning of the maximum swing of the second locking member 1022 .
- the corresponding pivot shaft can be directly fixedly installed on the housing.
- the locking device 1000 may further include a lock cylinder assembly 1040 a and a driving assembly 1040 b, and the transmission output member includes a lock dial 1044 and a lock dial 1033 .
- the lock dial 1044 is in transmission connection with the lock cylinder assembly 1040a, and has a mechanical unlocking output end and a mechanical unlocking output end.
- the lock shifting block 1033 is in transmission connection with the driving assembly 1040b, and has an electronic unlock output terminal and an electronic unlock output terminal.
- the rotating piece 1021 has a mechanical unlocking transmission part and an electronic unlocking transmission part, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is used for driving connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking transmission part is used for driving connection with the electronic unlocking output end.
- the lock limit baffle 1070 has a mechanical unlocking linkage part and an electronic unlocking linkage part, the mechanical unlocking linkage part is used for transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking linkage part is used for transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end.
- the lock cylinder assembly 1040a is used as an unlocking mechanism for performing mechanical unlocking operations, and its unlocking dial 1040a-1 drives the lock dial 1044 to slide in the fourth direction Y.
- the lock dial 1044 has a first long slot 10441 and a second long slot 10442, the first long slot 10441 is opened along the third direction X, and the unlocking dial 1040a-1 is inserted into the first long slot 10441, The second long slot 10442 is opened along the fourth direction Y, and the guide stud 1040a-2 on the housing is inserted into the second long slot 10442 to establish a sliding pair that satisfies the left and right movement of the lock dial 1044 .
- threaded fasteners can be used to tighten the guide studs of the casing, and two sets of second long grooves 10442, threaded fasteners, and the guide studs of the casing can be used to fully fasten and limit, It is ensured that when the unlocking dial 1040 a - 1 drives the lock dial 1044 to slide and displace along the fourth direction, it will not tilt up and down, so as to ensure the smooth movement of the lock dial 1044 left and right. Has good actuation performance.
- the lock dial 1044 is a transmission output member on the output driving force path of mechanical unlocking, on which is provided a pressing inclined surface 10443 as an output end of mechanical unlocking and a dial head 10444 as an output end of mechanical unlocking.
- the resisting slope 10443 is set toward the lock stopper 1070, and is used to match with the lifting guide post 1071 on the lock stopper 1070 to unlock;
- the retaining rib 10217 on the 1021 is adapted to realize unlocking.
- the transmission mode of the lock cylinder assembly 1040a and the lock dial 1044, and the sliding fitting relationship of the lock dial 1044 relative to the housing A are not limited to the structure shown in the figure; it can be understood that , as long as the mechanical unlocking driving force can be output through the lock dial 1044 in a linear displacement manner.
- the driving assembly 1040b is used as an unlocking mechanism for performing electronic unlocking operations, and its motor can be fixed on the housing through a motor bracket, and can drive the lock block 1033 to rotate.
- the lock shifter 1033 is a transmission output member on the output driving path of the electronic unlocking, on which a guide chamfer 10332 as the output end of the electronic unlocking and a dial 10331 as the output end of the electronic unlocking are arranged, and the dial 10331 is located at the guide
- the bottom of the chamfered surface 10332 and facing the lock limit baffle 1070 is used to match with the jacking slope 1073 on the lock limit baffle 1070 to realize unlocking; the dial 10331 extends along the fourth direction Y and is used for The toggle concave arc surface 10216 on the rotating piece 1021 is adapted to realize unlocking.
- the transmission mode of the lock dial 1033 , the lock limit baffle 1070 and the rotating plate 1021 can also be
- the retaining rib 10217 of the rotating piece 1021 is extended and formed in the first plane, and can be connected to the dial head 10444 (the output end of the mechanical unlocking) of the lock dial 1044 in transmission, or, the dialing inner part of the rotating piece 1021
- the concave arc surface 10216 is set towards the drive assembly 1040b, and can be connected with the shifting column 10331 (the output end of the electronic unlocking) of the lock shifting block 1033, and drives the first force applying part 10213 of the rotating piece 1021 and The second force applying portion 10222 of the second locking member 1022 is disengaged and switched to the unlocking working position.
- the rotating piece 1021 has a transmission part, a first force applying part 10213 and a stop part 10215, and the stop part 10215 is used to counteract the stop part 1072 of the lock limit baffle 1070 to form a stop limit vice.
- the transmission part includes the aforementioned retaining rib 10217 (mechanical unlocking transmission part) and the toggle concave arc surface 10216 (electronic unlocking transmission part), both of which are used for mechanical unlocking and electronic unlocking operations respectively.
- the second locking part 1022 has a second force application part 10222 adapted to the first force application part 10213 , and a first locking tongue 10221 adapted to the first locking part 1002 .
- the locking assembly 1020 may further include a traction piece 1023, which is respectively connected to the rotating piece 1021 and the second locking piece 1022;
- the elastic deformation energy is stored in the deformation, and the elastic deformation energy can be released after the first force application part 10213 is separated from the second force application part 10222 to drive the second locking part 1022 to rotate to the unlocking working position.
- the traction member 1023 may adopt a tension spring.
- the traction member 1023 can also adopt other structural forms, as long as the elastic member can meet the above-mentioned use function requirements.
- the rotating piece limit mechanism includes a lock limit baffle 1070, the lock limit baffle 1070 is an unlocking execution part, and can be slid along the third direction X to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position. bit.
- the locking stop baffle 1070 is fixedly installed on the housing through the support base 1095 to adapt to the internal assembly space. In some other embodiments, the locking limit baffle 1070 may also be fixedly installed on the housing directly.
- the locking limit baffle 1070 has a stopper 1072 and a linkage portion.
- the linkage portion includes the aforementioned lifting guide post 1071 and a jacking slope 1073.
- the lifting guide post 1071 extends in the first plane to form a lifting slope 1073 Set towards the drive assembly 1040b, respectively for mechanical unlocking and electronic unlocking operations.
- the specific configuration is: when the lock stopper 1070 is in the lock work position, the stopper 1072 on it is opposed to the stopper 10215 of the rotating piece 1021 to form a stop limit pair to limit the rotation of the rotating piece 1021 to Unlock work position.
- the jacking guide column 1071 (mechanical unlocking linkage) of the lock limit baffle 1070 can be connected in transmission with the pressing slope 10443 of the lock dial 1044 , or the top of the lock limit baffle 1070
- the ascending inclined surface 1073 (electronic unlocking linkage part) can be connected with the guide chamfer surface 10332 of the lock shift block 1033 in transmission, and in the corresponding use state, it drives the stopper 1072 of the lock limit baffle 1070 and the lock of the rotating piece 1021.
- the stopper 10215 is disengaged and switched to the unlocking working position.
- the limit mechanism for the rotating piece further includes a guide post 1080 and a positioning post 1090 .
- the guide post 1080 and the positioning post 1090 are fixedly disposed on the support base 1095 .
- the guide post 1080 and the positioning post 1090 can also be directly fixed on the casing.
- the plate body of the locking limit baffle 1070 has a guide groove 1074 and a positioning groove 1075 opened along the third direction X, and the guide post 1080 is inserted into the guide groove 1074 to form a sliding fit in the third direction X.
- the positioning post 1090 is inserted into the positioning slot 1075 and its end protrudes from the positioning slot 1075.
- the rotating piece limit mechanism also includes a return torsion spring 1085, and the two sides of the lock limit baffle 1070 in the fourth direction Y have supporting parts 1076 respectively; after assembly, the spring body of the return torsion spring 1085 It is set on the end of the positioning column 1090, and the spring bodies on both ends of it are respectively abutted on the two supporting parts 1076, and are configured such that when the lock limit baffle slides and switches to the unlocking position, the reset torque The spring 1085 is deformed and reserves elastic deformation energy to provide the reset force of the locking limit baffle 1070 .
- the first force application part 10213 includes a concave arc surface 10213-1 and a locking plane 10213-2, and the arc transition connection between the two; refer to Figure 13 and Figure 14
- the second force application part 10222 includes a tightening plane 10222-1 and an outer convex arc surface 10222-2, and the two are connected by a circular arc transition; when the rotating piece 1021 is in the locked working position shown in FIG.
- the locking plane 10213-2 and the tightening plane 10222-1 are offset to form a locking and limiting pair.
- the rotating piece 1021 is in the unlocking position shown in FIG. It fits well with the convex arc surface 10222-2 of the second force application part 10222.
- the stopper 10215 can be a stopper plane.
- the extension line L of the force exerted by the locking and limiting pair on the rotating piece 1021 is located on the side of the pivot center of the rotating piece 1021, so as to limit the turning of the rotating piece 1021 to the unlocking working position.
- the force direction of the occlusal surfaces of the two is on the inner side of the pivot axis, which can ensure effective self-locking occlusal effect when the door body is pulled by external force under the occlusal state of the lock.
- the body of the second locking member 1022 is provided with an avoidance groove 10223, and the avoidance groove 10223 is arranged on the inner side of the first lock tongue 10221, that is, opposite to the end of the first locking member 1002 inside. In this way, buffering the inward impact of the first locking member 1002 will not affect the function of the second locking member 1022 .
- the locking device 1000 provided in this embodiment can also design a stroke difference between the unlocking stroke and the unlocking stroke, so that the locking limit baffle 1070 can be effectively released.
- the lock dial 1044 can slide along the fourth direction Y to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the lock dial 1044 slides from the unlocking working position to the locking working position
- the stroke includes the unlocking sliding stroke and the unlocking sliding stroke in sequence, and is configured as follows: in the unlocking sliding stroke, the jacking guide post 1071 (mechanical unlocking linkage part) is in transmission connection with the pressing inclined surface 10443 (mechanical unlocking output end); Stroke, retaining rib 10217 (mechanical unlocking transmission part) and dial head 10444 (mechanical unlocking output end) transmission connection. That is to say, the preset distance M is equivalent to the unlocking sliding stroke to ensure that the locking limit baffle 1070 is effectively released. According to different product types, the
- the guiding chamfered surface 10332 of the lock shifting block 1033 shown in FIG. 11 has a predetermined included angle N with the shifting column 10331 .
- the lock shifting block 1033 can be rotatably switched between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the stroke of the locking shifting block 1033 from the unlocking working position to the locking working position includes unlocking
- the rotation stroke and the unlocking rotation stroke are configured as follows: during the unlocking rotation stroke, the jacking slope 1073 (electronic unlocking linkage part) is connected to the guide chamfer surface 10332 (electronic unlocking output end); during the unlocking rotation stroke, the inner concave
- the circular arc surface 10216 (electronic unlocking transmission part) is connected with the driving column 10331 (electronic unlocking output end). That is to say, the preset included angle N is equivalent to the unlocking rotation stroke to ensure that the locking limit baffle 1070 is effectively released. According to different product types, the preset
- the working stroke for unlocking is located after the unlocking working stroke, so that the unlocking operation of the first lock bolt 10221 is performed after the locking limit baffle 1070 is effectively released from the limit. Ensure to improve the reliability of the unlocking and unlocking operation of the scheme.
- Fig. 16(a) shows the locked state.
- the lock cylinder assembly 1040a rotates, and the lock dial 1044 moves to the left through the unlocking dial 1040a-1.
- the pressing slope 10443 on the lock dial 1044 acts on the lock limit baffle 1070 to lift up
- the guide post 1071, the stopper 1072 on which the lock stopper 1070 is pushed up is separated from the stopper 10215 of the rotating piece 1021, that is, the self-rotating piece 1021 and the shell shown in (b) of FIG. 16
- the dial head 10444 on the lock dial 1044 contacts the retaining rib 10217 on the rotating piece 1021 .
- the locking dial 1044 continues to move to the left, and drives the rotating piece 1021 to rotate clockwise until the locking plane 10213-2 on the rotating piece 1021 is separated from the tightening plane 10222-1 on the second locking member 1022, as shown in Figure 16 Shown in (c).
- the second locking member 1022 rotates clockwise under the action of the traction member 1023, and the first locking member 1002 is pulled out from the first lock tongue 10221, as shown in (d) of FIG. 16 , and the cover is opened and unlocked.
- the unlocking dial 1040a-1 on the lock cylinder assembly 1040a is rotated and reset, driving the lock dial 1044 to reset.
- the stopper 1072 of the stopper 1070 is inserted into the gap between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing A, that is, the stopper 1072 and the lock plane 10213-2 offset;
- the first locking member 1002 presses down the first bolt 10221 of the second locking member 1022, and the second locking member 1022 rotates counterclockwise under the action of the pressing down of the first locking member 1002, while passing
- the traction piece 1023 drives the rotating piece 1021 to move counterclockwise, and the first force application part 10213 on the rotating piece 1021 is pressed against the pressing plane 10222-1 on the bolt plate again to realize the locking of the second locking piece 1022; at the same time , the reserved distance M between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing B is re-formed.
- each figure in FIG. 17 is formed by removing the lock cylinder assembly 1040 a and the lock dial 1044 .
- Fig. 17 (a) shows the state of closing the cover, that is, the state of locking.
- the driving assembly 1040b drives the lock dial 1033 to rotate counterclockwise, and the guide chamfer 10332 on the lock dial 1033 acts on the jacking slope 1073 on the lock limit baffle 1070, pushing the lock limit baffle 1070 to the top.
- the stop part 1072 raised thereon is disengaged from the stop part 10215 of the rotating piece 1021, that is, it is pulled out from the gap between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing A shown in (b) in FIG.
- Block 1033 continues to rotate counterclockwise, and the shifting column 10331 on the lock dial 1033 acts on the concave arc surface 10216 on the rotating piece 1021, and pushes the rotating piece 1021 to rotate clockwise until the lock on the rotating piece 1021
- the fastening plane 10213-2 is separated from the fastening plane 10222-1 on the second locking member 1022, as shown in (c) of FIG. 17 .
- the second locking member 1022 rotates clockwise under the action of the traction member 1023, and the first locking member 1002 is pulled out from the first lock tongue 10221, as shown in (d) of FIG. 17 , and the cover is opened and unlocked.
- the driving component 1040b drives the buckle dial 1033 to continue to rotate counterclockwise until it touches the zero position sensor, and the lock dial 1033 stops rotating and resets to complete.
- the installation position of the zero sensor can be selected according to the internal space, as long as the locking shift block 1033 and its matching part can be in contact with it within the designed stroke.
- the stopper 1072 of the stopper 1070 is inserted into the gap between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing, that is, the stopper 1072 is offset against the lock plane 10213-2 ;
- the first locking piece 1002 presses down the first bolt 10221 of the second locking piece 1022, and the second locking piece 1022 rotates counterclockwise under the action of the first locking piece 1002 pressing down, and at the same time, it is pulled
- the piece 1023 drives the rotating piece 1021 to move counterclockwise, and the first force applying portion 10213 on the rotating piece 1021 is pressed against the pressing plane 10222-1 on the bolt plate again, so as to realize the locking of the second locking piece 1022 .
- the smart unlocking assembly 330 can be detachably arranged on the mounting bracket 310, wherein the detachable arrangement means that it can be disassembled, for example: screw connection, bolt connection, Snap connection and so on structure.
- the smart unlocking component 330 may also be non-detachably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 , wherein the non-detachable arrangement means that it cannot be disassembled, such as riveting, welding, integral molding and other structures.
- the intelligent unlocking component 330 is different from the traditional key unlocking mechanical unlocking component 340, such as password unlocking, face recognition unlocking, fingerprint unlocking, NFC unlocking, card unlocking, vein unlocking, terminal unlocking, etc. can be understood as intelligent unlocking, and has The unlocking component with this function can be understood as the smart unlocking component 330 .
- the smart unlocking component 330 can adopt the first setting way: the smart unlocking component 330 can include a driver 331, a controller and a verification information collection component, wherein the driver The component 331 is fixed on the mounting bracket 310. When the unlocking information collected by the verification information collection component is verified, the controller controls the driving component 331 to output an intelligent unlocking action.
- the above-mentioned unlocking information may include but not limited to password, face information, fingerprint information, NFC information and/or vein information and the like.
- the embodiments of this specification can be adapted to different verification information collection components.
- the verification information collection component can be a keyboard; when the unlocking information is face information or fingerprint information, the verification information collection
- the acquisition component may be a biometric acquisition component; when the unlocking information is NFC information, the verification information acquisition component may be an NFC acquisition component.
- the verification information collection component is a keyboard and/or a biological information collection component.
- the biological collection component may include a face collector and/or a fingerprint collector.
- the face collector mainly includes structures capable of collecting image information such as a camera and a CCD camera.
- the intelligent unlocking component 330 outputs an intelligent unlocking action.
- the driving member 331 can provide power for the smart unlocking component 330 .
- the driver 331 may be an electric hydraulic motor.
- the driving member 331 is a motor
- the motor may be a motor capable of outputting linear motion, or a motor capable of outputting rotational motion.
- the driver 331 is directly or indirectly detachably disposed on the installation bracket 310 , wherein, in the indirect detachable arrangement, the driver 331 can be detachably installed on the installation bracket 310 through the fixing plate 332 .
- the smart unlocking component 330 may include a driving part 331, an electronic controller operable to control the operation of the driving part, and an electronic controller electrically communicated with the electronic controller. At least one of a biometric sensor and a combination keyboard.
- the electronic controller controls the driving part to output an intelligent unlocking action. Or directly operate the unlock button of the electronic controller, and the electronic controller can only control the output of the driving part to unlock the action.
- the smart unlocking component 330 can be connected to an external power supply or the smart unlocking component 330 is also configured with a battery compartment that provides power for the smart unlocking component 330 .
- a battery is arranged in the battery compartment, and the battery is a battery with a replaceable structure or a battery with a non-replaceable structure.
- the battery compartment is of an openable design; when it is a battery with a non-replaceable structure, the battery compartment is of a non-openable design.
- the batteries in the battery compartment are accumulators.
- the intelligent unlocking component 330 also includes a communication component. After the communication component receives and verifies the unlocking information of the terminal device, the controller controls the driver 331 to output an intelligent unlocking action.
- the information interaction between the terminal equipment and the communication components is realized through the network and the server.
- a network may include various connection types such as wires, wireless communication links, or fiber optic cables, among others.
- Terminal devices Users can use terminal devices to interact with servers through the network to receive or send messages, etc.
- Various client applications may be installed on the terminal device.
- Terminal equipment can be hardware or software.
- the terminal device When the terminal device is hardware, it can be various electronic devices, including but not limited to smartphones, tablet computers, wearable devices, vehicle-mounted devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) devices, Ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), netbook, laptop portable computer, desktop computer and other electronic equipment.
- augmented reality augmented reality, AR
- virtual reality virtual reality
- UMPC Ultra-mobile personal computer
- netbook laptop portable computer
- desktop computer desktop computer
- the terminal device When the terminal device is software, it can be installed in the electronic devices listed above. It can be implemented as a plurality of software or software modules (for example, to provide distributed services), or as a single software or software module.
- the embodiment of this specification does not impose any limitation on the specific type of the electronic device.
- the server may be a server that provides various services, such as a background server that provides support for terminal equipment.
- the background server may analyze and process the request, obtain a processing result (for example, information to be pushed), and return the processing result.
- the server may be hardware or software.
- the server can be implemented as a distributed server cluster composed of multiple servers, or as a single server.
- the server is software, it can be implemented as multiple software or software modules (for example, for providing distributed services), or as a single software or software module. No specific limitation is made here.
- the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 can be a traditional key unlocked lock cylinder assembly, and the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 (ie, the lock cylinder assembly) can include a mounting part 343, a lock head 341 and a lock cylinder 342, wherein the mounting part 343 Removably installed on the mounting bracket 310, the lock head 341 is fixed on the installation part 343, the lock core 342 is located inside the lock head 341, and the part of the lock core 342 exposed from the lock head 341 is used as the power output end of the unlocking assembly.
- the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 ie, the lock cylinder assembly
- the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 can include a mounting part 343, a lock head 341 and a lock cylinder 342, wherein the mounting part 343 Removably installed on the mounting bracket 310, the lock head 341 is fixed on the installation part 343, the lock core 342 is located inside the lock head 341, and the part of the lock core 342 exposed from the lock head 341 is used as the power output end of the unlocking assembly
- one end of the lock head 341 is directly detachably fixed on the installation bracket 310 , or one end of the lock head 341 is detachably installed on the installation bracket 310 through the installation component 343 .
- the mounting part 343 and the locking head 341 are arranged in a detachable connection or a non-detachable connection.
- the function of the mounting bracket 310 is to support the locking component 320 , the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 .
- the mounting bracket 310 mainly includes a top plate 311, a side plate 312, a first support plate 313 and a second support plate 314, wherein the top plate 311 and the side plate 312 are connected at an angle, and the first support plate 313 and the second support plate 313 are connected at an angle.
- the support plate 314 is relatively arranged at the two ends of the top plate 311 and the side plate 312, and the joint of the top plate 311 and the side plate 312 is provided with a locking channel 315 for accommodating the passage of the first locking member 302, and the top plate 311, the side plate 312, the first support
- the plate 313 and the second supporting plate 314 enclose the installation space for installing the intelligent unlocking component 330 , the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 .
- the top plate 311 When applied to the actual application of the locking device 300, the top plate 311 may be an exposed structure. In some embodiments, a mechanical unlocking assembly 340 may be disposed on the top plate 311 . Or in actual application, the side plate 312 is an exposed structure, and the mechanical unlocking component 340 can be arranged on the side plate 312 .
- the smart unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320 can be arranged on the top plate 311 or the side plate 312 , preferably on the side plate 312 , and the locking component 320 corresponds to the locking channel 315 .
- the above-mentioned first direction and the second direction may or may not coincide.
- the second direction can be understood as the length direction of the top plate 311;
- the first direction can be understood as the rotation direction of the plane defined by the side plate 312 , for example, clockwise.
- the mounting bracket 310 may also include an emergency charging port compatible with the power source, and when the power source is exhausted, the locking device 300 may be provided with power through the emergency charging port.
- the mounting bracket 310 may further include a cover plate, at least one end of which is detachably connected to the mounting component or the mounting bracket, and the cover plate can cover the lock hole 342a of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and/or the emergency charging port.
- the lock hole 342a and the emergency charging port cannot be seen, which not only ensures the aesthetics, but also improves the safety.
- the specific structural implementation of the locking device 300 can refer to the following description: there is a first locking member 302 on the door body; 323, the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 includes a driving member 331, the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 includes a lock head 341, a lock cylinder 342 and a mounting part 343, the first transmission assembly 350 includes a rotating dial 351, and the second transmission assembly 360 treasure house rotating dial 361 and the first link 362.
- the password and fingerprint door opening mode of the locking device 300 (that is, the intelligent unlocking mode), after the system has verified the password or fingerprint verification, it will trigger the motor drive signal, so that the motor rotates counterclockwise, and the output of the motor
- the shaft is D-shaped, and matches with the D-shaped hole of the rotary dial 351, and drives the rotary dial 351 to rotate counterclockwise.
- the arc of the rotating piece 321 is pulled to rotate clockwise around the second rotation center 322a.
- the clockwise limit of the rotating piece 321 on the second locking member 322 is released.
- the extension spring stretches, and the extension spring force acts on the second locking member 322, and the second locking member 322 rotates clockwise around the second rotation center 322a under the action of the extension spring force, so that the door body is detached from the hook, and the door The body automatically springs under the action of the hinge to realize the door opening.
- the possible beneficial effects of the locking device 300, the locking device 1000 and the corresponding box structure disclosed in this manual include but are not limited to: (1) The two unlocking modes of the intelligent unlocking component and the mechanical unlocking component do not interfere with each other, reducing the need for locking The failure rate of the device improves the safety performance; (2) two unlocking modes enhance the convenience of use of the locking device. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
- locking device in Figure 3-17 can be applied not only to the box shown in Figure 2, but also to the smart lock box shown in Figure 23-24 and Figure 34, and can also be applied to the above-mentioned Various types of openable devices.
- Figure 18 is a perspective view of an embodiment of the opening and closing structure of this specification
- Figure 19 is an exploded view of an embodiment of the opening and closing structure of this specification
- Figure 20 is a front view of a buffer structure according to some embodiments of this specification .
- this embodiment provides an opening and closing structure 1800, which can be used in the closable device 100, and the opening and closing structure 1800 can be the above-mentioned connector 120. That is to say, the opening and closing structure 1800 can be used as the connecting member 120 of the closeable device 100 to connect the first part 110 and the second part 130 , and the first part 110 and the second part 130 are pivotally connected through the opening and closing structure 1800 .
- the opening and closing structure 1800 may include a first hinge 1801, a second hinge 1802, a first elastic member 1803 and a buffer structure 1804, wherein the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are pivotally connected; the first elastic member 1803 Arranged between the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, the first elastic member 1803 can drive the first hinge 1801 and/or the second hinge 1802 to rotate in the opening direction or the closing direction; the buffer structure 1804 is arranged on the second hinge All or part of the outer surface of a hinge 1801 , and the part of the buffer structure 1804 extending beyond the outer surface of the first hinge 1801 can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 and produce recoverable deformation.
- a buffer structure 1804 is provided on the outer surface of the first hinge 1801.
- the buffer structure 1804 extends to the outside and can abut against the second hinge 1802.
- the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 can abut against the cushioning structure 1804, thereby realizing the purpose of position limitation, cushioning and noise reduction, so the operating experience is better.
- first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 usually have an outer surface and an inner surface, wherein when the opening and closing structure 1800 is closed, the inner surface of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 The inner surfaces of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are far away from each other when the opening and closing structure 1800 is opened.
- the outer surface of the first hinge 1801 and the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 are usually attached to the object to be installed.
- the first elastic member 1803 can drive the first hinge 1801 to rotate relative to the second hinge 1802 in the opening direction or the closing direction, and the first elastic member 1803 can also drive the second hinge 1802 to rotate in the opening direction relative to the first hinge 1801 Or to rotate in the closing direction, the first elastic member 1803 can also simultaneously drive the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 to rotate in the opening direction or the closing direction.
- the cushioning structure 1804 is disposed on all or part of the outer surface of the first hinge 1801. It can be understood that the entire outer surface of the first hinge 1801 is wrapped by the cushioning structure 1804, or only a part of the cushioning structure 1804 is wrapped by the cushioning structure 1804.
- the buffer structure 1804 not only has the function of buffering, but also has the function of limiting. Therefore, when the opening and closing structure 1800 is opened, the second hinge 1802 hits the buffer structure 1804 to achieve the function of limiting, because the buffer structure 1804 has a recoverable The deformation ability has achieved the cushioning function, which should be able to reduce the impact during the impact and reduce the noise. There are many ways to set up the cushioning structure 1804.
- the cushioning structure 1804 can adopt the first setting way, and the cushioning structure 1804 can include a second fixing part 18041 and a third limiting part 18042, wherein the second fixing The part 18041 is installed on the first hinge 1801 , and the third limiting part 18042 extends outward from the second fixing part 18041 , and can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 and produce recoverable deformation.
- the second fixing part 18041 is glued on the first hinge 1801; or the second fixing part 18041 is installed on the outer side of the first hinge 1801 through fasteners; or the second fixing part 18041 is wrapped around the first hinge 1801; or the second fixing part 18041 is attached to the outer surface of the first hinge 1801, and when the opening and closing structure 1800 is installed, the first hinge 1801 and the second fixing part 18041 are fixed at the same time.
- the third limiting part 18042 extends outward from the second fixing part 18041, wherein the third limiting part 18042 and the second fixing part 18041 are on the same surface, or the third limiting part 18042 and the second fixing part 18041 exist A certain included angle is used to limit the second hinge 1802 better.
- the opening angle of the second hinge 1802 can be adjusted by adjusting the thickness of the third limiting portion 18042 . Normally, the thickness of the third limiting portion 18042 is greater than the thickness of the second fixing portion 18041 . The cushioning effect and the limit effect are better.
- the inner surface of the junction of the third limiting portion 18042 and the second fixing portion 18041 is in contact with the outer surface of the junction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, so that the buffer structure 1804 can All cover the junction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, because the junction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 is the key part of the rotation movement, which is the main source of noise, by setting the third The inner surface of the junction of the limiting part 18042 and the second fixing part 18041 is attached to it, which can further reduce noise.
- the engagement between the third limiting portion 18042 and the second fixing portion 18041 can be adjusted according to the difference in specific settings between the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 .
- the buffer structure 1804 can adopt the second setting method, and the buffer structure 1804 can include a second fixing part 18041, a third limiting part 18042 and a wrapping part 18043, wherein the second fixing part 18041 is installed on the first On the hinge 1801 , the third limiting part 18042 extends outward from the second fixing part 18041 , and the wrapping part 18043 is arranged on the edge of the second fixing part 18041 close to the first hinge 1801 . Since the buffer structure 1804 has a certain degree of elasticity, during installation, the wrapping parts 18043 are opened outwards so that the distance between the wrapping parts 18043 becomes larger, and then the second fixing part 18041 is wrapped on the first hinge 1801, thereby realizing a buffer structure 1804 installation.
- the cushioning structure 1804 is made of elastic material, so that the cushioning structure 1804 deforms when contacting the second hinge 1802, and gradually returns to its original shape after the contact disappears.
- the elastic material can achieve this purpose. There are many, such as: rubber, plastic, silicone and so on. In some embodiments, the cushioning structure 1804 is machined from rubber.
- first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 There are many ways to pivotally connect the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, for example, by setting the rotating shaft 1805 and adjusting its own structure.
- the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are pivoted
- the first setting method of rotating connection is: the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are pivotally connected through the rotating shaft 1805, the first elastic member 1803 is at least one torsion spring sleeved on the rotating shaft 1805, the first elastic member 1803 The first end of the first elastic member abuts against the inner surface of the first hinge 1801 , and the second end of the first elastic member 1803 abuts against the inner surface of the second hinge 1802 .
- the above-mentioned first elastic member 1803 is a torsion spring, of course, the first elastic member 1803 can also be other structures, for example, a spring, a tension spring, a clip spring, as long as it can achieve the opening direction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 or The structure that provides driving force in the closing direction is within the protection scope of this specification.
- a possibility of automatic opening is provided for the opening and closing structure 1800; when the first elastic member 1803 can provide the driving force in the closing direction, it is the opening and closing structure
- the 1800 provides a possibility of automatic closing, and provides a certain damping for the opening and closing structure 1800 in the opening direction, reducing noise.
- the first hinge 1801 has a first rotating sleeve 18013 sleeved on the rotating shaft 1805
- the second hinge 1802 has a second rotating sleeve 18023 sleeved on the rotating shaft 1805 .
- the first rotating sleeve 18013 is integrally formed with the first hinge 1801 or connected by welding
- the second rotating sleeve 18023 is integrally formed with the second hinge 1802 or connected by welding.
- the first hinge 1801 can be a plate-shaped structure, similar to a plane structure, and the second hinge 1802 can be a plate-shaped structure.
- the class structure similar to the flat class structure.
- the first hinge 1801 includes a first installation part 18011, and a first bending part 18012 bent at a first angle from the first installation part 18011, the first rotation The sleeve 18013 is disposed on the first bent portion 18012 .
- the first hinge 1801 is installed at the position to be installed through the first installation part 18011 , and the first bending part 18012 can play a buffering role and adjust the opening angle of the first hinge 1801 .
- the first included angle ranges from 0° to 120°, preferably 90°.
- the second hinge 1802 includes a second installation part 18021 and a second bending part 18022 bent from the second installation part 18021 at a second angle, and the second rotating sleeve 18023 is arranged on the second bending part 18022 superior.
- the second hinge 1802 is installed at the position to be installed through the second installation part 18021 , and the second bending part 18022 can play a buffering role and adjust the opening angle of the second hinge 1802 .
- the second included angle ranges from 0° to 120°, preferably 90°.
- FIG. 2 The following describes the case where the opening and closing structure 1800 is set in a box structure of the closeable device 100 as shown in FIG. 2 .
- the opening and closing structure 1800 is set in a box structure of the closeable device 100 as shown in FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 2 For the specific content of the box structure, reference may be made to FIG. 2 and its related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
- the opening and closing structure 1800 is composed of a second hinge 1802, a first elastic member 1803, a rotating shaft 1805, a buffer structure 1804, and a first hinge 1801, and the second hinge 1802 and the first hinge 1801 pass through the rotating shaft 1805 are connected together, the first elastic member 1803 is passed through the middle of the rotating shaft 1805, and the upper end of the first elastic member 1803 is pressed on the second hinge 1802, and the lower end is pressed on the first hinge 1801, so that the two opening and closing structures 1800 A relative rotational torque is generated between them, and finally drives the door body to open.
- Fig. 21 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in a closed state according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 21 , the force direction of the first elastic member 1803 on the second hinge 1802 is clockwise in the figure.
- the second hinge 1802 rotates clockwise under the force of the first elastic member 1803 (the second hinge 1802 drives the door body to rotate together).
- the second hinge 1802 is in contact with the buffer structure 1804, the second hinge 1802 stops rotating, and reaches the fully opened state.
- the door is in the state of the door opening and closing structure 1800, the second hinge 1802 reaches the third limit part 18042, and the second hinge
- the rotation movement of 1802 is restricted by the third limiting part 18042, which acts as a limiting function.
- the buffer structure 1804 is made of soft material and has elasticity, it plays a buffering role.
- Fig. 22 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- the buffer structure 1804 has a certain degree of elasticity. When it is opened in place, the side of the second hinge 1802 will press on the third limit part 18042 of the buffer structure 1804, as shown in Figure 22, the door opening and closing structure 1800 state, the second hinge When the hinge 1802 reaches the buffer limit contact point, the rotation movement of the second hinge 1802 is limited by the buffer structure 1804, which acts as a limit. At the same time, because the buffer structure 1804 is made of soft material and has elasticity, it plays a buffering role.
- the possible beneficial effects of the opening and closing structure 1800 disclosed in this specification and the corresponding closable devices include but are not limited to: (1) The design of the buffer structure can play a position-limiting and buffering effect, and the operating experience is better; (2) The buffer structure can also play a noise reduction effect, reducing the noise when the closeable device is opened and closed. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
- opening and closing structure 1800 in Figures 18-22 can be applied not only to the cabinet shown in Figure 2, but also to the smart lock box shown in Figures 23-24 and 34, and can also be applied to the above The various types of openable and closable devices described.
- Fig. 23 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in a closed state according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 24 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification
- An exploded view of the second housing assembly shown in some embodiments of this specification FIG. 26 is a sectional view of FIG. 24
- FIG. 27 is a sectional view of FIG. 25
- FIG. 28 is a contact piece and a contact groove shown according to some embodiments of this specification
- Fig. 29 is a structural schematic diagram showing that the contact member does not contact the left side wall and the right side wall of the contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification
- Fig. 29 is a structural schematic diagram showing that the contact member does not contact the left side wall and the right side wall of the contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification; Fig.
- FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram according to some embodiments of the present specification The shown schematic diagram of the structure of the contact piece in contact with the right side wall of the contact groove;
- FIG. 31 is a schematic structural diagram of the electrical interface and the spacer arranged on the second housing assembly according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 32 is According to some embodiments of this specification, a control logic diagram for locking is shown;
- FIG. 33 is a control logic diagram for unlocking according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 34 is another exemplary smart phone according to some embodiments of this specification.
- FIG. 35 is an exploded view of the second housing assembly according to some embodiments of this specification;
- FIG. 36 is an exploded view of the second housing assembly according to some embodiments of this specification Cross-sectional view;
- FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of an anti-knock device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- the smart lock box 2300 ( 3400 ) will be described below in conjunction with FIG. 1 and FIGS. 23-37 .
- the closeable device 100 may be a small container that is common in daily life, such as a safe or a key box that can be fixed on the wall outside the door for accommodating keys.
- the closable device can be a smart lock box 2300, at this time, the two relatively movable parts can include a first housing component 2301, and a second housing component that can jointly enclose an accommodating cavity with the first housing component 2301 Two shell assemblies 2302.
- the first housing component 2301 can be fixed (for example, fixed on the wall or door body, etc.), and the second housing component 2302 can rotate and/or move relative to the first housing component 2301 to make the accommodating cavity Opening and closing.
- the locking device 140 may include a smart lock, and the smart lock may be disposed on the second housing component 2302 for locking and unlocking between the second housing component 2302 and the first housing component 2301 .
- the smart lock box 3400 is mainly composed of two major parts, the first housing component 3401 and the second housing component 3402.
- the first housing component 3401 is generally in the shape of a cuboid, with There is a lock beam 3419 through which the smart lock box 3400 can be hung on door handles, car door handles and other positions that can pass through the lock beam 3419, thereby realizing the fixing of the smart lock box 3400.
- the second housing component 3402 is completely combined with the first housing component 3401, thereby locking the storage space of the first housing component 3401.
- the second housing assembly 3402 When the smart lock box is opened state, the second housing assembly 3402 can be flipped open relative to the first housing assembly 3401, so that consumers can take out items such as keys stored in advance from the first housing assembly 3401, and the specific locking and unlocking methods can have various forms For example, number keys are set on the front of the second housing component 3402 to perform authentication through a password, or a fingerprint identification device is set on the surface of the second housing component 3402 to perform authentication through fingerprints, and so on.
- the smart lock box 2300 is provided with a pendant 2319 , and the function and setting method of the pendant 2319 may be the same or similar to the function and setting method of the lock beam 3419 .
- the structural relationship between the first housing component 2301 and the second housing component 2302 may be the same or similar to the structural relationship between the first housing component 3401 and the second housing component 3402 .
- the thickness of the first housing component 3401 is slightly larger, and a storage space for storing small items such as keys is formed inside it, and the shape of the second housing component 3402 is similar to that of the first housing component Similar to 3401, it is also in the shape of a cuboid, and its thickness is slightly thinner than that of the first shell component 3401.
- the first shell component 3401 and the second shell component 3402 are hinged or fastened to each other at the lower edge.
- the thickness of the first housing component 3401 may also be the same as that of the second housing component 3402 , or the thickness of the first housing component 3401 is smaller than the thickness of the second housing component 3402 .
- This smart lock includes a There is a button 2303 for inputting the unlocking password.
- the second housing assembly 2302 can be unlocked only by pressing the button 2303 and inputting the unlocking password to the smart lock, and then rotate and/or Move the second housing component 2302 to open the storage cavity, so that the items (such as keys) contained in the storage cavity are exposed and can be taken out; while the smart lock has a button 2303, as shown in Figure 31, it also has an electrical interface 2304 , the electrical interface 2304 is, for example, a USB socket (the specific type of the USB socket can be Type-A, Type-B or Type-C), which can be used to charge the smart lock or transmit data to the smart lock.
- a USB socket the specific type of the USB socket can be Type-A, Type-B or Type-C
- the container with the above structure locks the accommodating cavity of the article through the smart lock, and the smart lock has a button 2303.
- the container is a key box for storing keys
- the button 2303 Enter the password to the smart lock to realize the unlocking of the smart lock, and then the user can take out the key to open the door.
- the input and reset of the password can be realized only by pressing the corresponding button 2303, and there is no need to turn the password wheel to expose the password wheel.
- the matching of the number and the password can make the unlocking operation and password reset operation simpler and more convenient, and the risk of damage is also lower.
- the electrical interface 2304 of the smart lock is isolated, after the illegal personnel destroys the electrical interface 2304, even if the unlocking tool is passed through the installation window, it will be blocked by the isolator 2305, and the unlocking tool cannot be connected with the second housing.
- the contacts of the second lock tongue 2307 or the motor 2308 inside the component 2302 are in contact, so that the second lock tongue 2307 cannot be pushed to unlock, nor can the motor 2308 be started to drive the second lock tongue 2307 to unlock, so that the smart lock is not easy to be cracked, improving Container security.
- the existing unlocking method of turning the password wheel has disadvantages such as complex configuration of the password wheel, non-waterproof, easy password cracking, and poor operating feel, while the key unlocking method of this embodiment does not have these disadvantages.
- the specific locking (or locking) and unlocking structure of the smart lock box 2300 is as follows: a motor 2308 is arranged on the first housing component 2301, and the smart lock includes a drive The assembly and the second locking tongue 2307 connected to the driving assembly, the second locking tongue 2307 can enter and exit the motor 2308 under the driving of the driving assembly to realize the locking and unlocking of the first casing assembly 2301 and the second casing assembly 2302.
- the second housing assembly 2302 is rotated and/or moved to realize the closing of the accommodating cavity.
- the second locking tongue 2307 and the motor 2308 Alignment then let the drive assembly drive the second lock tongue 2307 to move close to the motor 2308 and make the second lock tongue 2307 finally enter the motor 2308, the motor 2308 locks the second lock tongue 2307, at this time the first housing assembly 2301 and the second housing assembly 2302 are in a locked state, and the accommodating cavity cannot be opened; when an item needs to be taken out, the user enters the unlocking password by pressing the button 2303, and the smart lock activates the drive assembly to drive the second deadbolt 2307 after verifying that the password is correct Removed from the motor 2308, the motor 2308 no longer locks the second bolt 2307, the first housing assembly 2301 and the second housing assembly 2302 are in an unlocked state, and then the user rotates and/or moves the second housing
- the assembly 2302 can open the receiving chamber, and the article can be taken out from the receiving chamber.
- the motor 2308 is a lock that protrudes from the first housing assembly 2301, and the second housing assembly 2302 (specifically, the inner housing 23024 described later) is provided with a lock that allows the lock to pass through.
- the lock buckle can be a ring structure formed by bending a metal rod, and in order to better match with the second lock tongue 2307 to improve the locking effect on the second lock tongue 2307, preferably the lock buckle is a rectangular ring structure.
- the reason why the lock catch is protruded on the first housing component 2301 is to ensure that there is a larger space between the first housing component 2301 and the second housing component 2302 in the locked state, and this space is For the accommodating cavity, that is to say, the provision of the locking buckle protruding on the first housing can increase the volume of the accommodating cavity, so as to improve the accommodating effect of the container.
- the motor 2308 can also be a card slot opened on the first housing component 2301, and the second locking tongue 2307 can realize the locking between the first housing component 2301 and the second housing component 2302 by extending into the card slot.
- the through hole 2320 is provided on the second housing assembly 2302 because the second lock tongue 2307 is arranged inside the second housing assembly 2302. In order to ensure that the second lock tongue 2307 can be normally locked with the buckle, it is necessary to The through hole 2320 is provided so that the lock buckle can enter into the second housing component 2302 and cooperate with the second lock tongue 2307 .
- the drive assembly includes: a motor 2308; a transmission member 2309 connected to the output shaft of the motor 2308; a moving member 2310 connected to the transmission member 2309 and reciprocatingly moved under the drive of the transmission member 2309; On the part 2310; wherein, the motor 2308 moves away from the motor 2308 by driving the moving part 2310, so that the second lock tongue 2307 can enter the motor 2308; Move so that the second deadbolt 2307 can be removed from the motor 2308.
- the motor 2308 is a power component that drives the second lock tongue 2307 to move
- the transmission member 2309 is a power transmission component that can order the moving part 2310 to move under the action of power.
- the moving part 2310 is connected to the second lock tongue 2307
- the moving part moves back and forth on the transmission part 2309, that is, moves away from the motor 2308 and moves towards the direction close to the motor 2308. Since the second locking tongue 2307 is arranged on the moving part 2310, the second The locking tongue 2307 can move with the moving part 2310 to enter the motor 2308 when the moving part 2310 moves away from the motor 2308 and move out of the motor 2308 when the moving part 2310 moves toward the motor 2308 .
- the transmission part 2309 is a screw
- the moving part 2310 is sleeved on the screw and threadedly connected with the screw
- the moving part 2310 can only move along the screw under the limit of the second housing assembly 2302.
- the motor 2308 drives the screw to rotate forward to make the moving part 2310 away from the motor 2308, and drives the screw to rotate backward to make the moving part 2310 close to the motor 2308.
- the screw rod is coaxially connected on the output shaft of the motor 2308, and the moving part 2310 is connected to the outside of the screw rod through a threaded hole.
- the moving part 2310 is limited in the circumferential direction, that is, the moving part 2310 cannot rotate under the drive of the screw, and it can only move along the axial direction of the screw during the rotation of the screw (the axial direction of the screw is the direction in which the moving part 2310 reciprocates) , that is, the screw and the moving part 2310 constitute a lead screw nut mechanism. Since the second dead bolt 2307 is arranged on the moving part 2310, the reciprocating movement of the second dead bolt 2307 can be realized by driving the moving part 2310 to reciprocate axially through the screw rod. Further, the second locking tongue 2307 can enter and exit the motor 2308 .
- the mechanism formed by the cooperation of the transmission member 2309 and the moving member 2310 may also be a rack and pinion mechanism or a worm gear mechanism.
- the driving assembly with the above structure drives the second bolt 2307 to move to realize the locking and unlocking process as follows:
- the motor 2308 stops rotating, and the second lock tongue 2307 stays outside the lock buckle. At this time, the lock buckle and the second lock tongue 2307 are unlocked, and the second housing component 2302 can rotate relative to the first housing component 2301 and/or move, the accommodating cavity can be opened, and the articles contained in the accommodating cavity can be taken out.
- An inspection operation is also added, specifically to detect in advance the length of time required for the second bolt 2307 to move from the position closest to the motor 2308 to the position inside the buckle (that is, the length of time the moving part 2310 continues to move).
- This length can be called is the length of time for locking, and also pre-detects the time required for the second bolt 2307 to move from the position inside the buckle to the position closest to the motor 2308. This length can be called the time for unlocking.
- the locking duration or unlocking duration is the working duration of the motor 2308, so in the above
- the working hours of the motor 2308 are monitored in real time.
- the moving part 2310 is driven to ensure the continuous movement of the moving part 2310.
- the working time of the motor 2308 When the working time of the motor 2308 reaches the locking time or unlocking time, it indicates that the second bolt 2307 has moved from the position closest to the motor 2308 to the position inside the buckle , or move from the position inside the buckle to the position closest to the motor 2308, that is, the smart lock is locked or unlocked, and the motor 2308 can be stopped at this time.
- the above-mentioned locking duration or unlocking duration is 8s.
- the second lock tongue 2307 is slidably arranged on the moving part 2310 through the second connecting rod 2311, and the sliding direction of the second connecting rod 2311 is the same as the moving direction of the moving part 2310, And the moving part 2310 is provided with a second elastic part 2312 , and the second elastic part 2312 is compressed by the second connecting rod 2311 when the second locking tongue 2307 approaches the moving part 2310 . That is to say, the second locking tongue 2307 in this embodiment is an elastic locking tongue.
- the second locking tongue 2307 When the second locking tongue 2307 bears the force, the second locking tongue 2307 can approach the moving part 2310 to achieve retraction, and the retraction During the process, the second elastic member 2312 is compressed, and when the second lock tongue 2307 no longer bears the force, it can return to its position driven by the second elastic member 2312 .
- the automatic locking of the second lock tongue 2307 to the buckle can be realized, that is, when the second housing component 2302 and the first housing component 2301 are in contact to close the accommodating chamber, the lock buckle will be close to the first
- the second lock tongue 2307 passes through the above-mentioned through hole 2320 and squeezes the second lock tongue 2307, and the second lock tongue 2307 subjected to the extrusion force will retract and compress the second elastic member 2312 (the second lock tongue 2307 is an oblique tongue , the lock buckle squeezes the slope of the oblique tongue), when the second lock tongue 2307 is aligned with the inner space of the lock buckle due to retraction, the second lock tongue 2307 no longer bears the extrusion force, and the second elastic member 2312 is
- the second lock tongue 2307 can be driven back to enter the inner space of the lock buckle to achieve locking with the lock buckle.
- the driving component only needs to drive the second lock tongue 2307 to move out of the buckle to realize unlocking, that is to say, the driving component only drives the second lock tongue 2307 to unlock operation, while the locking operation is automatically realized through the driving of the second elastic member 2312 to the second lock tongue 2307.
- the tongue 2307 can realize locking, so that after the drive assembly drives the second lock tongue 2307 away from the lock to complete the unlocking and the receiving chamber is opened, it drives the second lock tongue 2307 to approach the lock again so that the second lock tongue 2307 is on the screw rod.
- the axial direction is at the position when it is locked (but because the accommodating cavity is open, the second bolt 2307 does not enter the lock at this time), so as to ensure that the second housing component 2302 and the first housing component 2301 are in contact When can realize above-mentioned automatic locking.
- the moving part 2310 is a rectangular frame structure, so that the screw rod passes through one frame wall, and the second connecting rod 2311 passes through the other frame wall, and the two frame walls are rectangular frames.
- the frame walls that are parallel to each other and have a small length can make the screw and the second connecting rod 2311 coaxially arranged, and at the same time, due to the inner space of the rectangular frame structure, the screw rod or the second connecting rod 2311 has a larger size in the axial direction, so when the second deadbolt 2307 approaches the motor 2308, the length of the screw rod extending into the inner space can be larger, and the second connecting rod 2311 can also be placed on the second deadbolt 2307.
- the second elastic member 2312 is a coil spring, and the coil spring is arranged in the inner space of the moving member 2310 and sleeved on the second connecting rod 2311.
- a stopper such as a screw
- one end of the helical spring is fixedly connected to the moving part 2310, and the other end is blocked by the stopper after being sleeved on the second connecting rod 2311.
- the moving part 2310 is set as a frame structure with an inner space, and the screw and the second connecting rod 2311 can extend into the inner cavity space, and the second elastic member 2312 is arranged in the inner space,
- the full utilization of the space is realized, the various parts of the smart lock can be set more compactly, the volume of the smart lock is reduced, and it is beneficial to the setting of the smart lock on a small container.
- the second housing assembly 3402 has an outer housing 34021 and a mounting plate 34022.
- the first housing component 3401 is provided with a lock buckle for matching with the second lock tongue 3407 at a position close to the vertical upper edge, the lock buckle in this embodiment is perpendicular to the first The "U"-shaped locking bracket 3405 on the fastening surface of the shell assembly 3401.
- the driving assembly 3404 is mainly composed of a motor 34041, a motor pressing block 34042, a moving part 34043 and a bolt spring 34044, etc., wherein the motor 34041 is positioned on the outer casing 34021 by the motor pressing block 34042, and the moving part 34043 is connected to the power output end of the motor 34041 The transmission is connected and can move vertically under the drive of the motor 34041 , and the dead bolt spring 34044 is arranged between the moving part 34043 and the second dead bolt 3407 .
- the main part of the second deadbolt 3407 is a block structure with a cavity inside, and its upper end is in the shape of a bevel, which is a right-angled trapezoid in lateral projection.
- the handle, the motor 34041, the moving part 34043, the dead bolt spring 34044 and the second dead bolt 3407 are arranged in sequence from the bottom to the top in the vertical direction, and are integrally packaged inside the outer casing 34021 by the mounting plate 34022, and the dead bolt spring 34044 It is a conical spring with a smaller diameter towards the end of the second lock tongue 3407, and a larger diameter at the other end facing away from the second lock tongue 3407.
- the end of the lock handle of the second lock tongue 3407 is processed with a through hole.
- the screw can be screwed in, and the small-diameter end of the dead bolt spring 34044 abuts against the screw, thereby driving the second dead bolt 3407 to move upward.
- the mounting plate 34022 is designed with a recess near the top to accommodate the "U"-shaped snap bracket 3405 of the lower cover of the lock box. In the locked state, the "U"-shaped snap bracket 3405 of the lower cover of the lock box enters In the concave position of the installation plate 34022, and locked by the second locking tongue 3407.
- the motor of the motor 34041 rotates in the forward and reverse directions, driving the moving part 34043 to move to the top or to the bottom.
- the bolt spring 34044 is pushed against the second bolt 3407 to lock the latch bracket 3405;
- the bottom moves, there is no supporting device at the bottom of the second dead bolt 3407, and it slides down automatically under the action of gravity, and the lock bracket 3405 is not clamped, and is in an unlocked state.
- the outer casing 34021 is provided with an anti-knock device 3406 for dispersing the impact force.
- the anti-knock device 3406 is located inside the top end of the outer casing 34021. Above the locked position of the lock tongue 3407 and the lock bracket 3405 .
- Anti-knocking device 3406 is mainly made up of mounting block 34061, loose vibration pin 34062 and damping spring 34063, and mounting block 34061 is provided with two symmetrical mounting holes 340611, which are respectively the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole, two mounting holes
- the holes are respectively provided with vibration-dispersing pins 34062 and damping springs 34063, the bottom ends of the vibration-dispersing pins 34062 are respectively inserted into the mounting holes 340611, the top ends of the vibration-dispersing pins 34062 protrude from the mounting holes 340611, and the damping springs 34063 in the mounting holes 340611 are set in the mounting holes.
- On the vibration pin 34062 to elastically support the scattered vibration pin 34062.
- the two vibration-dissipating pins 34062 have the same shape, both in a "T" shape.
- the top end of the damping spring 34063 is supported on the stepped part of the vibration-dissipating pin 34062, and the bottom end of the damping spring 34063 is supported on the inner bottom of the mounting hole 340611.
- the bottom of the mounting block 34061 is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 340612 that can abut against the top end of the second lock tongue 3407 in a locked state, and each protrusion 340612 is vertically aligned with the cylindrical shape.
- the protrusion 340612 is designed with an arc-shaped inner concave surface, so as to abut against the top end of the second locking tongue 3407.
- the vibration-dissipating pin 34062 installed in the mounting block 34061 receives the transmitted force and presses the damping spring 34063 downward, thereby distributing the received impact force and passing through the mounting block protrusion 340612
- the arc-shaped inner concave surface can further disperse the impact force, thereby avoiding too much impact force from being transmitted to the second lock tongue 3407, and will not press the lock tongue spring 34044 to sink, and the lock box is not easy to be violently opened.
- the smart lock of the smart lock box 2300 also includes a detection component, and the detection component includes: a detection part 2313 fixedly arranged relative to the motor 2308 (that is, the detection part 2313 and the motor 2308 are both be arranged on the PCB described later); the follower 2315 that is connected on the moving part 2310 and moves with the moving part 2310, and the detection part 2313 can obtain the position of the second dead bolt 2307 by detecting the position of the follower 2315.
- the detection component includes: a detection part 2313 fixedly arranged relative to the motor 2308 (that is, the detection part 2313 and the motor 2308 are both be arranged on the PCB described later); the follower 2315 that is connected on the moving part 2310 and moves with the moving part 2310, and the detection part 2313 can obtain the position of the second dead bolt 2307 by detecting the position of the follower 2315.
- the detection part 2313 has a contact part 2314, and the follower 2315 is provided with a contact groove 2316, and the contact part 2314 is located in the contact groove 2316 and enables the detection part 2313 to detect the first contact by contacting with different side walls of the contact groove 2316 Whether the second locking tongue 2307 is located in the motor 2308.
- one end of the follower 2315 is fixedly connected on the moving part 2310, and the other end is arranged close to the detection part 2313, and a contact groove 2316 is provided on the end close to the detection part 2313, the contact part 2314 of the detection part 2313 (this contact part 2314 That is, the triangular contact of the detection part 2313) extends into the contact groove 2316; since the follower 2315 is connected to the moving part 2310, the follower 2315 will follow the moving part 2310 and the second dead bolt 2307 to move synchronously, and at the same time
- the detection assembly is arranged on the drive assembly, as shown in Figure 28, when the second dead bolt 2307 is in the position closest to the motor 2308 (that is, when it is unlocked), it contacts the left side wall of the groove 2316 (this left side wall is for moving closer) and as shown in Figure 30, make the second bolt 2307 contact the right side wall of groove 2316 (this right side wall is away from the moving part 2310 when the position in the buckle).
- the side wall is in contact with the contact piece 2314, so that during the working process of the driving piece, once the left side wall of the contact groove 2316 contacts the contact piece 2314, the detection piece 2313 can detect that the second bolt 2307 is closest to the motor 2308 position, so that the detection part 2313 can send an unlocking signal to the control assembly 2317 described later, so that the control assembly 2317 can control the motor 2308 to stop working according to the unlocking signal, and once the right side wall of the contact groove 2316 contacts the contact piece 2314, the The detection part 2313 can detect that the second lock tongue 2307 is in the position inside the buckle, so that the detection part 2313 can send a locking signal to the control component 2317, so that the control component 2317 can control the motor 2308 to stop working according to the locking signal .
- the detection part 2313 can be a detection switch, a detection thimble, etc.
- the follower 2315 is a switch paddle.
- the detecting element 2313 may also be a Hall sensor or the like for sensing the follower element 2315 .
- the smart lock box 2300 provided in this embodiment can better protect the motor 2308 through the smart lock including the above-mentioned detection components, avoiding damage to the motor 2308 due to excessive movement of the moving part 2310, so that the motor 2308 has a longer working life. life.
- the smart lock includes a control assembly 2317 arranged on the second housing assembly 2302 and electrically connected to the button 2303 and the electrical interface 2304, the driving assembly and the detection part 2313 are arranged on the control assembly 2317 and connected to the control assembly 2317 electrical connection. That is to say, the driving component works under the control of the control component 2317, and the detection part 2313 is connected to the control component 2317 in communication. After verifying that the password is correct, control the motor 2308 to start, so that the motor 2308 drives the second lock tongue 2307 to approach the motor 2308 from the position inside the lock until the second lock tongue 2307 moves to the position closest to the motor 2308.
- the contact groove 2316 will gradually change from the state where the right side wall is in contact with the contact piece 2314 to the state where the left side wall is in contact with the contact piece 2314, that is, as shown in FIG. 31
- the state shown in FIG. 29 transitions to the state shown in FIG. 29.
- the detection piece 2313 When the left side wall contacts the contact piece 2314, the detection piece 2313 generates an unlock signal and sends the unlock signal to the control assembly 2317, and the control assembly 2317 controls the motor 2308 to stop rotating according to the unlock signal.
- the main part of the control assembly 2317 is a printed circuit board (PCB), which can be understood as a controller, on which a plurality of modules are arranged, and the plurality of modules and the PCB together constitute the control assembly 2317, and these modules are for example Including: motor drive module, used to control the start and stop, forward and reverse of the motor 2308, and finally realize the unlocking and locking of the container; RTC module, used to encrypt and record real-time time; key module, used to identify the input password;
- the biological information identification module is used to identify the biological information collected by the biological information identification piece described later, which can be integrated with the biological information identification piece or integrated with the PCB; the LED display module is used to realize the LED light effect.
- the smart lock on the basis that the smart lock has a button 2303 for inputting the unlock password, it is preferred that the smart lock also has a biological information identification piece (not shown in the figure), which is electrically connected to the control assembly 2317, and By cooperating with the control component 2317, the verification of the control instruction carrying biological information is realized.
- the unlocking process of the biological information identification part and the control component 2317 is as follows: when the user needs to unlock the container, make the body parts (such as fingers, face, palm, etc.) with biological information approach, align and/or touch the biological information identification part , so that the biometric information identification part can collect the user's personalized biological information.
- the biometric information identification part can simultaneously realize the identification of biological information. If the biometric information identification module and the PCB Integrated in one, the biological information identification part sends the collected biological information to the PCB and makes the PCB identify the biological information.
- the specific identification process is that the biological information identification module combines the collected biological information with the biological information preset in it. The information is compared, and if the comparison results are consistent, the PCB verifies the control command carrying the biological information to start the unlocking program, that is, the PCB controls the motor 2308 to start, and the motor 2308 drives the screw to reversely rotate so that the second dead bolt 2307 is released from the motor 2308. If the comparison results are inconsistent, the PCB does not start the unlocking process.
- the biological information identification includes at least one of fingerprint identification, face identification, finger vein identification and palmprint identification. That is to say, there can be multiple biometric information identification pieces set on the smart lock, which can respectively collect fingerprints, faces, finger veins, and palm prints according to preset rules; or, there is one biometric information identification piece for Collect fingerprints, faces, finger veins or palm prints according to preset rules. That is to say, the smart lock may have the function of collecting one type of biological information, or may have the function of collecting multiple types of biological information, which is not limited in this embodiment.
- the biological information identification component may be a fingerprint sensor for sensing fingerprints and palmprints and/or a CCD camera for photographing human faces and finger veins.
- control component 2317 also includes a wireless communication module capable of communicating with the electronic device, so that the electronic device can control the second locking bolt 2307 to move out of the motor 2308 . That is, the wireless communication module is used to realize the communication connection between the control component 2317 and electronic devices such as mobile phones and computers, so that the electronic devices can be locked and unlocked remotely through the installed APP remote control smart lock. In this way, the container provided by this embodiment can have more unlocking methods, which provides convenience for users.
- the wireless communication module may be a bluetooth module, a wifi module, a GPRS module, a ZIGBEE module or a ZWAVE module and the like.
- the second housing assembly 2302 includes: an outer housing 23021, on which the buttons 2303 and biometric identification pieces are arranged; a mounting plate 23022 provided with a mounting groove, a second locking tongue 2307, The drive assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly 2317 are all located in the installation groove; the fixed cover plate 23023 that is connected with the installation plate 23022 and covers the control assembly 2317 to fix the control assembly 2317 on the installation plate 23022; is connected with the outer casing 23021 to The installation plate 23022 , the second deadbolt 2307 , the drive assembly, the detection assembly, the control assembly 2317 and the fixed cover 23023 are housed in the inner casing 23024 of the second casing assembly 2302 .
- the outer casing 23021 and the inner casing 23024 are the parts of the second casing assembly 2302 that accommodate the smart lock, and the inner casing 23024 is the inner wall of the accommodating chamber; as shown in FIG. 23 , when the accommodating chamber is in In the closed state, only the outer shell 23021 is exposed on the surface of the container, and the inner shell 23024 fits with the first shell assembly 2301 and is covered by the outer shell 23021; as shown in Figure 24, when the container is in the open state, the inner The housing 23024 is no longer attached to the first housing component 2301 and is exposed.
- the inner housing 23024 can be the battery cover of the smart lock; and the components of the control assembly 2317, or the installation plate 23022 may be called an installation bracket, on which an installation groove is arranged, and the second lock tongue 2307, the driving assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly 2317 are respectively arranged at different positions of the installation groove;
- the fixed cover 23023 is a component that limits and fixes the control assembly 2317 in the installation groove. Since the second deadbolt 2307, the drive assembly and the detection assembly are all connected to the control assembly 2317, the fixed cover 23023 is fixed and covered.
- the control assembly 2317 can realize the installation of all components such as the second dead bolt 2307, the driving assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly 2317 on the mounting plate 23022, and the fixed cover plate 23023 is fixedly connected with the mounting plate 23022 by screws.
- the second housing assembly 2302 of this structure can not only realize the reasonable installation of the smart lock, but also make the various components more compact, so that the volume of the container can be reduced, which is beneficial to the use of the container, such as The installation of the key box on the wall outside the door.
- the first housing component 2301 is a groove structure, on which a lock is arranged, and a pendant 2319 is arranged on the top.
- the first housing component 2301 is provided with a hinge 2318
- the second housing component 2302 is rotatably connected with the first housing component 2301 through the hinge 2318, and is accommodated by rotating relative to the first housing component 2301. cavity opening and closing.
- This way of opening and closing the accommodating cavity by rotating the second housing assembly 2302 can keep the various parts of the container connected as a whole, which is beneficial to the setting and use of the container;
- the cavity can also make the opening area of the accommodating cavity larger, which is beneficial for taking and placing items.
- the opening of the accommodating cavity can also be realized by moving the second housing component 2302 on the first housing component 2301 or detaching the second housing component 2302 from the first housing component 2301 .
- the possible beneficial effects of the smart lock box 2300 and the smart lock box 3400 disclosed in this embodiment include but are not limited to: (1) can be unlocked by digital password keys, bluetooth, etc., which is convenient and fast; (2) elastic second lock Tongue and motor-driven lead screw and nut mechanism are locked and unlocked, and the operation is fast, simple, convenient and high in safety; (3) Self-contained detection components improve the service life of the motor. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
- the embodiment of this specification also relates to a method and system for managing index information.
- the method and system can be applied to device control and access to item information of the above-mentioned closable devices (such as the closable device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , the smart lock box 2300 shown in FIG. 23 , etc.) Management, the closeable device may include item storage devices including, but not limited to, safe deposit boxes, safe deposit boxes, jewelry boxes, smart pill boxes, and the like.
- the method and system can also be applied to the control of smart warehouses and the management of access item information.
- the method and system can be applied to the control of a safe deposit box used by a single person or multiple people, information management of stored personal items, and the like in a household use scenario.
- the method and system can be applied to the control of storage cabinets used by a single person or multiple people and the information management of accessed public goods in office use scenarios.
- one or more functions can be realized: performing security verification on users, identifying and accessing items, establishing an index of user and item information, and the like.
- the index information management method and system can realize one or more beneficial effects such as intelligent control of item storage devices, efficient management and query of item information, improvement of the safety and convenience of using item storage devices, and adaptation to more usage scenarios. .
- Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- the index information management system 3800 may include a server 3810 , a network 3820 , a closeable device 3830 , a user terminal 3840 and a storage device 3850 .
- the index information management system 3800 can perform security verification on users who access the item management area of the closeable device 3830, and perform corresponding operations according to the verification results. For example, after confirming that the user is a trusted user, the user can open the storage device or perform other operations.
- the index information management system 3800 can acquire item information in the closeable device 3830, and identify the item based on the item information. For example, attributes of items are determined, and items are classified according to the attributes of items.
- the index information management system 3800 can provide services for trusted users. For example, provide services for trusted users to access the item management area, or provide item query services.
- Server 3810 may be used to process information and/or data related to index information management.
- the server 3810 may process the user information acquired by the closeable device 3830, and complete security verification of the user according to the user information.
- the server 3810 may process the detection information related to the item acquired in the closeable device 3830, and determine the item information based on the detection information.
- the server 3810 may identify a service request of a trusted user, and provide a service for the trusted user based on the service request.
- the server 3810 may be hardware or software.
- the server 3810 may be a hardware device provided on the closeable device 3830 to provide data processing functions.
- the server 3810 may be software enabling the gateway to implement data processing functions.
- the server 3810 may include a processor 3812, and the processor 3812 may process data, information and/or processing results obtained from other devices or system components, and perform execution based on these data, information and/or processing results program instructions to perform one or more of the functions described in this specification.
- Network 3820 may be used to provide a channel for information exchange.
- the server 3810 , the closeable device 3830 , the user terminal 3840 and the storage device 3850 can exchange information through the network 3820 .
- the trusted user communicates with the server 3810 through the network 3820 via the user terminal 3840 to obtain information related to the items in the closeable device 3830 stored in the storage device 3850 .
- network 3820 may include one or more network access points.
- network 3820 may include wired or wireless network access points, eg, base stations and/or network switching points 3820-1, 3820-2, etc.
- the closeable device 3830 may be used to provide a closeable item management area to store items, and to retrieve information and/or data related to the items.
- the closeable device 3830 may obtain user information.
- user information is obtained through one or more methods of fingerprint, iris, face recognition, digital password, etc.
- the closeable device 3830 can obtain information about items in the item management area.
- the item information is acquired through one or more of the provided laser sensors, infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, pressure sensors and the like.
- Users can use the services provided by the system 3800 through the user terminal 3840 .
- a trusted user may send an inquiry request through the user terminal 3840 to inquire about the items it puts in the item management area of the closeable device 3830 .
- the closeable device 3830 may send an alarm to the user through the user terminal 3840 to warn the user that the stored items are in an unsafe state.
- the user terminal 3840 may include one of a smart phone 3840-1, a tablet computer 3840-2, a laptop computer 3840-3, etc., or other devices with input and/or output functions, or any combination thereof .
- the user terminal 3840 may be a display terminal with a display function for displaying item information.
- the user can operate various components of the system 3800 based on the user terminal 3840 .
- Storage device 3850 may be used to store data and/or instructions.
- the storage device 3850 may store item information of an item management area of the closable device 3830 .
- the storage device 3850 may store information of reference items.
- FIG. 39 is a block diagram of an exemplary closeable device 3900 according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- a closeable device 3900 includes an input module 3910 , a detection module 3920 , a lock body 3930 and a processor 3812 .
- the closeable device 3900 can provide an item management area, which is surrounded by two relatively movable parts (for example, the first part 110 and the second part 130 ).
- the item management area is a closable space, and the opening and closing of the item management area is controlled by the lock body 3930 .
- the modules and units mentioned in this specification can be realized by hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
- the implementation of hardware may include the realization of circuits or structures composed of physical components; the implementation of software may include storing the corresponding operations of modules and units in the memory in the form of codes, and performing them by appropriate hardware such as a microprocessor. implement.
- the modules and units mentioned in this article perform their operations, unless otherwise specified, it may refer to the execution of software codes including the functions, or the use of hardware with the functions.
- the modules and units mentioned in this article do not limit the structure of the corresponding hardware when they correspond to hardware, as long as the hardware that can realize its functions is within the protection scope of this application.
- different modules and units mentioned herein may correspond to the same hardware structure.
- the same module and unit mentioned herein may also correspond to multiple independent hardware structures.
- the input module 3910 is configured to receive user instructions.
- the user instruction includes a request to access an item management area, and the user instruction may also include a query request, a setting request, a management request, and the like.
- the input module 3910 includes devices capable of receiving user instructions, such as a keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, and the like. As an example only, the user presses a key on the keyboard, clicks on the touch screen, or sends out a voice message indicating to wake up, so that the input module 3910 receives a wake-up instruction.
- the input module is further configured to collect user information.
- the input module includes a device for collecting user information, such as a fingerprint collection device, a finger vein collection device, a palmprint collection device, an iris scanning device, an image collection device (such as a camera, a camera), a retinal scanning device, Image acquisition device, microphone, password input device, etc.
- a device for collecting user information such as a fingerprint collection device, a finger vein collection device, a palmprint collection device, an iris scanning device, an image collection device (such as a camera, a camera), a retinal scanning device, Image acquisition device, microphone, password input device, etc.
- the input module 3910 obtains the user's face information and fingerprint information through a camera and a fingerprint collection device.
- the detection module 3920 is configured to acquire detection information of items in the item management area of the closeable device 3900 .
- the detection module 3920 includes sensors that can be used to obtain detection information, such as image acquisition devices, laser sensors, infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, pressure sensors, and the like.
- the detection module 3920 acquires image signal data of the item through an image acquisition device, acquires infrared signal data of the item through an infrared sensor, and acquires pressure signal data of the item through a pressure sensor.
- the detection module 3920 is further configured to acquire status information of the lock body 3930 .
- the state information of the closeable device 3900 is used to indicate the working state of the lock body 3930 (such as an open state, a locked state).
- the detection module 3920 also includes a sensor for acquiring status information of the lock body 3930, such as a pressure sensor, a contact sensor, a Hall sensor, etc. installed on the lock body 3930.
- the lock body 3930 is configured to perform an unlocking operation based on a control signal sent by the processor 3812 .
- the processor 3812 sends an unlock control signal to the lock body 3930 based on the trusted user's access request; in response to receiving the unlock control signal, the lock body 3930 performs an unlock operation to allow the trusted user to access the item management area.
- the lock body 3930 is further configured to perform a locking operation based on a control signal sent by the processor 3812 .
- the processor 3812 judges that the lock body 3930 is in the open state based on the status information of the lock body 3930 acquired by the detection module 3920 and is in the open state for more than a predetermined time (such as 10 minutes, 15 minutes or 20 minutes), and the processor 3812 sends The lock body 3930 sends a lock control signal; in response to receiving the lock control signal, the lock body 3930 performs a lock operation to close the item management area.
- a predetermined time such as 10 minutes, 15 minutes or 20 minutes
- the processor 3812 is configured to process the information and/or data in the index information management process, including obtaining the user's access request; based on the access request, perform security verification on the user's identity, and control the lock body 3930 to perform an unlocking operation to allow trusted users to access The item management area, and generate access information; obtain the item information and/or item access information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit; determine the index information based on the item information and/or item access information, and the index information is at least based on The access information is confirmed.
- the specific content of the processor 3812 processing information and/or data in the index information management process please refer to other parts of this specification, such as FIG. 40, FIG. 41 and their descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
- the closeable device 3900 may also include a positioning module 3940 .
- the location module 3940 is configured to obtain location information of the closeable device 3900 .
- the positioning module 3940 includes a positioning device for obtaining location information, such as a GPS positioning device, a Beidou positioning device, a GPS Beidou dual-mode positioning device, and the like.
- the closeable device 3900 may also include an output module 3950 .
- the output module 3950 is configured to output a signal to the outside based on the control signal of the processor 3812, such as displaying index information to the user, or sending an alarm message indicating that the security verification has not been passed to the user.
- the output module 3950 includes means for outputting visual signals, such as a display.
- the output module 3950 includes means for outputting audio signals, such as a speaker.
- Fig. 40 is a block diagram of an exemplary index information management system 4000 according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- the system 4000 includes a security module 4010 and a management module 4020 .
- the security module 4010 and the management module 4020 may be implemented on the server 3810 or the closeable device 3900 , such as the processor 3812 .
- the security module 4010 is configured to obtain a user's request to access the item management area.
- the security module 4010 can communicate with the input module 3910 of the closeable device 3900 to obtain the user's access request, or the security module 4010 can communicate with the user terminal 3840 to obtain the user's access request.
- the security module 4010 is also configured to perform security verification on the user's identity based on the user's access request, so as to allow the trusted user to access the item management area and generate access information.
- the item management area is a closable space.
- Access information refers to the collection of information associated with an access request. As an example only, access information may include, but not limited to, user identification (such as user ID, user name, user avatar, etc.), access event, access time (such as unlock time, lock time) and the like.
- the security module 4010 controls the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlocking operation, so as to allow trusted users to access the item management area of the closeable device 3900 .
- security module 4010 includes a user authentication submodule.
- the access request carries user information corresponding to the user identity
- the user verification submodule is configured to determine whether the user is a trusted user based on the user information of the user, and issue an alarm message when the determination result is no.
- trusted user refers to a user who has access rights to the item management area of the closeable device 3900 . There can be one or more trusted users.
- the user can set and enter the user information of the user during access to the closeable device 3900 in the initialization state (such as the state of the first use of the closeable device 3900, the state of data reset, and the state of data loss), and the processor 3812 is based on the user information.
- the initialization state such as the state of the first use of the closeable device 3900, the state of data reset, and the state of data loss
- the processor 3812 is based on the user information.
- Set up to identify the user as a trusted user allowing the user to gain access.
- a trusted user may set and enter user information of other users during access to the closeable device 3900, so that other users may obtain access rights, and the processor 3812 determines that other users are trusted users based on the user settings.
- the user verification submodule is further configured to compare the user information of the user who sends the access request with the preset trusted user, and determine whether the user is a trusted user based on the comparison result.
- the term "user information" refers to a collection of information that can be used to identify a user.
- the user information of the default trusted user is pre-registered and stored in the storage device 3850 , and the user verification submodule can call the user information of the default trusted user stored in the storage device 3850 .
- user information may include one or more of fingerprint information, finger vein information, palmprint information, iris information, retina information, face information, voiceprint information, and digital password information.
- the user verification submodule is further configured to issue an alarm message when the judgment result is negative.
- the alarm information sent in response to judging that the user is not a trusted user can be used to warn the access behavior of the untrusted user.
- the alarm information may include local alarm information and remote alarm information, and the alarm information may be sent in at least one form of a voice signal, a vibration signal, and a text signal.
- the local alert message is sent through the output module 3950 of the closeable device 3900 .
- the image information of the untrusted user can be obtained by the image acquisition device of the input module 3910 through the display of the output module 3950 displaying the image information of the untrusted user and the text message indicating that the access request of the untrusted user has been rejected.
- the remote alert message is sent through an output device of the trusted user's user terminal 3840 .
- the user terminal 3840 receives the remote alarm information, displays the image information of the unauthenticated user through the display, and broadcasts the voice information indicating that an unauthenticated user access event occurs to the closeable device 3900 through the loudspeaker.
- the management module 4020 is configured to obtain item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit, the item identification information includes item information and/or item access information; based on the item identification information, determine index information, and the index information is at least based on the access information Sure.
- the index information is at least used to indicate access information of items of trusted users during access.
- the term "access period" refers to the time period from the start of executing the access request to the end of the execution of the access request. By way of example only, the access period may be the time period from when the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 performs an unlock operation to when the lock body 3930 locks.
- the management module 4020 further includes an identification submodule 4021 .
- the identification sub-module 4021 is configured to obtain the detection information obtained by the detection module 3920; based on the detection information obtained by the detection module 3920, determine the item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit.
- the item identification information includes item information, such as the attribute (type, material, etc.) and value of the item.
- the item identification information includes item access information, such as item access status and access time.
- the identification submodule 4021 may include an access determination unit; the access determination unit is configured to determine the access information of the item based on the detection information.
- the access information of the item is used to indicate the access status of the item, including the access status of all items that are accessed or not accessed in the item management area of the closeable device 3900 during the visit.
- access states may include deposited, withdrawn, and owned. Among them, inherent refers to the state that the item has been stored in the closeable device 3900 before the access request is executed (ie, before the item management area is opened), and has not been taken out after the access request is executed (ie, after the item management area is closed).
- the changes shown by the chronological arrangement of probe information can be used to indicate the access status of the item.
- the access determination unit may determine the access status of the item based on changes in the detection information. For example, the access status of an item can be determined by analyzing changes in pressure sensing data (eg, an increase in pressure indicates that an item is deposited). For another example, the access state of the item can be determined by comparing the image data at the time point when the closeable device 3900 is unlocked and when it is locked.
- the access determining unit is further configured to determine the access time of the item based on the detection information, for example, the data change time stamp of the pressure sensing data may be used as the deposit time or withdrawal time of the item.
- the identification submodule 4021 may include an attribute determination unit; the attribute determination unit is configured to determine the attribute of the item based on the detection information.
- the term "properties of an item" refers to a collection of characteristics inherent to the item itself.
- the attribute of the item may include but not limited to the type, specification, material, etc. of the item.
- the types of items may include but not limited to jewelry, currency, certificate documents, calligraphy and painting works of art, etc.
- the specifications of items may include but not limited to weight, volume, size, color, etc.
- the materials of items may include but not limited to metal, precious stones , paper, textiles, etc.
- the attribute determination unit may determine the type of the item based on the detection data. For example, image data or laser scanning data can be used to identify the type of items through an AI recognition model. In some embodiments, the attribute determination unit may determine the material of the item based on the detection data. For example, for jewelry items, infrared sensing data can be used to determine the material of the item through infrared spectrum analysis. In some embodiments, the attribute determination unit may determine the specification of the item based on the detection data. For example, pressure sensor data can be used to determine the weight of an item through analytical calculations.
- the attribute determination unit is further configured to determine the item attribute of the item through a multi-data fusion algorithm based on the detection information.
- Multi-data fusion integrates incomplete information about the attributes of the same item provided by multiple sensors to form a relatively complete and consistent perceptual description, thereby achieving more accurate identification and judgment functions. Determining item attributes through multi-data fusion algorithm can improve the accuracy and efficiency of item attribute recognition.
- the identification sub-module 4021 also includes a value determination unit.
- the value determination unit is configured to determine the value of the deposited item based on the probe information. The value of an item usually refers to the market value of the item.
- the value determination unit may retrieve a reference item matching the deposited item based on the detection information, and determine the value of the deposited item based on the value of the reference item. In some embodiments, the value determination unit may also determine the value of the deposited item based on user input.
- the identification sub-module provides a basis for comprehensive management and quick query of item information by quickly identifying items, determining item information, item access status and access time.
- the management module 4020 further includes an index sub-module 4022; the index sub-module 4022 is configured to determine index information based at least on item identification information and access information.
- the item identification information includes item information and/or access information of the item.
- the index sub-module 4022 further includes an index generation unit; the index generation unit is configured to create index information based at least on access information, item identification information and preset rules when the created index information is not detected.
- the created index information may be stored in the storage device 3850 .
- the term "preset rules" refers to rules for establishing, querying and displaying index information. For the closable device 3900 in the initialization state, the index submodule 4022 does not detect the created index information (such as no created index information, created index information is lost or created index information is reset), then the index generation unit can Create index information.
- the index generating unit may create the index information based on a management request of the trusted user requesting to create the index information. In some embodiments, the index generation unit can automatically create index information after the lock body 3930 enters the locked state from the unlocked state.
- the index submodule 4022 further includes an index update unit; the index update unit is configured to update the index information based at least on the access information and the item identification information when the created index information is detected.
- the index update unit can call and update the index information stored in the storage device 3850 .
- the index submodule 4022 further includes a query display unit; the query display unit is configured to perform query display based on the index information. In some embodiments, the query display unit is further configured to determine index information corresponding to the query request based on the query request of the trusted user, and display the index information corresponding to the query request. In some embodiments, the query display unit may be used for local query display. For example, the query display unit can acquire the query request received by the input module 3910, and display the index information corresponding to the query request through the display of the output module 3950. In some embodiments, the query display unit may be used for remote query display. For example, the query display unit can obtain the query request sent by the user terminal 3840, and the query display unit sends the index information corresponding to the query request to the user terminal 3840, and displays it on the display of the user terminal 3840.
- step 4240 in FIG. 42 For details about creating index information, updating index information, and querying and displaying based on index information, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as step 4240 in FIG. 42 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
- the index sub-module can enable the user to quickly understand the current trend and historical trend of the item through the index information query by establishing the index information associated with the user and the item, and enable the user to fully understand the item usage of other trusted users of the closeable device 3900, which is convenient for item identification. Overall management.
- Fig. 41 is a block diagram of another exemplary index information management system 4100 according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- the system 4100 includes a security module 4110 and a management module 4120 .
- the security module 4110 and the management module 4120 may be implemented on the server 3810 or on the closeable device 3900 , such as the processor 3812 .
- the security module 4110 is configured to obtain a user's request to access the item management area; based on the user's access request, perform security verification on the user's identity and generate access information, and the item management area is a closable space.
- security module 4110 includes a user authentication submodule.
- user verification sub-module For the specific content of the user verification sub-module, please refer to other parts of this specification, for example, the user verification sub-module and its description of the security module 4010 in FIG. 40 , which will not be repeated here.
- the safety module 4110 further includes a position monitoring sub-module 4112; the position monitoring sub-module 4112 is configured to determine whether the closeable device 3900 is located in the safety area based on the position information obtained by the positioning module 3940, and when the determination result is no Issue an alert message.
- the term "safe area" refers to the permitted safe range of movement of the closeable device 3900 .
- the safe area can be a circle, ellipse, polygon or other irregular graphic area that expands outward from a center.
- safe areas may be determined based on user input. For example, when the location monitoring sub-module 4112 obtains a setting request from a trusted user requesting to set a security area by communicating with the input module 3910 or the user terminal 3840, the location monitoring sub-module 4112 determines the security area based on the setting information carried in the setting request, and The setting information of the security area is stored in the storage device 3850 .
- the security zone can be automatically generated based on preset security zone setting rules.
- the closeable device 3900 (such as the system 4100) is in the initialization state.
- the position monitoring sub-module 4112 obtains the current position coordinates of the closeable device 3900 through communication with the positioning module 3940, and generates a Coordinates as the center, a circular area with a preset value (such as 10 meters, 20 meters or 30 meters) as the radius, set the circular area as a safe area, and store the setting information of the safe area in the storage device 3850 , so as to be called when the subsequent location monitoring submodule 4112 performs location monitoring.
- a preset value such as 10 meters, 20 meters or 30 meters
- an alarm message issued in response to determining that the position of the closeable device 3900 is not within a safe area may be used to alert the behavior of moving the closeable device 3900 beyond the range.
- the security module 4110 may terminate the alert based on a setup request by the trusted user requesting that the alert be dismissed.
- the specific content of the alarm information please refer to other parts of this specification, for example, the user verification sub-module of the security module 4010 in FIG. 40 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
- the position monitoring sub-module 4112 can further improve the use safety of the closable device 3900 by monitoring the position of the closable device 3900 and warning against unauthorized movement behaviors.
- the management module 4120 is configured to obtain item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit, the item identification information includes item information and/or item access information; based on the item identification information, determine index information, and the index information is at least based on the access information Sure.
- the management module 4120 further includes an identification sub-module 4121; the identification sub-module 4121 is configured to determine item identification information based on the detection information acquired by the detection module 3920.
- the identification sub-module 4121 is configured to determine item identification information based on the detection information acquired by the detection module 3920.
- the identification sub-module 4121 please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the identification sub-module 4021 in FIG. 40 and its description, and step 4230 in FIG. 42 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
- the management module 4120 further includes an authentication submodule 4122; the authentication submodule 4122 is configured to determine the ownership information of the item based at least on the access information and the detection information acquired by the detection module 3920.
- the term "ownership information" is used to indicate the ownership relationship between an item and a user.
- the ownership information of the item can be determined based on the access information and the item identification information determined based on the detection information of the identification sub-module 4121 .
- the authentication submodule 4122 may include a first authentication unit configured to determine the ownership information of the deposited item based on the access information and the detection information obtained by the detection module 3920 .
- the ownership information of the deposited item may be determined based on the item identification information determined based on the detection information of the access information and identification sub-module 4121 . Specifically, based on the access information of the item in the item identification information, it can be determined whether there is an item deposited in the item management area of the closeable device 3900 during the visit.
- the first authentication unit may analyze the coincidence of the depositing time of the item and the unlocking period of the user based on the unlocking time and locking time in the access information and the depositing time of the item in the item identification information, It is determined that the user whose access period coincides with the deposit time of the item is the owner of the deposited item.
- step 4320 in FIG. 43 For the specific content of determining the ownership information of the deposited item, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as step 4320 in FIG. 43 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
- the authentication submodule 4122 may include a second authentication unit configured to acquire the historical ownership information of the items in the item management area of the closeable device 3900; Detection information and historical ownership information to determine the ownership information of the items taken out.
- the ownership information of the retrieved item may be determined based on the item identification information determined by the identification sub-module 4121 and historical ownership information.
- the historical ownership information includes the closing device 3900 from the initialization state (such as the state of the first use of the closeable device 3900, the state of data reset, the state of data loss) to the lock body 3930 entering the locked state last time. Ownership information of deposited items.
- the historical ownership information can be stored in the storage device 3850, and the first authentication unit can update the historical ownership information based on the ownership information of the currently deposited item after the lock body 3930 enters the locked state from the unlocked state.
- the second authentication unit is further configured to judge whether the user taking out the item is the owner of the item, and send an alarm message if the judgment result is no.
- the alarm information sent in response to judging that the user is not the owner of the item taken out can be used to warn the non-owner of the item taking behavior.
- the authentication sub-module can increase the dimension of item information and expand the usage scenarios by authenticating the deposited items and determining the ownership information.
- the authentication sub-module can make the closeable device 3900 take into account sharing and security in multi-person use scenarios by authenticating the items taken out and warning the non-owner's access behavior of the items.
- the management module 4120 further includes an index submodule 4123; the index submodule 4123 is configured to determine index information based on access information, item identification information and ownership information.
- the item identification information includes item information and/or access information of the item.
- the index information is used to indicate the situation of the trusted user accessing the item in the item management area during the access period, and the ownership relationship between the trusted user and the accessed item.
- the index sub-module establishes index information based on access information, item identification information, and ownership information, which can realize information statistics, management, and query of personal items in multi-person usage scenarios, realize multi-dimensional management of item information, and adapt to security requirements. High application scenarios.
- Fig. 42 is an exemplary flowchart of index information management according to some embodiments of the present specification.
- Process 4200 may be performed by system 3800 .
- process 4200 may be implemented as a set of instructions (eg, an application program) stored in storage device 3850 .
- the processor 3812 and the modules in FIG. 39 , FIG. 40 , and FIG. 41 may execute at least a part of the set of instructions, and when executing at least a part of the instructions, the processor 3812 , these modules may be configured to execute the process 4200 .
- the operations of process 4200 shown below are for illustration purposes only. In some embodiments, process 4200 may be accomplished with one or more additional operations not described and/or one or more operations not discussed herein. Additionally, the order of the operations of process 4200 as shown in FIG. 42 and described below is not intended to be limiting.
- Step 4210 obtain the user's request for accessing the item management area.
- Step 4210 may be performed by processor 3812 (eg, security modules 4010, 4110).
- the processor 3812 may obtain the user's access request by communicating with the user terminal 3840 . In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may obtain the user's access request by communicating with the input module 3910 of the closeable device 3900 .
- Step 4220 based on the user's access request, perform security verification on the user's identity, and generate access information, and the item management area is a closable space.
- Step 4220 may be performed by processor 3812 (eg, security modules 4010, 4110).
- step 4220 may include a user verification step.
- the access request carries user information corresponding to the user's identity, and the user verification step can judge whether the user is a trusted user based on the user's user information, and send an alarm message when the judgment result is no.
- the user verification step may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the user verification submodule 4111).
- the user verification step further includes: acquiring user information of the user and user information of a preset trusted user. Specifically, when the processor 3812 obtains the user's access request, the processor 3812 may simultaneously obtain user information for user security verification. Information decides. For example, the pre-recorded user information of the preset trusted user includes digital password information and voiceprint information, then the processor 3812 obtains at least one of the user's digital password information and voiceprint information through the input module 3910 or the user terminal 3840, to Perform security verification.
- the user verification step further includes: comparing the user information of the user with that of a preset trusted user, and judging whether the user is a trusted user based on the comparison result.
- the comparison may be based on one type of user information. For example, compare the fingerprint information of the user with the fingerprint information of the preset trusted user, and determine the similarity between the two through fingerprint similarity analysis. If the similarity is higher than the threshold (such as 95%, 98%, 99%), the user can be judged as trusted. user, otherwise it is determined that the user is an untrusted user.
- the comparison can be made based on various information in the user information.
- the processor 3812 can perform face recognition analysis based on the user's face information and the preset trusted user's face information to obtain the first matching degree, which can be based on the user
- the iris information of the user and the iris information of the preset trusted user perform iris recognition and analysis to obtain the second matching degree.
- the processor 3812 scores the first matching degree and the second matching degree based on the scoring model, and calculates the total matching score. If the score is higher than the threshold (such as 90 points, 95 points, 99 points), it is judged that the user is a trusted user, otherwise it is judged that the user is an untrusted user.
- the threshold such as 90 points, 95 points, 99 points
- the user verification step further includes: sending out an alarm message when the judgment result is negative.
- the alarm information includes local alarm information and remote alarm information.
- access information For details about the access request, access information, user information, and alarm information, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the security module 4010 in FIG. 40 and its description, and will not be repeated here.
- step 4220 also includes a location monitoring step.
- the item management area is located in the movable storage device, and the position monitoring step can monitor whether the item management area is in a safe area, and send an alarm message when the judgment result is no.
- the position monitoring step may be performed by the processor 3812 (eg, the position monitoring sub-module 4112).
- the processor 3812 eg, the position monitoring sub-module 4112
- the position monitoring sub-module 4112 For details about the security area, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the position monitoring sub-module 4112 in FIG. 41 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
- the processor 3812 may obtain location information through the location module 3940 of the closeable device 3900 .
- the processor 3812 can acquire the position information of the closeable device 3900 in real time through the positioning module 3940 .
- the processor 3812 may periodically receive location information through the positioning module 3940, for example, the positioning device sends the location information to the processor 3812 every 10 minutes, 15 minutes or 30 minutes.
- the processor 3812 obtains the location information through the positioning module 3940 when determining that the trigger condition is met.
- the trigger condition for acquiring location information may be that the processor 3812 receives an access request.
- the processor 3812 when the processor 3812 determines that the position of the closable device 3900 is outside the safe area, it can send a local alarm message through the output module 3950 of the closable device 3900, such as sending out a voice message through a microphone, and sending a return safety message to the outside. area or prompts for trusted users to cancel the alarm, etc.
- the processor 3812 when the processor 3812 judges that the position of the closeable device 3900 is outside the safe area, it can send a remote alarm message through the user terminal 3840 of the trusted user, such as sending a graphic alarm through the display of the user terminal 3840, prompting the trusted user
- a remote alarm message through the user terminal 3840 of the trusted user, such as sending a graphic alarm through the display of the user terminal 3840, prompting the trusted user
- the user can set the current position of the closeable device 3900, and prompt if the movement of the current position of the closeable device 3900 is trustworthy, the alarm can be disarmed by the setting of the trusted user.
- Step 4230 acquire item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit, where the item identification information includes item information and/or item access information.
- Step 4230 may be performed by processor 3812 (such as management modules 4020, 4120).
- the processor 3812 may acquire detection information of the item management area; based on the detection information, determine item identification information of the item management area during the user's visit. Wherein, the detection information can be obtained through the detection module 3920 of the closeable device 3900 . In some embodiments, the item information includes at least the attributes of the item and/or the value of the item.
- step 4230 further includes an access determination step.
- the access determination step may determine access information of the items in the item management area during the user's visit based on the probe information.
- the access determination step may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the access determination unit of the identification sub-module 4021, 4121).
- the item's access information may indicate the item's access status, including deposited, withdrawn, and owned.
- the item's access information may indicate the item's access time, including deposit time and withdrawal time.
- the processor 3812 may determine the access information of the item after the item management area is closed. For example, the processor 3812 controls the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlocking operation, so as to allow the trusted user to access the item management area, and the trusted user deposits and/or withdraws items. After the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 is locked, the item When the management area is closed, the processor 3812 can perform image recognition and analysis based on the image data of the closing time point and the closing time point of the closable device 3900, and determine that there is an access status in the item management area of the closable device 3900 as deposit and/or withdrawal items.
- the identifying step further includes an attribute determining step.
- the attribute determining step may determine the attribute of the item in the item management area during the user's visit based on the probe information.
- the attribute determining step may be performed by a processor 3812 (such as an attribute determining unit).
- the processor 3812 may determine the attributes of the item through a machine learning model based on the detection information.
- the machine learning model may include but not limited to a neural network model, a decision tree model, a support vector machine model, etc. or any combination thereof.
- the processor 3812 can call the attribute recognition model stored in the storage device 3850.
- the attribute recognition model is generated by using the labeled detection information set as a sample to train the machine learning model.
- the attribute recognition model can be based on the image data of the item or laser The scanned data is used as input to identify the type and material of the item.
- the processor 3812 may determine the attribute parameters of the item through a parameter calculation model based on the detection information, and determine the attribute of the item based on the attribute parameters of the item. For example, the processor 3812 can call the density calculation model stored in the storage device 3850, calculate the density of the item based on the pressure sensing data and the ultrasonic sensing data, and determine the material (such as metal, jade, etc.) of the item through the density of the item. In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may determine the item attribute of the item through a graphic-text recognition model based on the detection information.
- an item may carry a graphic and text mark indicating the attribute of the item (such as a text mark indicating that the type of the item is a ring, the material is gold, and the specification includes a weight of 15g and a diameter of 2 cm), and the processor 3812 may call the graphic and text mark stored in the storage device 3850 Recognition model (such as OCR model), which determines the type, material and specification of the item by obtaining the image data with graphic and text identification of the item.
- a graphic and text mark indicating the attribute of the item such as a text mark indicating that the type of the item is a ring, the material is gold, and the specification includes a weight of 15g and a diameter of 2 cm
- the processor 3812 may call the graphic and text mark stored in the storage device 3850 Recognition model (such as OCR model), which determines the type, material and specification of the item by obtaining the image data with graphic and text identification of the item.
- the identifying step further includes a value determining step.
- the value determining step may determine the value of the items in the item management area during the user's visit based on the probe information.
- the value determination step may be performed by a processor 3812 (eg, a value determination unit).
- the value of the deposited item may be further determined.
- the specific method of determining the value of the deposited items can be selected according to the attributes of the deposited items.
- the step of determining the value may further include a step of determining the value of the deposited item through a network search.
- the processor 3812 performs a network search based on the image data of the stored items to determine candidate items whose matching degree is higher than one or more thresholds.
- the processor 3812 displays the one or more items to be selected through the display of the closeable device 3900 or the display device of the user terminal 3840 of the trusted user, and the trusted user determines the target from the one or more items to be selected Reference items. If the trusted user does not determine the target reference item within a predetermined time (eg, 1 minute), the processor 3812 automatically determines the candidate item with the highest matching degree as the target reference item.
- Processor 3812 may determine the value of the deposited item based on the retrieved market value of the target reference item.
- the step of determining the value may further include a step of determining the value of the deposited item by searching a local database.
- the local database is stored in storage device 3850.
- the local database may contain one or more pre-stored reference item information including at least image data and a value of the item. Wherein, the value of the reference item can be set by the trusted user.
- the steps of determining the value of the item through the local database search are similar to the steps of determining the value of the item through the network search, and will not be repeated here.
- the step of determining the value may further include the step of determining the value of the item based on user input.
- the processor 3812 may display a prompt message through the display of the closable device 3900 or the user terminal 3840 to prompt the user to manually set Determine the value of the deposited item.
- the processor 3812 determines the value of the deposited item based on the acquired setting request of the trusted user on value setting (the setting request carries the value information of the item).
- the process 4200 may also include an authentication step.
- the authentication step can determine the ownership information of the items in the item management area during the trusted user's visit based on the access information and/or the detection information of the item management area.
- the authentication step can be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the authentication sub-module 4122).
- the processor 3812 such as the authentication sub-module 4122.
- Step 4240 Determine index information based on the item identification information, where the index information is determined based at least on the access information. In some embodiments, the index information is also determined based on the ownership information determined in the authentication step. Step 4240 may be executed by the processor 3812 (such as the indexing submodule 4022 of the management module 4020, or the indexing submodule 4123 of the management module 4120).
- step 4240 may further include an index generation step.
- index information may be created based at least on access information, item identification information and preset rules. In some embodiments, the index information is also created based on the ownership information determined in the authentication step.
- the step of generating the index may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the index generating unit of the index sub-modules 4022, 4123).
- the index generation step may create or rebuild index information. It should be noted that the processor 3812 may create index information when there is no item access in the item management area.
- the preset rule may include an extraction rule for extracting information of associated items from the information to be counted, and the information to be counted includes at least access information and item identification information; the index generation step further includes extracting information based on the extraction rule from the information to be counted Steps to extract information.
- the extraction rule can be: extract the name, image, attribute, value, access status, access time, and user identification (such as user ID, user name) of the user who accesses the item from the information to be counted.
- the information to be counted also includes ownership information determined in the authentication step.
- the preset rules may also include statistical rules for counting the information of related items, and the index generating step further includes a step of counting the extracted information based on the statistical rules to generate index information.
- the statistical rule can be: classify the extracted information according to different owners, and count the names, attributes, access status, access time, and total value of items currently stored with each owner.
- the preset rule may also include a query rule for querying index information based on a query request; the index generating step further includes a step of determining a query method for index information based on the query rule.
- the query rule may be: querying index information by using one or more of access time, owner, property of the item, and name of the item as filter conditions.
- the preset rule may also include a display rule for displaying corresponding index information based on the query request; the step of generating the index further includes a step of determining a display mode of the index information based on the display rule.
- the display rule may be: displaying index information with one of item-based sorting, access-time-based sorting, and owner-based sorting as a display condition.
- the display manner may include sorting based on items, displaying based on access time and displaying based on owner.
- the indexing step may also include an index updating step.
- the index updating step may update the index information based on at least the access information and the item identification information when the created index information is detected.
- the index information is also updated based on the ownership information determined in the authentication step.
- the index updating step can be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the index updating unit of the index sub-modules 4022, 4123).
- the processor 3812 may call the created index information stored in the storage device 3850, and update the created index information.
- one or more operations of adding, modifying and deleting are used to update the index information entries associated with the currently deposited items and/or withdrawn items in the index information.
- the index information may include a plurality of index items, each index item being a collection of information associated with a specific item.
- Each index item may include a plurality of index information items, such as item name, attribute, value, access status, deposit time, withdrawal time, user ID of the depositing user, user ID of the withdrawing user, and the like.
- the processor 3812 uses a modification operation when updating the index information entry.
- the index information entry associated with the item including the access status is updated in a modified operation mode, and the item is updated in a newly added operation mode, including the time of taking out, and the user ID of the user who took out the item.
- the index information entry in the item is updated by deleting the index information entry including the value associated with the item.
- the indexing step may also include a query display step.
- the query display step may perform query display based on the index information.
- the query displaying step may further determine index information corresponding to the query request based on the query request of the trusted user, and display the index information corresponding to the query request.
- the query display step can be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the query display unit of the indexing submodules 4022, 4123).
- the query request carries filtering conditions for querying index information and display conditions for displaying index information. For example, in the query request of the trusted user, if the item attribute includes gemstones as the filtering condition, and the sorting based on the owner is used as the display condition, the processor 3812 determines the index information corresponding to the filtering condition based on the trusted user's query request.
- the determined index information may include one or more index items associated with gemstones with item attributes, and the index information entries of each index item may include name, attribute, value, access time and owner; the processor 3812 is based on the trusted user's query Request, determine to display the determined index information in a sorted manner based on the owner, that is, classify and arrange all index items according to the owner, and display the name, attribute, value and access time.
- Fig. 43 is an exemplary flowchart of authentication steps according to some embodiments of this specification.
- process 4300 may include steps 4310 to 4330 .
- Step 4310 Based on the detection information, it is confirmed whether there are items deposited and withdrawn from the item management area during the trusted user's visit. In some embodiments, whether there are deposited items and withdrawn items in the item management area can be confirmed based on item identification information. Wherein, the item identification information is determined based on the detection information acquired by the detection module 3920 in step 4230 . Step 4310 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the access determination unit of the identification sub-module 4021, 4121). In some embodiments, after determining the access information of the items in the item management area, the processor 3812 can confirm whether there are deposited items and withdrawn items.
- step 4320 based on the access information and the probe information, the ownership information of the deposited item is determined.
- step 4320 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the first authentication unit of the authentication submodule 4122).
- the ownership information of the deposited item may be determined based on the access information and the item identification information determined in step 4230 based on the probe information.
- step 4320 may further include: based on the deposit time of the item and the user's access time, determining the overlapping deposit and access time; determining the ownership relationship between the user corresponding to the overlapping deposit and access time and the corresponding deposited item.
- Deposit and access overlapping time refers to the overlapping time point or time period between item deposit and user access.
- the processor 3812 establishes a timeline based on the deposit time of the item and the user's unlock time and lock time.
- the storage time may be a storage time stamp determined based on a change time of detection information (such as pressure sensor data). The processor 3812 determines that the deposit-access overlap time coincides with the deposit-in time stamp during the unlocking period, and determines that the user corresponding to the deposit-access overlap time is the owner of the deposited item corresponding to the deposit-access overlap time.
- step 4320 further includes determining a joint owner of the deposited item based on user input, wherein the user is the trusted user and the user is the owner of the deposited item.
- the ownership of the same item can be jointly owned by multiple people.
- the processor 3812 receives a user's setting request, requesting to set one or more other trusted users as the joint owner of the deposited item; the processor 3812 determines whether the user who sent the setting request is the owner of the deposited item ; When the judgment result is yes, based on the setting request, it is determined that the one or more other trusted users are joint owners of the deposited items.
- step 4330 the historical ownership information of the items in the item management area is acquired.
- step 4330 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the second authentication unit of the authentication submodule 4122).
- processor 3812 retrieves historical title information stored in storage device 3850 . It can be understood that the ownership information of a specific historically deposited item in the historical ownership information may indicate the ownership information of the currently withdrawn item.
- Step 4340 based on the detection information and historical ownership information, determine the ownership information of the retrieved item.
- step 4340 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the second authentication unit).
- ownership information of the retrieved item may be determined based on item identification information and historical ownership information.
- the processor 3812 may determine the historically deposited items that match the information of the currently withdrawn items, and determine the ownership information of the currently withdrawn items based on the ownership information of the historically deposited items.
- information matching may include name matching, category matching, image matching, etc. of items, or any combination thereof.
- step 4340 further includes judging whether the user who took out the item is the owner of the item, and sending an alarm message if the judging result is no. Specifically, there may be situations where the trusted user who takes out the item is not the owner of the item. When this happens, the owner or other related personnel will be alerted, which can improve the security of item management.
- the processor 3812 determines the trusted user for item retrieval based on the access information and the item identification information. The method of determining the trusted user to take out the item is similar to step 4320, and the specific content can refer to the description of step 4320, which will not be repeated here.
- the processor 3812 determines that the trusted user who takes out the item is not the owner of the item, and sends an alarm message.
- Fig. 44 is an exemplary application scenario diagram of the index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification.
- the user wakes up the index information management system in the standby state through the input module of the closeable device 3900 and sends an access request, requesting the lock body of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlocking operation to allow the user to access the item management area, the access request Carry user information indicating user identity for security verification.
- the security module of the index information management system confirms whether the current user is a trusted user based on the user information carried in the access request.
- the safety module sends an alarm message through the display of the closeable device 3900 to prompt the user to verify that the verification has failed, and the safety verification needs to be carried out again, and waits for the user to re-enter the user information to carry out the next round of user verification; If yes, the security module controls the lock body of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlock operation and generate access information.
- the item management area is closed, and the management module of the index information management system calls the detection information of the items in the item management area collected by the detection module of the closable device 3900, and calls the information generated by the security module. Access information for item identification, authentication and index information updates. in:
- the identification sub-module of the management module determines item identification information (including item information and item access information) based on the detection information, and judges based on the item identification information whether to deposit and/or withdraw items from the item management area during user access (during unlocking).
- the index information management system When the identification sub-module judges that there is no deposit or withdrawal, the index information management system returns to the standby state and waits for the user to wake up.
- the identification sub-module When the identification sub-module judges that there are deposited items, it jumps to the authentication sub-module of the management module to authenticate the deposited items: the authentication sub-module calls the item identification information determined by the identification sub-module and the access information generated by the security module, Information used to determine ownership of deposited items. After the authentication sub-module completes the authentication, it jumps to the index sub-module of the management module to update the index information.
- the identification sub-module judges that there is an item to be taken out, it jumps to the index sub-module of the management module to update the index information.
- the index sub-module of the management module calls the identification information of the item determined by the identification sub-module, the ownership information of the deposited item determined by the authentication sub-module, and the access information generated by the security module to update the index information of the associated deposited item; the index sub-module The module invokes the item identification information determined by the identification sub-module and the access information generated by the security module to update the index information associated with the retrieved items. After the index sub-module of the management module finishes updating the index information, the index information management system returns to the standby state and waits for the user to wake it up.
- the beneficial effects that may be brought about by the index information management system 3800 and the closeable device 3900 disclosed in some embodiments of this specification include but are not limited to: (1) An index that can be used to at least indicate the access information of items of trusted users during access Information, users can intuitively and conveniently carry out comprehensive management and query on item information; (2) It enables users to conveniently inquire about the trend of item usage in the application scenario where multiple people share and use it, which is convenient for the overall management and use allocation of items; ( 3) It can issue local and/or remote alarms when untrusted access behaviors and unauthorized movement behaviors occur on storage devices, and when items are accessed by non-owners, so as to improve the safety of use in multiple dimensions. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
- numbers describing the quantity of components and attributes are used. It should be understood that such numbers used in the description of the embodiments use the modifiers "about”, “approximately” or “substantially” in some examples. grooming. Unless otherwise stated, “about”, “approximately” or “substantially” indicates that the stated figure allows for a variation of ⁇ 20%. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the numerical parameters used in the specification and claims are approximations that can vary depending upon the desired characteristics of individual embodiments. In some embodiments, numerical parameters shall take into account the specified significant digits and adopt the general digit reservation method. Although the numerical ranges and parameters used in some embodiments of this specification to confirm the breadth of the range are approximations, in specific embodiments, such numerical values are set as precisely as practicable.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Software Systems (AREA)
- Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Lock And Its Accessories (AREA)
Abstract
Embodiments of the present description provide a closable device and an index information management method and system. The device at least comprises two relatively movable components, and the two relatively movable components can form a closed space by means of at least one connecting member. The method comprises: obtaining a request from a user to access an item management area, the item management area being enclosed at least by the two relatively movable components; on the basis of the access request, performing security verification on the identity of the user, and generating access information, the item management area being a closable space; obtaining item information of the item management area and/or the access information of an item during the access of the trusted user; on the basis of the item information and/or the access information of the item, determining index information, the index information being further determined at least on the basis of the access information.
Description
交叉引用cross reference
本申请要求2021年06月01日提交的中国申请号202110608615.2的优先权,2021年06月01日提交的中国申请号202121213576.8的优先权,2021年06月01日提交的中国申请号202121213530.6的优先权,2021年06月11日提交的中国申请号202121316470.0的优先权,2022年01月27日提交的中国申请号202210100036.1的优先权,2022年02月15日提交的中国申请号202220303485.1的优先权,2022年03月02日提交的中国申请号202220453254.9的优先权,全部内容通过引用并入本文。This application claims the priority of Chinese application number 202110608615.2 submitted on June 1, 2021, the priority of Chinese application number 202121213576.8 submitted on June 1, 2021, and the priority of Chinese application number 202121213530.6 submitted on June 1, 2021 , priority of Chinese application No. 202121316470.0 filed on June 11, 2021, priority of Chinese application No. 202210100036.1 filed on January 27, 2022, priority of Chinese application No. 202220303485.1 filed on February 15, 2022, 2022 Priority of Chinese Application No. 202220453254.9 filed on March 2, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
本说明书涉及物品管理装置技术领域,特别涉及一种可闭合设备及索引信息管理方法和系统。This specification relates to the technical field of item management devices, in particular to a method and system for managing a closeable device and index information.
随着技术的发展,以及生活水平的提高,需要具有容纳空间的可闭合设备(例如保险柜、智能保险箱、保管柜、枪柜、便携式保险箱等箱体设备,钥匙盒、锁盒等盒体设备,或具有门体与墙体的房间等大型设备等)来进行物品的存放以及管理。如何使得可闭合设备使用更方便、更智能,是本领域亟待解决的技术问题。With the development of technology and the improvement of living standards, closeable devices with accommodating space are required (such as safes, smart safes, storage cabinets, gun cabinets, portable safes and other box equipment, key boxes, lock boxes and other box equipment) , or large equipment such as rooms with doors and walls, etc.) to store and manage items. How to make the closable device more convenient and smarter is a technical problem to be solved urgently in this field.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本说明书实施例之一提供一种可闭合设备,所述设备至少包括两个可相对移动的部件,所述两个可相对移动的部件可以通过至少一个连接件构成封闭空间。One of the embodiments of the present specification provides a closeable device, the device includes at least two relatively movable parts, and the two relatively movable parts can form a closed space through at least one connecting piece.
在一些实施例中,所述两个可相对移动的部件可以通过锁定装置进行锁定。In some embodiments, the two relatively movable parts can be locked by locking means.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定装置包括安装支架、第一锁定件、锁定组件、机械解锁组件和智能解锁组件;所述安装支架设于所述两个可相对移动的部件中的其中一个上;所述第一锁定件设于所述两个可相对移动的部件中的另一个上;所述锁定组件可移动的设置在所述安装支架上并能够与所述第一锁定件适配以形成锁定,所述锁定组件能够在锁定状态和解锁状态切换;所述机械解锁组件设于所述安装支架上,且所述机械解锁组件能够输出机械解锁动作而使得所述锁定组件解锁;所述智能解锁组件设置在所述安装支架上,且所述智能解锁组件能够输出智能解锁动作而使得所述锁定组件解锁。In some embodiments, the locking device includes a mounting bracket, a first locking member, a locking component, a mechanical unlocking component and an intelligent unlocking component; the mounting bracket is arranged on one of the two relatively movable parts ; the first locking member is provided on the other of the two relatively movable parts; the locking assembly is movably arranged on the mounting bracket and can be adapted to the first locking member to Forming a lock, the locking component can be switched between a locked state and an unlocked state; the mechanical unlocking component is arranged on the mounting bracket, and the mechanical unlocking component can output a mechanical unlocking action to unlock the locking component; the The intelligent unlocking component is arranged on the installation bracket, and the intelligent unlocking component can output an intelligent unlocking action to unlock the locking component.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定装置还包括第一传动组件和第二传动组件;所述第一传动组件能够与所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接;所述第二传动组件能够与所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接;当所述智能解锁组件输出智能解锁动作时,所述第一传动组件与所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接,所述第二传动组件与所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件脱离传动;当所述机械解锁组件输出机械解锁动作时,所述第一传动组件与所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件脱离传动,所述第二传动组件与所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接。In some embodiments, the locking device further includes a first transmission assembly and a second transmission assembly; the first transmission assembly can be connected to the intelligent unlocking assembly and the locking assembly; the second transmission assembly can It is connected with the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component in transmission; when the intelligent unlocking component outputs a smart unlocking action, the first transmission component is in transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking component and the locking component, and the second The transmission component is separated from the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component; when the mechanical unlocking component outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the first transmission component is separated from the intelligent unlocking component and the locking component, and the The second transmission assembly is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly and the locking assembly.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件包括转动片、第二锁定件和牵引件,其中,所述转动片通过第一旋转中心可旋转的设置在所述安装支架上;所述第二锁定件通过第二旋转中心可旋转的设置在所述安装支架上,所述第二锁定件具有与所述第一锁定件适配形成锁定的第一锁舌;所述牵引件的第一牵引点设置在所述转动片上,所述牵引件的第二牵引点设置在所述第二锁定件上,所述牵引件牵引所述转动片和所述第二锁定件以在锁定状态和解锁状态切换。In some embodiments, the locking assembly includes a rotating piece, a second locking piece and a traction piece, wherein the rotating piece is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through a first rotation center; the second locking piece The second locking part is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through the second rotation center, and the second locking part has a first locking tongue adapted to form locking with the first locking part; the first pulling point of the pulling part is set On the rotating piece, a second pulling point of the pulling member is arranged on the second locking member, and the pulling member pulls the rotating piece and the second locking member to switch between a locked state and an unlocked state.
在一些实施例中,所述第一旋转中心与所述转动片的重心重合。In some embodiments, the first rotation center coincides with the center of gravity of the rotating piece.
在一些实施例中,所述转动片包括第一限位部、第一施力部和传动部,其中,所述第一限位部和所述第一施力部能够与所述第二锁定件相适配以在所述第一锁舌在锁定状态和所述解锁状态切换,所述传动部的不同部位分别与所述第一传动组件和所述第二传动组件传动连接,所述第一限位部和所述第一施力部位于所述第一旋转中心与所述第一牵引点的连线靠近所述第二锁定件的一侧。In some embodiments, the rotating piece includes a first limiting part, a first force applying part and a transmission part, wherein the first limiting part and the first force applying part can be locked with the second The parts are adapted to switch between the locked state and the unlocked state of the first bolt, and different parts of the transmission part are respectively connected with the transmission of the first transmission assembly and the second transmission assembly. A limiting portion and the first force applying portion are located on a side of a line connecting the first rotation center and the first pulling point close to the second locking member.
在一些实施例中,所述传动部包括第一推动部和第二推动部,所述第一推动部能够与所述第一传动组件传动连接,所述第二推动部能够与所述第二传动组件传动连接;所述第一推动部和所述第二推动部位于所述第一旋转中心与所述第一牵引点的连线远离所述第二锁定件的一侧。In some embodiments, the transmission part includes a first push part and a second push part, the first push part can be in drive connection with the first transmission assembly, and the second push part can be connected with the second push part The transmission assembly is in transmission connection; the first pushing part and the second pushing part are located on the side of the line connecting the first rotation center and the first traction point away from the second locking part.
在一些实施例中,所述第一牵引点设置在所述第一施力部上。In some embodiments, the first pulling point is set on the first force application part.
在一些实施例中,所述第二锁定件靠近所述转动片的一侧设置有第二限位部和第二施力部,所述第二限位部能够与所述第一限位部相适配,所述第二施力部能够与所述第一施力部相适配。In some embodiments, the side of the second locking member close to the rotating piece is provided with a second limiting portion and a second force applying portion, and the second limiting portion can cooperate with the first limiting portion Adaptively, the second force application part can be compatible with the first force application part.
在一些实施例中,所述第一锁舌、所述第二限位部和所述第二施力部均位于所述第二旋转中心与 所述第二牵引点的连线靠近所述转动片的一侧。In some embodiments, the first lock tongue, the second limiting portion and the second force applying portion are all located on the line connecting the second rotation center and the second pulling point close to the rotation side of the slice.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件还包括缓冲垫板,所述缓冲垫板位于所述转动片与所述安装支架之间和/或所述第二锁定件与所述安装支架之间,所述转动片和所述第二锁定件通过所述缓冲垫板可旋转的设置在所述安装支架上。In some embodiments, the locking assembly further includes a buffer pad, and the buffer pad is located between the rotating piece and the mounting bracket and/or between the second locking piece and the mounting bracket, The rotating piece and the second locking piece are rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through the buffer plate.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件还包括限位套,所述锁定组件位于解锁状态时,所述限位套与所述第二锁定件抵接。In some embodiments, the locking assembly further includes a limiting sleeve, and when the locking assembly is in an unlocked state, the limiting sleeve abuts against the second locking member.
在一些实施例中,所述限位套设置在所述缓冲垫板上。In some embodiments, the limiting sleeve is arranged on the cushion plate.
在一些实施例中,所述第一传动组件包括旋转拨块,所述旋转拨块设置在所述智能解锁组件的动力输出端,当所述智能解锁组件的动力输出端输出智能解锁动作时,所述旋转拨块在第一方向旋转,并推动所述第一推动部使得所述转动片在解锁方向转动。In some embodiments, the first transmission assembly includes a rotary dial, and the rotary dial is arranged at the power output end of the intelligent unlocking assembly. When the power output end of the intelligent unlocking assembly outputs an intelligent unlocking action, The rotating dial rotates in a first direction, and pushes the first pushing part so that the rotating piece rotates in an unlocking direction.
在一些实施例中,所述第二传动组件包括转动拨片和第一连杆,其中,所述转动拨片设置在所述机械解锁组件的动力输出端,所述第一连杆沿第二方向可滑动的设置在所述安装支架,当所述机械解锁组件的动力输出端输出机械解锁动作时,所述转动拨片拨动所述第一连杆在第二方向移动,并拉动所述传动部使得所述转动片在解锁方向转动。In some embodiments, the second transmission assembly includes a rotating paddle and a first connecting rod, wherein the rotating paddle is arranged at the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly, and the first connecting rod is arranged along the second The direction is slidably arranged on the mounting bracket, and when the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the rotating paddle moves the first connecting rod to move in the second direction, and pulls the The transmission part makes the rotating piece rotate in the unlocking direction.
在一些实施例中,所述转动拨片包括固定在所述机械锁组件的动力输出端的第一固定部和与所述第一固定部偏心设置的凸起部;所述第一连杆包括依次连接的动力部、滑动部和拉动部,其中,所述动力部上设置有第一滑槽,所述凸起部可滑动的设置在所述第一滑槽;所述拉动部能够拉动所述第二推动部;所述滑动部和所述安装支架二者中一个设置有沿第二方向延伸的第二滑槽,所述滑动部和所述安装支架二者中的另一个设置有与所述第二滑槽相配合的多个导向件,多个导向件沿第二方向布置。In some embodiments, the rotating plectrum includes a first fixing portion fixed at the power output end of the mechanical lock assembly and a raised portion eccentrically arranged with the first fixing portion; the first connecting rod includes sequentially A connected power part, a sliding part and a pulling part, wherein the power part is provided with a first chute, and the protruding part is slidably arranged in the first chute; the pulling part can pull the The second pushing part; one of the sliding part and the mounting bracket is provided with a second chute extending along the second direction, and the other of the sliding part and the mounting bracket is provided with the second sliding groove. A plurality of guide pieces matched with the second chute, and the plurality of guide pieces are arranged along the second direction.
在一些实施例中,所述智能解锁组件可拆卸的设置在所述安装支架上。In some embodiments, the smart unlocking component is detachably arranged on the mounting bracket.
在一些实施例中,所述智能解锁组件包括驱动件、控制器和验证信息采集部件,其中,所述驱动件固定在所述安装支架上,当所述验证信息采集部件采集的解锁信息验证通过后,所述控制器控制所述驱动件输出智能解锁动作。In some embodiments, the intelligent unlocking component includes a driver, a controller, and a verification information collection component, wherein the driver is fixed on the mounting bracket, and when the unlock information collected by the verification information collection component passes the verification Afterwards, the controller controls the driver to output an intelligent unlocking action.
在一些实施例中,所述验证信息采集部件为键盘和/或生物采集部件。In some embodiments, the verification information collection component is a keyboard and/or a biometric collection component.
在一些实施例中,所述驱动件通过固定板可拆卸的安装在所述安装支架。In some embodiments, the driving member is detachably mounted on the mounting bracket through a fixing plate.
在一些实施例中,所述智能解锁组件还包括为所述智能解锁组件提供电源的电池仓,所述电池仓中电池为替换结构或者可充电结构。In some embodiments, the smart unlocking component further includes a battery compartment that provides power for the smart unlocking component, and the battery in the battery compartment is a replacement structure or a rechargeable structure.
在一些实施例中,所述智能解锁组件还包括通讯部件,所述通讯部件接收所述验证信息采集部件的解锁信息验证通过后,所述控制器控制所述驱动件输出智能解锁动作。In some embodiments, the smart unlocking component further includes a communication part, and after the communication part receives the verification of the unlocking information from the verification information collection part, the controller controls the driver to output a smart unlocking action.
在一些实施例中,机械解锁组件包括锁芯组件,所述锁芯组件包括安装部件、锁头和锁芯,其中,所述安装部件可拆卸的安装在所述安装支架上,所述锁头固定在所述安装部件上,所述锁芯位于所述锁头的内部,所述锁芯露出所述锁头的部分作为所述机械解锁组件的动力输出端。In some embodiments, the mechanical unlocking assembly includes a lock cylinder assembly, and the lock cylinder assembly includes a mounting part, a lock head and a lock cylinder, wherein the installation part is detachably mounted on the mounting bracket, and the lock head The lock core is fixed on the installation part, the lock core is located inside the lock head, and the part of the lock core exposed from the lock head is used as the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly.
在一些实施例中,所述安装支架包括顶板、侧板、第一支撑板和第二支撑板,其中,所述顶板和所述侧板呈角度连接,所述第一支撑板和第二支撑板相对设置在所述顶板和所述侧板的两端,所述顶板和所述侧板衔接的部位设置有容纳所述第一锁定件通过的锁定通道,且所述顶板、所述侧板、所述第一支撑板和所述第二支撑板围成安装所述智能解锁组件、所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件的安装空间。In some embodiments, the mounting bracket includes a top board, a side board, a first support board and a second support board, wherein the top board and the side board are connected at an angle, and the first support board and the second support board The plates are oppositely arranged at the two ends of the top plate and the side plate, and the joint part of the top plate and the side plate is provided with a locking channel for accommodating the passage of the first locking member, and the top plate, the side plate , the first support plate and the second support plate enclose an installation space for installing the intelligent unlocking component, the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component.
在一些实施例中,所述机械解锁组件设置在所述顶板。In some embodiments, the mechanical unlocking component is disposed on the top plate.
在一些实施例中,所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件设置在所述侧板,且所述锁定组件与所述锁定通道相对应。In some embodiments, the smart unlocking component and the locking component are arranged on the side panel, and the locking component corresponds to the locking channel.
在一些实施例中,所述安装支架还包括和电源适配的应急充电口。In some embodiments, the installation bracket further includes an emergency charging port compatible with the power supply.
在一些实施例中,所述安装支架还包括盖板,所述盖板至少一端可拆卸的与所述安装部件或者所述安装支架连接,且所述盖板能够覆盖所述机械解锁组件的锁孔和/或所述应急充电口。In some embodiments, the mounting bracket further includes a cover plate, at least one end of which is detachably connected to the mounting part or the mounting bracket, and the cover plate can cover the lock of the mechanical unlocking assembly hole and/or the emergency charging port.
在一些实施例中,所述两个可相对移动的部件包括箱体与门体,所述箱体和所述门体围成用于存储物品的内部隔室;所述门体具有所述第一锁定件;所述锁定装置设置在所述箱体内部,所述箱体和所述门体通过所述锁定装置与所述第一锁定件适配形成锁定。In some embodiments, the two relatively movable parts include a box body and a door body, the box body and the door body enclose an internal compartment for storing items; the door body has the first A locking piece; the locking device is arranged inside the box body, and the box body and the door body are locked by fitting with the first locking piece through the locking device.
在一些实施例中,所述两个可相对移动的部件为钣金、铝合金和/或塑胶加工而成。In some embodiments, the two relatively movable parts are made of sheet metal, aluminum alloy and/or plastic.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定装置包括传动输出件,所述传动输出件具有可传递开锁作用力的解锁输出端和开锁输出端;所述锁定组件包括相适配的转动片和第二锁定件,且两者能够分别在第一面内枢转;所述转动片具有传动部、第一施力部和止动部,所述第二锁定件具有第二施力部和第一锁舌,所述锁定组件被配置为:所述转动片位于关锁工作位时,所述第二锁定件的第一锁舌可与第一锁定件构建关锁限位副,且所述转动片的第一施力部与所述第二锁定件的所述第二施力部相抵形成锁扣限位副,以限制所述第二锁定件转动至开锁工作位;所述转动片的所述传动部与所述传动输出件的所述开锁输出端传动连接,以带动 所述转动片的所述第一施力部与所述第二锁定件的所述第二施力部脱离,切换至开锁工作位;转动片限位机构,包括锁扣限位挡板,所述锁扣限位挡板可沿第三方向滑动切换于解锁工作位和锁扣工作位,所述锁扣限位挡板具有止挡部和联动部,并配置为:所述锁扣限位挡板位于所述锁扣工作位时,其上的止挡部与所述转动片的止动部相抵形成止动限位副,以限制所述转动片转动至开锁工作位;所述锁扣限位挡板的联动部可与所述传动输出件的解锁输出端传动连接,以带动所述锁扣限位挡板的所述止挡部与所述转动片的止动部脱离,切换至解锁工作位;所述第三方向垂直于所述第一面。In some embodiments, the locking device includes a transmission output member, and the transmission output member has an unlocking output end and an unlocking output end capable of transmitting an unlocking force; the locking assembly includes a matching rotating piece and a second locking part, and both can pivot in the first plane respectively; the rotating piece has a transmission part, a first force application part and a stop part, and the second locking part has a second force application part and a first lock tongue , the locking assembly is configured such that: when the rotating piece is in the locking working position, the first bolt of the second locking piece can form a locking limit pair with the first locking piece, and the locking position of the rotating piece The first force application portion and the second force application portion of the second locking member are opposed to form a lock stopper to limit the rotation of the second locking member to the unlocking position; the transmission of the rotating piece part is in transmission connection with the unlocking output end of the transmission output member, so as to drive the first force applying part of the rotating piece to disengage from the second force applying part of the second locking member, and switch to unlocking Working position; the rotating piece limit mechanism includes a lock limit baffle, and the lock limit baffle can slide along the third direction to switch between the unlocking work position and the lock work position, and the lock limit baffle It has a stopper part and a linkage part, and is configured such that when the lock stopper is located at the locker working position, the stopper part on it abuts against the stopper part of the rotating piece to form a stop limiter Auxiliary, to limit the rotation of the rotating piece to the unlocking position; the linkage part of the lock limit baffle can be connected with the unlocking output end of the transmission output to drive the lock limit baffle The stopper part is disengaged from the stopper part of the rotating piece, and switched to the unlocking working position; the third direction is perpendicular to the first surface.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件还包括牵引件,分别与所述转动片和所述第二锁定件连接;并配置为:所述转动片转动至开锁工作位的过程中,所述牵引件可产生形变储备弹性变形能,并可在所述第一施力部与所述第二施力部脱离后释放所述弹性变形能,带动所述第二锁定件转动至开锁工作位。In some embodiments, the locking assembly further includes a traction member, which is respectively connected to the rotating piece and the second locking member; and is configured to: when the rotating piece rotates to the unlocking position, The member can generate deformation reserve elastic deformation energy, and can release the elastic deformation energy after the first force application part is separated from the second force application part, so as to drive the second locking member to rotate to the unlocking working position.
在一些实施例中,所述第一施力部包括内凹弧面和锁扣平面,且两者间圆弧过渡连接;所述第二施力部包括顶紧平面和外凸弧面,且两者间圆弧过渡连接;所述转动片位于关锁工作位时,通过所述锁扣平面和所述顶紧平面相抵形成所述锁扣限位副,所述转动片位于开锁工作位时,所述第一施力部的内凹弧面与所述第二施力部的外凸弧面接合适配。In some embodiments, the first force application part includes an inner concave arc surface and a locking plane, and the two are connected by an arc transition; the second force application part includes a tightening plane and an outer convex arc surface, and The two are connected by a circular arc transition; when the rotating piece is in the lock working position, the locking and locking pair is formed by the contact between the locking plane and the tightening plane, and when the rotating piece is in the unlocking working position , the concave arc surface of the first force application part is engaged with the convex arc surface of the second force application part.
在一些实施例中,所述止动部为止动平面,在与第一面平行的投影面内,所述转动片位于关锁工作位时,所述锁扣限位副施加在所述转动片上的作用力延长线位于所述转动片的枢转中心的旁侧,以限制所述转动片转动切换至开锁工作位。In some embodiments, the stop part is a stop plane, and in a projected plane parallel to the first plane, when the rotating piece is in the locked working position, the locking and limiting pairs are applied to the rotating piece The extension line of the active force is located on the side of the pivot center of the rotating piece, so as to limit the turning of the rotating piece to switch to the unlocking working position.
在一些实施例中,所述第二锁定件的本体开设有避让槽,所述避让槽配置在所述第一锁舌的内侧。In some embodiments, the body of the second locking member is provided with an avoidance groove, and the avoidance groove is arranged on the inner side of the first lock tongue.
在一些实施例中,所述牵引件为拉簧。In some embodiments, the traction member is a tension spring.
在一些实施例中,所述锁定装置还包括锁芯组件和驱动组件,所述传动输出件包括锁扣拨板和锁扣拨块;所述锁扣拨板与所述锁芯组件传动连接,且具有机械解锁输出端和机械开锁输出端;所述锁扣拨块与所述驱动组件传动连接,且具有电子解锁输出端和电子开锁输出端;相应地,所述锁扣板具有机械开锁传动部和电子开锁传动部,所述机械开锁传动部用于与所述机械开锁输出端传动连接,所述电子开锁传动部用于与所述电子开锁输出端传动连接;所述锁扣限位挡板具有机械解锁联动部和电子解锁联动部,所述机械解锁联动部用于与所述机械解锁输出端传动连接,所述电子解锁联动部用于与所述电子解锁输出端传动连接。In some embodiments, the locking device further includes a lock cylinder assembly and a drive assembly, and the transmission output member includes a lock dial and a lock dial; the lock dial is in transmission connection with the lock cylinder assembly, And it has a mechanical unlocking output end and a mechanical unlocking output end; the lock shifter is connected to the driving assembly in transmission, and has an electronic unlocking output end and an electronic unlocking output end; correspondingly, the striker plate has a mechanical unlocking transmission part and an electronic unlocking transmission part, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is used for transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking transmission part is used for transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end; the lock limit stop The board has a mechanical unlocking linkage part and an electronic unlocking linkage part, the mechanical unlocking linkage part is used for driving connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking linkage part is used for driving connection with the electronic unlocking output end.
在一些实施例中,在所述锁芯组件的带动下,所述锁扣拨板可沿第二方向滑动切换于开锁工作位和关锁工作位之间,所述锁扣拨板自开锁工作位滑动至关锁工作位的行程顺次包括解锁滑动行程和开锁滑动行程,并配置为:在所述解锁滑动行程,所述机械解锁联动部与所述机械解锁输出端传动连接;在所述开锁滑动行程,所述机械开锁传动部与所述机械开锁输出端传动连接;在驱动组件的带动下,所述锁扣拨块可转动切换于开锁工作位和关锁工作位之间,所述锁扣拨块自开锁工作位转动至关锁工作位的行程顺次包括解锁转动行程和开锁转动行程,并配置为:在所述解锁转动行程,所述电子解锁联动部与所述电子解锁输出端传动连接;在所述开锁转动行程,所述电子开锁传动部与所述电子开锁输出端传动连接。In some embodiments, driven by the lock cylinder assembly, the lock dial can be slid along the second direction to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the lock dial is self-unlocking. The stroke from the sliding position to the lock working position includes an unlocking sliding stroke and an unlocking sliding stroke in sequence, and is configured as follows: in the unlocking sliding stroke, the mechanical unlocking linkage part is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end; The unlocking sliding stroke, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end; driven by the drive assembly, the lock shift block can be rotated and switched between the unlocking working position and the locking working position. The stroke of the lock shift block from the unlocking working position to the locking working position includes an unlocking rotation stroke and an unlocking rotation stroke in sequence, and is configured such that: in the unlocking rotation stroke, the electronic unlocking linkage part and the electronic unlocking output end transmission connection; during the unlocking rotation stroke, the electronic unlocking transmission part is in transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end.
在一些实施例中,所述锁扣拨板包括压抵斜面和拨头部,所述压抵斜面朝向所述锁扣限位挡板设置以形成所述机械解锁输出端,所述拨头部沿第一方向延伸以形成所述机械开锁输出端,所述锁扣拨块包括导向倒角面和拨柱,所述导向倒角面朝向所述锁扣限位挡板设置以形成所述电子解锁输出端,所述拨柱沿第二方向延伸以形成所述电子开锁输出端;所述锁扣板包括挡筋和拨动内凹圆弧面,所述挡筋在第一面内延伸以形成机械开锁传动部,所述拨动内凹圆弧面朝向所述驱动组件设置以形成电子开锁传动部;所述锁扣限位挡板包括顶升导柱和顶升斜面,所述顶升导柱在第一面内延伸以形成所述机械解锁联动部,所述顶升斜面朝向所述驱动组件设置以形成所述电子解锁联动部。In some embodiments, the lock dial includes a pressing inclined surface and a toggle head, the pressing inclined surface is set toward the lock limit baffle to form the mechanical unlocking output end, and the toggle head Extending along the first direction to form the mechanical unlock output end, the lock shifter includes a guide chamfer surface and a dial column, the guide chamfer surface is set toward the lock limit baffle to form the electronic The unlocking output end, the shifting column extends along the second direction to form the electronic unlocking output end; the lock plate includes a retaining rib and a concave arc surface, and the retaining rib extends in the first surface to form the electronic unlocking output end. A mechanical unlocking transmission part is formed, and the concave arc surface of the toggle is set towards the drive assembly to form an electronic unlocking transmission part; the lock limit baffle includes a jacking guide column and a jacking slope, and the jacking The guide post extends in the first plane to form the mechanical unlocking linkage part, and the jacking slope is arranged toward the driving assembly to form the electronic unlocking linkage part.
在一些实施例中,所述限位套还包括复位扭簧、导向柱和定位柱,所述导向柱和所述定位柱固定设置,所述锁扣限位挡板的板体具有沿第三方向开设的导向槽和定位槽,且其在第四方向的两侧板沿分别具有承托部;所述导向柱插装在所述导向槽中形成滑动适配副,所述定位柱插装在所述定位槽中且其端部伸出于所述定位槽,所述复位扭簧的簧体套装在所述定位柱的端部,且其两端侧的簧体分别搭抵在两个所述承托部上,并配置为:所述锁扣限位挡板滑动切换至解锁工作位时,所述复位扭簧产生形变并储备弹性变形能,以提供所述锁扣限位挡板的复位作用力。In some embodiments, the limit sleeve further includes a return torsion spring, a guide column and a positioning column, the guide column and the positioning column are fixedly arranged, and the plate body of the locking limit baffle has a The guide groove and positioning groove opened in the direction, and the two side plates in the fourth direction have supporting parts respectively; the guide column is inserted into the guide groove to form a sliding adapter pair, and the positioning column is inserted In the positioning groove and its end protrudes from the positioning groove, the spring body of the reset torsion spring is sleeved on the end of the positioning column, and the spring bodies on both ends of the spring are respectively abutted against two On the supporting part, it is configured such that when the lock limit baffle slides to switch to the unlocking position, the return torsion spring deforms and reserves elastic deformation energy to provide the lock limit baffle reset force.
在一些实施例中,所述连接件包括开合装置,所述两个可相对移动的部件通过所述开合装置枢转连接,所述开合装置包括:枢转连接的第一合页和第二合页;设置在所述第一合页和所述第二合页之间的第一弹性件,所述第一弹性件能够驱动所述第一合页和/或所述第二合页在打开方向或者关闭方向转动;以及缓冲结构,所述缓冲结构设置于所述第一合页的外侧面的全部或部分,且所述缓冲结构延伸出所述第一合页的外侧面的部分能够与所述第二合页的外侧面抵接并产生可恢复的形变。In some embodiments, the connecting member includes an opening and closing device, and the two relatively movable parts are pivotally connected through the opening and closing device, and the opening and closing device includes: a first hinge that is pivotally connected and The second hinge; a first elastic member disposed between the first hinge and the second hinge, the first elastic member can drive the first hinge and/or the second hinge The page rotates in the opening direction or the closing direction; and a buffer structure, the buffer structure is arranged on all or part of the outer surface of the first hinge, and the buffer structure extends out of the outer surface of the first hinge The part can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge and produce recoverable deformation.
在一些实施例中,所述缓冲结构包括第二固定部和第三限位部,其中,所述第二固定部安装在所述第一合页上,所述第三限位部自所述第二固定部向外延伸,并能够与所述第二合页的外侧面抵接并产生 可恢复的形变。In some embodiments, the buffer structure includes a second fixing part and a third limiting part, wherein the second fixing part is installed on the first hinge, and the third limiting part is separated from the The second fixing part extends outwards, and can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge and produce recoverable deformation.
在一些实施例中,所述第三限位部的厚度大于所述第二固定部的厚度。In some embodiments, the thickness of the third limiting portion is greater than the thickness of the second fixing portion.
在一些实施例中,所述第三限位部与所述第二固定部衔接处的内侧面与所述第一合页和所述第二合页的衔接处的外侧面贴合。In some embodiments, the inner surface of the junction of the third limiting portion and the second fixing portion is in contact with the outer surface of the junction of the first hinge and the second hinge.
在一些实施例中,所述第三限位部与所述第二固定部衔接处的内侧面与所述第一合页和所述第二合页的衔接处的外侧面贴合。所述第二固定部靠近所述第一合页的边缘设置有包裹部。In some embodiments, the inner surface of the junction of the third limiting portion and the second fixing portion is in contact with the outer surface of the junction of the first hinge and the second hinge. A wrapping part is provided on the edge of the second fixing part close to the first hinge.
在一些实施例中,所述缓冲结构为弹性材料加工而成,以使得所述缓冲结构与所述第二合页抵接时产生形变,并在抵接消失后逐渐恢复原状。In some embodiments, the cushioning structure is made of elastic material, so that the cushioning structure deforms when contacting the second hinge, and gradually recovers to its original shape after the contact disappears.
在一些实施例中,所述第一合页和所述第二合页通过转轴枢转连接,所述第一弹性件为套设在所述转轴上的至少一个扭簧,所述第一弹性件的第一端与所述第一合页的内侧面抵接,所述第一弹性件的第二端与所述第二合页的内侧面抵接。In some embodiments, the first hinge and the second hinge are pivotally connected by a rotating shaft, the first elastic member is at least one torsion spring sleeved on the rotating shaft, and the first elastic The first end of the first elastic member abuts against the inner surface of the first hinge, and the second end of the first elastic member abuts against the inner surface of the second hinge.
在一些实施例中,所述第一合页具有套设在所述转轴上的第一旋转套,所述第二合页具有套设在所述转轴上的第二旋转套。In some embodiments, the first hinge has a first rotating sleeve sleeved on the rotating shaft, and the second hinge has a second rotating sleeve sleeved on the rotating shaft.
在一些实施例中,所述第一合页包括第一安装部,和自所述第一安装部呈第一夹角弯折的第一弯折部,所述第一旋转套设置在所述第一弯折部上。In some embodiments, the first hinge includes a first mounting portion, and a first bending portion bent from the first mounting portion at a first angle, and the first rotating sleeve is disposed on the on the first bend.
在一些实施例中,所述第二合页包括第二安装部,和自所述第二安装部呈第二夹角弯折的第二弯折部,所述第二旋转套设置在所述第二弯折部上。In some embodiments, the second hinge includes a second installation part, and a second bending part bent from the second installation part at a second angle, and the second rotating sleeve is arranged on the on the second bend.
在一些实施例中,所述可闭合设备为智能锁盒,所述两个可相对移动的部件包括第一壳体组件,以及能够与所述第一壳体组件共同围成容纳腔的第二壳体组件;所述锁定装置包括智能锁,所述智能锁设置在所述第二壳体组件上,用于所述第二壳体组件和所述第一壳体组件之间的解锁和锁定;其中,所述智能锁具有设置在所述第二壳体组件上的用于输入解锁密码的按键,以及设置在所述第二壳体组件上的电性接口,且所述电性接口在所述第二壳体组件内被隔离件隔离。In some embodiments, the closable device is an intelligent lock box, and the two relatively movable parts include a first housing component, and a second housing component that can jointly enclose an accommodating cavity with the first housing component. Housing assembly; the locking device includes an intelligent lock, and the intelligent lock is arranged on the second housing assembly for unlocking and locking between the second housing assembly and the first housing assembly ; Wherein, the smart lock has a key set on the second housing component for inputting the unlock password, and an electrical interface set on the second housing component, and the electrical interface is in The inside of the second housing assembly is isolated by a spacer.
在一些实施例中,所述第一壳体组件上设置有电动机,所述智能锁包括驱动组件和连接在所述驱动组件上的第二锁舌,所述第二锁舌能够在所述驱动组件的驱动下进出所述电动机以实现所述第一壳体组件和所述第二壳体组件的锁定和解锁。In some embodiments, the first housing assembly is provided with a motor, the smart lock includes a driving assembly and a second deadbolt connected to the driving assembly, and the second deadbolt can Driven by the assembly, the motor enters and exits to realize the locking and unlocking of the first housing assembly and the second housing assembly.
在一些实施例中,所述驱动组件包括:电动机;与所述电动机的输出轴连接的传动件;与所述传动件连接并在所述传动件的带动下往复移动的移动件,所述第二锁舌设置在所述移动件上;其中,所述电动机通过驱动所述移动件向远离所述电动机的方向移动,以使所述第二锁舌能够进入到所述电动机中;并且,所述电动机通过驱动所述移动件向靠近所述电动机的方向移动,以使所述第二锁舌能够从所述电动机中移出。In some embodiments, the drive assembly includes: a motor; a transmission member connected to the output shaft of the motor; a moving member connected to the transmission member and reciprocatingly driven by the transmission member, the first Two lock tongues are arranged on the moving part; wherein, the motor drives the moving part to move away from the motor, so that the second lock tongue can enter the motor; and, the The electric motor drives the moving member to move toward the electric motor, so that the second lock tongue can be moved out of the electric motor.
在一些实施例中,所述传动件为螺杆,所述移动件套设在所述螺杆上并与所述螺杆螺纹连接,且所述移动件在所述第二壳体组件的限位下仅能够沿所述螺杆的轴向往复移动;所述电动机通过带动所述螺杆正向转动使所述移动件远离所述电动机,并通过带动所述螺杆反向转动使所述移动件靠近所述电动机。In some embodiments, the transmission part is a screw rod, the moving part is sleeved on the screw rod and threadedly connected with the screw rod, and the moving part only Can reciprocate along the axial direction of the screw; the motor drives the screw to rotate forward to make the moving part away from the motor, and drives the screw to rotate in reverse to make the moving part close to the motor .
在一些实施例中,所述第二锁舌通过第二连杆滑动的设置在所述移动件上,所述第二连杆的滑动方向与所述移动件的移动方向相同,并且所述移动件上设置有第二弹性件,所述第二弹性件在所述第二锁舌向所述移动件靠近时被所述第二连杆压缩。In some embodiments, the second locking tongue is slidably arranged on the moving part through the second connecting rod, the sliding direction of the second connecting rod is the same as the moving direction of the moving part, and the moving A second elastic member is arranged on the member, and the second elastic member is compressed by the second connecting rod when the second lock tongue approaches the moving member.
在一些实施例中,所述智能锁包括检测组件,所述检测组件包括:相对于所述电动机固定设置的检测件;连接在所述移动件上并随所述移动件移动的随动件,所述检测件通过检测所述随动件的位置能够得到所述第二锁舌所处的位置。In some embodiments, the smart lock includes a detection component, and the detection component includes: a detection part fixedly arranged relative to the motor; a follower connected to the moving part and moving with the moving part, The detection member can obtain the position of the second lock tongue by detecting the position of the follower.
在一些实施例中,所述检测件具有接触件,所述随动件上开设有接触槽,所述接触件位于所述接触槽中并通过与所述接触槽的不同侧壁接触使得所述检测件能够测得所述第二锁舌是否位于所述电动机中。In some embodiments, the detection element has a contact element, and a contact groove is opened on the follower element, and the contact element is located in the contact groove and makes the contact element contact with different side walls of the contact groove. The detecting member is capable of detecting whether the second locking bolt is located in the electric motor.
在一些实施例中,所述智能锁包括设置在所述第二壳体组件上并与所述按键和所述电性接口电连接的控制组件,所述驱动组件和所述检测件设置在所述控制组件上并与所述控制组件电连接。In some embodiments, the smart lock includes a control component disposed on the second housing component and electrically connected to the button and the electrical interface, the driving component and the detection element are disposed on the and electrically connected to the control assembly.
在一些实施例中,所述智能锁包括生物信息识别件,所述生物信息识别件与所述控制组件电连接,并通过与所述控制组件配合实现对携带生物信息的控制指令的验证。In some embodiments, the smart lock includes a biological information identification part, the biological information identification part is electrically connected to the control component, and cooperates with the control component to realize the verification of the control command carrying the biological information.
在一些实施例中,所述生物信息识别件包括指纹识别件、人脸识别件、指静脉识别件和掌纹识别件中的至少一个。In some embodiments, the biological information identification includes at least one of a fingerprint identification, a face identification, a finger vein identification and a palmprint identification.
在一些实施例中,所述控制组件包括能够与电子设备通信连接的无线通信模块,以使所述电子设备能够控制所述第二锁舌从所述电动机中移出。In some embodiments, the control assembly includes a wireless communication module communicatively coupled with an electronic device to enable the electronic device to control the removal of the second deadbolt from the motor.
在一些实施例中,所述第二壳体组件包括:外侧壳体,所述按键和所述生物信息识别件设置在所述外侧壳体上;设置有安装槽的安装板,所述第二锁舌、所述驱动组件、所述检测组件和所述控制组件均 位于所述安装槽内;与所述安装板连接并覆盖所述控制组件以将所述控制组件固定在所述安装板上的固定盖板;与所述外侧壳体连接,以将所述安装板、所述第二锁舌、所述驱动组件、所述检测组件、所述控制组件和所述固定盖板容置在所述第二壳体组件内的内侧壳体。In some embodiments, the second housing assembly includes: an outer housing on which the button and the biometric identification member are disposed; a mounting plate provided with a mounting groove, and the second The deadbolt, the drive assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly are all located in the installation groove; they are connected with the installation board and cover the control assembly to fix the control assembly on the installation board a fixed cover plate; connected with the outer shell to accommodate the installation plate, the second lock tongue, the drive assembly, the detection assembly, the control assembly and the fixed cover plate an inner housing within the second housing assembly.
在一些实施例中,所述电动机为凸出所述第一壳体组件设置的锁扣,所述内侧壳体上开设有允许所述锁扣穿过的通孔。In some embodiments, the motor is a lock provided protruding from the first housing assembly, and the inner housing is provided with a through hole allowing the lock to pass through.
在一些实施例中,所述第一壳体组件上设置有铰链,所述第二壳体组件通过所述铰链与所述第一壳体组件转动连接,并通过相对于所述第一壳体组件转动实现所述容纳腔的开闭。In some embodiments, the first housing component is provided with a hinge, the second housing component is rotatably connected to the first housing component through the hinge, and The rotation of the component realizes the opening and closing of the accommodating cavity.
在一些实施例中,所述可闭合设备为智能锁盒,所述两个可相对移动的部件可以包括具有存储空间的第一壳体组件,以及能够与所述第一壳体组件相互对合并锁闭的第二壳体组件;所述锁定装置包括智能锁,所述智能锁设置在所述第二壳体组件上,所述第二壳体组件包括外侧壳体和安装板,所述智能锁包括设置在所述外侧壳体与所述安装板之间的驱动组件以及由所述驱动组件驱动的第二锁舌,所述第一壳体组件在接近竖向上边沿的位置设有用于与所述第二锁舌相配合的锁扣,所述外侧壳体内设有用于分散冲击力的防敲装置,所述防敲装置位于所述外侧壳体的顶端内侧。In some embodiments, the closable device is an intelligent lock box, and the two relatively movable parts may include a first housing component having a storage space, and can be combined with the first housing component Locked second housing assembly; the locking device includes a smart lock, the smart lock is arranged on the second housing assembly, the second housing assembly includes an outer housing and a mounting plate, the smart The lock includes a driving assembly arranged between the outer casing and the mounting plate and a second deadbolt driven by the driving assembly, and the first casing assembly is provided with a The lock buckle matched with the second lock tongue, an anti-knock device for dispersing impact force is provided inside the outer casing, and the anti-knock device is located inside the top end of the outer casing.
在一些实施例中,所述防敲装置包括安装块和散振销,所述安装块设有竖向的安装孔,所述散振销的底端插入所述安装孔,所述散振销的顶端伸出所述安装孔,所述安装孔内设有套装在所述散振销上的阻尼弹簧,以弹性支撑所述散振销。In some embodiments, the anti-knock device includes a mounting block and a vibration-dissipating pin, the mounting block is provided with a vertical mounting hole, the bottom end of the vibration-dissipating pin is inserted into the mounting hole, and the vibration-dissipating pin The top end of the top protrudes from the mounting hole, and a damping spring fitted on the vibration-scattering pin is provided in the mounting hole to elastically support the vibration-scattering pin.
在一些实施例中,所述散振销呈“T”字形,所述阻尼弹簧的顶端支撑于所述散振销的台阶部位,所述阻尼弹簧的底端支撑于所述安装孔的底部。In some embodiments, the vibration dissipating pin is in the shape of a "T", the top end of the damping spring is supported on the stepped portion of the vibration dissipating pin, and the bottom end of the damping spring is supported on the bottom of the installation hole.
在一些实施例中,所述安装块上设有左右对称的第一安装孔和第二安装孔,所述第一安装孔内设有第一散振销和第一阻尼弹簧,所述第二安装孔内设有第二散振销和第二阻尼弹簧。In some embodiments, the mounting block is provided with a left-right symmetrical first mounting hole and a second mounting hole, the first mounting hole is provided with a first vibration-dissipating pin and a first damping spring, and the second A second vibration-dissipating pin and a second damping spring are arranged in the mounting hole.
在一些实施例中,所述安装块的底部设有能够在锁紧状态下能够抵接于所述第二锁舌上端的凸出部,所述凸出部在竖直方向上与所述散振销相对应。In some embodiments, the bottom of the mounting block is provided with a protruding portion capable of abutting against the upper end of the second lock tongue in a locked state, and the protruding portion is vertically connected to the scattered Vibration pin corresponding.
在一些实施例中,所述第二锁舌的尾部带有向下延伸的锁柄。In some embodiments, the tail of the second lock tongue has a lock handle extending downward.
在一些实施例中,所述第二锁舌的主体部分呈块状结构,其上端为斜面形状。In some embodiments, the main body of the second lock tongue is in the shape of a block, and its upper end is in the shape of a bevel.
在一些实施例中,所述锁扣为垂直于所述第一壳体组件扣合面设置的“U”形。In some embodiments, the lock is in a "U" shape perpendicular to the fastening surface of the first housing component.
在一些实施例中,所述第一壳体组件的顶部设有锁梁。In some embodiments, the top of the first housing component is provided with a locking beam.
在一些实施例中,所述驱动组件包括电动机、电机压块、移动件以及锁舌弹簧,所述电动机由所述电机压块定位于所述外侧壳体,所述移动件与所述电动机的动力输出端传动连接并能够在所述电动机的带动下沿竖直方向移动,所述锁舌弹簧设于所述移动件与所述第二锁舌之间。In some embodiments, the drive assembly includes a motor, a motor pressing block, a moving part and a latch spring, the motor is positioned on the outer casing by the motor pressing block, and the moving part is connected to the motor. The power output end is transmission-connected and can move vertically under the drive of the motor, and the lock tongue spring is arranged between the moving part and the second lock tongue.
本说明书实施例之一提供一种索引信息管理方法,用于对如上述任一项所述的可闭合设备进行索引信息管理,其中,所述方法包括:获取用户访问物品管理区域的请求,所述物品管理区域至少由所述两个可相对移动的部件合围形成;基于所述访问请求,对所述用户的身份进行安全验证,并生成访问信息,所述物品管理区域为可闭合空间;获取所述受信用户访问期间所述物品管理区域的物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息;基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定。One of the embodiments of this specification provides an index information management method, which is used for index information management of the closeable device as described in any one of the above, wherein the method includes: acquiring a user's request for accessing the item management area, and the The item management area is at least surrounded by the two relatively movable parts; based on the access request, the identity of the user is safely verified, and access information is generated, and the item management area is a closable space; The item information of the item management area and/or the access information of the item during the access of the trusted user; based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, determine index information, the index information at least Also determined based on the access information.
在一些实施例中,所述基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定包括:在未检测到已创建的索引信息时,基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,创建所述索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息和预设规则创建。In some embodiments, the determining index information based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, and determining the index information based at least on the access information includes: when the created index is not detected When information is provided, the index information is created based on the item information and/or access information of the item, and the index information is created based at least on the access information and preset rules.
在一些实施例中,所述基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定还包括:在检测到已创建的索引信息时,基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,更新所述索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息更新。In some embodiments, the determining index information based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, the determining of the index information based at least on the access information further includes: when the created index is detected information, the index information is updated based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, and the index information is at least updated based on the access information.
在一些实施例中,所述方法还包括:基于所述索引信息进行查询显示。In some embodiments, the method further includes: performing query display based on the index information.
在一些实施例中,所述获取所述受信用户访问期间所述物品管理区域的物品信息和/或物品的存取信息包括:获取所述物品管理区域的探测信息;基于所述探测信息,确定所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息。In some embodiments, the acquiring item information and/or item access information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit includes: acquiring detection information of the item management area; based on the detection information, determining The item information and/or the access information of the item.
在一些实施例中,所述物品信息至少包括物品的属性和/或物品的价值。In some embodiments, the item information includes at least the attribute of the item and/or the value of the item.
在一些实施例中,所述探测信息通过传感器采集获得,所述传感器包括图像传感器、激光传感器、红外传感器、超声波传感器以及压力传感器中的至少一种。In some embodiments, the detection information is collected by a sensor, and the sensor includes at least one of an image sensor, a laser sensor, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, and a pressure sensor.
在一些实施例中,在所述基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息之前,所述方法还包括:至少基于所述访问信息和/或所述探测信息,确定物品的权属信息。In some embodiments, before determining the index information based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, the method further includes: at least based on the access information and/or the detection information, Determine the ownership information of the item.
在一些实施例中,所述至少基于所述访问信息和/或所述探测信息,确定物品的权属信息进一步包括:基于所述访问信息和所述探测信息,确定存入物品的权属信息。In some embodiments, said determining the ownership information of the item based at least on the access information and/or the detection information further comprises: determining the ownership information of the deposited item based on the access information and the detection information .
在一些实施例中,所述至少基于所述访问信息和/或所述探测信息,确定物品的权属信息进一步包括:获取所述物品管理区域内物品的历史权属信息;基于所述探测信息和所述历史权属信息,确定取出物品的权属信息。In some embodiments, at least based on the access information and/or the detection information, determining the ownership information of the item further includes: obtaining the historical ownership information of the item in the item management area; based on the detection information and the historical ownership information to determine the ownership information of the retrieved item.
在一些实施例中,所述索引信息还基于所述权属信息确定。In some embodiments, the index information is also determined based on the ownership information.
在一些实施例中,所述访问请求携带与所述用户的身份相对应的用户信息;所述对所述用户的身份进行安全验证包括:基于所述用户的用户信息判断所述用户是否为受信用户,在判定结果为否时发出警报信息。In some embodiments, the access request carries user information corresponding to the identity of the user; the security verification of the identity of the user includes: judging whether the user is trusted based on the user information of the user The user sends an alert message when the judgment result is negative.
本说明书实施例之一提出了一种索引信息管理系统,所述系统包括:安全模块,被配置为:获取用户访问物品管理区域的请求;基于所述访问请求,对所述用户的身份进行安全验证,并生成访问信息,所述物品管理区域为可闭合空间;以及管理模块,被配置为:获取所述受信用户访问期间所述物品管理区域的物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息;基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定。One of the embodiments of this specification proposes an index information management system, the system includes: a security module configured to: obtain a user's request for accessing an item management area; based on the access request, perform security on the user's identity Verifying and generating access information, the item management area is a closable space; and a management module configured to: acquire item information of the item management area and/or access information of the item during the trusted user's visit ; Based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, determine index information, the index information is determined based at least on the access information.
本说明书实施例之一提出了一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,其中,所述程序被处理器执行时实现如第一方面中任一实现方式描述的方法。One of the embodiments of the present specification provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, wherein, when the program is executed by a processor, the method described in any implementation manner in the first aspect is implemented.
本说明书实施例之一提出了一种处理器,所述处理器用于运行程序,其中,所述程序运行时实现如上述中任一实现方式描述的方法。One of the embodiments of this specification provides a processor, where the processor is configured to run a program, where the program implements the method described in any of the above implementation manners when running.
本说明书实施例之一提出了一种电子设备,包括:一个或多个处理器;存储装置,其上存储有一个或多个程序;当所述一个或多个程序被所述一个或多个处理器执行时,使得所述一个或多个处理器实现第一方面中任一实现方式描述的方法。One of the embodiments of this specification proposes an electronic device, including: one or more processors; a storage device, on which one or more programs are stored; when the one or more programs are used by the one or more When the processors are executed, the one or more processors are made to implement the method described in any implementation manner in the first aspect.
本说明书将以示例性实施例的方式进一步说明,这些示例性实施例将通过附图进行详细描述。这些实施例并非限制性的,在这些实施例中,相同的编号表示相同的结构,其中:This specification will be further illustrated by means of exemplary embodiments, which will be described in detail with the accompanying drawings. These examples are non-limiting, and in these examples, the same number indicates the same structure, wherein:
图1是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性可闭合设备的结构示意图;Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an exemplary closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图2是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的可闭合设备的示例性结构示意图;Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary structure of a closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图3是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的立体图;Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图4是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的爆炸图;Fig. 4 is an exploded view of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图5是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件的立体图;Fig. 5 is a perspective view of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图6是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置处于锁定状态的主视结构示意图;Fig. 6 is a schematic front structural view of a locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图7是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置处于锁定状态的仰视结构示意图;Fig. 7 is a schematic bottom view of the locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图8是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置处于解锁状态的主视结构示意图;Fig. 8 is a schematic front view of a locking device in an unlocked state according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图9是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置处于解锁状态的仰视结构示意图;Fig. 9 is a schematic bottom view of the locking device in an unlocked state according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图10是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的另一立体图;Fig. 10 is another perspective view of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图11是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的智能解锁组件的结构示意图;Fig. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an intelligent unlocking component according to some embodiments of this specification;
图12是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件的结构示意图;Fig. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图13是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件关锁时的状态示意图;Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of the locked state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图14是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件解锁时的状态示意图;Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of the unlocking state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图15是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁扣限位挡板的结构示意图;Fig. 15 is a schematic structural view of a lock and limit baffle according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图16是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的机械解锁过程示意图;Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of the mechanical unlocking process of the locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图17是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的智能解锁过程示意图;Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of an intelligent unlocking process of a locking device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图18是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的开合结构的立体图;Fig. 18 is a perspective view of an opening and closing structure according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图19是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的开合结构的爆炸图;Fig. 19 is an exploded view of an opening and closing structure according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图20是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的缓冲结构的主视图;Fig. 20 is a front view of a buffer structure according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图21是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的开合结构处于关闭状态的主视图;Fig. 21 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in a closed state according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图22是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的开合结构处于打开状态的主视图;Fig. 22 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图23是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的智能锁盒处于闭合状态时的结构示意图;Fig. 23 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in a closed state according to some embodiments of this specification;
图24是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的智能锁盒处于打开状态时的结构示意图;Fig. 24 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图25是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的第二壳体组件的分解图;Figure 25 is an exploded view of a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present description;
图26是图24的剖视图;Figure 26 is a sectional view of Figure 24;
图27是图25的剖视图;Figure 27 is a sectional view of Figure 25;
图28是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的接触件与接触槽的左侧壁接触的结构示意图;Fig. 28 is a schematic structural view of a contact member in contact with the left side wall of a contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图29是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的接触件与接触槽的左侧壁和右侧壁均不接触的结构示意 图;Fig. 29 is a structural schematic diagram showing that the contact element is not in contact with the left side wall and the right side wall of the contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图30是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的接触件与接触槽的右侧壁接触的结构示意图;Fig. 30 is a schematic structural view of a contact member in contact with a right side wall of a contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图31是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的电性接口和隔离件在第二壳体组件上设置的结构示意图;Fig. 31 is a schematic structural view of an electrical interface and an isolator disposed on a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图32是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定的控制逻辑图;Fig. 32 is a control logic diagram of locking according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图33是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的解锁的控制逻辑图;Fig. 33 is a control logic diagram of unlocking according to some embodiments of this specification;
图34是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一示例性智能锁盒在处于打开状态下的结构示意图;Fig. 34 is a schematic structural view of another exemplary smart lock box in an open state according to some embodiments of this specification;
图35是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的第二壳体组件的爆炸图;Figure 35 is an exploded view of a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图36是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的第二壳体组件的剖视图;36 is a cross-sectional view of a second housing assembly according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图37是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的防敲装置的分解结构示意图;Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of an anti-knock device according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图38是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性索引信息管理系统的应用场景示意图;Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification;
图39是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性索引信息管理装置的框图;Fig. 39 is a block diagram of an exemplary index information management device according to some embodiments of this specification;
图40是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性索引信息管理系统的框图;Fig. 40 is a block diagram of an exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图41是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一示例性索引信息管理系统的框图;Fig. 41 is a block diagram of another exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification;
图42是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的索引信息管理的示例性流程图;Fig. 42 is an exemplary flowchart of index information management according to some embodiments of this specification;
图43是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定物品的权属信息的示例性流程图;Fig. 43 is an exemplary flowchart of determining the ownership information of an item according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图44是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的索引信息管理系统的示例性应用场景图。Fig. 44 is an exemplary application scenario diagram of the index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification.
附图标记说明:100、可闭合设备;110、第一部件;120、连接件;130、第二部件;140、锁定装置;300、锁定装置;302、第一锁定件;310、安装支架;311、顶板;312、侧板;313、第一支撑板;314、第二支撑板;315、锁定通道;320、锁定组件;321、转动片;321a、第一旋转中心;321b、第一牵引点;3211、第一推动部;3212、第二推动部;3213、第一施力部;3214、第一限位部;322、第二锁定件;322a、第二旋转中心;322b、第二牵引点;3221、第一锁舌;3222、第二施力部;3223、第二限位部;323、牵引件;324、缓冲垫板;325、限位套;330、智能解锁组件;331、驱动件;332、固定板;340、机械解锁组件;341、锁头;342、锁芯;342a、锁孔;343、安装部件;350、第一传动组件;351、旋转拨块;360、第二传动组件;361、转动拨片;3611、固定部;3612、凸起部;362、第一连杆;3621、动力部;3621a、第一滑槽;3622、滑动部;3622a、第二滑槽;3623、拉动部;1000、锁定装置;1002、第一锁定件;1010、塑胶底座;1011、防撞套;1020、锁定组件;1021、转动片;1021a、第一旋转中心;10213、第一施力部;10213-1、内凹弧面;10213-2、锁扣平面;10215、止动部;10216、拨动内凹圆弧面;10217、挡筋;1022、第二锁定件;1022a、第二旋转中心;10221、第一锁舌;10222、第二施力部;10222-1、顶紧平面;10222-2、外凸弧面;10223、避让槽;10224、限位结构;1023、牵引件;1030、智能解锁组件;1033、锁扣拨块;10331、拨柱;10332、导向倒角面;1040、机械解锁组件;1040a、锁芯组件;1040a-1、开锁拨柱;1040a-2、导向螺柱;1040b、驱动组件;1044、锁扣拨板;10441、第一长槽;10442、第二长槽;10443、压抵斜面;10444、拨头部;1070、锁扣限位挡板;1071、顶升导柱;1072、止挡部;1073、顶升斜面;1074、导向槽;1075、定位槽;1076、承托部;1080、导向柱;1085、复位扭簧;1090、定位柱;1095、支撑座;1800、开合结构;1801、第一合页;18011、第一安装部;18012、第一弯折部;18013、第一旋转套;1802、第二合页;18021、第二安装部;18022、第二弯折部;18023、第二旋转套;1803、第一弹性件;1804、缓冲结构;18041、第二固定部;18042、第三限位部;18043、包裹部;1805、转轴;2300、可闭合设备;2301、第一壳体组件;2302、第二壳体组件;23021、外侧壳体;23022、安装板;23023、固定盖板;23024、内侧壳体;2303、按键;2304、电性接口;2305、隔离件;2306、锁定结构;2307、第二锁舌;2308、电动机;2309、传动件;2310、移动件;2311、连杆;2312、第二弹性件;2313、检测件;2314、检测件;2315、随动件;2316、接触槽;2317、控制组件;2318、铰链;2319、挂件;2320、通孔;3400、智能锁盒;3401、第一壳体组件;3402、第二壳体组件;34021、外侧壳体;34022、安装板;3404、驱动组件;34041、电动机;34042、电机压块;34043、移动件;34044、锁舌弹簧;3405、锁扣支架;3406、防敲装置;34061、安装块;340611、安装孔;340612、凸出部;34062、散振销;34063、阻尼弹簧;3407、第二锁舌;3419、锁梁。Explanation of reference numerals: 100, closeable device; 110, first component; 120, connector; 130, second component; 140, locking device; 300, locking device; 302, first locking member; 310, mounting bracket; 311, top plate; 312, side plate; 313, first support plate; 314, second support plate; 315, locking channel; 320, locking assembly; 321, rotating piece; 321a, first rotation center; 321b, first traction 3211, the first push part; 3212, the second push part; 3213, the first force application part; 3214, the first limit part; 322, the second locking part; 322a, the second rotation center; 322b, the second Traction point; 3221, first lock bolt; 3222, second force application part; 3223, second limit part; 323, traction part; 324, cushion plate; 325, limit sleeve; 330, intelligent unlocking component; 331 , driving part; 332, fixed plate; 340, mechanical unlocking component; 341, lock head; 342, lock cylinder; 342a, lock hole; 343, installation part; 350, first transmission component; 361, rotating plectrum; 3611, fixed part; 3612, raised part; 362, first connecting rod; 3621, power part; 3621a, first chute; 3622, sliding part; 3622a, second chute; 3623, pulling part; 1000, locking device; 1002, first locking member; 1010, plastic base; 1011, anti-collision cover; 1020, locking assembly; 10213-1, concave arc surface; 10213-2, locking plane; 10215, stopper; 10216, toggle concave arc surface; 10217, retaining rib; 1022, second locking piece ; 1022a, the second rotation center; 10221, the first lock bolt; 10222, the second force application part; 10222-1, the top tight plane; 10222-2, the convex arc surface; ;1023, traction piece; 1030, intelligent unlocking component; 1033, lock dial block; 10331, dial column; 10332, guiding chamfer surface; ; 1040a-2, guide stud; 1040b, drive assembly; 1044, lock dial; 10441, the first long slot; 10442, the second long slot; Buckle limit baffle; 1071, jacking guide column; 1072, stopper; 1073, jacking slope; 1074, guide groove; 1075, positioning groove; 1076, supporting part; 1080, guide column; Spring; 1090, positioning column; 1095, support seat; 1800, opening and closing structure; 1 801, the first hinge; 18011, the first installation part; 18012, the first bending part; 18013, the first rotating sleeve; 1802, the second hinge; 18021, the second installation part; 18022, the second bending part ; 18023, the second rotating sleeve; 1803, the first elastic member; 1804, the buffer structure; 18041, the second fixing part; 18042, the third limiting part; 18043, the wrapping part; 1805, the rotating shaft; 2301. First housing assembly; 2302. Second housing assembly; 23021. Outer housing; 23022. Mounting plate; 23023. Fixed cover; 23024. Inner housing; 2303. Button; 2304. Electrical interface; 2305 , spacer; 2306, locking structure; 2307, second bolt; 2308, motor; 2309, transmission part; 2310, moving part; 2311, connecting rod; 2312, second elastic part; 2313, detection part; 2314, detection 2315, follower; 2316, contact groove; 2317, control assembly; 2318, hinge; 2319, pendant; 2320, through hole; 3400, intelligent lock box; 3401, first shell assembly; 3402, second shell Body assembly; 34021, outer casing; 34022, mounting plate; 3404, drive assembly; 34041, motor; 34042, motor press block; 34043, moving parts; Device; 34061, mounting block; 340611, mounting hole; 340612, protrusion; 34062, loose vibration pin; 34063, damping spring; 3407, second deadbolt; 3419, lock beam.
为了更清楚地说明本说明书实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单的介绍。显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本说明书的一些示例或实施例,对于本领域的普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图将本说明书应用于其它类似情景。除非从语言环境中显而易见或另做说明,图中相同标号代表相同结构或操作。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present specification, the following briefly introduces the drawings that need to be used in the description of the embodiments. Apparently, the accompanying drawings in the following description are only some examples or embodiments of this specification, and those skilled in the art can also apply this specification to other similar scenarios. Unless otherwise apparent from context or otherwise indicated, like reference numerals in the figures represent like structures or operations.
应当理解,本文使用的“系统”、“装置”、“单元”和/或“模块”是用于区分不同级别的不同组件、元件、部件、部分或装配的一种方法。然而,如果其他词语可实现相同的目的,则可通过其他表达来替换所 述词语。It should be understood that "system", "device", "unit" and/or "module" as used herein is a method for distinguishing different components, elements, parts, parts or assemblies of different levels. However, said words may be replaced by other expressions if other words can achieve the same purpose.
如本说明书和权利要求书中所示,除非上下文明确提示例外情形,“一”、“一个”、“一种”和/或“该”等词并非特指单数,也可包括复数。一般说来,术语“包括”与“包含”仅提示包括已明确标识的步骤和元素,而这些步骤和元素不构成一个排它性的罗列,方法或者设备也可能包含其它的步骤或元素。As indicated in the specification and claims, the terms "a", "an", "an" and/or "the" are not specific to the singular and may include the plural unless the context clearly indicates an exception. Generally speaking, the terms "comprising" and "comprising" only suggest the inclusion of clearly identified steps and elements, and these steps and elements do not constitute an exclusive list, and the method or device may also contain other steps or elements.
本说明书中使用了流程图用来说明根据本说明书的实施例的系统所执行的操作。应当理解的是,前面或后面操作不一定按照顺序来精确地执行。相反,可以按照倒序或同时处理各个步骤。同时,也可以将其他操作添加到这些过程中,或从这些过程移除某一步或数步操作。The flowchart is used in this specification to illustrate the operations performed by the system according to the embodiment of this specification. It should be understood that the preceding or following operations are not necessarily performed in the exact order. Instead, various steps may be processed in reverse order or simultaneously. At the same time, other operations can be added to these procedures, or a certain step or steps can be removed from these procedures.
图1是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性可闭合设备的结构示意图。如图1所示,可闭合设备100主要包括至少包括两个可相对移动的部件,且这两个可相对移动的部件可以构成一个封闭空间。通过两个可相对移动的部件的相对移动,可以实现可闭合设备100的打开和闭合。两个部件的相对移动可以是相对平移或相对转动等。封闭空间可以理解为一个与外界环境隔离开,且能够容纳、存放物品的空间。在一些实施例中,两个相对移动的部件可以分别是盒子(如钥匙盒、珠宝盒等)的盒体和盖子。在一些实施例中,两个相对移动的部件可以分别是箱子(如保险箱、行李箱等)的箱体和门体。在一些实施例中,两个相对移动的部件可以分别是房屋(如仓库、住宅)的房门和墙体。可闭合设备100可以是多种,例如,可闭合设备100可以是图2所示的箱体、也可以是下文中图23-37所示的智能锁盒,具体请参见图2和图23-27相关的说明介绍了可闭合设备的具体示例。Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an exemplary closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 1 , the closable device 100 mainly includes at least two relatively movable parts, and these two relatively movable parts can form a closed space. Opening and closing of the closeable device 100 can be achieved by relative movement of two relatively movable parts. The relative movement of the two components may be relative translation or relative rotation or the like. A closed space can be understood as a space that is isolated from the external environment and can accommodate and store items. In some embodiments, the two relatively moving parts may be a box body and a cover of a box (such as a key box, a jewelry box, etc.) respectively. In some embodiments, the two relatively moving parts may be a box body and a door body of a box (such as a safe, a suitcase, etc.) respectively. In some embodiments, the two relatively moving parts may be a door and a wall of a house (such as a warehouse or a residence) respectively. The closable device 100 can be of various types. For example, the closable device 100 can be a box as shown in FIG. 2 or an intelligent lock box as shown in FIGS. 23-37 below. For details, please refer to FIGS. 2 and 23- 27 The related description presents specific examples of closeable devices.
在一些实施例中,两个可相对移动的部件可以通过至少一个连接件120构成封闭空间。至少一个连接件120可以将两个可相对移动的部件连接起来,且保证这两个部件能够实现相对移动,以实现可闭合设备100的打开和闭合。连接件120的结构可以是多种,例如,连接件120可以包括部件(如连接转轴),连接件120也可以包括连接结构(如卡接结构)。下文中图18-22相关的说明介绍了的关于连接件120的具体示例。In some embodiments, two relatively movable parts can form a closed space through at least one connecting piece 120 . At least one connecting piece 120 can connect two relatively movable parts, and ensure that the two parts can realize relative movement, so as to realize the opening and closing of the closeable device 100 . The structure of the connecting piece 120 may be various, for example, the connecting piece 120 may include a component (such as a connecting shaft), and the connecting piece 120 may also include a connecting structure (such as a snap-fit structure). Specific examples of connectors 120 are described below in relation to FIGS. 18-22 .
在一些实施例中,两个可相对移动的部件可以通过锁定装置进行锁定。在一些实施例中,当锁定装置将两个可相对移动的部件锁定,两个可移动部件无法再相对移动,可闭合设备100闭合且能够保持闭合状态。在一些实施例中,当锁定装置对两个可相对移动的部件锁定解除,两个可移动部件可以相对移动,可闭合设备100可以由闭合状态打开为打开状态。在一些实施例中,锁定装置可以包括锁定组件,锁定组件用于将两个可相对移动的部件的相对移动锁定。在一些实施例中,锁定机构可以包括解锁组件,解锁组件能够将锁定组件对两个可相对移动的部件的相对移动的锁定解除。在一些实施例中,锁定装置可以包括机械锁。在一些实施例中,机械锁可以包括锁定组件(即机械锁定组件)和解锁组件(即机械解锁组件)。在一些实施例中,锁定装置可以包括智能锁。在一些实施例中,智能锁可以包括锁定组件(即智能锁定组件)和解锁组件(即智能解锁组件)。锁定装置的结构可以是多种,下文中图2-17相关的说明介绍了的关于锁定装置的具体示例。In some embodiments, two relatively movable parts can be locked by a locking device. In some embodiments, when the locking device locks the two relatively movable parts, the two movable parts can no longer move relative to each other, and the closeable device 100 is closed and can maintain the closed state. In some embodiments, when the locking device unlocks the two relatively movable parts, the two movable parts can move relatively, and the closeable device 100 can be opened from the closed state to the open state. In some embodiments, the locking device may include a locking assembly for locking the relative movement of two relatively movable parts. In some embodiments, the locking mechanism may include an unlocking assembly capable of unlocking the relative movement of the two relatively movable parts by the locking assembly. In some embodiments, the locking device may comprise a mechanical lock. In some embodiments, a mechanical lock may include a locking component (ie, a mechanical locking component) and an unlocking component (ie, a mechanical unlocking component). In some embodiments, the locking device may comprise a smart lock. In some embodiments, a smart lock may include a locking component (ie, a smart locking component) and an unlocking component (ie, a smart unlocking component). There may be various structures of the locking device, and specific examples of the locking device are introduced in the descriptions related to Figs. 2-17 below.
示例性的,如图1所示,可闭合设备100可以包括第一部件110与第二部件130,第一部件110与第二部件130可以通过连接件120组合构成一个封闭空间。第一部件110与第二部件130的相对移动可以使可闭合设备100打开或闭合。第一部件110与第二部件130通过连接件120构成的封闭空间可以用于存放物品。在一些实施例中,第一部件110和/或第二部件130可以具有凹陷结构从而形成容纳腔。在一些实施例中,可闭合设备100还包括锁定装置140,当锁定装置140处于解锁状态时,第一部件110与第二部件130可以相对移动,从而使得可闭合设备100可以打开或关闭,方便存放或拿取物品。当物品存放完成或拿取完成后,可以使可闭合设备100闭合并控制锁定装置处于锁定状态,此时第一部件110与第二部件130之间的相对移动被锁定,可闭合设备100内为封闭空间且能稳定维持闭合状态,以实现物品的存放和管理。需要说明的是,图1及后续附图中所示的锁定装置及连接件的位置仅作为示例,并不构成限定。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 1 , the closeable device 100 may include a first part 110 and a second part 130 , and the first part 110 and the second part 130 may be combined to form a closed space through a connecting piece 120 . Relative movement of the first part 110 and the second part 130 may cause the closeable device 100 to be opened or closed. The closed space formed by the first part 110 and the second part 130 through the connecting piece 120 can be used for storing articles. In some embodiments, the first component 110 and/or the second component 130 may have a concave structure to form a receiving cavity. In some embodiments, the closable device 100 further includes a locking device 140. When the locking device 140 is in an unlocked state, the first part 110 and the second part 130 can move relative to each other, so that the closable device 100 can be opened or closed for convenience. Store or retrieve items. When the storage or retrieval of the articles is completed, the closeable device 100 can be closed and the locking device is controlled to be in the locked state. At this time, the relative movement between the first part 110 and the second part 130 is locked, and the inside of the closeable device 100 is The closed space can be stably maintained in a closed state to realize the storage and management of items. It should be noted that the positions of the locking device and the connecting parts shown in FIG. 1 and subsequent figures are only examples and not limiting.
图2是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的可闭合设备的示例性结构示意图。如图2所示,在一些实施例中,可闭合设备100可以为箱体结构,两个可相对移动的部件可以包括箱体与门体,例如第一部件110可以为门体,第二部件130可以为箱体。箱体和门体围成用于存储物品的内部隔室。箱体和门体可以为枢转连接,并通过锁定装置140实现箱体与门体的锁定;或者门体的一端卡接在箱体上,门体的另一端通过锁定装置140实现箱体与门体的锁定。Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary structure of a closeable device according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 2, in some embodiments, the closeable device 100 can be a box structure, and the two relatively movable parts can include a box body and a door body, for example, the first part 110 can be a door body, and the second part 110 can be a door body. 130 may be a box body. The box and door enclose an interior compartment for storing items. The box body and the door body can be pivotally connected, and the locking device 140 realizes the locking of the box body and the door body; Door locking.
在一些实施例中,箱体和门体可以为钣金加工而成。在一些实施例中,箱体与门体的材质可以为不锈钢、铝合金、塑胶等硬化材料中一种或多种形成的耐用的外壳,但不限于上述材料。In some embodiments, the box body and the door body can be processed from sheet metal. In some embodiments, the material of the box body and the door body can be a durable shell formed by one or more hardened materials such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, plastic, etc., but is not limited to the above materials.
在一些实施例中,可闭合设备100的箱体结构的形式可以包括但不限于保险柜、智能保险箱、保管柜,枪柜或者便携式保险箱等。In some embodiments, the form of the box structure of the closeable device 100 may include, but not limited to, a safe, a smart safe, a storage cabinet, a gun safe, or a portable safe.
图3是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的立体图;图4是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的爆炸图;图5是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件的立体图;图6是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置处于锁定状态的主视结构示意图;图7是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装 置处于锁定状态的仰视结构示意图;图8是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置处于解锁状态的主视结构示意图;图9是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置处于解锁状态的仰视结构示意图;图10是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的另一立体图;图11是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的智能解锁组件的结构示意图;图12是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件的结构示意图;图13是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件关锁时的状态示意图;图14是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定组件解锁时的状态示意图;图15是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁扣限位挡板的结构示意图;图16是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的机械解锁过程示意图;图17是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定装置的智能解锁过程示意图。以下结合图3-图17对锁定装置进行说明。Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a locking device according to some embodiments of this specification; Fig. 4 is an exploded view of a locking device according to some embodiments of this specification; Fig. 5 is a perspective view of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification Stereoscopic view; FIG. 6 is a front structural schematic view of the locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification; FIG. 7 is a bottom view structural schematic view of the locking device in a locked state according to some embodiments of the present specification; FIG. 8 is a According to some embodiments of this specification, a schematic front view of a locking device in an unlocked state; FIG. 9 is a schematic bottom view of a locking device in an unlocked state according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a bottom view of a locking device according to some embodiments of this specification. Another perspective view of the locking device shown in the example; FIG. 11 is a schematic structural view of an intelligent unlocking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 12 is a schematic structural view of a locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 13 It is a schematic diagram of the locked state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the unlocked state of the locking assembly according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the unlocked state according to some embodiments of this specification Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of the mechanical unlocking process of the locking device according to some embodiments of this specification; Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of the intelligent unlocking process of the locking device according to some embodiments of this specification . The locking device will be described below in conjunction with FIGS. 3-17 .
如图1-17所示,本实施例提供一种锁定装置300,锁定装置300可以用于图1或图2所示的可闭合设备100上,以实现可闭合设备100的两个部件(如箱体和门体)相对移动的锁定与解锁。As shown in FIGS. 1-17, this embodiment provides a locking device 300, which can be used on the closeable device 100 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. The locking and unlocking of the relative movement of the cabinet and the door).
在一些实施例中,如图1-4所示,锁定装置300主要包括安装支架310、第一锁定件302与锁定组件320。其中,安装支架310可以设于两个可相对移动的部件(即第一部件110与第二部件130)中的其中一个上,第一锁定件302设于两个可相对移动的部件(即第一部件110与第二部件130)中的另一个上。示例性的,第一锁定件302可以设置于门体(即第一部件110)上,安装支架310可以设于箱体(即第二部件130)内部,锁定组件320可移动的设置在安装支架310上并能够与第一锁定件302适配以形成锁定,锁定组件320能够在锁定状态和解锁状态切换。在一些实施例中,锁定装置300还可以包括智能解锁组件330和机械解锁组件340。智能解锁组件330设置在安装支架310上,智能解锁组件330能够输出智能解锁动作而使得锁定组件320解锁;机械解锁组件340设置在安装支架310上,机械解锁组件340能够输出机械解锁动作而使得锁定组件320解锁。在一些实施例中,智能解锁组件330和机械解锁组件340在安装支架310上的安装可以相互独立,互不影响。可以理解地,智能解锁组件330可以是指本说明书中的智能锁,也可以是本说明书中的智能锁的一部分;机械解锁组件340可以是指本说明书中的机械锁,也可以是本说明书中的机械锁的一部分。In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 1-4 , the locking device 300 mainly includes a mounting bracket 310 , a first locking member 302 and a locking component 320 . Wherein, the mounting bracket 310 can be arranged on one of the two relatively movable parts (ie, the first part 110 and the second part 130), and the first locking member 302 is arranged on the two relatively movable parts (ie, the second part 130). On the other of the first part 110 and the second part 130). Exemplarily, the first locking member 302 may be disposed on the door body (ie, the first component 110), the mounting bracket 310 may be disposed inside the box body (ie, the second component 130), and the locking assembly 320 may be movably disposed on the mounting bracket 310 and can fit with the first locking member 302 to form a lock, and the lock assembly 320 can be switched between a locked state and an unlocked state. In some embodiments, the locking device 300 may further include an intelligent unlocking component 330 and a mechanical unlocking component 340 . The intelligent unlocking component 330 is arranged on the mounting bracket 310, and the intelligent unlocking component 330 can output an intelligent unlocking action to unlock the locking component 320; the mechanical unlocking component 340 is arranged on the mounting bracket 310, and the mechanical unlocking component 340 can output a mechanical unlocking action to make the locking Component 320 is unlocked. In some embodiments, the installation of the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 on the mounting bracket 310 may be independent of each other without affecting each other. It can be understood that the smart unlocking component 330 may refer to the smart lock in this specification, or a part of the smart lock in this specification; the mechanical unlocking component 340 may refer to the mechanical lock in this specification, or it may be a part of the smart lock in this specification. part of the mechanical lock.
在一些实施例中,锁定装置300还可以包括第一传动组件350和第二传动组件360。第一传动组件350能够与智能解锁组件330及锁定组件320传动连接;第二传动组件360能够与机械解锁组件340及锁定组件320传动连接。当智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作时,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320传动连接,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320脱离传动;当机械解锁组件340输出机械解锁动作时,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320脱离传动,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320传动连接。In some embodiments, the locking device 300 may further include a first transmission assembly 350 and a second transmission assembly 360 . The first transmission assembly 350 can be connected in transmission with the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320 ; the second transmission assembly 360 can be in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320 . When the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 outputs an intelligent unlocking action, the first transmission assembly 350 is in transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320, and the second transmission assembly 360 is out of transmission with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320; when the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 When the mechanical unlocking action is output, the first transmission assembly 350 is out of transmission with the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320 , and the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320 .
在另一些实施例中,如图10-15所示,锁定装置1000主要包括第一锁定件1002、锁定组件1020、机械解锁组件1040、智能解锁组件1030以及传动输出件。其中,锁定组件1020和第一锁定件1002的设置方式及配合方式与锁定组件320和第一锁定件302的设置方式及配合方式相同。传动输出件可以包括与上述的第一传动组件350及第二传动组件360相似的结构,且机械解锁组件1040、智能解锁组件1030、锁定组件1020,及传动输出件的工作原理与机械解锁组件340、智能解锁组件330、锁定组件320及第一传动组件350、第二传动组件360的工作原理相同。In some other embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 , the locking device 1000 mainly includes a first locking component 1002 , a locking component 1020 , a mechanical unlocking component 1040 , an intelligent unlocking component 1030 and a transmission output component. Wherein, the arrangement and cooperation of the locking assembly 1020 and the first locking member 1002 are the same as the arrangement and cooperation of the locking assembly 320 and the first locking member 302 . The transmission output member may include a structure similar to the first transmission assembly 350 and the second transmission assembly 360 described above, and the mechanical unlocking assembly 1040, the intelligent unlocking assembly 1030, the locking assembly 1020, and the working principle of the transmission output member are the same as those of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 , the smart unlocking component 330, the locking component 320, the first transmission component 350, and the second transmission component 360 have the same working principle.
请参照图3与图4,在一些实施例中,锁定装置300的智能解锁模式的工作原理为:智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320传动连接,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320脱离传动,第一传动组件350驱动锁定组件320切换至解锁状态,从而完成智能解锁。Please refer to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 , in some embodiments, the working principle of the smart unlocking mode of the locking device 300 is: the smart unlocking component 330 outputs a smart unlocking action, and the first transmission component 350 and the smart unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320 drive connected, the second transmission assembly 360 is out of transmission with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320, and the first transmission assembly 350 drives the locking assembly 320 to switch to an unlocked state, thereby completing intelligent unlocking.
在一些实施例中,锁定装置300机械解锁模式的工作原理为:机械解锁组件340输出机械解锁动作,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320脱离传动,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320传动连接,第二传动组件360驱动锁定组件320切换至解锁状态,从而完成机械解锁。In some embodiments, the working principle of the mechanical unlocking mode of the locking device 300 is as follows: the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the first transmission component 350 is separated from the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320, and the second transmission component 360 and the mechanical The unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 are connected by transmission, and the second transmission component 360 drives the locking component 320 to switch to the unlocked state, thereby completing the mechanical unlocking.
由上述过程可知,锁定装置300实现了关门自动上锁,开锁自动打开的功能。另外,由于上述智能解锁过程中,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320脱离传动,因此,第二传动组件360和机械解锁组件340不会影响智能解锁;上述机械解锁过程中,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320脱离传动,因此,第一传动组件350和智能解锁组件330不会影响机械解锁,从而实现了智能解锁和机械解锁互不影响,因此,当智能解锁组件330和机械解锁组件340二者中的任一个出现故障时,均不影响用于可闭合设备100的锁定装置300的正常使用,降低了故障率,提高了安全性能。It can be seen from the above process that the locking device 300 realizes the functions of automatically locking the door when it is closed and automatically opening it when it is unlocked. In addition, since the second transmission component 360 is out of transmission with the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 during the above intelligent unlocking process, the second transmission component 360 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 will not affect the intelligent unlocking; during the above mechanical unlocking process, The first transmission assembly 350 is separated from the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320. Therefore, the first transmission assembly 350 and the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 will not affect the mechanical unlocking, thereby realizing that the intelligent unlocking and the mechanical unlocking do not affect each other. Therefore, when When any one of the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 fails, it will not affect the normal use of the locking device 300 for the closeable device 100, reducing the failure rate and improving the safety performance.
在一些实施例中,锁定组件320的初始状态可以为锁定状态,智能解锁组件330和机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作,锁定组件320始终处于锁定状态。在另一些实施例中,锁定组件320的初始状态也可以为解锁状态,当需要锁定第一锁定件302时再进行锁定。In some embodiments, the initial state of the locking component 320 may be a locked state, the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 do not output an unlocking action, and the locking component 320 is always in the locked state. In some other embodiments, the initial state of the locking component 320 may also be an unlocked state, and then the locking is performed when the first locking member 302 needs to be locked.
在一些实施例中,锁定组件320可以用于锁定第一锁定件302,第一锁定件302可以为挂钩、凹槽等具有能够与锁定组件320相适配的结构。锁定组件320通过移动实现锁定状态和解锁状态的切换,其 中,锁定组件320的移动可以为往复直线运动或者往复旋转运动。In some embodiments, the locking component 320 can be used to lock the first locking member 302 , and the first locking member 302 can be a hook, a groove, etc. that have a structure that can be adapted to the locking component 320 . The locking assembly 320 realizes switching between the locking state and the unlocking state by moving, wherein, the movement of the locking assembly 320 can be a reciprocating linear motion or a reciprocating rotational motion.
请参照图3-图5,在一些实施例中,锁定组件320可以包括转动片321、第二锁定件322和牵引件323。其中,转动片321的作用是接收第一传动组件350和第二传动组件360输出的驱动力,以带动第二锁定件322在解锁方向旋转。牵引件323的作用是实现牵引转动片321和第二锁定件322。第二锁定件322的作用是通过第一锁舌3221钩住第一锁定件302实现锁定。Referring to FIGS. 3-5 , in some embodiments, the locking assembly 320 may include a rotating piece 321 , a second locking piece 322 and a pulling piece 323 . Wherein, the role of the rotating piece 321 is to receive the driving force output by the first transmission assembly 350 and the second transmission assembly 360 to drive the second locking member 322 to rotate in the unlocking direction. The function of the traction member 323 is to realize the traction of the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 . The function of the second locking member 322 is to lock the first locking member 302 by hooking the first locking tongue 3221 .
锁定组件320通过往复旋转实现锁定状态和解锁状态的切换时,该锁定组件320的设置方式有多种。在一些实施例中,锁定组件320可以采用第一种设置方式:转动片321通过第一旋转中心321a可旋转的设置在安装支架310上;第二锁定件322通过第二旋转中心322a可旋转的设置在安装支架310上,第二锁定件322具有与第一锁定件302适配形成锁定的第一锁舌3221;牵引件323的第一牵引点321b设置在转动片321上,牵引件323的第二牵引点322b设置在第二锁定件322上,牵引件323牵引转动片321和第二锁定件322以在锁定状态和解锁状态切换。When the locking assembly 320 realizes switching between the locked state and the unlocked state by reciprocating rotation, there are many ways to arrange the locking assembly 320 . In some embodiments, the locking assembly 320 can adopt the first configuration method: the rotating piece 321 is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 through the first rotation center 321a; the second locking member 322 is rotatable through the second rotation center 322a Set on the mounting bracket 310, the second locking piece 322 has a first locking tongue 3221 adapted to form a lock with the first locking piece 302; the first pulling point 321b of the pulling piece 323 is set on the rotating piece 321, and the pulling piece 323 The second pulling point 322b is disposed on the second locking member 322, and the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 to switch between the locked state and the unlocked state.
牵引件323的第一牵引点321b牵引转动片321,牵引件323的第二牵引点322b牵引第二锁定件322,以使得锁定组件320维持在锁定状态,即在智能解锁组件330和机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时,锁定组件320在牵引件323的作用下维持在锁定状态。当智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作或者机械解锁组件340输出机械解锁动作时,在第一传动组件350或者第二传动组件360的传动作用下,转动片321在解锁方向旋转,第二锁定件322在牵引件323牵引作用下,跟随转动片321在解锁方向旋转,直至第一锁舌3221脱离第一锁定件302,达到解锁的目的;当智能解锁组件330或者机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时,在牵引件323的作用下,转动片321和第二锁定件322在锁定方向旋转,直至第二锁定件322处于锁定状态。The first pulling point 321b of the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321, and the second pulling point 322b of the pulling member 323 pulls the second locking member 322, so that the locking assembly 320 is maintained in the locked state, that is, between the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the mechanical unlocking assembly. When 340 does not output an unlocking action, the locking assembly 320 is maintained in a locked state under the action of the pulling member 323 . When the intelligent unlocking component 330 outputs an intelligent unlocking action or the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, under the driving action of the first transmission component 350 or the second transmission component 360, the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction, and the second locking member 322 Under the traction of the traction member 323, follow the rotating piece 321 to rotate in the unlocking direction until the first lock tongue 3221 breaks away from the first locking member 302 to achieve the purpose of unlocking; when the intelligent unlocking component 330 or the mechanical unlocking component 340 does not output the unlocking action , under the action of the traction member 323, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 rotate in the locking direction until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
请参照图10-图15,在一些实施例中,锁定组件1020主要包括相适配的转动片1021和第二锁定件1022,且两者能够分别在第一面内枢转。转动片1021具有传动部、第一施力部10213和止动部10215,第二锁定件1022具有第二施力部10222和第一锁舌10221,并配置为:转动片1021位于关锁工作位时,第二锁定件1022的第一锁舌10221可与第一锁定件1002构建关锁限位副,且转动片1021的第一施力部10213与第二锁定件1022的第二施力部10222相抵形成锁扣限位副,以限制第二锁定件1022转动至开锁工作位。转动片1021的传动部与传动输出件的开锁输出端传动连接,以带动转动片1021的第一施力部10213与第二锁定件1022的第二施力部10222脱离,切换至开锁工作位。Referring to FIGS. 10-15 , in some embodiments, the locking assembly 1020 mainly includes a matching rotating piece 1021 and a second locking member 1022 , and both of them can pivot in the first plane respectively. The rotating piece 1021 has a transmission part, a first force application part 10213 and a stopper part 10215, and the second locking part 1022 has a second force application part 10222 and a first lock tongue 10221, and is configured such that the rotation piece 1021 is located at the locking working position At this time, the first lock tongue 10221 of the second locking piece 1022 can form a locking limit pair with the first locking piece 1002, and the first force applying part 10213 of the rotating piece 1021 and the second force applying part of the second locking piece 1022 10222 offset each other to form a locking and limiting pair to limit the rotation of the second locking member 1022 to the unlocking working position. The transmission part of the rotating piece 1021 is connected to the unlocking output end of the transmission output part, so as to drive the first force applying part 10213 of the rotating piece 1021 to disengage from the second force applying part 10222 of the second locking part 1022, and switch to the unlocking working position.
在一些实施例中,锁定装置1000还可以包括转动片限位机构,用于对转动片1021进行限位。转动片限位机构主要包括锁扣限位挡板1070,锁扣限位挡板1070可沿第三方向滑动切换于解锁工作位和锁扣工作位。锁扣限位挡板1070具有止挡部1072和联动部,并配置为:锁扣限位挡板1070位于锁扣工作位时,其上的止挡部1072与转动片1021的止动部10215相抵形成止动限位副,以限制转动片1021转动至开锁工作位;锁扣限位挡板1070的联动部可与传动输出件的解锁输出端传动连接,以带动锁扣限位挡板1070的止挡部1072与转动片1021的止动部10215脱离,切换至解锁工作位。In some embodiments, the locking device 1000 may further include a rotating piece limiting mechanism for limiting the rotating piece 1021 . The rotating piece limiting mechanism mainly includes a lock limit baffle 1070, and the lock limit baffle 1070 can slide along the third direction to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position. The lock limit baffle 1070 has a stop part 1072 and a linkage part, and is configured as follows: when the lock limit baffle 1070 is in the lock working position, the stop part 1072 on it and the stop part 10215 of the rotating piece 1021 Counteract to form a stop limit pair to limit the rotation of the rotating piece 1021 to the unlocking position; the linkage part of the lock limit baffle 1070 can be connected with the unlocking output end of the transmission output to drive the lock limit baffle 1070 The stop part 1072 of the rotating piece 1021 disengages from the stop part 10215, and switches to the unlocked working position.
在一些实施例中,锁定装置1000的机械解锁组件1040可以通过传动输出件的锁扣拨板1044与锁定组件1020传动连接,智能解锁组件1030可以通过传动输出件的旋转拨块1033与锁定组件1020传动连接,从而控制锁芯组件1040的解锁与锁定。机械解锁组件1040和智能解锁组件1030可分别与锁定组件1020和转动片限位机构建立传力路径,达成各自独立的机械解锁模式和智能解锁模式。其中,机械解锁模式的实现由机械解锁组件1040、锁定组件1020和转动片限位机构三个模块构成;智能解锁模式的实现由智能解锁组件1030、锁定组件1020和转动片限位机构构成。当然,可以理解的是,在其他实施例中,锁定装置1000可择一配置机械解锁组件1040和智能解锁组件1030。In some embodiments, the mechanical unlocking component 1040 of the locking device 1000 can be connected to the locking component 1020 through the lock dial 1044 of the transmission output part, and the intelligent unlocking component 1030 can be connected to the locking component 1020 through the rotary dial 1033 of the transmission output part. The transmission connection controls the unlocking and locking of the lock cylinder assembly 1040 . The mechanical unlocking component 1040 and the intelligent unlocking component 1030 can respectively establish a force transmission path with the locking component 1020 and the rotating piece limit mechanism to achieve respective independent mechanical unlocking modes and intelligent unlocking modes. Among them, the realization of the mechanical unlocking mode is composed of three modules: the mechanical unlocking component 1040, the locking component 1020, and the rotating plate limiting mechanism; the realization of the intelligent unlocking mode is composed of the intelligent unlocking component 1030, the locking component 1020 and the rotating plate limiting mechanism. Of course, it can be understood that in other embodiments, the locking device 1000 can be configured with either a mechanical unlocking component 1040 or an intelligent unlocking component 1030 .
请参照图3-图9,在一些实施例中,转动片321的第一旋转中心321a与转动片321的重心重合,因此即使锁定装置300受到多个方向的冲击,转动片321自身很难产生旋转方向的位移,能有效的防止第二锁定件322的松脱,从而防止门体弹开,具有更高的安全性。在另一些实施例中,转动片321的第一旋转中心321a与转动片321的重心也可以不重合。Please refer to FIGS. 3-9 , in some embodiments, the first rotation center 321a of the rotating piece 321 coincides with the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321, so even if the locking device 300 is impacted from multiple directions, the rotating piece 321 itself is difficult to produce The displacement in the rotation direction can effectively prevent the second locking member 322 from loosening, thereby preventing the door body from bouncing open, which has higher safety. In other embodiments, the first rotation center 321 a of the rotating piece 321 and the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321 may not coincide.
在另一些实施例中,锁定组件320也可以采用第二种设置方式,此时锁定组件320可以包括转动片321、第二锁定件322和牵引件323,其中,转动片321通过第一旋转中心321a可旋转的设置在安装支架310上,转动片321与第二锁定件322之间具有容纳第一锁定件302进出的锁定开口;第二锁定件322通过第二旋转中心322a可旋转的设置在安装支架310上,第二锁定件322与锁定开口相对应的部位具有与第一锁定件302适配形成锁定的第一锁舌3221;牵引件323的第一牵引点321b设置在转动片321上,牵引件323的第二牵引点322b设置在第二锁定件322上,牵引件323牵引转动片321和第二锁定件322相互靠近。In some other embodiments, the locking assembly 320 can also adopt the second arrangement mode, at this time, the locking assembly 320 can include a rotating piece 321, a second locking piece 322 and a traction piece 323, wherein the rotating piece 321 passes through the first rotation center 321a is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket 310, and there is a locking opening between the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 for accommodating the first locking member 302 to enter and exit; the second locking member 322 is rotatably arranged on the On the mounting bracket 310, the part of the second locking member 322 corresponding to the locking opening has a first lock tongue 3221 that fits with the first locking member 302 to form a lock; the first pulling point 321b of the pulling member 323 is set on the rotating piece 321 , the second pulling point 322b of the pulling member 323 is disposed on the second locking member 322, and the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 close to each other.
牵引件323的第一牵引点321b牵引转动片321,牵引件323的第二牵引点322b牵引第二锁定件322使得锁定组件320维持在锁定状态,即在智能解锁组件330和机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时, 锁定组件320在牵引件323的作用下维持在锁定状态。当智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作或者机械解锁组件340输出机械解锁动作时,在第一传动组件350或者第二传动组件360的传动作用下,转动片321在解锁方向旋转,第二锁定件322在牵引件323牵引作用下,跟随转动片321在解锁方向旋转,二者在旋转过程中锁定开口距离变大,直至第一锁舌3221脱离第一锁定件302,达到解锁的目的;当智能解锁组件330或者机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时,在牵引件323的作用下,转动片321和第二锁定件322在锁定方向旋转,锁定开口的距离变小,直至第二锁定件322处于锁定状态。The first pulling point 321b of the pulling member 323 pulls the rotating piece 321, and the second pulling point 322b of the pulling member 323 pulls the second locking member 322 so that the locking assembly 320 is maintained in the locked state, that is, when the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 are not locked. When the unlocking action is output, the locking assembly 320 is maintained in a locked state under the action of the pulling member 323 . When the intelligent unlocking component 330 outputs an intelligent unlocking action or the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, under the driving action of the first transmission component 350 or the second transmission component 360, the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction, and the second locking member 322 Under the traction of the traction member 323, it follows the rotating piece 321 and rotates in the unlocking direction. During the rotation, the distance between the locking opening becomes larger until the first lock tongue 3221 is separated from the first locking member 302 to achieve the purpose of unlocking; when the smart unlock When the assembly 330 or the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 does not output the unlocking action, under the action of the traction member 323, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322 rotate in the locking direction, and the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller until the second locking member 322 is in the locked position. state.
在一些实施例中,转动片321的第一旋转中心321a与转动片321的重心重合,因此即使锁定装置300受到多个方向的冲击,转动片321自身很难产生旋转方向的位移,能有效的防止第二锁定件322的松脱,从而防止门体弹开,具有更高的安全性。在另一些实施例中,转动片321的第一旋转中心321a与转动片321的重心也可以不重合。In some embodiments, the first rotation center 321a of the rotating piece 321 coincides with the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321, so even if the locking device 300 is impacted by multiple directions, the rotating piece 321 itself is difficult to produce displacement in the direction of rotation, which can effectively Preventing the second locking member 322 from getting loose, thereby preventing the door body from bouncing open, which has higher safety. In other embodiments, the first rotation center 321 a of the rotating piece 321 and the center of gravity of the rotating piece 321 may not coincide.
转动片321在具体设置时具有多种设置方式。在一些实施例中,在上述的第一种设置方式中,转动片321可以包括第一施力部3213与传动部,其中,第一施力部3213能够与第二锁定件322适配,传动部的不同部位分别与第一传动组件350和第二传动组件360传动连接。且,第一施力部3213位于第一旋转中心321a与第一牵引点321b的连线O1靠近第二锁定件322的一侧。The rotating piece 321 has various setting modes when it is set specifically. In some embodiments, in the above-mentioned first setting mode, the rotating piece 321 may include a first force application part 3213 and a transmission part, wherein the first force application part 3213 can be adapted to the second locking part 322, and the transmission part Different parts of the first transmission assembly 350 and the second transmission assembly 360 are respectively in transmission connection. Moreover, the first force applying portion 3213 is located on a side of the line O1 connecting the first rotation center 321 a and the first pulling point 321 b close to the second locking member 322 .
在一些实施例中,传动部可以包括第一推动部3211和第二推动部3212。第一推动部3211能够与第一传动组件350传动连接,第二推动部3212能够与第二传动组件360传动连接;第一推动部3211和第二推动部3212位于第一旋转中心321a与第一牵引点321b的连线O1远离第二锁定件322的一侧,如图5所示。In some embodiments, the transmission part may include a first pushing part 3211 and a second pushing part 3212 . The first pushing part 3211 can be connected to the first transmission assembly 350, and the second pushing part 3212 can be connected to the second transmission assembly 360; the first pushing part 3211 and the second pushing part 3212 are located between the first rotation center 321a and the first The line O1 connecting the pulling point 321b is away from the side of the second locking member 322 , as shown in FIG. 5 .
智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作时,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320传动连接。具体的,第一传动组件350与第一推动部3211传动连接,第一传动组件350推动第一推动部3211,转动片321克服牵引件323的牵引力后,使得转动片321在解锁方向旋转。When the smart unlocking component 330 outputs a smart unlocking action, the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the smart unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320 . Specifically, the first transmission assembly 350 is in transmission connection with the first pushing part 3211 , the first transmission assembly 350 pushes the first pushing part 3211 , and the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction after overcoming the traction force of the traction member 323 .
机械解锁组件340输出机械解锁动作时,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320传动连接。具体的,第二传动组件360与第二推动部3212传动连接,第二传动组件360推动第二推动部3212,转动片321克服牵引件323的牵引力后,使得转动片321在解锁方向旋转。When the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the second transmission component 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 . Specifically, the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the second pushing part 3212 , the second transmission assembly 360 pushes the second pushing part 3212 , and the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction after overcoming the pulling force of the traction member 323 .
当智能解锁组件330或者机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时,在牵引件323以及第一施力部3213与第二锁定件322双重作用下,转动片321和第二锁定件322在锁定方向旋转,锁定开口的距离变小,直至第二锁定件322处于锁定状态。When the intelligent unlocking component 330 or the mechanical unlocking component 340 does not output the unlocking action, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
在另一些实施例中,相较于上述的第一种设置方式,在上述的第二种设置方式中,转动片321还可以包括第一限位部3214,其中,第一限位部3214和第一施力部3213能够与第二锁定件322相适配;第一限位部3214位于第一旋转中心321a与第一牵引点321b的连线靠近第二锁定件322的一侧。In some other embodiments, compared with the above-mentioned first setting method, in the above-mentioned second setting method, the rotating piece 321 may further include a first limiting portion 3214, wherein the first limiting portion 3214 and The first force applying portion 3213 can be adapted to the second locking member 322 ; the first limiting portion 3214 is located on a side of the line connecting the first rotation center 321 a and the first pulling point 321 b close to the second locking member 322 .
当智能解锁组件330或者机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时,在牵引件323以及第一施力部3213与第二锁定件322双重作用下,转动片321和第二锁定件322在锁定方向旋转,锁定开口的距离变小,并在第一限位部3214的作用下使得锁定开口维持在合理距离,直至第二锁定件322处于锁定状态。When the intelligent unlocking component 330 or the mechanical unlocking component 340 does not output the unlocking action, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller, and the locking opening is maintained at a reasonable distance under the action of the first limiting portion 3214 until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
其中,该牵引件323可以理解为具有弹性性能的材质加工而成,例如橡胶条、弹簧。第一牵引点321b还可设置在第一推动部3211、第二推动部3212或者第一施力部3213上,较优的,设置在第一施力部3213上,与第二锁定件322距离最小,传动最有效。Wherein, the traction member 323 can be understood as being processed from materials with elastic properties, such as rubber strips and springs. The first traction point 321b can also be set on the first pushing part 3211, the second pushing part 3212 or the first force applying part 3213, preferably, it is set on the first force applying part 3213, at a distance from the second locking part 322 The smallest, the most efficient transmission.
第二锁定件322原始状态即为锁定第一锁定件302的状态,当在解锁方向旋转时,能够脱离第一锁定件302,第二锁定件322在具体设置时具有多种设置方式。在一些实施例中,在上述第一种的设置方式中,第二锁定件322靠近转动片321的一侧可以设置有第二施力部3222,第二施力部3222能够与第一施力部3213相配合,如图5所示。The original state of the second locking member 322 is the state of locking the first locking member 302 , and when it is rotated in the unlocking direction, it can disengage from the first locking member 302 . In some embodiments, in the above-mentioned first setting mode, a second force application part 3222 can be provided on the side of the second locking member 322 close to the rotating piece 321, and the second force application part 3222 can be combined with the first force application part 3222. part 3213, as shown in Figure 5.
当智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作时,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320传动连接,具体的,第一传动组件350与第一推动部3211传动连接,第一传动组件350推动第一推动部3211,转动片321克服牵引件323的牵引力以及第二施力部3222与第一施力部3213之间的作用力后,使得转动片321在解锁方向旋转。When the smart unlocking component 330 outputs the smart unlocking action, the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320, specifically, the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the first pushing part 3211, and the first transmission component 350 When the first pushing part 3211 is pushed, the rotating piece 321 will rotate in the unlocking direction after the rotating piece 321 overcomes the traction force of the pulling member 323 and the force between the second force applying part 3222 and the first force applying part 3213 .
当机械解锁组件340输出机械解锁动作时,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320传动连接。具体的,第二传动组件360与第二推动部3212传动连接,第二传动组件360推动第二推动部3212,转动片321克服牵引件323的牵引力以及第二施力部3222与第一施力部3213之间的作用力后,使得转动片321在解锁方向旋转。When the mechanical unlocking component 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the second transmission component 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 . Specifically, the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the second pushing part 3212, the second transmission assembly 360 pushes the second pushing part 3212, the rotating piece 321 overcomes the traction force of the traction member 323 and the second force application part 3222 and the first force application After the force between the parts 3213, the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
当智能解锁组件330或者机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时,在牵引件323以及第一施力部3213与第二锁定件322双重作用下,转动片321和第二锁定件322在锁定方向旋转,锁定开口的距离变小,直至第二锁定件322处于锁定状态。When the intelligent unlocking component 330 or the mechanical unlocking component 340 does not output the unlocking action, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
在另一些实施例中,相较于上述第一种设置方式,在上述第二种设置方式中,第二锁定件322靠 近转动片321的一侧还可以设置有第二限位部3223,第二限位部3223能够与第一限位部3214相适配。In some other embodiments, compared with the above-mentioned first setting method, in the above-mentioned second setting method, the side of the second locking member 322 close to the rotating piece 321 can also be provided with a second limiting portion 3223, the second The second limiting portion 3223 can match the first limiting portion 3214 .
智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作时,第一传动组件350与智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320传动连接,具体的,第一传动组件350与第一推动部3211传动连接,第一传动组件350推动第一推动部3211,转动片321克服牵引件323的牵引力以及第二施力部3222与第一施力部3213之间的作用力后,使得转动片321在解锁方向旋转。When the smart unlocking component 330 outputs a smart unlocking action, the first transmission component 350 is connected in transmission with the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320. Specifically, the first transmission component 350 is in transmission connection with the first pusher 3211, and the first transmission component 350 pushes After the first pushing part 3211 and the rotating piece 321 overcome the pulling force of the pulling member 323 and the force between the second force applying part 3222 and the first force applying part 3213 , the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
机械解锁组件340输出机械解锁动作时,第二传动组件360与机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320传动连接,具体的,第二传动组件360与第二推动部3212传动连接,第二传动组件360推动第二推动部3212,转动片321克服牵引件323的牵引力以及第二施力部3222与第一施力部3213之间的作用力后,使得转动片321在解锁方向旋转。When the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320. Specifically, the second transmission assembly 360 is in transmission connection with the second pusher 3212, and the second transmission assembly 360 pushes After the second pushing part 3212 and the rotating piece 321 overcome the traction force of the pulling member 323 and the force between the second force applying part 3222 and the first force applying part 3213 , the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
当智能解锁组件330或者机械解锁组件340不输出解锁动作时,在牵引件323以及第一施力部3213与第二锁定件322双重作用下,转动片321和第二锁定件322在锁定方向旋转,锁定开口的距离变小,并在第一限位部3214和第二限位部3223的作用下使得锁定开口维持在合理距离,直至第二锁定件322处于锁定状态。When the intelligent unlocking component 330 or the mechanical unlocking component 340 does not output the unlocking action, the rotating piece 321 and the second locking component 322 rotate in the locking direction under the double action of the traction component 323, the first force applying part 3213 and the second locking component 322 , the distance of the locking opening becomes smaller, and under the action of the first limiting portion 3214 and the second limiting portion 3223, the locking opening is maintained at a reasonable distance until the second locking member 322 is in the locked state.
以第二旋转中心322a与第二牵引点322b的连线O2为界,第一锁舌3221、第二限位部3223和第二施力部3222有两种布置方式。在一些实施例中,可以采用第一种布置方式:第一锁舌3221、第二限位部3223和第二施力部3222均位于第二旋转中心322a与第二牵引点322b的连线O2靠近转动片321的一侧。在另一些实施例中,也可以采用第二种布置方式:第一锁舌3221、第二限位部3223和第二施力部3222均位于第二旋转中心322a与第二牵引点322b的连线O2远离转动片321的一侧。采用第二种布置方式,能够在转动片321与第二锁定件322之间形成锁定开口,有效防止第一锁定件302从第一锁舌3221处脱离,从而提高了安全性能。With the line O2 connecting the second rotation center 322a and the second pulling point 322b as the boundary, the first lock tongue 3221 , the second limiting portion 3223 and the second force applying portion 3222 can be arranged in two ways. In some embodiments, the first arrangement can be adopted: the first locking tongue 3221, the second limiting portion 3223 and the second force applying portion 3222 are all located on the line O2 connecting the second rotation center 322a and the second pulling point 322b Close to the side of the rotating piece 321 . In some other embodiments, the second arrangement can also be adopted: the first locking tongue 3221, the second limiting portion 3223 and the second force applying portion 3222 are all located at the connection between the second rotation center 322a and the second pulling point 322b. The line O2 is away from the side of the rotating piece 321 . With the second arrangement, a locking opening can be formed between the rotating piece 321 and the second locking member 322, effectively preventing the first locking member 302 from detaching from the first locking tongue 3221, thereby improving safety performance.
在一些实施例中,锁定组件320还可以包括缓冲垫板324,缓冲垫板324位于转动片321与安装支架310之间和/或第二锁定件322与安装支架310之间,转动片321和第二锁定件322通过缓冲垫板324可旋转的设置在安装支架310上。在一些实施例中,缓冲垫板324可以为具有弹性材质加工而成,能够在锁定组件320在往复移动或者旋转过程中,起到降低噪音的目的,或者在发生碰撞过程中,在锁定组件320与安装支架310之间起到缓冲的作用。In some embodiments, the locking assembly 320 may further include a buffer pad 324, the buffer pad 324 is located between the rotating piece 321 and the mounting bracket 310 and/or between the second locking piece 322 and the mounting bracket 310, the rotating piece 321 and the mounting bracket 310 The second locking member 322 is rotatably disposed on the mounting bracket 310 through the buffer plate 324 . In some embodiments, the buffer plate 324 can be made of elastic material, which can reduce the noise during the reciprocating movement or rotation of the locking assembly 320, or in the process of collision, the locking assembly 320 It plays a role of buffering with the mounting bracket 310 .
在一些实施例中,锁定组件320还可以包括限位套325,锁定组件320位于解锁状态时,限位套325与第二锁定件322抵接。从而有效地减少第二锁定件322在解锁方向转动过大。该限位套325设置在缓冲垫板324或者安装支架310上。In some embodiments, the locking assembly 320 may further include a limiting sleeve 325 , and when the locking assembly 320 is in an unlocked state, the limiting sleeve 325 abuts against the second locking member 322 . Thereby effectively reducing the excessive rotation of the second locking member 322 in the unlocking direction. The limiting sleeve 325 is disposed on the buffer pad 324 or the mounting bracket 310 .
第一传动组件350的作用是实现智能解锁组件330与锁定组件320之间的动力传输,第一传动组件350的设置方式有很多。在一些实施例中,第一传动组件350可以采用上述第一种设置方式:第一传动组件350可以包括旋转拨块351,旋转拨块351设置在智能解锁组件330的动力输出端,当智能解锁组件330的动力输出端输出智能解锁动作时,旋转拨块351在第一方向旋转,并推动第一推动部3211使得转动片321在解锁方向转动。The function of the first transmission assembly 350 is to realize power transmission between the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 and the locking assembly 320 , and there are many configurations of the first transmission assembly 350 . In some embodiments, the first transmission assembly 350 can adopt the above-mentioned first setting method: the first transmission assembly 350 can include a rotary dial 351, and the rotary dial 351 is arranged at the power output end of the smart unlocking assembly 330. When the smart unlocking When the power output end of the component 330 outputs the smart unlocking action, the rotary dial 351 rotates in the first direction, and pushes the first pushing part 3211 so that the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
在另一些实施例中,第一传动组件350也可以采用第二种设置方式:第一传动组件350可以包括转动拨片361和第一连杆362,其中,转动拨片361设置在智能解锁组件330的动力输出端,第一连杆362沿第一方向可滑动的设置在安装支架310,当智能解锁组件330的动力输出端输出智能解锁动作时,转动拨片361拨动第一连杆362第一方向移动,并拉动第一推动部3211使得转动片321在解锁方向转动。In some other embodiments, the first transmission assembly 350 can also adopt the second setting method: the first transmission assembly 350 can include a rotary paddle 361 and a first connecting rod 362, wherein the rotary paddle 361 is arranged on the smart unlocking assembly At the power output end of 330, the first connecting rod 362 is slidably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 along the first direction. When the power output end of the smart unlocking component 330 outputs the smart unlocking action, turn the paddle 361 to move the first connecting rod 362 Move in the first direction, and pull the first pushing part 3211 to make the rotating piece 321 rotate in the unlocking direction.
能够实现将旋转运动转换为直线运动的结构有很多,例如,丝杠螺母机构、曲柄滑块机构等等。在一些实施例中,转动拨片361包括固定在智能解锁组件330的动力输出端的第一固定部3611和与第一固定部3611偏心设置的凸起部3612。There are many structures capable of converting rotary motion into linear motion, for example, screw nut mechanism, crank slider mechanism and so on. In some embodiments, the rotating paddle 361 includes a first fixing portion 3611 fixed on the power output end of the smart unlocking assembly 330 and a protrusion 3612 eccentrically arranged with the first fixing portion 3611 .
第一连杆362包括依次连接的动力部3621、滑动部3622和拉动部3623,其中,动力部3621上设置有第一滑槽3621a,凸起部3612可滑动的设置在第一滑槽3621a;拉动部3623能够拉动第二推动部3212;滑动部3622和安装支架310二者中一个设置有沿第二方向ox延伸的第二滑槽3622a,滑动部3622和安装支架310二者中的另一个设置有与第二滑槽3622a相配合的多个导向件,多个导向件沿第二方向ox布置。The first connecting rod 362 includes a power part 3621, a sliding part 3622 and a pulling part 3623 connected in sequence, wherein the power part 3621 is provided with a first sliding groove 3621a, and the protruding part 3612 is slidably arranged in the first sliding groove 3621a; The pulling part 3623 can pull the second pushing part 3212; one of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310 is provided with a second sliding groove 3622a extending along the second direction ox, and the other of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310 A plurality of guide pieces matched with the second slide groove 3622a are provided, and the plurality of guide pieces are arranged along the second direction ox.
当智能解锁组件330输出旋转运动时,带动转动拨片361进行旋转,而凸起部3612偏心设置,为此第一连杆362在凸起部3612与第一滑槽3621a配合作用以及导向件与第二滑槽3622a配合作用下,进行直线运动,从而实现了将旋转运动转换为直线运动。When the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 outputs a rotary motion, it drives the rotary paddle 361 to rotate, and the raised portion 3612 is eccentrically arranged. Therefore, the first connecting rod 362 cooperates with the raised portion 3612 and the first chute 3621a and the guide member and the first slide groove 3621a Under the cooperative action of the second slide groove 3622a, the linear motion is performed, thereby realizing the conversion of the rotary motion into the linear motion.
第二传动组件360的作用是实现机械解锁组件340与锁定组件320之间的动力传输,第二传动组件360的设置方式有很多。在一些实施例中,第二传动组件360可以采用第一种设置方式:第二传动组件360包括转动拨片361和第一连杆362,其中,转动拨片361设置在机械解锁组件340的动力输出端,第一连杆362沿第二方向ox可滑动的设置在安装支架310,当机械解锁组件340的动力输出端输出机械解锁 动作时,转动拨片361拨动第一连杆362第二方向ox移动,并拉动第二推动部3212使得转动片321在解锁方向转动。The function of the second transmission assembly 360 is to realize the power transmission between the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and the locking assembly 320 , and there are many arrangements of the second transmission assembly 360 . In some embodiments, the second transmission assembly 360 can adopt the first arrangement mode: the second transmission assembly 360 includes a rotary paddle 361 and a first connecting rod 362 , wherein the rotary paddle 361 is set at the power of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 At the output end, the first connecting rod 362 is slidably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 along the second direction ox. When the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, turn the paddle 361 to move the first connecting rod 362 to the second direction ox, and pulling the second pushing part 3212 makes the rotating piece 321 rotate in the unlocking direction.
能够实现将旋转运动转换为直线运动的结构有很多,例如,丝杠螺母结构、曲柄滑块结构等等。在一些实施例中,转动拨片361包括固定在机械锁组件的动力输出端的第一固定部3611和与第一固定部3611偏心设置的凸起部3612。There are many structures capable of converting rotary motion into linear motion, for example, lead screw nut structure, crank slider structure and so on. In some embodiments, the rotating paddle 361 includes a first fixing portion 3611 fixed on the power output end of the mechanical lock assembly and a protrusion 3612 eccentrically arranged with the first fixing portion 3611 .
第一连杆362包括依次连接的动力部3621、滑动部3622和拉动部3623,其中,动力部3621上设置有第一滑槽3621a,凸起部3612可滑动的设置在第一滑槽3621a;拉动部3623能够拉动第二推动部3212;滑动部3622和安装支架310二者中一个设置有沿第二方向ox延伸的第二滑槽3622a,滑动部3622和安装支架310二者中的另一个设置有与第二滑槽3622a相配合的多个导向件,多个导向件沿第二方向ox布置。The first connecting rod 362 includes a power part 3621, a sliding part 3622 and a pulling part 3623 connected in sequence, wherein the power part 3621 is provided with a first sliding groove 3621a, and the protruding part 3612 is slidably arranged in the first sliding groove 3621a; The pulling part 3623 can pull the second pushing part 3212; one of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310 is provided with a second sliding groove 3622a extending along the second direction ox, and the other of the sliding part 3622 and the mounting bracket 310 A plurality of guide pieces matched with the second slide groove 3622a are provided, and the plurality of guide pieces are arranged along the second direction ox.
当机械解锁组件340输出旋转运动时,带动转动拨片361进行旋转,而凸起部3612偏心设置,为此第一连杆362在凸起部3612与第一滑槽3621a配合作用以及导向件与第二滑槽3622a配合作用下,进行直线运动,从而实现了将旋转运动转换为直线运动。When the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 outputs a rotary motion, it drives the rotating plectrum 361 to rotate, and the raised portion 3612 is eccentrically arranged. Therefore, the first connecting rod 362 cooperates with the raised portion 3612 and the first slide groove 3621a and the guide member and the first slide groove 3621a Under the cooperative action of the second slide groove 3622a, the linear motion is performed, thereby realizing the conversion of the rotary motion into the linear motion.
在另一些实施例中,第二传动组件360也可以采用第二种设置方式:第二传动组件360可以包括旋转拨块351,旋转拨块351设置在机械解锁组件340的动力输出端,当机械解锁组件340的动力输出端输出机械解锁动作时,旋转拨块351在第二方向ox旋转,并推动第二推动部3212使得转动片321在解锁方向转动。In some other embodiments, the second transmission assembly 360 can also adopt the second arrangement: the second transmission assembly 360 can include a rotary dial 351, and the rotary dial 351 is arranged at the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340, when the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 When the power output end of the unlocking assembly 340 outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the rotary dial 351 rotates in the second direction ox, and pushes the second pushing part 3212 so that the rotating piece 321 rotates in the unlocking direction.
因此,第一传动组件350的设置方式与第二传动组件360的设置方式可以相同,也可以不同。Therefore, the arrangement manner of the first transmission assembly 350 and the arrangement manner of the second transmission assembly 360 may be the same or different.
请参照图10-图17,在一些实施例中,为了清楚描述锁定装置1000的构成或结构间的动态配合关系,定义转动片1021和第二锁定件1022的枢转平面为第一面,定义锁扣限位挡板1070的滑动位移方向为第三方向X,该第三方向X垂直于第一面,定义锁扣拨板1044的滑动位移方向为第四方向Y,定义第一面内与第四方向Y垂直的方向为第五方向Z。Please refer to FIGS. 10-17 , in some embodiments, in order to clearly describe the composition of the locking device 1000 or the dynamic cooperation relationship between the structures, the pivot plane of the rotating piece 1021 and the second locking member 1022 is defined as the first plane, and the first plane is defined as The sliding displacement direction of the locking stopper 1070 is the third direction X, the third direction X is perpendicular to the first surface, the sliding displacement direction of the locking dial 1044 is defined as the fourth direction Y, and the first surface and The direction perpendicular to the fourth direction Y is the fifth direction Z.
如图10、图12、图13和图14所示,锁定组件1020主要包括相适配的转动片1021和第二锁定件1022,且两者可分别在第一面内枢转;转动片1021的第一旋转中心1021a和第二锁定件1022的第二旋转中心1022a间隔布置。在一些实施例中,转动片1021、第二锁定件1022和相应的枢转轴集成安装在塑胶底座1010上,再将塑胶底座1010上安装固定在壳体(即图2中对应的第二部件130)上,同时塑胶底座1010上设置有防撞套1011,用于适配第二锁定件1022的限位结构10224,构建对第二锁定件1022最大摆幅的可靠定位。当然,在其他具体应用中,相应的枢转轴可以直接固定安装在壳体上。As shown in Fig. 10, Fig. 12, Fig. 13 and Fig. 14, the locking assembly 1020 mainly includes a matching rotating piece 1021 and a second locking member 1022, and the two can pivot in the first plane respectively; the rotating piece 1021 The first rotation center 1021a of the second locking member 1022 and the second rotation center 1022a of the second locking member 1022 are arranged at intervals. In some embodiments, the rotating piece 1021, the second locking member 1022 and the corresponding pivot shaft are integrally installed on the plastic base 1010, and then the plastic base 1010 is installed and fixed on the housing (ie, the corresponding second part 130 in FIG. 2 ), and at the same time, the plastic base 1010 is provided with a bumper sleeve 1011 for adapting to the limiting structure 10224 of the second locking member 1022 to construct a reliable positioning of the maximum swing of the second locking member 1022 . Of course, in other specific applications, the corresponding pivot shaft can be directly fixedly installed on the housing.
在一些实施例中,锁定装置1000还可以包括锁芯组件1040a和驱动组件1040b,传动输出件包括锁扣拨板1044和锁扣拨块1033。锁扣拨板1044与锁芯组件1040a传动连接,且具有机械解锁输出端和机械开锁输出端。锁扣拨块1033与驱动组件1040b传动连接,且具有电子解锁输出端和电子开锁输出端。相应地,转动片1021具有机械开锁传动部和电子开锁传动部,机械开锁传动部用于与机械开锁输出端传动连接,电子开锁传动部用于与电子开锁输出端传动连接。锁扣限位挡板1070具有机械解锁联动部和电子解锁联动部,机械解锁联动部用于与机械解锁输出端传动连接,电子解锁联动部用于与电子解锁输出端传动连接。In some embodiments, the locking device 1000 may further include a lock cylinder assembly 1040 a and a driving assembly 1040 b, and the transmission output member includes a lock dial 1044 and a lock dial 1033 . The lock dial 1044 is in transmission connection with the lock cylinder assembly 1040a, and has a mechanical unlocking output end and a mechanical unlocking output end. The lock shifting block 1033 is in transmission connection with the driving assembly 1040b, and has an electronic unlock output terminal and an electronic unlock output terminal. Correspondingly, the rotating piece 1021 has a mechanical unlocking transmission part and an electronic unlocking transmission part, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is used for driving connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking transmission part is used for driving connection with the electronic unlocking output end. The lock limit baffle 1070 has a mechanical unlocking linkage part and an electronic unlocking linkage part, the mechanical unlocking linkage part is used for transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking linkage part is used for transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end.
如图10所示,在一些实施例中,锁芯组件1040a作为执行机械解锁操作的开锁机构,其开锁拨柱1040a-1带动锁扣拨板1044在第四方向Y上滑动位移,具体地,锁扣拨板1044具有开有第一长槽10441和第二长槽10442,第一长槽10441沿第三方向X开设,且开锁拨柱1040a-1插装在该第一长槽10441中,第二长槽10442沿第四方向Y开设,且壳体上的导向螺柱1040a-2插装在第二长槽10442中,以建立满足锁扣拨板1044左右运动的滑动副。As shown in FIG. 10 , in some embodiments, the lock cylinder assembly 1040a is used as an unlocking mechanism for performing mechanical unlocking operations, and its unlocking dial 1040a-1 drives the lock dial 1044 to slide in the fourth direction Y. Specifically, The lock dial 1044 has a first long slot 10441 and a second long slot 10442, the first long slot 10441 is opened along the third direction X, and the unlocking dial 1040a-1 is inserted into the first long slot 10441, The second long slot 10442 is opened along the fourth direction Y, and the guide stud 1040a-2 on the housing is inserted into the second long slot 10442 to establish a sliding pair that satisfies the left and right movement of the lock dial 1044 .
在一些实施例中,可以采用螺纹紧固件与壳体的导向螺柱旋紧,并且采用两组第二长槽10442、螺纹紧固件和壳体的导向螺柱进行充分紧固限位,保证开锁拨柱1040a-1带动锁扣拨板1044沿第四方向滑动位移时,不会上下翘起,保证锁扣拨板1044左右运动顺畅性。具有良好的作动性能。In some embodiments, threaded fasteners can be used to tighten the guide studs of the casing, and two sets of second long grooves 10442, threaded fasteners, and the guide studs of the casing can be used to fully fasten and limit, It is ensured that when the unlocking dial 1040 a - 1 drives the lock dial 1044 to slide and displace along the fourth direction, it will not tilt up and down, so as to ensure the smooth movement of the lock dial 1044 left and right. Has good actuation performance.
在一些实施例中,锁扣拨板1044为机械开锁输出驱动力路径上的传动输出件,其上设置有作为机械解锁输出端的压抵斜面10443和作为机械开锁输出端的拨头部10444,该压抵斜面10443朝向锁扣限位挡板1070设置,用于与锁扣限位挡板1070上顶升导柱1071适配实现解锁;拨头部10444沿第三方向X延伸,用于与转动片1021上的挡筋10217适配实现开锁。在其他具体实现中,锁芯组件1040a与锁扣拨板1044的传动方式,以及锁扣拨板1044相对于壳体A的滑动适配关系非局限于图中所示的结构;可以理解的是,只要能够将机械开锁驱动力以直线位移方式经由锁扣拨板1044输出均可。In some embodiments, the lock dial 1044 is a transmission output member on the output driving force path of mechanical unlocking, on which is provided a pressing inclined surface 10443 as an output end of mechanical unlocking and a dial head 10444 as an output end of mechanical unlocking. The resisting slope 10443 is set toward the lock stopper 1070, and is used to match with the lifting guide post 1071 on the lock stopper 1070 to unlock; The retaining rib 10217 on the 1021 is adapted to realize unlocking. In other specific implementations, the transmission mode of the lock cylinder assembly 1040a and the lock dial 1044, and the sliding fitting relationship of the lock dial 1044 relative to the housing A are not limited to the structure shown in the figure; it can be understood that , as long as the mechanical unlocking driving force can be output through the lock dial 1044 in a linear displacement manner.
如图11所示,在一些实施例中,驱动组件1040b作为执行电子开锁操作的开锁机构,其电机可通过电机支架固定在壳体上,并可驱动锁扣拨块1033转动。具体地,该锁扣拨块1033为电子开锁输出驱动路径上的传动输出件,其上设置有作为电子解锁输出端的导向倒角面10332和作为电子开锁输出端的拨 柱10331,拨柱10331位于导向倒角面10332的下方且朝向锁扣限位挡板1070设置,用于与锁扣限位挡板1070上顶升斜面1073适配实现解锁;拨柱10331沿第四方向Y延伸,用于与转动片1021上的拨动内凹圆弧面10216适配实现开锁。需要说明的是,锁扣拨块1033与锁扣限位挡板1070和转动片1021的传动方式,同样可根据实际需要进行选择,非局限于图中所示的结构。As shown in FIG. 11 , in some embodiments, the driving assembly 1040b is used as an unlocking mechanism for performing electronic unlocking operations, and its motor can be fixed on the housing through a motor bracket, and can drive the lock block 1033 to rotate. Specifically, the lock shifter 1033 is a transmission output member on the output driving path of the electronic unlocking, on which a guide chamfer 10332 as the output end of the electronic unlocking and a dial 10331 as the output end of the electronic unlocking are arranged, and the dial 10331 is located at the guide The bottom of the chamfered surface 10332 and facing the lock limit baffle 1070 is used to match with the jacking slope 1073 on the lock limit baffle 1070 to realize unlocking; the dial 10331 extends along the fourth direction Y and is used for The toggle concave arc surface 10216 on the rotating piece 1021 is adapted to realize unlocking. It should be noted that the transmission mode of the lock dial 1033 , the lock limit baffle 1070 and the rotating plate 1021 can also be selected according to actual needs, and is not limited to the structure shown in the figure.
结合前述传动关系,转动片1021的挡筋10217在第一面内延伸形成,可与锁扣拨板1044的拨头部10444(机械开锁输出端)传动连接,或者,转动片1021的拨动内凹圆弧面10216朝向驱动组件1040b设置,可与锁扣拨块1033的拨柱10331(电子开锁输出端)传动连接,在相应的使用状态下,带动转动片1021的第一施力部10213与第二锁定件1022的第二施力部10222脱离切换至开锁工作位。Combined with the aforementioned transmission relationship, the retaining rib 10217 of the rotating piece 1021 is extended and formed in the first plane, and can be connected to the dial head 10444 (the output end of the mechanical unlocking) of the lock dial 1044 in transmission, or, the dialing inner part of the rotating piece 1021 The concave arc surface 10216 is set towards the drive assembly 1040b, and can be connected with the shifting column 10331 (the output end of the electronic unlocking) of the lock shifting block 1033, and drives the first force applying part 10213 of the rotating piece 1021 and The second force applying portion 10222 of the second locking member 1022 is disengaged and switched to the unlocking working position.
在一些实施例中,转动片1021具有传动部、第一施力部10213和止动部10215,止动部10215用于与锁扣限位挡板1070的止挡部1072相抵形成止动限位副。传动部包括前述的挡筋10217(机械开锁传动部)和拨动内凹圆弧面10216(电子开锁传动部),两者分别用于机械开锁和电子开锁操作。第二锁定件1022具有与第一施力部10213适配的第二施力部10222,以及与第一锁定件1002适配的第一锁舌10221。并配置为:该转动片1021位于图13所示关锁工作位时,第二锁定件1022的第一锁舌10221可与第一锁定件1002构建关锁限位副,且转动片1021的第一施力部10213与第二锁定件1022的第二施力部10222相抵形成锁扣限位副,以限制第二锁定件1022转动至如图14所示的开锁工作位。In some embodiments, the rotating piece 1021 has a transmission part, a first force applying part 10213 and a stop part 10215, and the stop part 10215 is used to counteract the stop part 1072 of the lock limit baffle 1070 to form a stop limit vice. The transmission part includes the aforementioned retaining rib 10217 (mechanical unlocking transmission part) and the toggle concave arc surface 10216 (electronic unlocking transmission part), both of which are used for mechanical unlocking and electronic unlocking operations respectively. The second locking part 1022 has a second force application part 10222 adapted to the first force application part 10213 , and a first locking tongue 10221 adapted to the first locking part 1002 . And it is configured as follows: when the rotating piece 1021 is in the locking working position shown in FIG. A force applying portion 10213 is opposed to the second force applying portion 10222 of the second locking member 1022 to form a locking and limiting pair to limit the rotation of the second locking member 1022 to the unlocking position as shown in FIG. 14 .
在一些实施例中,锁定组件1020还可以包括牵引件1023,分别与转动片1021和第二锁定件1022连接;并配置为:转动片1021转动至开锁工作位的过程中,牵引件1023可产生形变储备弹性变形能,并可在第一施力部10213与第二施力部10222脱离后释放弹性变形能,带动第二锁定件1022转动至开锁工作位。在一些实施例中,牵引件1023可以采用拉簧。当然,牵引件1023也可采用其他结构形式,只要能够满足上述使用功能需要的弹性件均可。In some embodiments, the locking assembly 1020 may further include a traction piece 1023, which is respectively connected to the rotating piece 1021 and the second locking piece 1022; The elastic deformation energy is stored in the deformation, and the elastic deformation energy can be released after the first force application part 10213 is separated from the second force application part 10222 to drive the second locking part 1022 to rotate to the unlocking working position. In some embodiments, the traction member 1023 may adopt a tension spring. Of course, the traction member 1023 can also adopt other structural forms, as long as the elastic member can meet the above-mentioned use function requirements.
如图15所示,转动片限位机构包括锁扣限位挡板1070,该锁扣限位挡板1070为解锁执行部件,并可沿第三方向X滑动切换于解锁工作位和锁扣工作位。在一些实施例中,锁扣限位挡板1070通过支撑座1095固定安装在壳体上,以适应内部装配空间。在另一些实施例中,锁扣限位挡板1070也可直接固定安装在壳体上。As shown in Figure 15, the rotating piece limit mechanism includes a lock limit baffle 1070, the lock limit baffle 1070 is an unlocking execution part, and can be slid along the third direction X to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position. bit. In some embodiments, the locking stop baffle 1070 is fixedly installed on the housing through the support base 1095 to adapt to the internal assembly space. In some other embodiments, the locking limit baffle 1070 may also be fixedly installed on the housing directly.
锁扣限位挡板1070具有止挡部1072和联动部,联动部包括前述顶升导柱1071和顶升斜面1073,该顶升导柱1071在第一面内延伸以形成,顶升斜面1073朝向驱动组件1040b设置,分别用于机械解锁和电子开锁操作。具体配置为:锁扣限位挡板1070位于锁扣工作位时,其上的止挡部1072与转动片1021的止动部10215相抵形成止动限位副,以限制该转动片1021转动至开锁工作位。The locking limit baffle 1070 has a stopper 1072 and a linkage portion. The linkage portion includes the aforementioned lifting guide post 1071 and a jacking slope 1073. The lifting guide post 1071 extends in the first plane to form a lifting slope 1073 Set towards the drive assembly 1040b, respectively for mechanical unlocking and electronic unlocking operations. The specific configuration is: when the lock stopper 1070 is in the lock work position, the stopper 1072 on it is opposed to the stopper 10215 of the rotating piece 1021 to form a stop limit pair to limit the rotation of the rotating piece 1021 to Unlock work position.
结合前述传动关系,锁扣限位挡板1070的顶升导柱1071(机械解锁联动部)可与锁扣拨板1044的压抵斜面10443传动连接,或者,锁扣限位挡板1070的顶升斜面1073(电子解锁联动部)可与锁扣拨块1033的导向倒角面10332传动连接,在相应的使用状态下,带动锁扣限位挡板1070的止挡部1072与转动片1021的止动部10215脱离切换至开锁工作位。Combined with the aforementioned transmission relationship, the jacking guide column 1071 (mechanical unlocking linkage) of the lock limit baffle 1070 can be connected in transmission with the pressing slope 10443 of the lock dial 1044 , or the top of the lock limit baffle 1070 The ascending inclined surface 1073 (electronic unlocking linkage part) can be connected with the guide chamfer surface 10332 of the lock shift block 1033 in transmission, and in the corresponding use state, it drives the stopper 1072 of the lock limit baffle 1070 and the lock of the rotating piece 1021. The stopper 10215 is disengaged and switched to the unlocking working position.
如图15所示,转动片限位机构还包括导向柱1080和定位柱1090。在一些实施例中,导向柱1080和定位柱1090固定设置在支撑座1095。在另一些实施例中,对于不配置支撑座1095的组装方式,导向柱1080和定位柱1090也可直接固定在壳体上。As shown in FIG. 15 , the limit mechanism for the rotating piece further includes a guide post 1080 and a positioning post 1090 . In some embodiments, the guide post 1080 and the positioning post 1090 are fixedly disposed on the support base 1095 . In some other embodiments, for the assembling method without the support seat 1095, the guide post 1080 and the positioning post 1090 can also be directly fixed on the casing.
相应地,锁扣限位挡板1070的板体具有沿第三方向X开设的导向槽1074和定位槽1075,导向柱1080插装在导向槽1074中形成在第三方向X上的滑动适配副;定位柱1090插装在定位槽1075中且其端部伸出于该定位槽1075,当然,定位柱1090与定位槽1075之间也具备满足解锁需要的行程。Correspondingly, the plate body of the locking limit baffle 1070 has a guide groove 1074 and a positioning groove 1075 opened along the third direction X, and the guide post 1080 is inserted into the guide groove 1074 to form a sliding fit in the third direction X. Auxiliary; the positioning post 1090 is inserted into the positioning slot 1075 and its end protrudes from the positioning slot 1075. Of course, there is also a stroke between the positioning post 1090 and the positioning slot 1075 to meet the unlocking requirements.
此外,转动片限位机构还包括复位扭簧1085、且锁扣限位挡板1070在第四方向Y的两侧板沿,分别具有承托部1076;组装后,复位扭簧1085的簧体套装在定位柱1090的端部,且其两端侧的簧体分别搭抵在两个承托部1076上,并配置为:锁扣限位挡板滑动切换至解锁工作位时,该复位扭簧1085产生形变并储备弹性变形能,以提供锁扣限位挡板1070的复位作用力。In addition, the rotating piece limit mechanism also includes a return torsion spring 1085, and the two sides of the lock limit baffle 1070 in the fourth direction Y have supporting parts 1076 respectively; after assembly, the spring body of the return torsion spring 1085 It is set on the end of the positioning column 1090, and the spring bodies on both ends of it are respectively abutted on the two supporting parts 1076, and are configured such that when the lock limit baffle slides and switches to the unlocking position, the reset torque The spring 1085 is deformed and reserves elastic deformation energy to provide the reset force of the locking limit baffle 1070 .
为了进一步提高作动性能,在一些实施例中,第一施力部10213包括内凹弧面10213-1和锁扣平面10213-2,且两者间圆弧过渡连接;结合图13和图14所示,第二施力部10222包括顶紧平面10222-1和外凸弧面10222-2,且两者间圆弧过渡连接;转动片1021位于图4所示的关锁工作位时,通过该锁扣平面10213-2和顶紧平面10222-1相抵形成锁扣限位副,转动片1021位于图14所示的开锁工作位时,第一施力部10213的内凹弧面10213-1与第二施力部10222的外凸弧面10222-2接合适配。In order to further improve the actuation performance, in some embodiments, the first force application part 10213 includes a concave arc surface 10213-1 and a locking plane 10213-2, and the arc transition connection between the two; refer to Figure 13 and Figure 14 As shown, the second force application part 10222 includes a tightening plane 10222-1 and an outer convex arc surface 10222-2, and the two are connected by a circular arc transition; when the rotating piece 1021 is in the locked working position shown in FIG. The locking plane 10213-2 and the tightening plane 10222-1 are offset to form a locking and limiting pair. When the rotating piece 1021 is in the unlocking position shown in FIG. It fits well with the convex arc surface 10222-2 of the second force application part 10222.
为了进一步提高其安全可靠性,在一些实施例中,止动部10215可以为止动平面,在与第一面平行的投影面内(例如图13所示),转动片1021位于关锁工作位时,锁扣限位副施加在转动片1021上的作用力延长线L,位于转动片1021的枢转中心的旁侧,以限制该转动片1021转动切换至开锁工作位。换言之,两者咬合面的受力方向在其枢转轴的内侧,可保证在锁扣咬合状态下,外力强拉门体时具有有效自锁咬合作用。In order to further improve its safety and reliability, in some embodiments, the stopper 10215 can be a stopper plane. In the projection plane parallel to the first plane (such as shown in FIG. 13 ), when the rotating piece 1021 is in the lock working position The extension line L of the force exerted by the locking and limiting pair on the rotating piece 1021 is located on the side of the pivot center of the rotating piece 1021, so as to limit the turning of the rotating piece 1021 to the unlocking working position. In other words, the force direction of the occlusal surfaces of the two is on the inner side of the pivot axis, which can ensure effective self-locking occlusal effect when the door body is pulled by external force under the occlusal state of the lock.
请再参照图12、图13和图14,第二锁定件1022的本体开设有避让槽10223,该避让槽10223配置在第一锁舌10221的内侧,也即相对于第一锁定件1002端部的内侧。这样,缓冲第一锁定件1002向内冲击对,不会影响第二锁定件1022的功能。Please refer to Fig. 12, Fig. 13 and Fig. 14 again, the body of the second locking member 1022 is provided with an avoidance groove 10223, and the avoidance groove 10223 is arranged on the inner side of the first lock tongue 10221, that is, opposite to the end of the first locking member 1002 inside. In this way, buffering the inward impact of the first locking member 1002 will not affect the function of the second locking member 1022 .
为了提供开锁可靠性,在一些实施例中,本实施方式提供的锁定装置1000还可以在解锁行程与开锁行程之间设计行程差,以便锁扣限位挡板1070得到有效解除。In order to improve the reliability of unlocking, in some embodiments, the locking device 1000 provided in this embodiment can also design a stroke difference between the unlocking stroke and the unlocking stroke, so that the locking limit baffle 1070 can be effectively released.
对于机械解锁来说,图13所示关锁状态时,锁扣拨板1044的拨头部10444与转动片1021的挡筋10217之间具有预设距离M(图10)。在锁芯组件1040a的带动下,该锁扣拨板1044可沿第四方向Y滑动切换于开锁工作位和关锁工作位之间,锁扣拨板1044自开锁工作位滑动至关锁工作位的行程顺次包括解锁滑动行程和开锁滑动行程,并配置为:在解锁滑动行程,顶升导柱1071(机械解锁联动部)与压抵斜面10443(机械解锁输出端)传动连接;在开锁滑动行程,挡筋10217(机械开锁传动部)与拨头部10444(机械开锁输出端)传动连接。也就是说,预设距离M相当于解锁滑动行程,保证锁扣限位挡板1070得到有效解除,根据不同产品类型,该预设距离M可以为3mm至12mm。For mechanical unlocking, in the locked state shown in FIG. 13 , there is a preset distance M ( FIG. 10 ) between the toggle head 10444 of the lock dial 1044 and the retaining rib 10217 of the rotating piece 1021 . Driven by the lock cylinder assembly 1040a, the lock dial 1044 can slide along the fourth direction Y to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the lock dial 1044 slides from the unlocking working position to the locking working position The stroke includes the unlocking sliding stroke and the unlocking sliding stroke in sequence, and is configured as follows: in the unlocking sliding stroke, the jacking guide post 1071 (mechanical unlocking linkage part) is in transmission connection with the pressing inclined surface 10443 (mechanical unlocking output end); Stroke, retaining rib 10217 (mechanical unlocking transmission part) and dial head 10444 (mechanical unlocking output end) transmission connection. That is to say, the preset distance M is equivalent to the unlocking sliding stroke to ensure that the locking limit baffle 1070 is effectively released. According to different product types, the preset distance M can be 3 mm to 12 mm.
对于电子解锁来说,图11所示锁扣拨块1033的导向倒角面10332与拨柱10331具有预设夹角N。在驱动组件1040b的带动下,锁扣拨块1033可转动切换于开锁工作位和关锁工作位之间,该锁扣拨块1033自开锁工作位转动至关锁工作位的行程顺次包括解锁转动行程和开锁转动行程,并配置为:在解锁转动行程,顶升斜面1073(电子解锁联动部)与导向倒角面10332(电子解锁输出端)传动连接;在开锁转动行程,拨动内凹圆弧面10216(电子开锁传动部)与拨柱10331(电子开锁输出端)传动连接。也就是说,预设夹角N相当于解锁转动行程,保证锁扣限位挡板1070得到有效解除,根据不同产品类型,该预设夹角N可以为30°至90°。For electronic unlocking, the guiding chamfered surface 10332 of the lock shifting block 1033 shown in FIG. 11 has a predetermined included angle N with the shifting column 10331 . Driven by the drive assembly 1040b, the lock shifting block 1033 can be rotatably switched between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the stroke of the locking shifting block 1033 from the unlocking working position to the locking working position includes unlocking The rotation stroke and the unlocking rotation stroke are configured as follows: during the unlocking rotation stroke, the jacking slope 1073 (electronic unlocking linkage part) is connected to the guide chamfer surface 10332 (electronic unlocking output end); during the unlocking rotation stroke, the inner concave The circular arc surface 10216 (electronic unlocking transmission part) is connected with the driving column 10331 (electronic unlocking output end). That is to say, the preset included angle N is equivalent to the unlocking rotation stroke to ensure that the locking limit baffle 1070 is effectively released. According to different product types, the preset included angle N can be 30° to 90°.
这样,在机械传动路径和电子传动路径上,用于开锁的工作行程位于解锁工作行程之后,从而在锁扣限位挡板1070得以有效解除限位后,再执行第一锁舌10221开锁操作,确保提高本方案解锁开锁操作的可靠性。In this way, on the mechanical transmission path and the electronic transmission path, the working stroke for unlocking is located after the unlocking working stroke, so that the unlocking operation of the first lock bolt 10221 is performed after the locking limit baffle 1070 is effectively released from the limit. Ensure to improve the reliability of the unlocking and unlocking operation of the scheme.
下面结合附图简要说明机械开锁功能和智能开锁功能的实现过程。The realization process of the mechanical unlocking function and the intelligent unlocking function will be briefly described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
锁定装置1000的机械开锁功能的实现,请参见图16所示的机械开锁过程示意图。For the realization of the mechanical unlocking function of the locking device 1000, please refer to the schematic diagram of the mechanical unlocking process shown in FIG. 16 .
首先,图16中(a)所示为锁定状态。锁芯组件1040a转动,通过开锁拨柱1040a-1带动锁扣拨板1044向左运动,此过程中,锁扣拨板1044上的压抵斜面10443作用于锁扣限位挡板1070上顶升导柱1071,将锁扣限位挡板1070顶起至其上的止挡部1072与转动片1021的止动部10215脱离,也即图16中(b)所示的自转动片1021与壳体之间的缝隙抽出;同时,锁扣拨板1044上的拨头部10444与转动片1021上的挡筋10217接触。锁扣拨板1044继续向左运动,并带动转动片1021顺时转动,直至转动片1021上的锁扣平面10213-2与第二锁定件1022上的顶紧平面10222-1脱离,如图16中(c)所示。第二锁定件1022在牵引件1023的作用下,顺时转动,第一锁定件1002从第一锁舌10221上抽出,如图16中(d)所示,完成开盖解锁。First, Fig. 16(a) shows the locked state. The lock cylinder assembly 1040a rotates, and the lock dial 1044 moves to the left through the unlocking dial 1040a-1. During this process, the pressing slope 10443 on the lock dial 1044 acts on the lock limit baffle 1070 to lift up The guide post 1071, the stopper 1072 on which the lock stopper 1070 is pushed up, is separated from the stopper 10215 of the rotating piece 1021, that is, the self-rotating piece 1021 and the shell shown in (b) of FIG. 16 At the same time, the dial head 10444 on the lock dial 1044 contacts the retaining rib 10217 on the rotating piece 1021 . The locking dial 1044 continues to move to the left, and drives the rotating piece 1021 to rotate clockwise until the locking plane 10213-2 on the rotating piece 1021 is separated from the tightening plane 10222-1 on the second locking member 1022, as shown in Figure 16 Shown in (c). The second locking member 1022 rotates clockwise under the action of the traction member 1023, and the first locking member 1002 is pulled out from the first lock tongue 10221, as shown in (d) of FIG. 16 , and the cover is opened and unlocked.
机械开锁完成后,锁芯组件1040a上的开锁拨柱1040a-1回转复位,带动锁扣拨板1044复位。锁扣限位挡板1070在复位扭簧1085的作用下,则其止挡部1072下插至转动片1021与壳体A之间的缝隙,也即止挡部1072与锁扣平面10213-2相抵;待箱盖再次上锁,第一锁定件1002下压第二锁定件1022的第一锁舌10221,第二锁定件1022在第一锁定件1002下压的作用下逆时转动,同时通过牵引件1023带动转动片1021逆时运动,转动片1021上的第一施力部10213与锁舌板上的顶紧平面10222-1重新压抵,实现第二锁定件1022上锁;与此同时,转动片1021与壳体B之间的预留距离M重新形成。After the mechanical unlocking is completed, the unlocking dial 1040a-1 on the lock cylinder assembly 1040a is rotated and reset, driving the lock dial 1044 to reset. Under the action of the return torsion spring 1085, the stopper 1072 of the stopper 1070 is inserted into the gap between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing A, that is, the stopper 1072 and the lock plane 10213-2 offset; when the lid is locked again, the first locking member 1002 presses down the first bolt 10221 of the second locking member 1022, and the second locking member 1022 rotates counterclockwise under the action of the pressing down of the first locking member 1002, while passing The traction piece 1023 drives the rotating piece 1021 to move counterclockwise, and the first force application part 10213 on the rotating piece 1021 is pressed against the pressing plane 10222-1 on the bolt plate again to realize the locking of the second locking piece 1022; at the same time , the reserved distance M between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing B is re-formed.
锁定装置1000的智能开锁功能的实现,请参见图17所示的电子开锁过程示意图。为了清楚示出相关构件或结构的动态配合关系,图17中的各图以去除锁芯组件1040a和锁扣拨板1044的方式形成。For the realization of the intelligent unlocking function of the locking device 1000, please refer to the schematic diagram of the electronic unlocking process shown in FIG. 17 . In order to clearly show the dynamic matching relationship of related components or structures, each figure in FIG. 17 is formed by removing the lock cylinder assembly 1040 a and the lock dial 1044 .
首先,图17中(a)所示为关盖状态,也即关锁状态。驱动组件1040b带动锁扣拨块1033逆时针转动,锁扣拨块1033上的导向倒角面10332作用于锁扣限位挡板1070上的顶升斜面1073,将锁扣限位挡板1070顶起至其上的止挡部1072与转动片1021的止动部10215脱离,也即图17中(b)所示的自转动片1021与壳体A之间的缝隙抽出;同时,锁扣拨块1033继续逆时针转动,锁扣拨块1033上的拨柱10331作用于转动片1021上的拨动内凹圆弧面10216,并顶动转动片1021顺时针转动,直至转动片1021上的锁扣平面10213-2与第二锁定件1022上的顶紧平面10222-1相脱离,如图17中(c)所示。第二锁定件1022在牵引件1023的作用下,顺时转动,第一锁定件1002从第一锁舌10221上抽出,如图17中(d)所示,完成开盖解锁。First, Fig. 17 (a) shows the state of closing the cover, that is, the state of locking. The driving assembly 1040b drives the lock dial 1033 to rotate counterclockwise, and the guide chamfer 10332 on the lock dial 1033 acts on the jacking slope 1073 on the lock limit baffle 1070, pushing the lock limit baffle 1070 to the top. The stop part 1072 raised thereon is disengaged from the stop part 10215 of the rotating piece 1021, that is, it is pulled out from the gap between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing A shown in (b) in FIG. 17; Block 1033 continues to rotate counterclockwise, and the shifting column 10331 on the lock dial 1033 acts on the concave arc surface 10216 on the rotating piece 1021, and pushes the rotating piece 1021 to rotate clockwise until the lock on the rotating piece 1021 The fastening plane 10213-2 is separated from the fastening plane 10222-1 on the second locking member 1022, as shown in (c) of FIG. 17 . The second locking member 1022 rotates clockwise under the action of the traction member 1023, and the first locking member 1002 is pulled out from the first lock tongue 10221, as shown in (d) of FIG. 17 , and the cover is opened and unlocked.
开锁完成后,驱动组件1040b带动锁扣拨块1033继续逆时针转动,直至接触到零位传感器,锁扣拨块1033停止转动复位完成。这里,零位传感器的设置位置可根据内部空间进行选择,只要锁扣拨块1033与其适配部位能够在设计行程内与其接触均可。锁扣限位挡板1070在复位扭簧1085的作用下,则其止挡部1072下插至转动片1021与壳体之间的缝隙,也即止挡部1072与锁扣平面10213-2相抵;待门体再 次上锁,第一锁定件1002下压第二锁定件1022的第一锁舌10221,第二锁定件1022在第一锁定件1002下压的作用下逆时转动,同时通过牵引件1023带动转动片1021逆时运动,转动片1021上的第一施力部10213与锁舌板上的顶紧平面10222-1重新压抵,实现第二锁定件1022上锁。After the unlocking is completed, the driving component 1040b drives the buckle dial 1033 to continue to rotate counterclockwise until it touches the zero position sensor, and the lock dial 1033 stops rotating and resets to complete. Here, the installation position of the zero sensor can be selected according to the internal space, as long as the locking shift block 1033 and its matching part can be in contact with it within the designed stroke. Under the action of the reset torsion spring 1085, the stopper 1072 of the stopper 1070 is inserted into the gap between the rotating piece 1021 and the housing, that is, the stopper 1072 is offset against the lock plane 10213-2 ;When the door is locked again, the first locking piece 1002 presses down the first bolt 10221 of the second locking piece 1022, and the second locking piece 1022 rotates counterclockwise under the action of the first locking piece 1002 pressing down, and at the same time, it is pulled The piece 1023 drives the rotating piece 1021 to move counterclockwise, and the first force applying portion 10213 on the rotating piece 1021 is pressed against the pressing plane 10222-1 on the bolt plate again, so as to realize the locking of the second locking piece 1022 .
需要说明的是,智能解锁组件330与智能解锁组件1030的结构功能相似,以下以智能解锁组件300为例进行说明,智能解锁组件1030的相关内容不再赘述。请参照图3-图9,在一些实施例中,智能解锁组件330可以可拆卸的设置在安装支架310上,其中,可拆卸的设置方式理解为能够进行拆卸,例如:螺钉连接、螺栓连接、卡扣连接等等结构。在另一些实施例中,智能解锁组件330也可以不可拆卸的设置在安装支架310上,其中,不可拆卸的设置方式理解为不能够进行拆卸,例如:铆接、焊接、一体成型等结构。It should be noted that the structure and function of the smart unlocking component 330 and the smart unlocking component 1030 are similar, and the following uses the smart unlocking component 300 as an example for illustration, and the relevant content of the smart unlocking component 1030 will not be repeated. Please refer to FIGS. 3-9 , in some embodiments, the smart unlocking assembly 330 can be detachably arranged on the mounting bracket 310, wherein the detachable arrangement means that it can be disassembled, for example: screw connection, bolt connection, Snap connection and so on structure. In some other embodiments, the smart unlocking component 330 may also be non-detachably arranged on the mounting bracket 310 , wherein the non-detachable arrangement means that it cannot be disassembled, such as riveting, welding, integral molding and other structures.
智能解锁组件330区别于传统的钥匙开锁的机械解锁组件340,例如通过密码解锁、人脸识别解锁、指纹解锁、NFC解锁、卡解锁、静脉解锁、终端解锁等均可以理解为智能解锁,而具有这种功能的解锁组件即可理解为智能解锁组件330。The intelligent unlocking component 330 is different from the traditional key unlocking mechanical unlocking component 340, such as password unlocking, face recognition unlocking, fingerprint unlocking, NFC unlocking, card unlocking, vein unlocking, terminal unlocking, etc. can be understood as intelligent unlocking, and has The unlocking component with this function can be understood as the smart unlocking component 330 .
智能解锁组件330的设置方式有多种,在一些实施例中,智能解锁组件330可以采用第一种设置方式:智能解锁组件330可以包括驱动件331、控制器和验证信息采集部件,其中,驱动件331固定在安装支架310上,当验证信息采集部件采集的解锁信息验证通过后,控制器控制驱动件331输出智能解锁动作。上述解锁信息可以包括但不限于密码、人脸信息、指纹信息、NFC信息和/或静脉信息等等。There are many ways to set up the smart unlocking component 330. In some embodiments, the smart unlocking component 330 can adopt the first setting way: the smart unlocking component 330 can include a driver 331, a controller and a verification information collection component, wherein the driver The component 331 is fixed on the mounting bracket 310. When the unlocking information collected by the verification information collection component is verified, the controller controls the driving component 331 to output an intelligent unlocking action. The above-mentioned unlocking information may include but not limited to password, face information, fingerprint information, NFC information and/or vein information and the like.
针对不同的解锁信息本说明书的实施例可适配不同的验证信息采集部件,例如,当解锁信息为密码时,验证信息采集部件可以为键盘;当解锁信息为人脸信息或者指纹信息时,验证信息采集部件可以为生物采集部件;当解锁信息为NFC信息时,验证信息采集部件可以为NFC采集部件。For different unlocking information, the embodiments of this specification can be adapted to different verification information collection components. For example, when the unlocking information is a password, the verification information collection component can be a keyboard; when the unlocking information is face information or fingerprint information, the verification information collection The acquisition component may be a biometric acquisition component; when the unlocking information is NFC information, the verification information acquisition component may be an NFC acquisition component.
在一些实施例中,验证信息采集部件为键盘和/或生物信息采集部件。In some embodiments, the verification information collection component is a keyboard and/or a biological information collection component.
生物采集部件可以包括人脸采集器和/或指纹采集器。其中,人脸采集器主要包括摄像头、CCD相机等能够采集图像信息的结构。当生物采集部件采集到的人脸信息、指纹信息、静脉信息验证通过后,智能解锁组件330输出智能解锁动作。The biological collection component may include a face collector and/or a fingerprint collector. Wherein, the face collector mainly includes structures capable of collecting image information such as a camera and a CCD camera. When the face information, fingerprint information, and vein information collected by the biological collection component are verified, the intelligent unlocking component 330 outputs an intelligent unlocking action.
驱动件331能够为智能解锁组件330提供动力。在一些实施例中,驱动件331可以为电动机液压马达。当驱动件331为电动机时,该电动机可以为能够输出直线运动的电动机,或者为能够输出旋转运动的电动机。驱动件331直接或者间接可拆卸的设置在安装支架310上,其中,在间接的可拆卸的设置方式中,驱动件331可以通过固定板332可拆卸的安装在安装支架310。The driving member 331 can provide power for the smart unlocking component 330 . In some embodiments, the driver 331 may be an electric hydraulic motor. When the driving member 331 is a motor, the motor may be a motor capable of outputting linear motion, or a motor capable of outputting rotational motion. The driver 331 is directly or indirectly detachably disposed on the installation bracket 310 , wherein, in the indirect detachable arrangement, the driver 331 can be detachably installed on the installation bracket 310 through the fixing plate 332 .
在一些实施例中,在智能解锁组件330的第一种设置方式中,智能解锁组件330可以包括驱动件331、可操作以控制驱动件的操作的电子控制器,以及与电子控制器电连通的生物传感器和组合键盘中的至少一个。当采集到生物信息和/或密码验证通过后,电子控制器控制驱动件输出智能解锁动作。或者直接操作电子控制器的解锁按键,电子控制器控制驱动件输出只能解锁动作。In some embodiments, in the first configuration mode of the smart unlocking component 330, the smart unlocking component 330 may include a driving part 331, an electronic controller operable to control the operation of the driving part, and an electronic controller electrically communicated with the electronic controller. At least one of a biometric sensor and a combination keyboard. When the biological information is collected and/or the password verification is passed, the electronic controller controls the driving part to output an intelligent unlocking action. Or directly operate the unlock button of the electronic controller, and the electronic controller can only control the output of the driving part to unlock the action.
为了给智能解锁组件330提供电源,该智能解锁组件330可外接电源或者智能解锁组件330还配置有为智能解锁组件330提供电源的电池仓。In order to provide power for the smart unlocking component 330 , the smart unlocking component 330 can be connected to an external power supply or the smart unlocking component 330 is also configured with a battery compartment that provides power for the smart unlocking component 330 .
电池仓中设置有电池,该电池为可替换结构的电池或者为不可替换结构的电池。当为可替换结构的电池时,该电池仓为能够开放式设计;当为不可替换结构的电池时,该电池仓为不可开放式设计。A battery is arranged in the battery compartment, and the battery is a battery with a replaceable structure or a battery with a non-replaceable structure. When it is a battery with a replaceable structure, the battery compartment is of an openable design; when it is a battery with a non-replaceable structure, the battery compartment is of a non-openable design.
在一些实施例中,电池仓的内的电池为蓄电池。In some embodiments, the batteries in the battery compartment are accumulators.
为了拓展该锁定装置300的适用范围,该智能解锁组件330还包括通讯部件,通讯部件接收终端设备的解锁信息验证通过后,控制器控制驱动件331输出智能解锁动作。In order to expand the scope of application of the locking device 300, the intelligent unlocking component 330 also includes a communication component. After the communication component receives and verifies the unlocking information of the terminal device, the controller controls the driver 331 to output an intelligent unlocking action.
终端设备与通讯部件的信息交互通过网络和服务器实现。网络用以在终端设备和服务器之间提供通信链路的介质。网络可以包括各种连接类型,例如有线、无线通信链路或者光纤电缆等等。The information interaction between the terminal equipment and the communication components is realized through the network and the server. A medium used by a network to provide a communication link between an end device and a server. A network may include various connection types such as wires, wireless communication links, or fiber optic cables, among others.
用户可以使用终端设备通过网络与服务器交互,以接收或发送消息等。终端设备上可以安装有各种客户端应用。Users can use terminal devices to interact with servers through the network to receive or send messages, etc. Various client applications may be installed on the terminal device.
终端设备可以是硬件,也可以是软件。当终端设备为硬件时,可以是各种电子设备,包括但不限于智能手机、平板电脑、可穿戴设备、车载设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本、膝上型便携计算机、台式计算机等电子设备。当终端设备为软件时,可以安装在上述所列举的电子设备中。其可以实现成多个软件或软件模块(例如用来提供分布式服务),也可以实现成单个软件或软件模块。本说明书实施例对电子设备的具体类型不作任何限制。Terminal equipment can be hardware or software. When the terminal device is hardware, it can be various electronic devices, including but not limited to smartphones, tablet computers, wearable devices, vehicle-mounted devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) devices, Ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), netbook, laptop portable computer, desktop computer and other electronic equipment. When the terminal device is software, it can be installed in the electronic devices listed above. It can be implemented as a plurality of software or software modules (for example, to provide distributed services), or as a single software or software module. The embodiment of this specification does not impose any limitation on the specific type of the electronic device.
服务器可以是提供各种服务的服务器,例如对终端设备提供支持的后台服务器。后台服务器可以响应于接收到终端设备发送的信息获取请求,对该请求进行分析等处理,得到处理结果(例如待推送信息),并返回该处理结果。The server may be a server that provides various services, such as a background server that provides support for terminal equipment. In response to receiving the information acquisition request sent by the terminal device, the background server may analyze and process the request, obtain a processing result (for example, information to be pushed), and return the processing result.
需要说明的是,服务器可以是硬件,也可以是软件。当服务器为硬件时,可以实现成多个服务器 组成的分布式服务器集群,也可以实现成单个服务器。当服务器为软件时,可以实现成多个软件或软件模块(例如用来提供分布式服务),也可以实现成单个软件或软件模块。在此不做具体限定。It should be noted that the server may be hardware or software. When the server is hardware, it can be implemented as a distributed server cluster composed of multiple servers, or as a single server. When the server is software, it can be implemented as multiple software or software modules (for example, for providing distributed services), or as a single software or software module. No specific limitation is made here.
在一些实施例中,机械解锁组件340可以为传统的钥匙解锁的锁芯组件,机械解锁组件340(即锁芯组件)可以包括安装部件343、锁头341和锁芯342,其中,安装部件343可拆卸的安装在安装支架310上,锁头341固定在安装部件343上,锁芯342位于锁头341的内部,锁芯342露出锁头341的部分作为解锁组件的动力输出端。In some embodiments, the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 can be a traditional key unlocked lock cylinder assembly, and the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 (ie, the lock cylinder assembly) can include a mounting part 343, a lock head 341 and a lock cylinder 342, wherein the mounting part 343 Removably installed on the mounting bracket 310, the lock head 341 is fixed on the installation part 343, the lock core 342 is located inside the lock head 341, and the part of the lock core 342 exposed from the lock head 341 is used as the power output end of the unlocking assembly.
在一些实施例中,锁头341的一端直接可拆卸的固定在安装支架310上,或者锁头341的一端通过安装部件343可拆卸的安装在安装支架310上。而安装部件343与锁头341的设置方式为可拆卸连接或者不可拆卸连接。In some embodiments, one end of the lock head 341 is directly detachably fixed on the installation bracket 310 , or one end of the lock head 341 is detachably installed on the installation bracket 310 through the installation component 343 . The mounting part 343 and the locking head 341 are arranged in a detachable connection or a non-detachable connection.
安装支架310的作用是支撑锁定组件320、智能解锁组件330和机械解锁组件340,安装支架310的设置形式有多种,只要能够实现支撑作用的结构均可以理解为安装支架310。在一些实施例中,安装支架310主要包括顶板311、侧板312、第一支撑板313和第二支撑板314,其中,顶板311和侧板312呈角度连接,第一支撑板313和第二支撑板314相对设置在顶板311和侧板312的两端,顶板311和侧板312衔接的部位设置有容纳第一锁定件302通过的锁定通道315,且顶板311、侧板312、第一支撑板313和第二支撑板314围成安装智能解锁组件330、机械解锁组件340和锁定组件320的安装空间。The function of the mounting bracket 310 is to support the locking component 320 , the intelligent unlocking component 330 and the mechanical unlocking component 340 . In some embodiments, the mounting bracket 310 mainly includes a top plate 311, a side plate 312, a first support plate 313 and a second support plate 314, wherein the top plate 311 and the side plate 312 are connected at an angle, and the first support plate 313 and the second support plate 313 are connected at an angle. The support plate 314 is relatively arranged at the two ends of the top plate 311 and the side plate 312, and the joint of the top plate 311 and the side plate 312 is provided with a locking channel 315 for accommodating the passage of the first locking member 302, and the top plate 311, the side plate 312, the first support The plate 313 and the second supporting plate 314 enclose the installation space for installing the intelligent unlocking component 330 , the mechanical unlocking component 340 and the locking component 320 .
应用于锁定装置300实际应用时,顶板311可以为露出的结构。在一些实施例中,机械解锁组件340可以设置在顶板311。或者实际应用时侧板312为露出的结构,机械解锁组件340可以设置在侧板312。而智能解锁组件330和锁定组件320可以设置在顶板311或者侧板312上,较优的设置在侧板312,且锁定组件320与锁定通道315相对应。When applied to the actual application of the locking device 300, the top plate 311 may be an exposed structure. In some embodiments, a mechanical unlocking assembly 340 may be disposed on the top plate 311 . Or in actual application, the side plate 312 is an exposed structure, and the mechanical unlocking component 340 can be arranged on the side plate 312 . The smart unlocking component 330 and the locking component 320 can be arranged on the top plate 311 or the side plate 312 , preferably on the side plate 312 , and the locking component 320 corresponds to the locking channel 315 .
需要说明的是,上述第一方向和第二方向可以重合,也可以不重合,当机械解锁组件300设置在顶板311上时,第二方向可以理解为顶板311的长度方向;当智能解锁组件200设置在侧板312上时,第一方向可以理解为侧板312所确定平面旋转的方向,例如为顺时针方向。It should be noted that the above-mentioned first direction and the second direction may or may not coincide. When the mechanical unlocking component 300 is set on the top plate 311, the second direction can be understood as the length direction of the top plate 311; when the smart unlocking component 200 When it is arranged on the side plate 312 , the first direction can be understood as the rotation direction of the plane defined by the side plate 312 , for example, clockwise.
在一些实施例中,安装支架310还可以包括和电源适配的应急充电口,电源耗尽时,可以通过应急充电口为锁定装置300提供电源。In some embodiments, the mounting bracket 310 may also include an emergency charging port compatible with the power source, and when the power source is exhausted, the locking device 300 may be provided with power through the emergency charging port.
为了提高锁定装置300的安全性,安装支架310可以还包括盖板,盖板至少一端可拆卸的与安装部件或者安装支架连接,且盖板能够覆盖机械解锁组件340的锁孔342a和/或应急充电口。在通常状态下,无法看到锁孔342a和应急充电口,既保证了美观性,又提高了安全性。In order to improve the safety of the locking device 300, the mounting bracket 310 may further include a cover plate, at least one end of which is detachably connected to the mounting component or the mounting bracket, and the cover plate can cover the lock hole 342a of the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 and/or the emergency charging port. In a normal state, the lock hole 342a and the emergency charging port cannot be seen, which not only ensures the aesthetics, but also improves the safety.
在一些实施例中,锁定装置300具体的结构实现方式可以参照以下说明:门体上有第一锁定件302;在锁定装置300中,锁定组件320包括转动片321、第二锁定件322和牵引件323,智能解锁组件330包括驱动件331,机械解锁组件340包括锁头341、锁芯342和安装部件343,第一传动组件350包括旋转拨块351,第二传动组件360宝库转动拨片361和第一连杆362。In some embodiments, the specific structural implementation of the locking device 300 can refer to the following description: there is a first locking member 302 on the door body; 323, the intelligent unlocking assembly 330 includes a driving member 331, the mechanical unlocking assembly 340 includes a lock head 341, a lock cylinder 342 and a mounting part 343, the first transmission assembly 350 includes a rotating dial 351, and the second transmission assembly 360 treasure house rotating dial 361 and the first link 362.
如图8和图9所示,锁定装置300的钥匙开门体的模式(即机械解锁模式),锁芯342上插入钥匙旋转,带动转动拨片361顺时针旋转90°,转动拨片361的凸起部在第一滑槽3621a内滑动,带动第一连杆362运动,第一连杆362上有折弯挡边,折弯挡边会拉着转动片321绕第一旋转中心321a顺时针旋转,转动片321上有立柱,拉簧一端挂在转动片321的立柱上,另一端挂在第二锁定件322的立柱上,外力作用于转动片321突起位置,使其绕第一旋转中心321a顺时针旋转时,随着转动片321旋转角度增大,转动片321对第二锁定件322顺时针方向的限位脱离,拉簧伸长,拉簧力作用于第二锁定件322上,第二锁定件322在拉簧力作用下绕着第二旋转中心322a顺时针方向转动,从而使门体脱离第一锁舌3221,门体在合页的作用下自动弹簧,实现门体打开。As shown in Figures 8 and 9, in the mode of the key of the locking device 300 to open the door body (that is, the mechanical unlocking mode), the key is inserted into the lock cylinder 342 and rotated, which drives the rotating plectrum 361 to rotate clockwise 90°, and the protrusion of the rotating plectrum 361 The starting part slides in the first chute 3621a, driving the first connecting rod 362 to move, and the first connecting rod 362 has a bent rib, and the bent rib will pull the rotating piece 321 to rotate clockwise around the first rotation center 321a , there is a column on the rotating piece 321, one end of the tension spring is hung on the column of the rotating piece 321, and the other end is hung on the column of the second locking member 322, and the external force acts on the protruding position of the rotating piece 321 to make it rotate around the first rotation center 321a When rotating clockwise, as the rotation angle of the rotating piece 321 increases, the clockwise limit of the rotating piece 321 on the second locking member 322 is disengaged, the extension spring is stretched, and the force of the extension spring acts on the second locking member 322. The second locking member 322 rotates clockwise around the second rotation center 322a under the force of the tension spring, so that the door is separated from the first bolt 3221, and the door automatically springs under the action of the hinge to open the door.
如图8和图9所示,锁定装置300的密码、指纹开门模式(即智能解锁模式),系统验证了密码或指纹验证通过后,会触发电动机驱动信号,使电动机逆时针旋转,电动机的输出轴呈D型,与旋转拨块351的D型孔配合,并带动旋转拨块351逆时针方向转动,旋转拨块351的有圆柱形突出,旋转拨块351的圆柱面外径与转动片321的圆弧处接触,拔动转动片321绕第二旋转中心322a顺时针旋转,同理,随着转动片321旋转角度增大,转动片321对第二锁定件322顺时针方向的限位脱离,拉簧伸长,拉簧力作用于第二锁定件322上,第二锁定件322在拉簧力作用下绕着第二旋转中心322a顺时针方向转动,从而使门体脱离钩勾,门体在合页的作用下自动弹簧,实现门体打开。As shown in Figure 8 and Figure 9, the password and fingerprint door opening mode of the locking device 300 (that is, the intelligent unlocking mode), after the system has verified the password or fingerprint verification, it will trigger the motor drive signal, so that the motor rotates counterclockwise, and the output of the motor The shaft is D-shaped, and matches with the D-shaped hole of the rotary dial 351, and drives the rotary dial 351 to rotate counterclockwise. The arc of the rotating piece 321 is pulled to rotate clockwise around the second rotation center 322a. Similarly, as the rotation angle of the rotating piece 321 increases, the clockwise limit of the rotating piece 321 on the second locking member 322 is released. , the extension spring stretches, and the extension spring force acts on the second locking member 322, and the second locking member 322 rotates clockwise around the second rotation center 322a under the action of the extension spring force, so that the door body is detached from the hook, and the door The body automatically springs under the action of the hinge to realize the door opening.
如图6和图7所示,门体锁定模式,外力压门体,门体挂勾的上锁接触点会压到第二锁定件322的上锁接触点,使第二锁定件322绕第二旋转中心322a逆时针旋转,第二锁定件322卡住门体的挂勾,同时拉簧拉动转动片321逆时针旋转,到达与第二锁定件322配合的限位缺口,实现上锁并限位。As shown in Figures 6 and 7, in the door lock mode, when the door is pressed by an external force, the locking contact point of the door body hook will be pressed against the locking contact point of the second locking member 322, so that the second locking member 322 wraps around the second locking member. The second rotation center 322a rotates counterclockwise, and the second locking member 322 catches the hook of the door body. At the same time, the tension spring pulls the rotating piece 321 to rotate counterclockwise, and reaches the limit gap matched with the second locking member 322 to realize locking and locking. bit.
本说明书所披露的锁定装置300、锁定装置1000及对应的箱体结构可能带来的有益效果包括但不限于:(1)智能解锁组件和机械解锁组件两种解锁模式互不干扰,降低了锁定装置的故障率,提高了安全性能;(2)两种解锁模式增强了锁定装置的使用方便性。需要说明的是,不同实施例可能产生的有益效果 不同,在不同的实施例里,可能产生的有益效果可以是以上任意一种或几种的组合,也可以是其他任何可能获得的有益效果。The possible beneficial effects of the locking device 300, the locking device 1000 and the corresponding box structure disclosed in this manual include but are not limited to: (1) The two unlocking modes of the intelligent unlocking component and the mechanical unlocking component do not interfere with each other, reducing the need for locking The failure rate of the device improves the safety performance; (2) two unlocking modes enhance the convenience of use of the locking device. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
需要说明的是,图3-17中锁定装置不仅可以应用于图2所示的箱体,也可以应用于图23-24以及图34所示的智能锁盒,还可以适用于上文所述的多种类型的可开合设备。It should be noted that the locking device in Figure 3-17 can be applied not only to the box shown in Figure 2, but also to the smart lock box shown in Figure 23-24 and Figure 34, and can also be applied to the above-mentioned Various types of openable devices.
图18是本说明书的开合结构的一个实施例的立体图;图19是本说明书的开合结构的一个实施例的爆炸图;图20是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的缓冲结构的主视图。Figure 18 is a perspective view of an embodiment of the opening and closing structure of this specification; Figure 19 is an exploded view of an embodiment of the opening and closing structure of this specification; Figure 20 is a front view of a buffer structure according to some embodiments of this specification .
如图2、图18-图20所示,本实施例提供的一种开合结构1800,其可以用于可闭合设备100,开合结构1800可以是上文的连接件120。也就是说,开合结构1800可以作为可闭合设备100的连接件120对第一部件110与第二部件130进行连接,第一部件110与第二部件130通过开合结构1800枢转连接。开合结构1800可以包括第一合页1801、第二合页1802、第一弹性件1803和缓冲结构1804,其中,第一合页1801和第二合页1802枢转连接;第一弹性件1803设置在第一合页1801和第二合页1802之间,第一弹性件1803能够驱动第一合页1801和/或第二合页1802在打开方向或者关闭方向转动;缓冲结构1804设置于第一合页1801的外侧面的全部或部分,且缓冲结构1804延伸出第一合页1801的外侧面的部分能够与第二合页1802的外侧面抵接并产生可恢复的形变。As shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 18-FIG. 20, this embodiment provides an opening and closing structure 1800, which can be used in the closable device 100, and the opening and closing structure 1800 can be the above-mentioned connector 120. That is to say, the opening and closing structure 1800 can be used as the connecting member 120 of the closeable device 100 to connect the first part 110 and the second part 130 , and the first part 110 and the second part 130 are pivotally connected through the opening and closing structure 1800 . The opening and closing structure 1800 may include a first hinge 1801, a second hinge 1802, a first elastic member 1803 and a buffer structure 1804, wherein the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are pivotally connected; the first elastic member 1803 Arranged between the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, the first elastic member 1803 can drive the first hinge 1801 and/or the second hinge 1802 to rotate in the opening direction or the closing direction; the buffer structure 1804 is arranged on the second hinge All or part of the outer surface of a hinge 1801 , and the part of the buffer structure 1804 extending beyond the outer surface of the first hinge 1801 can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 and produce recoverable deformation.
本说明书实施例提供的开合结构1800和箱体设备,在第一合页1801的外侧面设置缓冲结构1804,该缓冲结构1804向外界延伸并能够与第二合页1802抵接,当打开开合结构1800时,第二合页1802的外侧面能够与缓冲结构1804抵接,实现了限位、缓冲和降噪的目的,因此,操作体验比较好。In the opening and closing structure 1800 and box equipment provided in the embodiment of this specification, a buffer structure 1804 is provided on the outer surface of the first hinge 1801. The buffer structure 1804 extends to the outside and can abut against the second hinge 1802. When the hinge structure 1800 is used, the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 can abut against the cushioning structure 1804, thereby realizing the purpose of position limitation, cushioning and noise reduction, so the operating experience is better.
需要说明的是,第一合页1801和第二合页1802通常情况下具有外侧面和内侧面,其中,开合结构1800在关闭时,第一合页1801的内侧面与第二合页1802的内侧面相互靠近;开合结构1800在打开时,第一合页1801的内侧面与第二合页1802的内侧面相互远离。第一合页1801的外侧面和第二合页1802的外侧面通常与被安装物贴合。It should be noted that the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 usually have an outer surface and an inner surface, wherein when the opening and closing structure 1800 is closed, the inner surface of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 The inner surfaces of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are far away from each other when the opening and closing structure 1800 is opened. The outer surface of the first hinge 1801 and the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 are usually attached to the object to be installed.
第一弹性件1803可以驱动第一合页1801相对于第二合页1802在打开方向或关闭方向转动,第一弹性件1803也可以驱动第二合页1802相对于第一合页1801在打开方向或关闭方向转动,第一弹性件1803还可以同时驱动第一合页1801和第二合页1802在打开方向或关闭方向转动。The first elastic member 1803 can drive the first hinge 1801 to rotate relative to the second hinge 1802 in the opening direction or the closing direction, and the first elastic member 1803 can also drive the second hinge 1802 to rotate in the opening direction relative to the first hinge 1801 Or to rotate in the closing direction, the first elastic member 1803 can also simultaneously drive the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 to rotate in the opening direction or the closing direction.
缓冲结构1804设置于第一合页1801的外侧面的全部或者部分可以这样理解,第一合页1801的外侧面全部被缓冲结构1804包裹,或者,缓冲结构1804只有部分被缓冲结构1804包裹。The cushioning structure 1804 is disposed on all or part of the outer surface of the first hinge 1801. It can be understood that the entire outer surface of the first hinge 1801 is wrapped by the cushioning structure 1804, or only a part of the cushioning structure 1804 is wrapped by the cushioning structure 1804.
缓冲结构1804不仅具有缓冲的作用,而且还具有限位的功能,因此,当开合结构1800打开时,第二合页1802撞击缓冲结构1804达到限位功能,由于该缓冲结构1804具有可恢复的形变能力,达到了缓冲功能,应该能够降低撞击过程中的冲击,降低噪音。缓冲结构1804的设置方式有多种,在一些实施例中,缓冲结构1804可以采用第一种设置方式,缓冲结构1804可以包括第二固定部18041和第三限位部18042,其中,第二固定部18041安装在第一合页1801上,第三限位部18042自第二固定部18041向外延伸,并能够与所述第二合页1802的外侧面抵接并产生可恢复的形变。The buffer structure 1804 not only has the function of buffering, but also has the function of limiting. Therefore, when the opening and closing structure 1800 is opened, the second hinge 1802 hits the buffer structure 1804 to achieve the function of limiting, because the buffer structure 1804 has a recoverable The deformation ability has achieved the cushioning function, which should be able to reduce the impact during the impact and reduce the noise. There are many ways to set up the cushioning structure 1804. In some embodiments, the cushioning structure 1804 can adopt the first setting way, and the cushioning structure 1804 can include a second fixing part 18041 and a third limiting part 18042, wherein the second fixing The part 18041 is installed on the first hinge 1801 , and the third limiting part 18042 extends outward from the second fixing part 18041 , and can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge 1802 and produce recoverable deformation.
其中,第二固定部18041粘结在第一合页1801上;或者第二固定部18041通过紧固件安装在第一合页1801的外侧面;或者第二固定部18041包裹在第一合页1801上;或者第二固定部18041与第一合页1801的外侧面贴合,当安装开合结构1800时,同时实现第一合页1801与第二固定部18041的固定。Wherein, the second fixing part 18041 is glued on the first hinge 1801; or the second fixing part 18041 is installed on the outer side of the first hinge 1801 through fasteners; or the second fixing part 18041 is wrapped around the first hinge 1801; or the second fixing part 18041 is attached to the outer surface of the first hinge 1801, and when the opening and closing structure 1800 is installed, the first hinge 1801 and the second fixing part 18041 are fixed at the same time.
第三限位部18042自第二固定部18041向外延伸,其中,第三限位部18042与第二固定部18041在同一面上,或者,第三限位部18042与第二固定部18041存在一定的夹角,以更好的限制第二合页1802。在一些实施例中,可以通过调节第三限位部18042的厚度来调节第二合页1802的开启角度。通常情况下,第三限位部18042的厚度大于第二固定部18041的厚度。缓冲效果以及限位效果均更好。The third limiting part 18042 extends outward from the second fixing part 18041, wherein the third limiting part 18042 and the second fixing part 18041 are on the same surface, or the third limiting part 18042 and the second fixing part 18041 exist A certain included angle is used to limit the second hinge 1802 better. In some embodiments, the opening angle of the second hinge 1802 can be adjusted by adjusting the thickness of the third limiting portion 18042 . Normally, the thickness of the third limiting portion 18042 is greater than the thickness of the second fixing portion 18041 . The cushioning effect and the limit effect are better.
在一些实施例中,第三限位部18042与第二固定部18041衔接处的内侧面与第一合页1801和第二合页1802的衔接处的外侧面贴合,从而使得缓冲结构1804能够全部包裹第一合页1801和第二合页1802的衔接处,由于第一合页1801和第二合页1802的衔接处为发生转动运动的关键部位,是噪音的主要来源,通过设置第三限位部18042与第二固定部18041衔接处的内侧面与之贴合,能够进一步降低噪音。In some embodiments, the inner surface of the junction of the third limiting portion 18042 and the second fixing portion 18041 is in contact with the outer surface of the junction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, so that the buffer structure 1804 can All cover the junction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, because the junction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 is the key part of the rotation movement, which is the main source of noise, by setting the third The inner surface of the junction of the limiting part 18042 and the second fixing part 18041 is attached to it, which can further reduce noise.
当然,第三限位部18042与第二固定部18041之间的衔接可以根据第一合页1801和第二合页1802具体设置的差异进行调整。Of course, the engagement between the third limiting portion 18042 and the second fixing portion 18041 can be adjusted according to the difference in specific settings between the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 .
在一些实施例中,缓冲结构1804可以采用第二种设置方式,缓冲结构1804可以包括第二固定部18041、第三限位部18042和包裹部18043,其中,第二固定部18041安装在第一合页1801上,第三限位部18042自第二固定部18041向外延伸,包裹部18043设置在第二固定部18041靠近第一合页1801的边缘。由于缓冲结构1804具有一定弹性,安装时,向外掰开包裹部18043使得包裹部18043之间的距离变大,然后将第二固定部18041包裹在第一合页1801上,从而实现了缓冲结构1804的安装。In some embodiments, the buffer structure 1804 can adopt the second setting method, and the buffer structure 1804 can include a second fixing part 18041, a third limiting part 18042 and a wrapping part 18043, wherein the second fixing part 18041 is installed on the first On the hinge 1801 , the third limiting part 18042 extends outward from the second fixing part 18041 , and the wrapping part 18043 is arranged on the edge of the second fixing part 18041 close to the first hinge 1801 . Since the buffer structure 1804 has a certain degree of elasticity, during installation, the wrapping parts 18043 are opened outwards so that the distance between the wrapping parts 18043 becomes larger, and then the second fixing part 18041 is wrapped on the first hinge 1801, thereby realizing a buffer structure 1804 installation.
缓冲结构1804为弹性材料加工而成,以使得所述缓冲结构1804与所述第二合页1802抵接时产生形变,并在抵接消失后逐渐恢复原状,能够起到这一目的的弹性材质有很多,例如:橡胶、塑料、硅胶 等等。在一些实施例中,缓冲结构1804为橡胶加工而成。The cushioning structure 1804 is made of elastic material, so that the cushioning structure 1804 deforms when contacting the second hinge 1802, and gradually returns to its original shape after the contact disappears. The elastic material can achieve this purpose. There are many, such as: rubber, plastic, silicone and so on. In some embodiments, the cushioning structure 1804 is machined from rubber.
第一合页1801和第二合页1802枢转连接的方式有很多种,例如通过转轴1805设置、通过调整自身结构实现,在一些实施例中,第一合页1801和第二合页1802枢转连接的第一种设置方式为:第一合页1801和第二合页1802通过转轴1805枢转连接,第一弹性件1803为套设在转轴1805上至少一个扭簧,第一弹性件1803的第一端与第一合页1801的内侧面抵接,第一弹性件1803的第二端与第二合页1802的内侧面抵接。There are many ways to pivotally connect the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802, for example, by setting the rotating shaft 1805 and adjusting its own structure. In some embodiments, the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are pivoted The first setting method of rotating connection is: the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 are pivotally connected through the rotating shaft 1805, the first elastic member 1803 is at least one torsion spring sleeved on the rotating shaft 1805, the first elastic member 1803 The first end of the first elastic member abuts against the inner surface of the first hinge 1801 , and the second end of the first elastic member 1803 abuts against the inner surface of the second hinge 1802 .
上述第一弹性件1803为扭簧,当然第一弹性件1803还可以为其他结构,例如,弹簧、拉簧、卡簧,只要能够达到为第一合页1801和第二合页1802打开方向或者关闭方向提供驱动力的结构均在本说明书的保护范围内。当第一弹性件1803能够提供在打开方向的驱动力时,为开合结构1800提供一种自动开启的可能性;当第一弹性件1803能够提供在关闭向的驱动力时,为开合结构1800提供一种自动关闭的可能性,且为开合结构1800在开启方向提供了一定的阻尼,降低了噪音。The above-mentioned first elastic member 1803 is a torsion spring, of course, the first elastic member 1803 can also be other structures, for example, a spring, a tension spring, a clip spring, as long as it can achieve the opening direction of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802 or The structure that provides driving force in the closing direction is within the protection scope of this specification. When the first elastic member 1803 can provide the driving force in the opening direction, a possibility of automatic opening is provided for the opening and closing structure 1800; when the first elastic member 1803 can provide the driving force in the closing direction, it is the opening and closing structure The 1800 provides a possibility of automatic closing, and provides a certain damping for the opening and closing structure 1800 in the opening direction, reducing noise.
第一合页1801具有套设在转轴1805上的第一旋转套18013,第二合页1802具有套设在转轴1805上的第二旋转套18023。第一旋转套18013与第一合页1801一体成型,或者通过焊接进行连接;第二旋转套18023与第二合页1802一体成型,或者通过焊接进行连接。The first hinge 1801 has a first rotating sleeve 18013 sleeved on the rotating shaft 1805 , and the second hinge 1802 has a second rotating sleeve 18023 sleeved on the rotating shaft 1805 . The first rotating sleeve 18013 is integrally formed with the first hinge 1801 or connected by welding; the second rotating sleeve 18023 is integrally formed with the second hinge 1802 or connected by welding.
为了适应于不同的产品,第一合页1801和第二合页1802的结构会做一些调整,第一合页1801可以为板状结构,类似平面类结构,第二合页1802可以为板状类结构,类似于平面类结构。In order to adapt to different products, some adjustments will be made to the structure of the first hinge 1801 and the second hinge 1802. The first hinge 1801 can be a plate-shaped structure, similar to a plane structure, and the second hinge 1802 can be a plate-shaped structure. The class structure, similar to the flat class structure.
为了增加开合结构1800的打开时的相对角度,第一合页1801包括第一安装部18011,和自第一安装部18011呈第一夹角弯折的第一弯折部18012,第一旋转套18013设置在第一弯折部18012上。第一合页1801通过第一安装部18011安装在待安装的部位,而第一弯折部18012能够起到缓冲作用,以及调整第一合页1801的打开角度的作用。该第一夹角为0°~120°,较优的采用90°。In order to increase the relative angle when the opening and closing structure 1800 is opened, the first hinge 1801 includes a first installation part 18011, and a first bending part 18012 bent at a first angle from the first installation part 18011, the first rotation The sleeve 18013 is disposed on the first bent portion 18012 . The first hinge 1801 is installed at the position to be installed through the first installation part 18011 , and the first bending part 18012 can play a buffering role and adjust the opening angle of the first hinge 1801 . The first included angle ranges from 0° to 120°, preferably 90°.
同理,第二合页1802包括第二安装部18021,和自第二安装部18021呈第二夹角弯折的第二弯折部18022,第二旋转套18023设置在第二弯折部18022上。第二合页1802通过第二安装部18021安装在待安装的部位,而第二弯折部18022能够起到缓冲作用,以及调整第二合页1802的打开角度的作用。该第二夹角为0°~120°,较优的采用90°。Similarly, the second hinge 1802 includes a second installation part 18021 and a second bending part 18022 bent from the second installation part 18021 at a second angle, and the second rotating sleeve 18023 is arranged on the second bending part 18022 superior. The second hinge 1802 is installed at the position to be installed through the second installation part 18021 , and the second bending part 18022 can play a buffering role and adjust the opening angle of the second hinge 1802 . The second included angle ranges from 0° to 120°, preferably 90°.
以下以开合结构1800设置在如图2所示的可闭合设备100为箱体结构的情况进行说明。箱体结构的具体内容可以参照图2及其相关描述,在此不再赘述。The following describes the case where the opening and closing structure 1800 is set in a box structure of the closeable device 100 as shown in FIG. 2 . For the specific content of the box structure, reference may be made to FIG. 2 and its related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
如图19所示,开合结构1800由第二合页1802、第一弹性件1803、转轴1805、缓冲结构1804、第一合页1801组成,第二合页1802与第一合页1801通过转轴1805连接在一起,第一弹性件1803穿在转轴1805中间,并且第一弹性件1803上部末端压在第二合页1802,下部末端压在第一合页1801上,使两个开合结构1800间产生相对旋转的扭力,最终驱动门体打开。As shown in Figure 19, the opening and closing structure 1800 is composed of a second hinge 1802, a first elastic member 1803, a rotating shaft 1805, a buffer structure 1804, and a first hinge 1801, and the second hinge 1802 and the first hinge 1801 pass through the rotating shaft 1805 are connected together, the first elastic member 1803 is passed through the middle of the rotating shaft 1805, and the upper end of the first elastic member 1803 is pressed on the second hinge 1802, and the lower end is pressed on the first hinge 1801, so that the two opening and closing structures 1800 A relative rotational torque is generated between them, and finally drives the door body to open.
图21是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的开合结构处于关闭状态的主视图。如图21所示,第一弹性件1803对第二合页1802的作用力方向如图顺时针方向。Fig. 21 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in a closed state according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 21 , the force direction of the first elastic member 1803 on the second hinge 1802 is clockwise in the figure.
当门体关闭时,第一弹性件1803的压缩行程最大,第一弹性件1803对第二合页1802的作用力最大。When the door body is closed, the compression stroke of the first elastic member 1803 is the largest, and the force exerted by the first elastic member 1803 on the second hinge 1802 is the largest.
当门体打开时,第一弹性件1803的压缩行程得到释放,第二合页1802在第一弹性件1803力的作用下顺时针旋转(第二合页1802带动门体一起旋转),当第二合页1802与缓冲结构1804接触,第二合页1802停止旋转,到达完全开门状态,此时,开门开合结构1800状态,第二合页1802到达第三限位部18042,第二合页1802的旋转运动受到第三限位部18042的限制,起到限位作用。同时,因缓冲结构1804是软材质,具有弹性,起到缓冲作用。When the door body is opened, the compression stroke of the first elastic member 1803 is released, and the second hinge 1802 rotates clockwise under the force of the first elastic member 1803 (the second hinge 1802 drives the door body to rotate together). The second hinge 1802 is in contact with the buffer structure 1804, the second hinge 1802 stops rotating, and reaches the fully opened state. At this time, the door is in the state of the door opening and closing structure 1800, the second hinge 1802 reaches the third limit part 18042, and the second hinge The rotation movement of 1802 is restricted by the third limiting part 18042, which acts as a limiting function. At the same time, because the buffer structure 1804 is made of soft material and has elasticity, it plays a buffering role.
当门体需要关闭时,手动用力往下压,门体上锁扣与箱体上内部的锁定件连接,即可达到锁紧目的。When the door body needs to be closed, manually press it down hard, and the latch on the door body is connected with the locking piece inside the box body to achieve the purpose of locking.
图22是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的开合结构处于打开状态的主视图。缓冲结构1804,具有一定的弹性,当开启到位时,第二合页1802侧边会压在缓冲结构1804的第三限位部18042上,如图22,开门开合结构1800状态,第二合页1802到达缓冲限位接触点,第二合页1802的旋转运动受到缓冲结构1804的限制,起到限位作用。同时,因缓冲结构1804是软材质,具有弹性,起到缓冲作用。Fig. 22 is a front view of the opening and closing structure in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification. The buffer structure 1804 has a certain degree of elasticity. When it is opened in place, the side of the second hinge 1802 will press on the third limit part 18042 of the buffer structure 1804, as shown in Figure 22, the door opening and closing structure 1800 state, the second hinge When the hinge 1802 reaches the buffer limit contact point, the rotation movement of the second hinge 1802 is limited by the buffer structure 1804, which acts as a limit. At the same time, because the buffer structure 1804 is made of soft material and has elasticity, it plays a buffering role.
本说明书所披露的开合结构1800及对应的可闭合设备可能带来的有益效果包括但不限于:(1)缓冲结构的设计能够起到限位缓冲的效果,操作体验较好;(2)缓冲结构还能够起到降噪的效果,减少可闭合设备开闭时的噪音。需要说明的是,不同实施例可能产生的有益效果不同,在不同的实施例里,可能产生的有益效果可以是以上任意一种或几种的组合,也可以是其他任何可能获得的有益效果。The possible beneficial effects of the opening and closing structure 1800 disclosed in this specification and the corresponding closable devices include but are not limited to: (1) The design of the buffer structure can play a position-limiting and buffering effect, and the operating experience is better; (2) The buffer structure can also play a noise reduction effect, reducing the noise when the closeable device is opened and closed. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
需要说明的是,图18-22中开合结构1800不仅可以应用于图2所示的箱体,也可以应用于图23-24以及图34所示的智能锁盒,还可以适用于上文所述的多种类型的可开合设备。It should be noted that the opening and closing structure 1800 in Figures 18-22 can be applied not only to the cabinet shown in Figure 2, but also to the smart lock box shown in Figures 23-24 and 34, and can also be applied to the above The various types of openable and closable devices described.
图23是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的智能锁盒处于闭合状态时的结构示意图;图24是根据本 说明书一些实施例所示的智能锁盒处于打开状态时的结构示意图;图25是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的第二壳体组件的分解图;图26是图24的剖视图;图27是图25的剖视图;图28是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的接触件与接触槽的左侧壁接触的结构示意图;图29是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的接触件与接触槽的左侧壁和右侧壁均不接触的结构示意图;图30是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的接触件与接触槽的右侧壁接触的结构示意图;图31是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的电性接口和隔离件在第二壳体组件上设置的结构示意图;图32是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的锁定的控制逻辑图;图33是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的解锁的控制逻辑图;图34是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一示例性智能锁盒在处于打开状态下的结构示意图;图35是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的第二壳体组件的爆炸图;图36是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的第二壳体组件的剖视图;图37是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的防敲装置的分解结构示意图。以下结合图1以及图23-图37对智能锁盒2300(3400)进行描述。Fig. 23 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in a closed state according to some embodiments of the present specification; Fig. 24 is a schematic structural view of the smart lock box in an open state according to some embodiments of the present specification; An exploded view of the second housing assembly shown in some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 26 is a sectional view of FIG. 24; FIG. 27 is a sectional view of FIG. 25; FIG. 28 is a contact piece and a contact groove shown according to some embodiments of this specification Fig. 29 is a structural schematic diagram showing that the contact member does not contact the left side wall and the right side wall of the contact groove according to some embodiments of the present specification; Fig. 30 is a schematic structural diagram according to some embodiments of the present specification The shown schematic diagram of the structure of the contact piece in contact with the right side wall of the contact groove; FIG. 31 is a schematic structural diagram of the electrical interface and the spacer arranged on the second housing assembly according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 32 is According to some embodiments of this specification, a control logic diagram for locking is shown; FIG. 33 is a control logic diagram for unlocking according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 34 is another exemplary smart phone according to some embodiments of this specification. A schematic structural view of the lock box in an open state; FIG. 35 is an exploded view of the second housing assembly according to some embodiments of this specification; FIG. 36 is an exploded view of the second housing assembly according to some embodiments of this specification Cross-sectional view; FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of an anti-knock device according to some embodiments of the present specification. The smart lock box 2300 ( 3400 ) will be described below in conjunction with FIG. 1 and FIGS. 23-37 .
请参照图1与图23。在一些实施例中,可闭合设备100可以为日常生活中常见的小型容器,例如保险箱或者能够固定在门外墙体上的、用于容纳钥匙的钥匙盒等。在一些实施例中,可闭合设备可以是智能锁盒2300,此时两个可相对移动的部件可以包括第一壳体组件2301,以及能够与第一壳体组件2301共同围成容纳腔的第二壳体组件2302。此时,可以将第一壳体组件2301固定(例如固定在墙体或门体上等),第二壳体组件2302可以通过相对于第一壳体组件2301转动和/或移动而使容纳腔开闭。锁定装置140可以包括智能锁,智能锁可以设置在第二壳体组件2302上,其用于第二壳体组件2302和第一壳体组件2301之间的锁定和解锁。Please refer to Figure 1 and Figure 23. In some embodiments, the closeable device 100 may be a small container that is common in daily life, such as a safe or a key box that can be fixed on the wall outside the door for accommodating keys. In some embodiments, the closable device can be a smart lock box 2300, at this time, the two relatively movable parts can include a first housing component 2301, and a second housing component that can jointly enclose an accommodating cavity with the first housing component 2301 Two shell assemblies 2302. At this time, the first housing component 2301 can be fixed (for example, fixed on the wall or door body, etc.), and the second housing component 2302 can rotate and/or move relative to the first housing component 2301 to make the accommodating cavity Opening and closing. The locking device 140 may include a smart lock, and the smart lock may be disposed on the second housing component 2302 for locking and unlocking between the second housing component 2302 and the first housing component 2301 .
请参照图34,在另一些实施例中,智能锁盒3400主要由第一壳体组件3401和第二壳体组件3402两大部分组成,第一壳体组件3401大体呈长方体形状,其顶部设有锁梁3419,通过锁梁3419可以将智能锁盒3400挂在家门把手、车门把手以及其他能够穿过锁梁3419的位置,从而实现智能锁盒3400的固定。当智能锁盒3400处于锁闭状态时,第二壳体组件3402与第一壳体组件3401完整的对合在一起,从而锁闭第一壳体组件3401的储存空间,当智能锁盒处于开启状态时,第二壳体组件3402可相对于第一壳体组件3401翻转打开,以便消费者从第一壳体组件3401取出事先存放的钥匙等物品,其具体闭锁和开锁方式可以有多种形式,例如在第二壳体组件3402的正面设置数字按键,通过密码的方式进行认证,或者,在第二壳体组件3402的表面设置指纹识别装置,通过指纹的方式进行认证,等等。在另一些实施例中,智能锁盒2300设置有挂件2319,挂件2319的作用及其设置方式可以与锁梁3419的作用及设置方式相同或相似。Please refer to Fig. 34. In some other embodiments, the smart lock box 3400 is mainly composed of two major parts, the first housing component 3401 and the second housing component 3402. The first housing component 3401 is generally in the shape of a cuboid, with There is a lock beam 3419 through which the smart lock box 3400 can be hung on door handles, car door handles and other positions that can pass through the lock beam 3419, thereby realizing the fixing of the smart lock box 3400. When the smart lock box 3400 is in the locked state, the second housing component 3402 is completely combined with the first housing component 3401, thereby locking the storage space of the first housing component 3401. When the smart lock box is opened state, the second housing assembly 3402 can be flipped open relative to the first housing assembly 3401, so that consumers can take out items such as keys stored in advance from the first housing assembly 3401, and the specific locking and unlocking methods can have various forms For example, number keys are set on the front of the second housing component 3402 to perform authentication through a password, or a fingerprint identification device is set on the surface of the second housing component 3402 to perform authentication through fingerprints, and so on. In some other embodiments, the smart lock box 2300 is provided with a pendant 2319 , and the function and setting method of the pendant 2319 may be the same or similar to the function and setting method of the lock beam 3419 .
在一些实施例中,第一壳体组件2301和第二壳体组件2302之间的结构关系与第一壳体组件3401和第二壳体组件3402的结构关系可以相同或相似。继续参照图34,在一些实施例中,第一壳体组件3401的厚度略大,其内部形成有用于存放钥匙等小型物品的存储空间,第二壳体组件3402的形状与第一壳体组件3401相仿,也呈长方体形状,其厚度略薄于第一壳体组件3401,第一壳体组件3401和第二壳体组件3402在下边缘处相互铰接或扣接。当然,在其他实施例中,第一壳体组件3401的厚度也可以与第二壳体组件3402的厚度相同,或者,第一壳体组件3401的厚度小于第二壳体组件3402的厚度。In some embodiments, the structural relationship between the first housing component 2301 and the second housing component 2302 may be the same or similar to the structural relationship between the first housing component 3401 and the second housing component 3402 . Continuing to refer to FIG. 34 , in some embodiments, the thickness of the first housing component 3401 is slightly larger, and a storage space for storing small items such as keys is formed inside it, and the shape of the second housing component 3402 is similar to that of the first housing component Similar to 3401, it is also in the shape of a cuboid, and its thickness is slightly thinner than that of the first shell component 3401. The first shell component 3401 and the second shell component 3402 are hinged or fastened to each other at the lower edge. Of course, in other embodiments, the thickness of the first housing component 3401 may also be the same as that of the second housing component 3402 , or the thickness of the first housing component 3401 is smaller than the thickness of the second housing component 3402 .
请参照图23-图33,当第二壳体组件2302被锁定在第一壳体组件2301上时,第二壳体组件2302无法相对于第一壳体组件2301转动和/或移动而保持容纳腔的闭合,使得放置在容纳腔中的物品无法被取出,当智能锁不再锁定第二壳体组件2302时,容纳腔则能够实现开启,此智能锁包括设置在第二壳体组件2302上的用于输入解锁密码的按键2303,当用户需要打开容纳腔时,只需通过按压按键2303的方式向智能锁输入解锁密码就能够实现第二壳体组件2302的解锁,之后再转动和/或移动第二壳体组件2302即可打开容纳腔,使得容纳腔内容纳的物品(例如钥匙)外露并可取出;智能锁在具有按键2303的同时,如图31所示,还具有电性接口2304,此电性接口2304例如为USB插口(此USB插口的具体类型可以为Type-A、Type-B或Type-C),其可以用于给智能锁充电或向智能锁传输数据等,在具体设置电性接口2304时,需先在第二壳体组件2302的表面上开设安装窗口,然后再将电性接口2304安装在安装窗口中,以保证电性接口2304在第二壳体组件2302上的外露,并且本实施例还在第二壳体组件2302的内部设置隔离件2305,此隔离件2305在第二壳体组件2302的内部对电性接口2304进行隔离,以使电性接口2304与智能锁的后述的第二锁舌2307和驱动第二锁舌2307的电动机2308不位于同一空间中。23-33, when the second housing assembly 2302 is locked on the first housing assembly 2301, the second housing assembly 2302 cannot rotate and/or move relative to the first housing assembly 2301 and remains contained. The closure of the cavity makes it impossible for the items placed in the cavity to be taken out. When the smart lock no longer locks the second housing component 2302, the cavity can be opened. This smart lock includes a There is a button 2303 for inputting the unlocking password. When the user needs to open the storage cavity, the second housing assembly 2302 can be unlocked only by pressing the button 2303 and inputting the unlocking password to the smart lock, and then rotate and/or Move the second housing component 2302 to open the storage cavity, so that the items (such as keys) contained in the storage cavity are exposed and can be taken out; while the smart lock has a button 2303, as shown in Figure 31, it also has an electrical interface 2304 , the electrical interface 2304 is, for example, a USB socket (the specific type of the USB socket can be Type-A, Type-B or Type-C), which can be used to charge the smart lock or transmit data to the smart lock. When installing the electrical interface 2304, it is necessary to open an installation window on the surface of the second housing component 2302, and then install the electrical interface 2304 in the installation window to ensure that the electrical interface 2304 is on the second housing component 2302 The exposed, and this embodiment also sets the spacer 2305 inside the second housing assembly 2302, the spacer 2305 isolates the electrical interface 2304 inside the second housing assembly 2302, so that the electrical interface 2304 and The second lock tongue 2307 described later of the smart lock and the motor 2308 driving the second lock tongue 2307 are not located in the same space.
上述结构的容器,通过智能锁对容纳物品的容纳腔进行锁定,并且令智能锁具有按键2303,当容器为用于存放钥匙的钥匙盒时,如果用户需要取出钥匙,则可以通过按压按键2303的方式向智能锁输入密码而实现智能锁的解锁,之后用户就可以取出钥匙开门。此种按键解锁的方式,与现有技术中转动密码轮解锁的方式相比,密码的输入、重置仅需通过按压相应的按键2303即可实现,无需再转动密码轮以使密码轮上外露的数字与密码匹配,能够令解锁操作、密码重置操作更加简单、方便的实现,并且损坏风险也更低。同时,由于智能锁的电性接口2304被隔离,所以在非法人员破坏电性接口2304后,即使将开锁工具穿过安装窗口也会被隔离件2305阻挡,开锁工具无法与设置在第二壳体组件2302内部的第二锁舌2307或电动机2308的触点接触,进而无法推动第二锁舌2307解锁也无法启动电动机2308使其驱动第二 锁舌2307解锁,使得智能锁不易被破解,提高了容器的安全性。The container with the above structure locks the accommodating cavity of the article through the smart lock, and the smart lock has a button 2303. When the container is a key box for storing keys, if the user needs to take out the key, he can press the button 2303 Enter the password to the smart lock to realize the unlocking of the smart lock, and then the user can take out the key to open the door. Compared with the unlocking method of turning the password wheel in the prior art, the input and reset of the password can be realized only by pressing the corresponding button 2303, and there is no need to turn the password wheel to expose the password wheel. The matching of the number and the password can make the unlocking operation and password reset operation simpler and more convenient, and the risk of damage is also lower. At the same time, since the electrical interface 2304 of the smart lock is isolated, after the illegal personnel destroys the electrical interface 2304, even if the unlocking tool is passed through the installation window, it will be blocked by the isolator 2305, and the unlocking tool cannot be connected with the second housing. The contacts of the second lock tongue 2307 or the motor 2308 inside the component 2302 are in contact, so that the second lock tongue 2307 cannot be pushed to unlock, nor can the motor 2308 be started to drive the second lock tongue 2307 to unlock, so that the smart lock is not easy to be cracked, improving Container security.
另外,现有的转动密码轮解锁的方式,存在密码轮结构设置复杂、不防水、密码易破解、操作手感差等缺点,而本实施例的按键解锁方式则不具有这些缺点。In addition, the existing unlocking method of turning the password wheel has disadvantages such as complex configuration of the password wheel, non-waterproof, easy password cracking, and poor operating feel, while the key unlocking method of this embodiment does not have these disadvantages.
如图24-图27所示,在一些实施例中,智能锁盒2300具体的锁定(或者说上锁)和解锁的结构为:第一壳体组件2301上设置有电动机2308,智能锁包括驱动组件和连接在驱动组件上的第二锁舌2307,第二锁舌2307能够在驱动组件的驱动下进出电动机2308以实现第一壳体组件2301和第二壳体组件2302的锁定和解锁。在需要保持容纳腔的闭合以避免容纳腔内的物品外露或被取出时,先使第二壳体组件2302转动和/或移动而实现容纳腔的闭合,此时第二锁舌2307和电动机2308对正,然后令驱动组件驱动第二锁舌2307移动以靠近电动机2308并使第二锁舌2307最终进入到电动机2308中,电动机2308对第二锁舌2307进行锁定,此时第一壳体组件2301和第二壳体组件2302处于锁定状态,容纳腔无法开启;当需要取出物品时,用户通过按压按键2303输入解锁密码,智能锁在验证密码正确后令驱动组件启动以驱动第二锁舌2307从电动机2308中移出,此时电动机2308不再对第二锁舌2307进行锁定,第一壳体组件2301和第二壳体组件2302处于解锁状态,之后用户再转动和/或移动第二壳体组件2302就可以打开容纳腔,物品可以从容纳腔中取出。As shown in Figures 24-27, in some embodiments, the specific locking (or locking) and unlocking structure of the smart lock box 2300 is as follows: a motor 2308 is arranged on the first housing component 2301, and the smart lock includes a drive The assembly and the second locking tongue 2307 connected to the driving assembly, the second locking tongue 2307 can enter and exit the motor 2308 under the driving of the driving assembly to realize the locking and unlocking of the first casing assembly 2301 and the second casing assembly 2302. When it is necessary to keep the accommodating cavity closed to prevent the items in the accommodating cavity from being exposed or taken out, the second housing assembly 2302 is rotated and/or moved to realize the closing of the accommodating cavity. At this time, the second locking tongue 2307 and the motor 2308 Alignment, then let the drive assembly drive the second lock tongue 2307 to move close to the motor 2308 and make the second lock tongue 2307 finally enter the motor 2308, the motor 2308 locks the second lock tongue 2307, at this time the first housing assembly 2301 and the second housing assembly 2302 are in a locked state, and the accommodating cavity cannot be opened; when an item needs to be taken out, the user enters the unlocking password by pressing the button 2303, and the smart lock activates the drive assembly to drive the second deadbolt 2307 after verifying that the password is correct Removed from the motor 2308, the motor 2308 no longer locks the second bolt 2307, the first housing assembly 2301 and the second housing assembly 2302 are in an unlocked state, and then the user rotates and/or moves the second housing The assembly 2302 can open the receiving chamber, and the article can be taken out from the receiving chamber.
其中,如图24所示,优选电动机2308为凸出第一壳体组件2301设置的锁扣,第二壳体组件2302(具体为后述的内侧壳体23024)上开设有允许锁扣穿过的通孔2320。此锁扣可以为由金属杆折弯形成的环形结构,并且为了更好的与第二锁舌2307匹配以提升对第二锁舌2307的锁定效果,优选锁扣为矩形环结构。而之所以令锁扣凸出的设置在第一壳体组件2301上,是为了保证处于锁定状态的第一壳体组件2301和第二壳体组件2302之间具有更大的空间,此空间即为容纳腔,也就是说,令锁扣凸出的设置在第一壳体上能够增大容纳腔的体积,以提升容器的容纳效果。此外,电动机2308也可以为开设在第一壳体组件2301上的卡槽,第二锁舌2307通过伸入到卡槽中实现第一壳体组件2301和第二壳体组件2302之间的锁定。而在第二壳体组件2302上开设通孔2320,是因为第二锁舌2307设置在第二壳体组件2302的内部,为了保证第二锁舌2307能够正常的与锁扣进行锁定,就需要令锁扣可以进入到第二壳体组件2302中与第二锁舌2307配合,因此设置此通孔2320。Wherein, as shown in FIG. 24 , it is preferred that the motor 2308 is a lock that protrudes from the first housing assembly 2301, and the second housing assembly 2302 (specifically, the inner housing 23024 described later) is provided with a lock that allows the lock to pass through. The through hole 2320. The lock buckle can be a ring structure formed by bending a metal rod, and in order to better match with the second lock tongue 2307 to improve the locking effect on the second lock tongue 2307, preferably the lock buckle is a rectangular ring structure. The reason why the lock catch is protruded on the first housing component 2301 is to ensure that there is a larger space between the first housing component 2301 and the second housing component 2302 in the locked state, and this space is For the accommodating cavity, that is to say, the provision of the locking buckle protruding on the first housing can increase the volume of the accommodating cavity, so as to improve the accommodating effect of the container. In addition, the motor 2308 can also be a card slot opened on the first housing component 2301, and the second locking tongue 2307 can realize the locking between the first housing component 2301 and the second housing component 2302 by extending into the card slot. . The through hole 2320 is provided on the second housing assembly 2302 because the second lock tongue 2307 is arranged inside the second housing assembly 2302. In order to ensure that the second lock tongue 2307 can be normally locked with the buckle, it is necessary to The through hole 2320 is provided so that the lock buckle can enter into the second housing component 2302 and cooperate with the second lock tongue 2307 .
优选的,驱动组件包括:电动机2308;与电动机2308的输出轴连接的传动件2309;与传动件2309连接并在传动件2309的带动下往复移动的移动件2310,第二锁舌2307设置在移动件2310上;其中,电动机2308通过驱动移动件2310向远离电动机2308的方向移动,以使第二锁舌2307能够进入到电动机2308中;并且,电动机2308通过驱动移动件2310向靠近电动机2308的方向移动,以使第二锁舌2307能够从电动机2308中移出。在此结构中,电动机2308为驱动第二锁舌2307移动的动力部件,传动件2309为动力传递部件,其能够在动力作用下令移动件2310发生移动,移动件2310为连接第二锁舌2307的部件,移动件2310的移动方式是在传动件2309上往复移动,即向远离电动机2308的方向移动和向靠近电动机2308的方向移动,由于第二锁舌2307设置在移动件2310上,所以第二锁舌2307能够跟随移动件2310移动,以在移动件2310向远离电动机2308的方向上移动时进入到电动机2308中,并在移动件2310向靠近电动机2308的方向上移动时从电动机2308中移出。Preferably, the drive assembly includes: a motor 2308; a transmission member 2309 connected to the output shaft of the motor 2308; a moving member 2310 connected to the transmission member 2309 and reciprocatingly moved under the drive of the transmission member 2309; On the part 2310; wherein, the motor 2308 moves away from the motor 2308 by driving the moving part 2310, so that the second lock tongue 2307 can enter the motor 2308; Move so that the second deadbolt 2307 can be removed from the motor 2308. In this structure, the motor 2308 is a power component that drives the second lock tongue 2307 to move, and the transmission member 2309 is a power transmission component that can order the moving part 2310 to move under the action of power. The moving part 2310 is connected to the second lock tongue 2307 The moving part, the moving part 2310 moves back and forth on the transmission part 2309, that is, moves away from the motor 2308 and moves towards the direction close to the motor 2308. Since the second locking tongue 2307 is arranged on the moving part 2310, the second The locking tongue 2307 can move with the moving part 2310 to enter the motor 2308 when the moving part 2310 moves away from the motor 2308 and move out of the motor 2308 when the moving part 2310 moves toward the motor 2308 .
如图25-图27所示,进一步优选传动件2309为螺杆,移动件2310套设在螺杆上并与螺杆螺纹连接,且移动件2310在第二壳体组件2302的限位下仅能够沿螺杆的轴向往复移动;电动机2308通过带动螺杆正向转动使移动件2310远离电动机2308,并通过带动螺杆反向转动使移动件2310靠近电动机2308。其中,螺杆同轴的连接在电动机2308的输出轴上,移动件2310通过螺纹孔连接在螺杆的外侧,在第二壳体组件2302上设置驱动组件时,令第二壳体组件2302对移动件2310进行周向上的限位,即令移动件2310无法在螺杆的带动下转动,其仅能在螺杆转动的过程中沿螺杆的轴向移动(螺杆的轴向即为移动件2310往复移动的方向),即螺杆和移动件2310构成了丝杠螺母机构,由于第二锁舌2307设置在移动件2310上,所以通过螺杆带动移动件2310轴向往复移动就能够实现第二锁舌2307的往复移动,进而令第二锁舌2307能够进出电动机2308。此外,传动件2309和移动件2310配合构成的机构还可以为齿轮齿条机构或涡轮蜗杆机构等。As shown in Figures 25-27, it is further preferred that the transmission part 2309 is a screw, the moving part 2310 is sleeved on the screw and threadedly connected with the screw, and the moving part 2310 can only move along the screw under the limit of the second housing assembly 2302. The motor 2308 drives the screw to rotate forward to make the moving part 2310 away from the motor 2308, and drives the screw to rotate backward to make the moving part 2310 close to the motor 2308. Wherein, the screw rod is coaxially connected on the output shaft of the motor 2308, and the moving part 2310 is connected to the outside of the screw rod through a threaded hole. 2310 is limited in the circumferential direction, that is, the moving part 2310 cannot rotate under the drive of the screw, and it can only move along the axial direction of the screw during the rotation of the screw (the axial direction of the screw is the direction in which the moving part 2310 reciprocates) , that is, the screw and the moving part 2310 constitute a lead screw nut mechanism. Since the second dead bolt 2307 is arranged on the moving part 2310, the reciprocating movement of the second dead bolt 2307 can be realized by driving the moving part 2310 to reciprocate axially through the screw rod. Further, the second locking tongue 2307 can enter and exit the motor 2308 . In addition, the mechanism formed by the cooperation of the transmission member 2309 and the moving member 2310 may also be a rack and pinion mechanism or a worm gear mechanism.
具体的,上述结构的驱动组件驱动第二锁舌2307移动而实现上锁和解锁的过程为:Specifically, the driving assembly with the above structure drives the second bolt 2307 to move to realize the locking and unlocking process as follows:
如图25、图26和图32所示,以传动件2309为螺杆为例,当需要上锁时,令电动机2308启动,使得电动机2308带动螺杆正向(例如逆时针)转动,套设在螺杆上的移动件2310在螺纹作用下沿着螺杆的轴向向远离电动机2308的方向移动,即向靠近锁扣的方向移动,随着移动件2310的持续移动,由于第二锁舌2307固定设置在移动件2310上,所以第二锁舌2307会与移动件2310一同移动而逐渐靠近锁扣并最终进入到锁扣中,然后电动机2308停止转动,第二锁舌2307停留在锁扣中,此时锁扣和第二锁舌2307即实现了锁定,第二壳体组件2302无法相对于第一壳体组件2301转动和/或移动,容纳腔无法打开,容纳于容纳腔内的物品无法取出;如图25、图27和图33所示,当需要解锁时,再次启动电动机2308,使得电 动机2308带动螺杆反向(例如顺时针)转动,套设在螺杆上的移动件2310在螺纹作用下沿着螺杆的轴向向靠近电动机2308的方向移动,即向远离锁扣的方向移动,随着移动件2310的持续移动,第二锁舌2307会跟随移动件2310同步移动而从锁扣内移出,然后电动机2308停止转动,第二锁舌2307停留在锁扣外部,此时锁扣和第二锁舌2307即实现了解锁,第二壳体组件2302能够相对于第一壳体组件2301转动和/或移动,容纳腔可以被打开,容纳于容纳腔内的物品能够被取出。As shown in Figure 25, Figure 26 and Figure 32, taking the transmission member 2309 as a screw as an example, when it is necessary to lock, the motor 2308 is started, so that the motor 2308 drives the screw to rotate forward (for example, counterclockwise), and is sleeved on the screw The moving part 2310 on the top moves in the direction away from the motor 2308 along the axial direction of the screw rod under the action of the screw thread, that is, moves towards the direction close to the lock. on the moving part 2310, so the second bolt 2307 will move together with the moving part 2310 and gradually approach the buckle and finally enter into the buckle, then the motor 2308 stops rotating, and the second bolt 2307 stays in the buckle. The lock and the second lock tongue 2307 are locked, the second housing component 2302 cannot rotate and/or move relative to the first housing component 2301, the storage cavity cannot be opened, and the items contained in the storage cavity cannot be taken out; As shown in Figure 25, Figure 27 and Figure 33, when unlocking is required, start the motor 2308 again, so that the motor 2308 drives the screw to rotate in the opposite direction (for example, clockwise), and the moving part 2310 sleeved on the screw moves along the The axial direction of the screw rod moves towards the direction of the motor 2308, that is, moves away from the buckle. With the continuous movement of the moving part 2310, the second bolt 2307 will move synchronously with the moving part 2310 and move out of the buckle. The motor 2308 stops rotating, and the second lock tongue 2307 stays outside the lock buckle. At this time, the lock buckle and the second lock tongue 2307 are unlocked, and the second housing component 2302 can rotate relative to the first housing component 2301 and/or move, the accommodating cavity can be opened, and the articles contained in the accommodating cavity can be taken out.
在上述过程中,为了进一步提高上锁和解锁操作的可靠性,避免第二锁舌2307因过量远离和靠近电动机2308而对锁扣或驱动组件造成损坏,如图32和图33所示,优选还增设检验操作,具体是预先检测出第二锁舌2307由最靠近电动机2308的位置移动至位于锁扣内的位置所需的时长(即移动件2310持续移动的时长),此时长可以称之为上锁时长,并且还预先检测出第二锁舌2307由位于锁扣内的位置移动至最靠近电动机2308的位置所需的时长,此时长可以称之为解锁时长,正常情况下上锁时长等于解锁时长,由于电动机2308启动时第二锁舌2307即开始移动,电动机2308关停时第二锁舌2307即停止移动,所以上锁时长或解锁时长即为电动机2308的工作时长,因此在上锁或解锁的过程中,实时对电动机2308的工作时长进行监测,当电动机2308的工作时长未达到上锁时长或解锁时长时,则上锁过程或解锁过程还未完成,电动机2308需要继续对移动件2310进行驱动以保证移动件2310的持续移动,当电动机2308的工作时长达到上锁时长或解锁时长时,则表明第二锁舌2307由最靠近电动机2308的位置移动到了位于锁扣内的位置,或者由位于锁扣内的位置移动到了最靠近电动机2308的位置,即智能锁完成了上锁或解锁,此时就可以令电动机2308停止工作。优选的,上述上锁时长或解锁时长为8s。In the above process, in order to further improve the reliability of the locking and unlocking operations, and avoid the second lock tongue 2307 from being too far away from and close to the motor 2308 to cause damage to the lock or the drive assembly, as shown in Figure 32 and Figure 33, preferably An inspection operation is also added, specifically to detect in advance the length of time required for the second bolt 2307 to move from the position closest to the motor 2308 to the position inside the buckle (that is, the length of time the moving part 2310 continues to move). This length can be called is the length of time for locking, and also pre-detects the time required for the second bolt 2307 to move from the position inside the buckle to the position closest to the motor 2308. This length can be called the time for unlocking. Normally, the time for locking Equal to the unlocking duration, because the second dead bolt 2307 starts to move when the motor 2308 is started, and the second dead bolt 2307 stops moving when the motor 2308 is turned off, so the locking duration or unlocking duration is the working duration of the motor 2308, so in the above In the process of locking or unlocking, the working hours of the motor 2308 are monitored in real time. When the working hours of the motor 2308 do not reach the locking time or unlocking time, the locking process or the unlocking process has not been completed, and the motor 2308 needs to continue to move. The moving part 2310 is driven to ensure the continuous movement of the moving part 2310. When the working time of the motor 2308 reaches the locking time or unlocking time, it indicates that the second bolt 2307 has moved from the position closest to the motor 2308 to the position inside the buckle , or move from the position inside the buckle to the position closest to the motor 2308, that is, the smart lock is locked or unlocked, and the motor 2308 can be stopped at this time. Preferably, the above-mentioned locking duration or unlocking duration is 8s.
进一步的,如图25-图27所示,优选第二锁舌2307通过第二连杆2311滑动的设置在移动件2310上,第二连杆2311的滑动方向与移动件2310移动的方向相同,并且移动件2310上设置有第二弹性件2312,此第二弹性件2312在第二锁舌2307向移动件2310靠近时被第二连杆2311压缩。也就是说,本实施例中的第二锁舌2307为弹性锁舌,在第二锁舌2307承受作用力时,第二锁舌2307可以向移动件2310靠近而实现回缩,并在回缩的过程中压缩第二弹性件2312,当第二锁舌2307不再承受作用力时即可在第二弹性件2312的驱动下回位。通过如此设置,就能够实现第二锁舌2307对锁扣的自动锁定,即:在第二壳体组件2302和第一壳体组件2301接触以使容纳腔闭合的过程中,锁扣会靠近第二锁舌2307并穿过上述的通孔2320后挤压第二锁舌2307,承受挤压力的第二锁舌2307会回缩并压缩第二弹性件2312(第二锁舌2307为斜舌,锁扣挤压的是斜舌的斜面),当第二锁舌2307因为回缩而与锁扣的内侧空间对正时第二锁舌2307不再承受挤压力,第二弹性件2312就能够驱动第二锁舌2307回位而进入到锁扣的内侧空间中以实现和锁扣的锁定。在第二锁舌2307为弹性锁舌的基础之上,驱动组件只需带动第二锁舌2307从锁扣内移出以实现解锁即可,也就是说驱动组件仅驱动第二锁舌2307进行解锁操作,而上锁操作则通过第二弹性件2312对第二锁舌2307的驱动自动实现,同时为了保证锁扣实现对第二锁舌2307的挤压以及第二弹性件2312通过驱动第二锁舌2307能够实现上锁,令驱动组件在驱动第二锁舌2307远离锁扣以完成解锁且容纳腔被打开后,再次驱动第二锁舌2307向锁扣靠近而使第二锁舌2307在螺杆的轴向上处于上锁时所在的位置(但由于容纳腔打开,所以第二锁舌2307此时并未进入锁扣中),以保证第二壳体组件2302和第一壳体组件2301接触时能够实现上述的自动上锁。Further, as shown in Figures 25-27, preferably, the second lock tongue 2307 is slidably arranged on the moving part 2310 through the second connecting rod 2311, and the sliding direction of the second connecting rod 2311 is the same as the moving direction of the moving part 2310, And the moving part 2310 is provided with a second elastic part 2312 , and the second elastic part 2312 is compressed by the second connecting rod 2311 when the second locking tongue 2307 approaches the moving part 2310 . That is to say, the second locking tongue 2307 in this embodiment is an elastic locking tongue. When the second locking tongue 2307 bears the force, the second locking tongue 2307 can approach the moving part 2310 to achieve retraction, and the retraction During the process, the second elastic member 2312 is compressed, and when the second lock tongue 2307 no longer bears the force, it can return to its position driven by the second elastic member 2312 . By setting in this way, the automatic locking of the second lock tongue 2307 to the buckle can be realized, that is, when the second housing component 2302 and the first housing component 2301 are in contact to close the accommodating chamber, the lock buckle will be close to the first The second lock tongue 2307 passes through the above-mentioned through hole 2320 and squeezes the second lock tongue 2307, and the second lock tongue 2307 subjected to the extrusion force will retract and compress the second elastic member 2312 (the second lock tongue 2307 is an oblique tongue , the lock buckle squeezes the slope of the oblique tongue), when the second lock tongue 2307 is aligned with the inner space of the lock buckle due to retraction, the second lock tongue 2307 no longer bears the extrusion force, and the second elastic member 2312 is The second lock tongue 2307 can be driven back to enter the inner space of the lock buckle to achieve locking with the lock buckle. On the basis that the second lock tongue 2307 is an elastic lock tongue, the driving component only needs to drive the second lock tongue 2307 to move out of the buckle to realize unlocking, that is to say, the driving component only drives the second lock tongue 2307 to unlock operation, while the locking operation is automatically realized through the driving of the second elastic member 2312 to the second lock tongue 2307. The tongue 2307 can realize locking, so that after the drive assembly drives the second lock tongue 2307 away from the lock to complete the unlocking and the receiving chamber is opened, it drives the second lock tongue 2307 to approach the lock again so that the second lock tongue 2307 is on the screw rod. The axial direction is at the position when it is locked (but because the accommodating cavity is open, the second bolt 2307 does not enter the lock at this time), so as to ensure that the second housing component 2302 and the first housing component 2301 are in contact When can realize above-mentioned automatic locking.
在具体的结构中,如图25所示,优选移动件2310为矩形框状结构,令螺杆穿过一个框壁,第二连杆2311穿过另一个框壁,此两个框壁为矩形框状结构的四个框壁中相互平行且长度较小的框壁,以此就能够使螺杆和第二连杆2311同轴设置,同时由于矩形框状结构的内侧空间在螺杆或第二连杆2311的轴向上具有较大的尺寸,所以在第二锁舌2307向电动机2308靠近时可以令螺杆伸入到内侧空间的长度较大,并且第二连杆2311也可以在第二锁舌2307回缩时伸入到内侧空间的长度较大,从而保证第二锁舌2307具有足够的解锁行程和回缩行程,提升了容器的上锁和解锁性能。同时,还优选第二弹性件2312为螺旋弹簧,且螺旋弹簧设置在移动件2310的内侧空间中并套设在第二连杆2311上,在具体设置时,令第二连杆2311上设置有阻挡件(例如螺钉),螺旋弹簧的一端与移动件2310固定连接,另一端在套设于第二连杆2311上以后被阻挡件阻挡,在第二锁舌2307回缩的过程中,由于螺旋弹簧被阻挡件阻挡,所以跟随第二锁舌2307回缩的阻挡件会压缩螺旋弹簧,并且此阻挡件也位于内侧空间中,在第二锁舌2307回位时,阻挡件会与移动件2310的内侧壁面抵触而阻挡第二连杆2311过量伸出,从而在避免第二锁舌2307和移动件2310分离的同时还能够对第二锁舌2307的上锁位置进行限位。本实施例中,将移动件2310设置为具有内侧空间的框状结构,并令螺杆和第二连杆2311能够伸入到内腔空间中,且将第二弹性件2312设置在内侧空间中,实现了对空间的充分利用,能够使得智能锁的各部件设置的更加紧凑,减小了智能锁的体积,有利于智能锁在小型容器上的设置。In a specific structure, as shown in Figure 25, preferably the moving part 2310 is a rectangular frame structure, so that the screw rod passes through one frame wall, and the second connecting rod 2311 passes through the other frame wall, and the two frame walls are rectangular frames. Among the four frame walls of the rectangular frame structure, the frame walls that are parallel to each other and have a small length can make the screw and the second connecting rod 2311 coaxially arranged, and at the same time, due to the inner space of the rectangular frame structure, the screw rod or the second connecting rod 2311 has a larger size in the axial direction, so when the second deadbolt 2307 approaches the motor 2308, the length of the screw rod extending into the inner space can be larger, and the second connecting rod 2311 can also be placed on the second deadbolt 2307. When retracting, the length extending into the inner space is relatively large, so as to ensure that the second lock tongue 2307 has sufficient unlocking stroke and retracting stroke, and improves the locking and unlocking performance of the container. At the same time, it is also preferred that the second elastic member 2312 is a coil spring, and the coil spring is arranged in the inner space of the moving member 2310 and sleeved on the second connecting rod 2311. A stopper (such as a screw), one end of the helical spring is fixedly connected to the moving part 2310, and the other end is blocked by the stopper after being sleeved on the second connecting rod 2311. During the retraction process of the second dead bolt 2307, due to the helical The spring is blocked by the stopper, so the stopper following the retraction of the second deadbolt 2307 will compress the coil spring, and this stopper is also located in the inner space, when the second deadbolt 2307 returns, the stopper will contact the moving part 2310 The inner side wall surface of the second locking tongue 2311 is prevented from being excessively protruded, so as to prevent the second locking tongue 2307 from separating from the moving part 2310 and also limit the locked position of the second locking tongue 2307. In this embodiment, the moving part 2310 is set as a frame structure with an inner space, and the screw and the second connecting rod 2311 can extend into the inner cavity space, and the second elastic member 2312 is arranged in the inner space, The full utilization of the space is realized, the various parts of the smart lock can be set more compactly, the volume of the smart lock is reduced, and it is beneficial to the setting of the smart lock on a small container.
请参照图35与图36,对于智能锁盒3400,第二壳体组件3402具有外侧壳体34021和安装板34022,外侧壳体34021与安装板34022之间设有驱动组件3404以及由驱动组件3404驱动的竖向第二锁舌3407,第一壳体组件3401在接近竖向上边沿的位置设有用于与第二锁舌3407相配合的锁扣,本实施例 中的锁扣为垂直于第一壳体组件3401扣合面的“U”形锁扣支架3405。Please refer to Figure 35 and Figure 36, for the smart lock box 3400, the second housing assembly 3402 has an outer housing 34021 and a mounting plate 34022. Driven vertical second lock tongue 3407, the first housing component 3401 is provided with a lock buckle for matching with the second lock tongue 3407 at a position close to the vertical upper edge, the lock buckle in this embodiment is perpendicular to the first The "U"-shaped locking bracket 3405 on the fastening surface of the shell assembly 3401.
驱动组件3404主要由电动机34041、电机压块34042、移动件34043以及锁舌弹簧34044等组成,其中,电动机34041由电机压块34042定位于外侧壳体34021,移动件34043与电动机34041的动力输出端传动连接并能够在电动机34041的带动下沿竖直方向移动,锁舌弹簧34044设于移动件34043与第二锁舌3407之间。The driving assembly 3404 is mainly composed of a motor 34041, a motor pressing block 34042, a moving part 34043 and a bolt spring 34044, etc., wherein the motor 34041 is positioned on the outer casing 34021 by the motor pressing block 34042, and the moving part 34043 is connected to the power output end of the motor 34041 The transmission is connected and can move vertically under the drive of the motor 34041 , and the dead bolt spring 34044 is arranged between the moving part 34043 and the second dead bolt 3407 .
第二锁舌3407的主体部分为内部具有空腔的块状结构,其上端为斜面形状,在侧向投影上呈直角梯形,第二锁舌3407的尾部带有向移动件34043方向延伸的锁柄,电动机34041、移动件34043、锁舌弹簧34044和第二锁舌3407沿竖向方向,从底部向顶部依次布置,并由安装板34022整体封装在外侧壳体34021的内部,锁舌弹簧34044为锥形弹簧,其朝向第二锁舌3407的一端直径较小,背向第二锁舌3407的另一端直径较大,第二锁舌3407的锁柄末端加工有通孔,此通孔内可旋入螺钉,锁舌弹簧34044的小径端抵接于螺钉,从而可以带动第二锁舌3407向上移动。The main part of the second deadbolt 3407 is a block structure with a cavity inside, and its upper end is in the shape of a bevel, which is a right-angled trapezoid in lateral projection. The handle, the motor 34041, the moving part 34043, the dead bolt spring 34044 and the second dead bolt 3407 are arranged in sequence from the bottom to the top in the vertical direction, and are integrally packaged inside the outer casing 34021 by the mounting plate 34022, and the dead bolt spring 34044 It is a conical spring with a smaller diameter towards the end of the second lock tongue 3407, and a larger diameter at the other end facing away from the second lock tongue 3407. The end of the lock handle of the second lock tongue 3407 is processed with a through hole. The screw can be screwed in, and the small-diameter end of the dead bolt spring 34044 abuts against the screw, thereby driving the second dead bolt 3407 to move upward.
安装板34022在接近顶端的位置设计有一处凹位,以容纳锁盒下盖的“U”形锁扣支架3405,在锁紧状态下,锁盒下盖的“U”形锁扣支架3405进入安装板34022的凹位中,并由第二锁舌3407锁紧。The mounting plate 34022 is designed with a recess near the top to accommodate the "U"-shaped snap bracket 3405 of the lower cover of the lock box. In the locked state, the "U"-shaped snap bracket 3405 of the lower cover of the lock box enters In the concave position of the installation plate 34022, and locked by the second locking tongue 3407.
工作时,电动机34041的电机正反向旋转,带动移动件34043向顶端或向底部移动,当向顶端移动时,推动锁舌弹簧34044顶着第二锁舌3407锁紧锁扣支架3405;当向底部移动时,第二锁舌3407底端无支撑装置,在重力作用下自动下滑,锁扣支架3405未被卡紧,处于开锁状态。When working, the motor of the motor 34041 rotates in the forward and reverse directions, driving the moving part 34043 to move to the top or to the bottom. When moving to the top, the bolt spring 34044 is pushed against the second bolt 3407 to lock the latch bracket 3405; When the bottom moves, there is no supporting device at the bottom of the second dead bolt 3407, and it slides down automatically under the action of gravity, and the lock bracket 3405 is not clamped, and is in an unlocked state.
如图37所示,外侧壳体34021内设有用于分散冲击力的防敲装置3406,此防敲装置3406位于外侧壳体34021的顶端内侧,在竖向方向上,防敲装置3406处于第二锁舌3407与锁扣支架3405的锁紧位置的上方。As shown in Figure 37, the outer casing 34021 is provided with an anti-knock device 3406 for dispersing the impact force. The anti-knock device 3406 is located inside the top end of the outer casing 34021. Above the locked position of the lock tongue 3407 and the lock bracket 3405 .
防敲装置3406主要由安装块34061、散振销34062和阻尼弹簧34063组成,安装块34061上设有左右对称的两个安装孔340611,分别为第一安装孔和第二安装孔,两个安装孔内分别设有散振销34062和阻尼弹簧34063,散振销34062的底端分别插入安装孔340611,散振销34062的顶端伸出安装孔340611,安装孔340611内的阻尼弹簧34063套装在散振销34062上,以对散振销34062进行弹性支撑。 Anti-knocking device 3406 is mainly made up of mounting block 34061, loose vibration pin 34062 and damping spring 34063, and mounting block 34061 is provided with two symmetrical mounting holes 340611, which are respectively the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole, two mounting holes The holes are respectively provided with vibration-dispersing pins 34062 and damping springs 34063, the bottom ends of the vibration-dispersing pins 34062 are respectively inserted into the mounting holes 340611, the top ends of the vibration-dispersing pins 34062 protrude from the mounting holes 340611, and the damping springs 34063 in the mounting holes 340611 are set in the mounting holes. On the vibration pin 34062, to elastically support the scattered vibration pin 34062.
两个散振销34062的形状相同,都呈“T”字形,阻尼弹簧34063的顶端支撑于散振销34062的台阶部位,阻尼弹簧34063的底端支撑于安装孔340611的内底部。The two vibration-dissipating pins 34062 have the same shape, both in a "T" shape. The top end of the damping spring 34063 is supported on the stepped part of the vibration-dissipating pin 34062, and the bottom end of the damping spring 34063 is supported on the inner bottom of the mounting hole 340611.
更为具体地,安装块34061的底部设有能够在锁紧状态下能够抵接于第二锁舌3407顶端的圆柱形凸出部340612,每一个凸出部340612在竖直方向上与圆柱状的散振销34062相对应,且凸出部340612设计有弧形内凹面,以便与第二锁舌3407的顶端相抵接。More specifically, the bottom of the mounting block 34061 is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 340612 that can abut against the top end of the second lock tongue 3407 in a locked state, and each protrusion 340612 is vertically aligned with the cylindrical shape. Corresponding to the vibration-dissipating pin 34062, and the protrusion 340612 is designed with an arc-shaped inner concave surface, so as to abut against the top end of the second locking tongue 3407.
当使用外力敲击外侧壳体34021的顶部时,安装在安装块34061内的散振销34062受到传递过来力,向下压迫阻尼弹簧34063,从而分散受到的冲击力,通过安装块凸出部340612的弧形内凹面可起到进一步分散冲击力的作用,从而避免冲击力过多的传递到第二锁舌3407,不会压迫锁舌弹簧34044下沉,锁盒不易被暴力开启。When the top of the outer shell 34021 is hit by an external force, the vibration-dissipating pin 34062 installed in the mounting block 34061 receives the transmitted force and presses the damping spring 34063 downward, thereby distributing the received impact force and passing through the mounting block protrusion 340612 The arc-shaped inner concave surface can further disperse the impact force, thereby avoiding too much impact force from being transmitted to the second lock tongue 3407, and will not press the lock tongue spring 34044 to sink, and the lock box is not easy to be violently opened.
上述实施例仅是本实用新型的优选方案,具体并不局限于此,在此基础上可根据实际需要作出具有针对性的调整,从而得到不同的实施方式。例如,在安装块34061上安装三个或四个散振销34062,或者,将散振销34062设计成其他形状,等等。由于可能实现的方式较多,这里就不再一一举例说明。The above-mentioned embodiments are only preferred solutions of the present invention, and are not limited thereto. On this basis, targeted adjustments can be made according to actual needs, so as to obtain different implementation modes. For example, install three or four vibration-dispersing pins 34062 on the mounting block 34061, or design the vibration-dispersing pins 34062 into other shapes, etc. Since there are many ways of possible realization, it is not necessary to give examples one by one here.
请参照图23-图32,在一些实施例中,智能锁盒2300的智能锁还包括检测组件,此检测组件包括:相对于电动机2308固定设置的检测件2313(即检测件2313和电动机2308均设置在后述的PCB上);连接在移动件2310上并随移动件2310移动的随动件2315,检测件2313通过检测随动件2315的位置能够得到第二锁舌2307所处的位置。更加优选的,检测件2313具有接触件2314,随动件2315上开设有接触槽2316,接触件2314位于接触槽2316中并通过与接触槽2316的不同侧壁接触使得检测件2313能够测得第二锁舌2307是否位于电动机2308中。其中,随动件2315的一端固定连接在移动件2310上,另一端靠近检测件2313设置,并且靠近检测件2313的一端上开设有接触槽2316,检测件2313的接触件2314(此接触件2314即为检测件2313的三角形触点)伸入到接触槽2316中;由于随动件2315连接在移动件2310上,所以随动件2315会跟随移动件2310、第二锁舌2307同步移动,同时在驱动组件上设置检测组件时,如图28所示,令第二锁舌2307处于最靠近电动机2308的位置时(即解锁状态时)接触槽2316的左侧壁(此左侧壁为靠近移动件2310的侧壁)与接触件2314接触;并且如图30所示,令第二锁舌2307处于位于锁扣内的位置时接触槽2316的右侧壁(此右侧壁为远离移动件2310的侧壁)与接触件2314接触,从而在驱动件工作的过程中,一旦接触槽2316的左侧壁与接触件2314接触则能够使检测件2313测得第二锁舌2307处于最靠近电动机2308的位置,进而使得检测件2313可以向后述的控制组件2317发送解锁信号,令控制组件2317可以依据此解锁信号控制电动机2308停止工作,而一旦接触槽2316的右侧壁与接触件2314接触则能够使检测件2313测得第二锁舌2307处于位于锁扣内的位置,进而使得检测件2313可以向控制组件2317发送上锁信号,令控制组件2317可以依据此上锁信号控制电动机2308停止工作。在 此结构的基础之上,检测件2313可以为检测开关、检测顶针等,随动件2315为开关拨片。另外检测件2313也可以为对随动件2315进行感测的霍尔传感器等。Please refer to FIGS. 23-32 , in some embodiments, the smart lock of the smart lock box 2300 also includes a detection component, and the detection component includes: a detection part 2313 fixedly arranged relative to the motor 2308 (that is, the detection part 2313 and the motor 2308 are both be arranged on the PCB described later); the follower 2315 that is connected on the moving part 2310 and moves with the moving part 2310, and the detection part 2313 can obtain the position of the second dead bolt 2307 by detecting the position of the follower 2315. More preferably, the detection part 2313 has a contact part 2314, and the follower 2315 is provided with a contact groove 2316, and the contact part 2314 is located in the contact groove 2316 and enables the detection part 2313 to detect the first contact by contacting with different side walls of the contact groove 2316 Whether the second locking tongue 2307 is located in the motor 2308. Wherein, one end of the follower 2315 is fixedly connected on the moving part 2310, and the other end is arranged close to the detection part 2313, and a contact groove 2316 is provided on the end close to the detection part 2313, the contact part 2314 of the detection part 2313 (this contact part 2314 That is, the triangular contact of the detection part 2313) extends into the contact groove 2316; since the follower 2315 is connected to the moving part 2310, the follower 2315 will follow the moving part 2310 and the second dead bolt 2307 to move synchronously, and at the same time When the detection assembly is arranged on the drive assembly, as shown in Figure 28, when the second dead bolt 2307 is in the position closest to the motor 2308 (that is, when it is unlocked), it contacts the left side wall of the groove 2316 (this left side wall is for moving closer) and as shown in Figure 30, make the second bolt 2307 contact the right side wall of groove 2316 (this right side wall is away from the moving part 2310 when the position in the buckle). The side wall) is in contact with the contact piece 2314, so that during the working process of the driving piece, once the left side wall of the contact groove 2316 contacts the contact piece 2314, the detection piece 2313 can detect that the second bolt 2307 is closest to the motor 2308 position, so that the detection part 2313 can send an unlocking signal to the control assembly 2317 described later, so that the control assembly 2317 can control the motor 2308 to stop working according to the unlocking signal, and once the right side wall of the contact groove 2316 contacts the contact piece 2314, the The detection part 2313 can detect that the second lock tongue 2307 is in the position inside the buckle, so that the detection part 2313 can send a locking signal to the control component 2317, so that the control component 2317 can control the motor 2308 to stop working according to the locking signal . On the basis of this structure, the detection part 2313 can be a detection switch, a detection thimble, etc., and the follower 2315 is a switch paddle. In addition, the detecting element 2313 may also be a Hall sensor or the like for sensing the follower element 2315 .
本实施例提供的智能锁盒2300,通过智能锁包括上述检测组件,能够更好的对电动机2308进行保护,避免电动机2308因移动件2310的过量移动而造成损坏,使得电动机2308具有更长的工作寿命。The smart lock box 2300 provided in this embodiment can better protect the motor 2308 through the smart lock including the above-mentioned detection components, avoiding damage to the motor 2308 due to excessive movement of the moving part 2310, so that the motor 2308 has a longer working life. life.
如图25所示,智能锁包括设置在第二壳体组件2302上并与按键2303和电性接口2304电连接的控制组件2317,驱动组件和检测件2313设置在控制组件2317上并与控制组件2317电连接。也就是说,驱动组件在控制组件2317的控制下工作,而检测件2313则与控制组件2317通信连接,此三者具体的配合过程为:当用户通过按压按键2303输入解锁密码后,控制组件2317验证密码正确后控制电动机2308启动,使得电动机2308驱动第二锁舌2307由位于锁扣内的位置向电动机2308靠近直至第二锁舌2307移动至最靠近电动机2308的位置,在此移动过程中,由于随动件2315和第二锁舌2307同步移动,所以会使得接触槽2316由右侧壁与接触件2314接触的状态逐渐转变为左侧壁与接触件2314接触的状态,即由图31所示状态向图29所示状态转变,当左侧壁与接触件2314接触后,检测件2313生成解锁信号并将解锁信号发送给控制组件2317,控制组件2317依据解锁信号控制电动机2308停止转动。As shown in Figure 25, the smart lock includes a control assembly 2317 arranged on the second housing assembly 2302 and electrically connected to the button 2303 and the electrical interface 2304, the driving assembly and the detection part 2313 are arranged on the control assembly 2317 and connected to the control assembly 2317 electrical connection. That is to say, the driving component works under the control of the control component 2317, and the detection part 2313 is connected to the control component 2317 in communication. After verifying that the password is correct, control the motor 2308 to start, so that the motor 2308 drives the second lock tongue 2307 to approach the motor 2308 from the position inside the lock until the second lock tongue 2307 moves to the position closest to the motor 2308. During this movement, Since the follower 2315 and the second bolt 2307 move synchronously, the contact groove 2316 will gradually change from the state where the right side wall is in contact with the contact piece 2314 to the state where the left side wall is in contact with the contact piece 2314, that is, as shown in FIG. 31 The state shown in FIG. 29 transitions to the state shown in FIG. 29. When the left side wall contacts the contact piece 2314, the detection piece 2313 generates an unlock signal and sends the unlock signal to the control assembly 2317, and the control assembly 2317 controls the motor 2308 to stop rotating according to the unlock signal.
其中,控制组件2317的主体部件为印制电路板(PCB),可以将此PCB理解为控制器,其上设置有多个模块,此多个模块和PCB共同构成了控制组件2317,这些模块例如包括:电动机驱动模块,用于控制电动机2308的启停以及正反转,最终实现容器的解锁和上锁;RTC模块,用于加密相关,记录实时时间;按键模块,用于识别输入的密码;生物信息识别模块,用于识别后述的生物信息识别件采集到的生物信息,其可以与生物信息识别件集成于一体,也可以与PCB集成于一体;LED显示模块,用于实现LED的灯效。Wherein, the main part of the control assembly 2317 is a printed circuit board (PCB), which can be understood as a controller, on which a plurality of modules are arranged, and the plurality of modules and the PCB together constitute the control assembly 2317, and these modules are for example Including: motor drive module, used to control the start and stop, forward and reverse of the motor 2308, and finally realize the unlocking and locking of the container; RTC module, used to encrypt and record real-time time; key module, used to identify the input password; The biological information identification module is used to identify the biological information collected by the biological information identification piece described later, which can be integrated with the biological information identification piece or integrated with the PCB; the LED display module is used to realize the LED light effect.
本实施例中,在智能锁具有用于输入解锁密码的按键2303的基础上,优选智能锁还具有生物信息识别件(图中未示出),该生物信息识别件与控制组件2317电连接,并通过与控制组件2317配合实现对携带生物信息的控制指令的验证。生物信息识别件和控制组件2317配合实现解锁的过程为:当用户需要解锁容器时,令具有生物信息的人体部位(例如手指、面部、手掌等)靠近、对准和/或接触生物信息识别件,使得生物信息识别件能够采集到用户的个性化生物信息,如果生物信息识别模块与生物信息识别件集成于一体,则生物信息识别件同时实现对生物信息的识别,如果生物信息识别模块与PCB集成于一体,则生物信息识别件并将采集到的生物信息发送给PCB并使PCB对生物信息进行识别,具体的识别过程是生物信息识别模块将采集到的生物信息与预设在其中的生物信息进行对比,如果对比结果一致,则PCB对携带生物信息的控制指令进行验证以开启解锁程序,即PCB控制电动机2308启动,电动机2308带动螺杆反向转动而使第二锁舌2307从电动机2308中移出,如果对比结果不一致,则PCB不开启解锁程序。In this embodiment, on the basis that the smart lock has a button 2303 for inputting the unlock password, it is preferred that the smart lock also has a biological information identification piece (not shown in the figure), which is electrically connected to the control assembly 2317, and By cooperating with the control component 2317, the verification of the control instruction carrying biological information is realized. The unlocking process of the biological information identification part and the control component 2317 is as follows: when the user needs to unlock the container, make the body parts (such as fingers, face, palm, etc.) with biological information approach, align and/or touch the biological information identification part , so that the biometric information identification part can collect the user's personalized biological information. If the biometric information identification module and the biometric information identification part are integrated, the biometric information identification part can simultaneously realize the identification of biological information. If the biometric information identification module and the PCB Integrated in one, the biological information identification part sends the collected biological information to the PCB and makes the PCB identify the biological information. The specific identification process is that the biological information identification module combines the collected biological information with the biological information preset in it. The information is compared, and if the comparison results are consistent, the PCB verifies the control command carrying the biological information to start the unlocking program, that is, the PCB controls the motor 2308 to start, and the motor 2308 drives the screw to reversely rotate so that the second dead bolt 2307 is released from the motor 2308. If the comparison results are inconsistent, the PCB does not start the unlocking process.
优选的,生物信息识别件包括指纹识别件、人脸识别件、指静脉识别件和掌纹识别件中的至少一个。也就是说,智能锁上设置的生物信息识别件可以为多个,并分别能够根据预设规则对指纹、人脸、指静脉和掌纹进行采集;或者,生物信息识别件为一个,用于根据预设规则对指纹、人脸、指静脉或掌纹进行采集。也就是说,智能锁可以具有对一种生物信息进行采集的功能,也可以具有对多种生物信息进行采集的功能,本实施例对此不做限定。其中,生物信息识别件可以为对指纹、掌纹进行感测的指纹传感器和/或对人脸、指静脉进行拍摄的CCD相机。Preferably, the biological information identification includes at least one of fingerprint identification, face identification, finger vein identification and palmprint identification. That is to say, there can be multiple biometric information identification pieces set on the smart lock, which can respectively collect fingerprints, faces, finger veins, and palm prints according to preset rules; or, there is one biometric information identification piece for Collect fingerprints, faces, finger veins or palm prints according to preset rules. That is to say, the smart lock may have the function of collecting one type of biological information, or may have the function of collecting multiple types of biological information, which is not limited in this embodiment. Wherein, the biological information identification component may be a fingerprint sensor for sensing fingerprints and palmprints and/or a CCD camera for photographing human faces and finger veins.
进一步的,控制组件2317还包括能够与电子设备通信连接的无线通信模块,以使电子设备能够控制第二锁舌2307从电动机2308中移出。即,无线通信模块用于实现控制组件2317与手机、电脑等电子设备的通信连接,使得电子设备能够通过安装的APP遥控智能锁上锁和解锁。如此就能够使得本实施例提供的容器具有更多的解锁方式,给用户的使用提供了便利。无线通信模块具体可以为蓝牙模块、wifi模块、GPRS模块、ZIGBEE模块或ZWAVE模块等。Further, the control component 2317 also includes a wireless communication module capable of communicating with the electronic device, so that the electronic device can control the second locking bolt 2307 to move out of the motor 2308 . That is, the wireless communication module is used to realize the communication connection between the control component 2317 and electronic devices such as mobile phones and computers, so that the electronic devices can be locked and unlocked remotely through the installed APP remote control smart lock. In this way, the container provided by this embodiment can have more unlocking methods, which provides convenience for users. Specifically, the wireless communication module may be a bluetooth module, a wifi module, a GPRS module, a ZIGBEE module or a ZWAVE module and the like.
如图25所示,优选第二壳体组件2302包括:外侧壳体23021,按键2303和生物信息识别件设置在外侧壳体23021上;设置有安装槽的安装板23022,第二锁舌2307、驱动组件、检测组件和控制组件2317均位于安装槽内;与安装板23022连接并覆盖控制组件2317以将控制组件2317固定在安装板23022上的固定盖板23023;与外侧壳体23021连接,以将安装板23022、第二锁舌2307、驱动组件、检测组件、控制组件2317和固定盖板23023容置在第二壳体组件2302内的内侧壳体23024。在此结构中,外侧壳体23021和内侧壳体23024为第二壳体组件2302的容置智能锁的部件,且内侧壳体23024为容纳腔的内壁;如图23所示,当容纳腔处于闭合状态时,仅外侧壳体23021外露于容器的表面,内侧壳体23024与第一壳体组件2301贴合并被外侧壳体23021遮挡;如图24所示,当容纳器处于打开状态时,内侧壳体23024不再与第一壳体组件2301贴合而外露,具体的,该内侧壳体23024可以为智能锁的电池盖板;安装板23022为承载第二锁舌2307、驱动组件、检测组件和控制组件2317的部件,或者可以将安装板23022称之为安装支架,其上设置有安装槽,第二锁舌2307、驱动组件、检测组件和控制组件2317分别设置在安装槽的不同部位;固定盖板23023为将控制组件2317限位、固定在安装槽内的部件,由于第二锁舌2307、驱动 组件和检测组件均连接在控制组件2317上,所以通过使固定盖板23023固定、覆盖控制组件2317就能够实现第二锁舌2307、驱动组件、检测组件和控制组件2317等全部部件在安装板23022上的安装,此固定盖板23023通过螺钉实现与安装板23022的固定连接。此种结构的第二壳体组件2302,不仅能够实现智能锁的合理安装,而且还能够使得各部件设置的较为紧凑,进而使得容器的体积可以得到减小,有利于容器的使用,例如有利于钥匙盒在门外墙体上的安装。As shown in Figure 25, preferably, the second housing assembly 2302 includes: an outer housing 23021, on which the buttons 2303 and biometric identification pieces are arranged; a mounting plate 23022 provided with a mounting groove, a second locking tongue 2307, The drive assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly 2317 are all located in the installation groove; the fixed cover plate 23023 that is connected with the installation plate 23022 and covers the control assembly 2317 to fix the control assembly 2317 on the installation plate 23022; is connected with the outer casing 23021 to The installation plate 23022 , the second deadbolt 2307 , the drive assembly, the detection assembly, the control assembly 2317 and the fixed cover 23023 are housed in the inner casing 23024 of the second casing assembly 2302 . In this structure, the outer casing 23021 and the inner casing 23024 are the parts of the second casing assembly 2302 that accommodate the smart lock, and the inner casing 23024 is the inner wall of the accommodating chamber; as shown in FIG. 23 , when the accommodating chamber is in In the closed state, only the outer shell 23021 is exposed on the surface of the container, and the inner shell 23024 fits with the first shell assembly 2301 and is covered by the outer shell 23021; as shown in Figure 24, when the container is in the open state, the inner The housing 23024 is no longer attached to the first housing component 2301 and is exposed. Specifically, the inner housing 23024 can be the battery cover of the smart lock; and the components of the control assembly 2317, or the installation plate 23022 may be called an installation bracket, on which an installation groove is arranged, and the second lock tongue 2307, the driving assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly 2317 are respectively arranged at different positions of the installation groove; The fixed cover 23023 is a component that limits and fixes the control assembly 2317 in the installation groove. Since the second deadbolt 2307, the drive assembly and the detection assembly are all connected to the control assembly 2317, the fixed cover 23023 is fixed and covered. The control assembly 2317 can realize the installation of all components such as the second dead bolt 2307, the driving assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly 2317 on the mounting plate 23022, and the fixed cover plate 23023 is fixedly connected with the mounting plate 23022 by screws. The second housing assembly 2302 of this structure can not only realize the reasonable installation of the smart lock, but also make the various components more compact, so that the volume of the container can be reduced, which is beneficial to the use of the container, such as The installation of the key box on the wall outside the door.
第一壳体组件2301为槽型结构,其上设置有锁扣,且顶部设置有挂件2319。The first housing component 2301 is a groove structure, on which a lock is arranged, and a pendant 2319 is arranged on the top.
如图24所示,第一壳体组件2301上设置有铰链2318,第二壳体组件2302通过铰链2318与第一壳体组件2301转动连接,并通过相对于第一壳体组件2301转动实现容纳腔的开闭。此种通过转动第二壳体组件2302实现容纳腔开闭的设置方式,一方面能够保持容器的各个部分始终连为一体,有利于容器的设置和使用,另一方面,通过转动的方式打开容纳腔也能够使得容纳腔的开口面积更大,有利于物品的取放。此外,容纳腔的打开还可以通过第二壳体组件2302在第一壳体组件2301上移动或将第二壳体组件2302从第一壳体组件2301上拆下而实现。As shown in Figure 24, the first housing component 2301 is provided with a hinge 2318, and the second housing component 2302 is rotatably connected with the first housing component 2301 through the hinge 2318, and is accommodated by rotating relative to the first housing component 2301. cavity opening and closing. This way of opening and closing the accommodating cavity by rotating the second housing assembly 2302, on the one hand, can keep the various parts of the container connected as a whole, which is beneficial to the setting and use of the container; The cavity can also make the opening area of the accommodating cavity larger, which is beneficial for taking and placing items. In addition, the opening of the accommodating cavity can also be realized by moving the second housing component 2302 on the first housing component 2301 or detaching the second housing component 2302 from the first housing component 2301 .
本实施例所披露的智能锁盒2300及智能锁盒3400可能带来的有益效果包括但不限于:(1)可使用数字密码按键、蓝牙等方式解锁,方便快捷;(2)弹性第二锁舌和电动机驱动丝杠螺母机构上锁、解锁的方式,操作迅速、简单、便捷,安全性高;(3)自带检测组件,提高了电动机的使用寿命。需要说明的是,不同实施例可能产生的有益效果不同,在不同的实施例里,可能产生的有益效果可以是以上任意一种或几种的组合,也可以是其他任何可能获得的有益效果。The possible beneficial effects of the smart lock box 2300 and the smart lock box 3400 disclosed in this embodiment include but are not limited to: (1) can be unlocked by digital password keys, bluetooth, etc., which is convenient and fast; (2) elastic second lock Tongue and motor-driven lead screw and nut mechanism are locked and unlocked, and the operation is fast, simple, convenient and high in safety; (3) Self-contained detection components improve the service life of the motor. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
需要说明的是,图23-37中的智能锁、防敲装置等部件不仅可以应用于图23-37所示的智能锁盒,也可以应用于图2所示的箱体,还可以适用于上文所述的多种类型的可开合设备。It should be noted that the smart lock, anti-knock device and other components in Figure 23-37 can be applied not only to the smart lock box shown in Figure 23-37, but also to the box shown in Figure 2, and can also be applied to Various types of openable devices as described above.
本说明书实施例还涉及一种索引信息管理方法和系统。在一些实施例中,该方法和系统可以应用于上述的可闭合设备(例如图2所示的可闭合设备100、图23所示的智能锁盒2300等)的装置控制及存取物品信息的管理,可闭合设备可以包括物品存储装置,物品存储装置包括但不限于保管柜、保管箱、珠宝盒和智能药盒等。在一些实施例中,该方法和系统也可以应用于智能仓库的控制及存取物品信息的管理。在一些实施例中,该方法和系统可以应用于家庭使用场景中单人或多人使用的保管箱的控制及存储的私人物品的信息管理等。在一些实施例中,该方法和系统可以应用于办公使用场景中单人或多人使用的保管柜的控制及存取的公共物品的信息管理等。通过该方法和系统,可以实现:对用户进行安全验证、识别存取物品、建立用户及物品信息的索引等一种或多种功能。该索引信息管理方法和系统可以实现物品存储装置的智能化控制、物品信息的高效管理及查询、提高物品存储装置使用的安全性和便捷性、适应更多使用场景等一种或多种有益效果。The embodiment of this specification also relates to a method and system for managing index information. In some embodiments, the method and system can be applied to device control and access to item information of the above-mentioned closable devices (such as the closable device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , the smart lock box 2300 shown in FIG. 23 , etc.) Management, the closeable device may include item storage devices including, but not limited to, safe deposit boxes, safe deposit boxes, jewelry boxes, smart pill boxes, and the like. In some embodiments, the method and system can also be applied to the control of smart warehouses and the management of access item information. In some embodiments, the method and system can be applied to the control of a safe deposit box used by a single person or multiple people, information management of stored personal items, and the like in a household use scenario. In some embodiments, the method and system can be applied to the control of storage cabinets used by a single person or multiple people and the information management of accessed public goods in office use scenarios. Through the method and system, one or more functions can be realized: performing security verification on users, identifying and accessing items, establishing an index of user and item information, and the like. The index information management method and system can realize one or more beneficial effects such as intelligent control of item storage devices, efficient management and query of item information, improvement of the safety and convenience of using item storage devices, and adaptation to more usage scenarios. .
图38是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性索引信息管理系统的应用场景示意图。如图38所示,索引信息管理系统3800可以包括服务器3810、网络3820、可闭合设备3830、用户终端3840和存储设备3850。Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an exemplary index information management system according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 38 , the index information management system 3800 may include a server 3810 , a network 3820 , a closeable device 3830 , a user terminal 3840 and a storage device 3850 .
索引信息管理系统3800可以对访问可闭合设备3830的物品管理区域的用户进行安全验证,根据验证结果进行相应操作。例如,确认用户为受信用户以后,用户可以打开储物装置或进行其他操作。The index information management system 3800 can perform security verification on users who access the item management area of the closeable device 3830, and perform corresponding operations according to the verification results. For example, after confirming that the user is a trusted user, the user can open the storage device or perform other operations.
索引信息管理系统3800可以获取可闭合设备3830内的物品信息,并基于物品信息对物品进行识别。例如,确定物品的属性,并根据物品的属性对物品进行分类。The index information management system 3800 can acquire item information in the closeable device 3830, and identify the item based on the item information. For example, attributes of items are determined, and items are classified according to the attributes of items.
索引信息管理系统3800可以为受信用户提供服务。例如,为受信用户提供访问物品管理区域的服务,或者提供物品查询服务。The index information management system 3800 can provide services for trusted users. For example, provide services for trusted users to access the item management area, or provide item query services.
服务器3810可以用于处理与索引信息管理相关的信息和/或数据。例如,服务器3810可以处理可闭合设备3830获取的用户信息,并根据用户信息完成对用户的安全验证。又例如,服务器3810可以处理可闭合设备3830中获取的与物品相关的探测信息,并基于探测信息确定物品信息。还例如,服务器3810可以识别受信用户的服务请求,并基于服务请求为受信用户提供服务。 Server 3810 may be used to process information and/or data related to index information management. For example, the server 3810 may process the user information acquired by the closeable device 3830, and complete security verification of the user according to the user information. For another example, the server 3810 may process the detection information related to the item acquired in the closeable device 3830, and determine the item information based on the detection information. Also for example, the server 3810 may identify a service request of a trusted user, and provide a service for the trusted user based on the service request.
需要说明的是,服务器3810可以是硬件,也可以是软件。例如,服务器3810可以是设置在可闭合设备3830上的提供数据处理功能的硬件设备。又例如,服务器3810可以是使网关实现数据处理功能的软件。It should be noted that the server 3810 may be hardware or software. For example, the server 3810 may be a hardware device provided on the closeable device 3830 to provide data processing functions. For another example, the server 3810 may be software enabling the gateway to implement data processing functions.
在一些实施例中,服务器3810可以包括处理器3812,处理器3812可以处理从其他设备或系统组成部分中获得的数据、信息和/或处理结果,并基于这些数据、信息和/或处理结果执行程序指令,以执行一个或多个本说明书中描述的功能。In some embodiments, the server 3810 may include a processor 3812, and the processor 3812 may process data, information and/or processing results obtained from other devices or system components, and perform execution based on these data, information and/or processing results program instructions to perform one or more of the functions described in this specification.
网络3820可以用于提供信息交换的渠道。在一些实施例中,服务器3810、可闭合设备3830、用户终端3840和存储设备3850之间可以通过网络3820交换信息。例如,受信用户经由用户终端3840通过网络3820与服务器3810通信连接,获取存储设备3850中存储的与可闭合设备3830中的物品相关的信息。 Network 3820 may be used to provide a channel for information exchange. In some embodiments, the server 3810 , the closeable device 3830 , the user terminal 3840 and the storage device 3850 can exchange information through the network 3820 . For example, the trusted user communicates with the server 3810 through the network 3820 via the user terminal 3840 to obtain information related to the items in the closeable device 3830 stored in the storage device 3850 .
在一些实施例中,网络3820可以包括一个或以上网络接入点。例如,网络3820可以包括有线或无线网络接入点,例如,基站和/或网络交换点3820-1、3820-2等。In some embodiments, network 3820 may include one or more network access points. For example, network 3820 may include wired or wireless network access points, eg, base stations and/or network switching points 3820-1, 3820-2, etc.
可闭合设备3830可以用于提供可闭合的物品管理区域以存储物品,以及获取与物品相关的信息和/或数据。在一些实施例中,可闭合设备3830可以获取用户信息。例如,通过指纹、虹膜、人脸识别、数字密码等中的一种或多种方式获取用户信息。在一些实施例中,可闭合设备3830可以获取物品管理区域内物品的信息。例如,通过设置的激光传感器、红外传感器、超声波传感器、压力传感器等中的一种或多种设备获取物品信息。The closeable device 3830 may be used to provide a closeable item management area to store items, and to retrieve information and/or data related to the items. In some embodiments, the closeable device 3830 may obtain user information. For example, user information is obtained through one or more methods of fingerprint, iris, face recognition, digital password, etc. In some embodiments, the closeable device 3830 can obtain information about items in the item management area. For example, the item information is acquired through one or more of the provided laser sensors, infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, pressure sensors and the like.
用户可以通过用户终端3840使用系统3800提供的服务。例如,受信用户可以通过用户终端3840发出查询请求,查询其放入可闭合设备3830的物品管理区域内的物品。又例如,可闭合设备3830可以通过用户终端3840向用户发送警报,以警示用户所存物品处于非安全状态。Users can use the services provided by the system 3800 through the user terminal 3840 . For example, a trusted user may send an inquiry request through the user terminal 3840 to inquire about the items it puts in the item management area of the closeable device 3830 . For another example, the closeable device 3830 may send an alarm to the user through the user terminal 3840 to warn the user that the stored items are in an unsafe state.
在一些实施例中,用户终端3840可以包括智能手机3840-1、平板计算机3840-2、膝上型计算机3840-3等或其他具有输入和/或输出功能的设备中的一种或其任意组合。在一些实施例中,用户终端3840可以是具有显示功能的显示终端,用于显示物品信息。在一些实施例中,用户可以基于用户终端3840对系统3800的各组成部分进行操控。In some embodiments, the user terminal 3840 may include one of a smart phone 3840-1, a tablet computer 3840-2, a laptop computer 3840-3, etc., or other devices with input and/or output functions, or any combination thereof . In some embodiments, the user terminal 3840 may be a display terminal with a display function for displaying item information. In some embodiments, the user can operate various components of the system 3800 based on the user terminal 3840 .
存储设备3850可以用于存储数据和/或指令。例如,存储设备3850可以存储可闭合设备3830的物品管理区域的物品信息。又例如,存储设备3850可以存储参考物品的信息。 Storage device 3850 may be used to store data and/or instructions. For example, the storage device 3850 may store item information of an item management area of the closable device 3830 . For another example, the storage device 3850 may store information of reference items.
图39是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性可闭合设备3900的框图。如图39所示,可闭合设备3900包括输入模块3910、探测模块3920、锁体3930和处理器3812。可闭合设备3900可提供物品管理区域,物品管理区域由两个可相对移动的部件(例如第一部件110与第二部件130)合围形成。物品管理区域为可闭合空间,物品管理区域的开启和关闭通过锁体3930控制。需要注意的是,本说明书中提到的模块、单元可以通过硬件、软件或者软件和硬件的结合的方式来实现。其中,硬件的实现方式可以包括利用实体部件组成的电路或结构来实现;软件的实现方式可以包括将模块、单元对应的操作以代码的形式存储在存储器中,由适当的硬件例如微处理器来执行。在本文提到的模块、单元执行其操作时,如果没有特殊说明,既可以指包含该功能的软件代码被执行,也可以指具有该功能的硬件被使用。同时,本文中所提到的模块、单元在对应硬件的时候并不限定其对应硬件的结构,只要能实现其功能的硬件都在本申请保护范围内。例如,本文中所提到的不同模块、单元可以对应同一个硬件结构。又例如,本文中所提到的同一个模块、单元也可以对应多个独立的硬件结构。Figure 39 is a block diagram of an exemplary closeable device 3900 according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 39 , a closeable device 3900 includes an input module 3910 , a detection module 3920 , a lock body 3930 and a processor 3812 . The closeable device 3900 can provide an item management area, which is surrounded by two relatively movable parts (for example, the first part 110 and the second part 130 ). The item management area is a closable space, and the opening and closing of the item management area is controlled by the lock body 3930 . It should be noted that the modules and units mentioned in this specification can be realized by hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware. Among them, the implementation of hardware may include the realization of circuits or structures composed of physical components; the implementation of software may include storing the corresponding operations of modules and units in the memory in the form of codes, and performing them by appropriate hardware such as a microprocessor. implement. When the modules and units mentioned in this article perform their operations, unless otherwise specified, it may refer to the execution of software codes including the functions, or the use of hardware with the functions. At the same time, the modules and units mentioned in this article do not limit the structure of the corresponding hardware when they correspond to hardware, as long as the hardware that can realize its functions is within the protection scope of this application. For example, different modules and units mentioned herein may correspond to the same hardware structure. For another example, the same module and unit mentioned herein may also correspond to multiple independent hardware structures.
输入模块3910被配置为接收用户指令。仅作为示例,用户指令包括访问物品管理区域的请求,用户指令还可包括查询请求、设置请求、管理请求等。在一些实施例中,输入模块3910包括可用于接收用户指令的装置,如键盘、鼠标、触摸屏、麦克风等。仅作为示例,用户按压键盘按键、点击触摸屏或发出指示唤醒的语音信息,以使输入模块3910接收到唤醒指令。输入模块进一步被配置为采集用户信息。在一些实施例中,输入模块包括用于采集用户信息的装置,如指纹采集装置、指静脉采集装置、掌纹采集装置、虹膜扫描装置、图像采集装置(如照相机、摄像头)、视网膜扫描装置、图像采集装置、麦克风、密码输入装置等。仅作为示例,输入模块3910通过摄像头和指纹采集装置获取用户的人脸信息和指纹信息。The input module 3910 is configured to receive user instructions. Merely as an example, the user instruction includes a request to access an item management area, and the user instruction may also include a query request, a setting request, a management request, and the like. In some embodiments, the input module 3910 includes devices capable of receiving user instructions, such as a keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, and the like. As an example only, the user presses a key on the keyboard, clicks on the touch screen, or sends out a voice message indicating to wake up, so that the input module 3910 receives a wake-up instruction. The input module is further configured to collect user information. In some embodiments, the input module includes a device for collecting user information, such as a fingerprint collection device, a finger vein collection device, a palmprint collection device, an iris scanning device, an image collection device (such as a camera, a camera), a retinal scanning device, Image acquisition device, microphone, password input device, etc. As an example only, the input module 3910 obtains the user's face information and fingerprint information through a camera and a fingerprint collection device.
探测模块3920被配置为获取可闭合设备3900的物品管理区域内物品的探测信息。在一些实施例中,探测模块3920包括可用于获取探测信息的传感器,如图像采集装置、激光传感器、红外传感器、超声波传感器、压力传感器等。仅作为示例,探测模块3920通过图像采集装置获取物品的图像信号数据,通过红外传感器获取物品的红外信号数据,以及通过压力传感器获取物品的压力信号数据。在一些实施例中,探测模块3920还被配置为获取锁体3930的状态信息。可闭合设备3900的状态信息用于指示锁体3930的工作状态(如开启状态、锁止状态)。在一些实施例中,探测模块3920还包括获取锁体3930状态信息的传感器,如安装在锁体3930上的压力传感器、接触传感器、霍尔传感器等。The detection module 3920 is configured to acquire detection information of items in the item management area of the closeable device 3900 . In some embodiments, the detection module 3920 includes sensors that can be used to obtain detection information, such as image acquisition devices, laser sensors, infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, pressure sensors, and the like. As an example only, the detection module 3920 acquires image signal data of the item through an image acquisition device, acquires infrared signal data of the item through an infrared sensor, and acquires pressure signal data of the item through a pressure sensor. In some embodiments, the detection module 3920 is further configured to acquire status information of the lock body 3930 . The state information of the closeable device 3900 is used to indicate the working state of the lock body 3930 (such as an open state, a locked state). In some embodiments, the detection module 3920 also includes a sensor for acquiring status information of the lock body 3930, such as a pressure sensor, a contact sensor, a Hall sensor, etc. installed on the lock body 3930.
锁体3930被配置为基于处理器3812发出的控制信号执行开锁操作。仅作为示例,处理器3812基于受信用户的访问请求,发送开锁控制信号至锁体3930;响应于接收到开锁控制信号,锁体3930执行开锁操作,以允许受信用户访问物品管理区域。在一些实施例中,锁体3930还被配置为基于处理器3812发出的控制信号执行关锁操作。仅作为示例,处理器3812基于探测模块3920获取的锁体3930的状态信息,判断锁体3930处于开启状态且处于开启状态超过预定时间(如10分钟、15分钟或20分钟),处理器3812向锁体3930发送关锁控制信号;响应于接收到关锁控制信号,锁体3930执行关锁操作,以关闭物品管理区域。The lock body 3930 is configured to perform an unlocking operation based on a control signal sent by the processor 3812 . As an example only, the processor 3812 sends an unlock control signal to the lock body 3930 based on the trusted user's access request; in response to receiving the unlock control signal, the lock body 3930 performs an unlock operation to allow the trusted user to access the item management area. In some embodiments, the lock body 3930 is further configured to perform a locking operation based on a control signal sent by the processor 3812 . As an example only, the processor 3812 judges that the lock body 3930 is in the open state based on the status information of the lock body 3930 acquired by the detection module 3920 and is in the open state for more than a predetermined time (such as 10 minutes, 15 minutes or 20 minutes), and the processor 3812 sends The lock body 3930 sends a lock control signal; in response to receiving the lock control signal, the lock body 3930 performs a lock operation to close the item management area.
处理器3812被配置为处理索引信息管理过程中的信息和/或数据,包括获取用户的访问请求;基于访问请求,对用户的身份进行安全验证,控制锁体3930执行开锁操作以允许受信用户访问物品管理区域,并生成访问信息;获取受信用户访问期间物品管理区域的物品信息和/或物品的存取信息;基于物品信息和/或物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,索引信息至少还基于访问信息确定。关于处理器3812处理索引 信息管理过程中的信息和/或数据的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图40、图41及其描述,在此不再赘述。The processor 3812 is configured to process the information and/or data in the index information management process, including obtaining the user's access request; based on the access request, perform security verification on the user's identity, and control the lock body 3930 to perform an unlocking operation to allow trusted users to access The item management area, and generate access information; obtain the item information and/or item access information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit; determine the index information based on the item information and/or item access information, and the index information is at least based on The access information is confirmed. For the specific content of the processor 3812 processing information and/or data in the index information management process, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as FIG. 40, FIG. 41 and their descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,可闭合设备3900还可包括定位模块3940。定位模块3940被配置为获取可闭合设备3900的位置信息。在一些实施例中定位模块3940包括用于获取位置信息的定位装置,如GPS定位装置、北斗定位装置、GPS北斗双模定位装置等。In some embodiments, the closeable device 3900 may also include a positioning module 3940 . The location module 3940 is configured to obtain location information of the closeable device 3900 . In some embodiments, the positioning module 3940 includes a positioning device for obtaining location information, such as a GPS positioning device, a Beidou positioning device, a GPS Beidou dual-mode positioning device, and the like.
在一些实施例中,可闭合设备3900还可包括输出模块3950。输出模块3950被配置为基于处理器3812的控制信号向外部输出信号,如向用户显示索引信息,或者向用户发出指示未通过安全验证的警报信息等。在一些实施例中,输出模块3950包括用于输出视觉信号的装置,如显示器。在一些实施例中,输出模块3950包括用于输出音频信号的装置,如扬声器。In some embodiments, the closeable device 3900 may also include an output module 3950 . The output module 3950 is configured to output a signal to the outside based on the control signal of the processor 3812, such as displaying index information to the user, or sending an alarm message indicating that the security verification has not been passed to the user. In some embodiments, the output module 3950 includes means for outputting visual signals, such as a display. In some embodiments, the output module 3950 includes means for outputting audio signals, such as a speaker.
图40是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的示例性索引信息管理系统4000的框图。如图40所示,系统4000包括安全模块4010和管理模块4020。在一些实施例中,安全模块4010和管理模块4020可以在服务器3810或可闭合设备3900上实现,例如处理器3812。Fig. 40 is a block diagram of an exemplary index information management system 4000 according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 40 , the system 4000 includes a security module 4010 and a management module 4020 . In some embodiments, the security module 4010 and the management module 4020 may be implemented on the server 3810 or the closeable device 3900 , such as the processor 3812 .
安全模块4010被配置为获取用户访问物品管理区域的请求。在一些实施例中,安全模块4010可通过与可闭合设备3900的输入模块3910通信以获取用户的访问请求,或者安全模块4010可通过与用户终端3840通信以获取用户的访问求情。The security module 4010 is configured to obtain a user's request to access the item management area. In some embodiments, the security module 4010 can communicate with the input module 3910 of the closeable device 3900 to obtain the user's access request, or the security module 4010 can communicate with the user terminal 3840 to obtain the user's access request.
安全模块4010还被配制为基于用户的访问请求,对用户的身份进行安全验证,以允许受信用户访问物品管理区域,并生成访问信息,物品管理区域为可闭合空间。访问信息是指与访问请求相关联的信息集合。仅作为示例,访问信息可包括但不限于用户标识(如用户ID、用户名称、用户头像等)、访问事件、访问时间(如开锁时间、锁止时间)等。在一些实施例中,安全模块4010通过控制可闭合设备3900的锁体3930执行开锁操作,以允许受信用户访问可闭合设备3900的物品管理区域。The security module 4010 is also configured to perform security verification on the user's identity based on the user's access request, so as to allow the trusted user to access the item management area and generate access information. The item management area is a closable space. Access information refers to the collection of information associated with an access request. As an example only, access information may include, but not limited to, user identification (such as user ID, user name, user avatar, etc.), access event, access time (such as unlock time, lock time) and the like. In some embodiments, the security module 4010 controls the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlocking operation, so as to allow trusted users to access the item management area of the closeable device 3900 .
在一些实施例中,安全模块4010包括用户验证子模块。在一些实施例中,访问请求携带与用户身份相对应的用户信息,用户验证子模块被配置为基于用户的用户信息判断用户是否为受信用户,在判定结果为否时发出警报信息。如本文所用,术语“受信用户”是指对可闭合设备3900的物品管理区域具有访问权限的用户。受信用户可以有一个或多个。例如,用户可以在访问初始化状态(如可闭合设备3900首次使用的状态、数据重置的状态、数据丢失的状态)的可闭合设备3900期间设置并录入该用户的用户信息,处理器3812基于用户设置确定该用户为受信用户,使该用户获得访问权限。又例如,受信用户可以在访问可闭合设备3900期间设置并录入其他用户的用户信息,以使其他用户获得访问权限,处理器3812基于用户设置确定该其他用户为受信用户。In some embodiments, security module 4010 includes a user authentication submodule. In some embodiments, the access request carries user information corresponding to the user identity, and the user verification submodule is configured to determine whether the user is a trusted user based on the user information of the user, and issue an alarm message when the determination result is no. As used herein, the term "trusted user" refers to a user who has access rights to the item management area of the closeable device 3900 . There can be one or more trusted users. For example, the user can set and enter the user information of the user during access to the closeable device 3900 in the initialization state (such as the state of the first use of the closeable device 3900, the state of data reset, and the state of data loss), and the processor 3812 is based on the user information. Set up to identify the user as a trusted user, allowing the user to gain access. For another example, a trusted user may set and enter user information of other users during access to the closeable device 3900, so that other users may obtain access rights, and the processor 3812 determines that other users are trusted users based on the user settings.
在一些实施例中,用户验证子模块进一步被配置为对比发出访问请求的用户与预设受信用户的用户信息,基于对比结果判断用户是否为受信用户。如本文所用,术语“用户信息”是指可用于指示用户身份的信息集合。在一些实施例中,预设受信用户的用户信息预先录入并储存于存储设备3850中,用户验证子模块可调用存储设备3850中储存的预设受信用户的用户信息。在一些实施例中,用户信息可包括指纹信息、指静脉信息、掌纹信息、虹膜信息、视网膜信息、人脸信息、声纹信息、数字密码信息中的一种或多种。In some embodiments, the user verification submodule is further configured to compare the user information of the user who sends the access request with the preset trusted user, and determine whether the user is a trusted user based on the comparison result. As used herein, the term "user information" refers to a collection of information that can be used to identify a user. In some embodiments, the user information of the default trusted user is pre-registered and stored in the storage device 3850 , and the user verification submodule can call the user information of the default trusted user stored in the storage device 3850 . In some embodiments, user information may include one or more of fingerprint information, finger vein information, palmprint information, iris information, retina information, face information, voiceprint information, and digital password information.
在一些实施例中,用户验证子模块进一步被配置为在判断结果为否时,发出警报信息。具体的,响应于判断用户不是受信用户而发出的警报信息可用于对非受信用户的访问行为进行警示。在一些实施例中,警报信息可以包括本地警报信息和远程警报信息,警报信息可以通过语音信号、振动信号和图文信号中的至少一种形式发出。在一些实施例中,本地警报信息通过可闭合设备3900的输出模块3950发出。例如,通过输出模块3950的显示器显示非受信用户的图像信息以及显示非受信用户的访问请求已被拒绝的文字信息,非受信用户的图像信息可由输入模块3910的图像采集装置获取。在一些实施例中,远程警报信息通过受信用户的用户终端3840的输出装置发出。例如,用户终端3840接收到远程警报信息,通过显示器显示非受信用户的图像信息,以及通过扬声器播报指示可闭合设备3900发生非受信用户访问事件的语音信息。In some embodiments, the user verification submodule is further configured to issue an alarm message when the judgment result is negative. Specifically, the alarm information sent in response to judging that the user is not a trusted user can be used to warn the access behavior of the untrusted user. In some embodiments, the alarm information may include local alarm information and remote alarm information, and the alarm information may be sent in at least one form of a voice signal, a vibration signal, and a text signal. In some embodiments, the local alert message is sent through the output module 3950 of the closeable device 3900 . For example, the image information of the untrusted user can be obtained by the image acquisition device of the input module 3910 through the display of the output module 3950 displaying the image information of the untrusted user and the text message indicating that the access request of the untrusted user has been rejected. In some embodiments, the remote alert message is sent through an output device of the trusted user's user terminal 3840 . For example, the user terminal 3840 receives the remote alarm information, displays the image information of the unauthenticated user through the display, and broadcasts the voice information indicating that an unauthenticated user access event occurs to the closeable device 3900 through the loudspeaker.
通过用户验证子模块的安全验证,以及对非受信用户访问行为的警示,可干扰非受信用户的访问行为,且对受信用户给予安全提示,以保障物品的存储安全性。Through the security verification of the user verification sub-module and the warning of the access behavior of untrusted users, it can interfere with the access behavior of untrusted users, and give security reminders to trusted users to ensure the storage security of items.
管理模块4020被配置为获取受信用户访问期间物品管理区域的物品识别信息,物品识别信息包括物品信息和/或物品的存取信息;基于物品识别信息,确定索引信息,索引信息至少还基于访问信息确定。索引信息至少用于指示访问期间受信用户的物品的存取信息。如本文所用,术语“访问期间”是指在在执行访问请求起始至访问请求执行结束为止的时间段。仅作为示例,访问期间可以为可闭合设备3900的锁体3930执行开锁操作起始至锁体3930锁止为止的时间段。The management module 4020 is configured to obtain item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit, the item identification information includes item information and/or item access information; based on the item identification information, determine index information, and the index information is at least based on the access information Sure. The index information is at least used to indicate access information of items of trusted users during access. As used herein, the term "access period" refers to the time period from the start of executing the access request to the end of the execution of the access request. By way of example only, the access period may be the time period from when the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 performs an unlock operation to when the lock body 3930 locks.
在一些实施例中,管理模块4020进一步包括识别子模块4021。识别子模块4021被配置为获取探测模块3920获取的探测信息;基于探测模块3920获取的探测信息,确定受信用户访问期间物品管理区域 的物品识别信息。在一些实施例中,物品识别信息包括物品信息,如物品的属性(种类、材质等)和价值。在一些实施例中,物品识别信息包括物品的存取信息,如物品的存取状态和存取时间。In some embodiments, the management module 4020 further includes an identification submodule 4021 . The identification sub-module 4021 is configured to obtain the detection information obtained by the detection module 3920; based on the detection information obtained by the detection module 3920, determine the item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit. In some embodiments, the item identification information includes item information, such as the attribute (type, material, etc.) and value of the item. In some embodiments, the item identification information includes item access information, such as item access status and access time.
在一些实施例中,识别子模块4021可包括存取确定单元;存取确定单元被配置为基于探测信息,确定物品的存取信息。物品的存取信息用于指示物品的存取情况,包括访问期间可闭合设备3900的物品管理区域内发生存取及未发生存取的所有物品的存取情况。在一些实施例中,存取状态可包括存入、取出和固有。其中,固有是指物品在执行访问请求前(即物品管理区域开启前)已存储在可闭合设备3900内,且访问请求执行结束后(即物品管理区域关闭后)未被取出的状态。In some embodiments, the identification submodule 4021 may include an access determination unit; the access determination unit is configured to determine the access information of the item based on the detection information. The access information of the item is used to indicate the access status of the item, including the access status of all items that are accessed or not accessed in the item management area of the closeable device 3900 during the visit. In some embodiments, access states may include deposited, withdrawn, and owned. Among them, inherent refers to the state that the item has been stored in the closeable device 3900 before the access request is executed (ie, before the item management area is opened), and has not been taken out after the access request is executed (ie, after the item management area is closed).
探测信息按时间顺序排列所显示出的变化可用于指示物品的存取状态。在一些实施例中,存取确定单元可基于探测信息的变化确定物品的存取状态。例如,可通过分析压力传感数据的变化确定物品的存取状态(如压力增大指示有物品存入)。又例如,可通过可闭合设备3900开锁时间点及锁止时间点的图像数据的对比确定物品的存取状态。The changes shown by the chronological arrangement of probe information can be used to indicate the access status of the item. In some embodiments, the access determination unit may determine the access status of the item based on changes in the detection information. For example, the access status of an item can be determined by analyzing changes in pressure sensing data (eg, an increase in pressure indicates that an item is deposited). For another example, the access state of the item can be determined by comparing the image data at the time point when the closeable device 3900 is unlocked and when it is locked.
在一些实施例中,存取确定单元还被配置为基于探测信息,确定物品存取时间,如压力传感数据的数据变化时间戳可作为物品的存入时间或取出时间。In some embodiments, the access determining unit is further configured to determine the access time of the item based on the detection information, for example, the data change time stamp of the pressure sensing data may be used as the deposit time or withdrawal time of the item.
在一些实施例中,识别子模块4021可包括属性确定单元;属性确定单元被配置为基于探测信息,确定物品的属性。如本文所用,术语“物品的属性”是指物品本身所固有的特征的集合。仅作为示例,物品的属性可包括但不限于物品的种类、规格、材质等。其中,物品的种类可包括但不限于首饰、货币、证书文件、字画艺术品等;物品的规格可包括但不限于重量、体积、尺寸、颜色等;物品的材质可包括但不限于金属、宝石、纸质、纺织品等。In some embodiments, the identification submodule 4021 may include an attribute determination unit; the attribute determination unit is configured to determine the attribute of the item based on the detection information. As used herein, the term "properties of an item" refers to a collection of characteristics inherent to the item itself. As an example only, the attribute of the item may include but not limited to the type, specification, material, etc. of the item. Among them, the types of items may include but not limited to jewelry, currency, certificate documents, calligraphy and painting works of art, etc.; the specifications of items may include but not limited to weight, volume, size, color, etc.; the materials of items may include but not limited to metal, precious stones , paper, textiles, etc.
在一些实施例中,属性确定单元可基于探测数据,确定物品的种类。例如,可采用图像数据或激光扫描数据通过AI识别模型识别物品的种类。在一些实施例中,属性确定单元可基于探测数据,确定物品的材质。例如,对于首饰类物品,可采用红外传感数据通过红外光谱分析确定物品的材质。在一些实施例中,属性确定单元可基于探测数据,确定物品的规格。例如,可采用压力传感数据通过分析计算确定物品的重量。In some embodiments, the attribute determination unit may determine the type of the item based on the detection data. For example, image data or laser scanning data can be used to identify the type of items through an AI recognition model. In some embodiments, the attribute determination unit may determine the material of the item based on the detection data. For example, for jewelry items, infrared sensing data can be used to determine the material of the item through infrared spectrum analysis. In some embodiments, the attribute determination unit may determine the specification of the item based on the detection data. For example, pressure sensor data can be used to determine the weight of an item through analytical calculations.
在一些实施例中,属性确定单元进一步被配置为基于探测信息,通过多数据融合算法确定物品的物品属性。多数据融合对多个传感器所提供的关于同一物品的属性的不完整信息加以综合,以形成相对完整、一致的感知描述,从而实现更加准确的识别和判断功能。通过多数据融合算法确定物品属性可提高物品属性识别的准确性和效率。In some embodiments, the attribute determination unit is further configured to determine the item attribute of the item through a multi-data fusion algorithm based on the detection information. Multi-data fusion integrates incomplete information about the attributes of the same item provided by multiple sensors to form a relatively complete and consistent perceptual description, thereby achieving more accurate identification and judgment functions. Determining item attributes through multi-data fusion algorithm can improve the accuracy and efficiency of item attribute recognition.
在一些实施例中,识别子模块4021还包括价值确定单元。在一些实施例中,价值确定单元被配置为基于探测信息,确定存入物品的价值。物品的价值通常是指物品的市场价值。在一些实施例中,价值确定单元可基于探测信息检索匹配存入物品的参考物品,基于参考物品的价值确定存入物品的价值。在一些实施例中,价值确定单元还可基于用户输入确定存入物品的价值。In some embodiments, the identification sub-module 4021 also includes a value determination unit. In some embodiments, the value determination unit is configured to determine the value of the deposited item based on the probe information. The value of an item usually refers to the market value of the item. In some embodiments, the value determination unit may retrieve a reference item matching the deposited item based on the detection information, and determine the value of the deposited item based on the value of the reference item. In some embodiments, the value determination unit may also determine the value of the deposited item based on user input.
关于确定物品的存取状态、确定物品的属性、确定存入物品的价值的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图42中的步骤4230及其描述,在此不再赘述。For details about determining the access state of the item, determining the attribute of the item, and determining the value of the deposited item, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as step 4230 in FIG. 42 and its description, and will not be repeated here.
识别子模块通过快速识别物品,确定物品信息、物品的存取状态和存取时间,为实现物品信息的综合管理和快速查询提供基础。The identification sub-module provides a basis for comprehensive management and quick query of item information by quickly identifying items, determining item information, item access status and access time.
在一些实施例中,管理模块4020进一步包括索引子模块4022;索引子模块4022被配置为至少基于物品识别信息和访问信息,确定索引信息。其中,物品识别信息包括物品信息和/或物品的存取信息。In some embodiments, the management module 4020 further includes an index sub-module 4022; the index sub-module 4022 is configured to determine index information based at least on item identification information and access information. Wherein, the item identification information includes item information and/or access information of the item.
在一些实施例中,索引子模块4022进一步包括索引生成单元;索引生成单元被配置为在未检测到已创建的索引信息时,至少基于访问信息、物品识别信息和预设规则,创建索引信息。其中,创建的索引信息可储存在存储设备3850中。如本文所用,术语“预设规则”是指建立、查询及显示索引信息的规则。对于初始化状态的可闭合设备3900,索引子模块4022未检测到已创建的索引信息(如未创建索引信息、已创建的索引信息丢失或已创建的索引信息被重置),则索引生成单元可创建索引信息。在一些实施例中,索引生成单元可基于受信用户的请求创建索引信息的管理请求创建索引信息。在一些实施例中,索引生成单元可在锁体3930由开启状态进入锁止状态后自动创建索引信息。In some embodiments, the index sub-module 4022 further includes an index generation unit; the index generation unit is configured to create index information based at least on access information, item identification information and preset rules when the created index information is not detected. Wherein, the created index information may be stored in the storage device 3850 . As used herein, the term "preset rules" refers to rules for establishing, querying and displaying index information. For the closable device 3900 in the initialization state, the index submodule 4022 does not detect the created index information (such as no created index information, created index information is lost or created index information is reset), then the index generation unit can Create index information. In some embodiments, the index generating unit may create the index information based on a management request of the trusted user requesting to create the index information. In some embodiments, the index generation unit can automatically create index information after the lock body 3930 enters the locked state from the unlocked state.
在一些实施例中,索引子模块4022进一步包括索引更新单元;索引更新单元被配置为在检测到已创建的索引信息时,至少基于访问信息和物品识别信息,更新索引信息。对于已创建索引信息的可闭合设备3900而言,在锁体3930进入锁止状态(即物品管理区域关闭)后,索引更新单元可调用并更新储存在存储设备3850中的索引信息。In some embodiments, the index submodule 4022 further includes an index update unit; the index update unit is configured to update the index information based at least on the access information and the item identification information when the created index information is detected. For the closeable device 3900 that has created index information, after the lock body 3930 enters the locked state (that is, the item management area is closed), the index update unit can call and update the index information stored in the storage device 3850 .
在一些实施例中,索引子模块4022进一步包括查询显示单元;查询显示单元被配置为基于索引信息进行查询显示。在一些实施例中,查询显示单元进一步被配置为基于受信用户的查询请求,确定与查询请求相对应的索引信息,以及显示与查询请求相对应的索引信息。在一些实施例中,查询显示单元可用于本地查询显示。例如,查询显示单元可获取输入模块3910接收的查询请求,并通过输出模块3950的显 示器显示与查询请求相对应的索引信息。在一些实施例中,查询显示单元可用于远程查询显示。例如,查询显示单元可获取用户终端3840发出的查询请求,查询显示单元将与查询请求相对应的索引信息发送至用户终端3840,并通过用户终端3840的显示器进行显示。In some embodiments, the index submodule 4022 further includes a query display unit; the query display unit is configured to perform query display based on the index information. In some embodiments, the query display unit is further configured to determine index information corresponding to the query request based on the query request of the trusted user, and display the index information corresponding to the query request. In some embodiments, the query display unit may be used for local query display. For example, the query display unit can acquire the query request received by the input module 3910, and display the index information corresponding to the query request through the display of the output module 3950. In some embodiments, the query display unit may be used for remote query display. For example, the query display unit can obtain the query request sent by the user terminal 3840, and the query display unit sends the index information corresponding to the query request to the user terminal 3840, and displays it on the display of the user terminal 3840.
关于创建索引信息、更新索引信息以及基于索引信息进行查询显示的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图42中的步骤4240及其描述,此处不再赘述。For details about creating index information, updating index information, and querying and displaying based on index information, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as step 4240 in FIG. 42 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
索引子模块通过建立关联用户和物品的索引信息,可使用户通过索引信息查询快速了解物品当前动向及历史动向,以及使用户全面了解可闭合设备3900的其他受信用户的物品使用情况,便于物品的统筹管理。The index sub-module can enable the user to quickly understand the current trend and historical trend of the item through the index information query by establishing the index information associated with the user and the item, and enable the user to fully understand the item usage of other trusted users of the closeable device 3900, which is convenient for item identification. Overall management.
图41是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一示例性索引信息管理系统4100的框图。如图41所示,系统4100包括安全模块4110和管理模块4120。在一些实施例中,安全模块4110和管理模块4120可以在服务器3810或可闭合设备上3900实现,例如处理器3812。Fig. 41 is a block diagram of another exemplary index information management system 4100 according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in FIG. 41 , the system 4100 includes a security module 4110 and a management module 4120 . In some embodiments, the security module 4110 and the management module 4120 may be implemented on the server 3810 or on the closeable device 3900 , such as the processor 3812 .
安全模块4110被配置为获取用户访问物品管理区域的请求;基于用户的访问请求,对用户的身份进行安全验证,并生成访问信息,物品管理区域为可闭合空间。The security module 4110 is configured to obtain a user's request to access the item management area; based on the user's access request, perform security verification on the user's identity and generate access information, and the item management area is a closable space.
在一些实施例中,安全模块4110包括用户验证子模块。关于用户验证子模块的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图40中安全模块4010的用户验证子模块及其描述,在此不再赘述。In some embodiments, security module 4110 includes a user authentication submodule. For the specific content of the user verification sub-module, please refer to other parts of this specification, for example, the user verification sub-module and its description of the security module 4010 in FIG. 40 , which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,安全模块4110还包括位置监测子模块4112;位置监测子模块4112被配置为基于定位模块3940获取的位置信息判断可闭合设备3900是否位于安全区域内,在判断结果为否时发出警报信息。如本文所用,术语“安全区域”是指可闭合设备3900的受许可的安全移动范围。安全区域可以是以一个中心向外扩展的圆形、椭圆形、多边形或其他不规则的图形区域。In some embodiments, the safety module 4110 further includes a position monitoring sub-module 4112; the position monitoring sub-module 4112 is configured to determine whether the closeable device 3900 is located in the safety area based on the position information obtained by the positioning module 3940, and when the determination result is no Issue an alert message. As used herein, the term "safe area" refers to the permitted safe range of movement of the closeable device 3900 . The safe area can be a circle, ellipse, polygon or other irregular graphic area that expands outward from a center.
在一些实施例中,安全区域可基于用户输入确定。例如,位置监测子模块4112通过与输入模块3910或用户终端3840通信获取受信用户请求设定安全区域的设置请求时,位置监测子模块4112基于该设置请求携带的设定信息确定安全区域,并将安全区域的设定信息储存在存储设备3850中。In some embodiments, safe areas may be determined based on user input. For example, when the location monitoring sub-module 4112 obtains a setting request from a trusted user requesting to set a security area by communicating with the input module 3910 or the user terminal 3840, the location monitoring sub-module 4112 determines the security area based on the setting information carried in the setting request, and The setting information of the security area is stored in the storage device 3850 .
在一些实施例中,安全区域可基于预设的安全区域设定规则自动生成而确定。例如,可闭合设备3900(如系统4100)为初始化状态,安全模块4110获取用户的访问请求后,位置监测子模块4112通过与定位模块3940通信获取当前可闭合设备3900的位置坐标,生成以该位置坐标为中心、以预设值(如10米、20米或30米)为半径的圆形区域,设定该圆形区域为安全区域,并将安全区域的设定信息存储在存储设备3850中,以备后续位置监测子模块4112进行位置监测时调用。In some embodiments, the security zone can be automatically generated based on preset security zone setting rules. For example, the closeable device 3900 (such as the system 4100) is in the initialization state. After the security module 4110 obtains the user's access request, the position monitoring sub-module 4112 obtains the current position coordinates of the closeable device 3900 through communication with the positioning module 3940, and generates a Coordinates as the center, a circular area with a preset value (such as 10 meters, 20 meters or 30 meters) as the radius, set the circular area as a safe area, and store the setting information of the safe area in the storage device 3850 , so as to be called when the subsequent location monitoring submodule 4112 performs location monitoring.
在一些实施例中,响应于判断可闭合设备3900的位置没有位于安全区域内而发出的警报信息可用于对超范围移动可闭合设备3900的行为进行警示。在一些实施例中,安全模块4110可基于受信用户的请求解除警报的设置请求而终止警报。关于警报信息的具体内容可参考本说明书的其他部分,例如图40中安全模块4010的用户验证子模块及其描述,在此不再赘述。In some embodiments, an alarm message issued in response to determining that the position of the closeable device 3900 is not within a safe area may be used to alert the behavior of moving the closeable device 3900 beyond the range. In some embodiments, the security module 4110 may terminate the alert based on a setup request by the trusted user requesting that the alert be dismissed. For the specific content of the alarm information, please refer to other parts of this specification, for example, the user verification sub-module of the security module 4010 in FIG. 40 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
位置监测子模块4112通过对可闭合设备3900进行位置监测,以及对不受许可的移动行为进行警示,可进一步提高可闭合设备3900的使用安全性。The position monitoring sub-module 4112 can further improve the use safety of the closable device 3900 by monitoring the position of the closable device 3900 and warning against unauthorized movement behaviors.
管理模块4120被配置为获取受信用户访问期间物品管理区域的物品识别信息,物品识别信息包括物品信息和/或物品的存取信息;基于物品识别信息,确定索引信息,索引信息至少还基于访问信息确定。The management module 4120 is configured to obtain item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit, the item identification information includes item information and/or item access information; based on the item identification information, determine index information, and the index information is at least based on the access information Sure.
在一些实施例中,管理模块4120进一步包括识别子模块4121;识别子模块4121被配置为基于探测模块3920获取的探测信息,确定物品识别信息。关于识别子模块4121的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图40中识别子模块4021及其描述,图42中的步骤4230及其描述,在此不再赘述。In some embodiments, the management module 4120 further includes an identification sub-module 4121; the identification sub-module 4121 is configured to determine item identification information based on the detection information acquired by the detection module 3920. For the specific content of the identification sub-module 4121, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the identification sub-module 4021 in FIG. 40 and its description, and step 4230 in FIG. 42 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,管理模块4120还包括鉴权子模块4122;鉴权子模块4122被配置为至少基于访问信息和探测模块3920获取的探测信息,确定物品的权属信息。如本文所用,术语“权属信息”是指用于指示物品与用户之间的权属关系。在一些实施例中,物品的权属信息可基于访问信息和识别子模块4121的基于探测信息确定的物品识别信息确定。In some embodiments, the management module 4120 further includes an authentication submodule 4122; the authentication submodule 4122 is configured to determine the ownership information of the item based at least on the access information and the detection information acquired by the detection module 3920. As used herein, the term "ownership information" is used to indicate the ownership relationship between an item and a user. In some embodiments, the ownership information of the item can be determined based on the access information and the item identification information determined based on the detection information of the identification sub-module 4121 .
在一些实施例中,鉴权子模块4122可包括第一鉴权单元,第一鉴权单元被配置为基于访问信息和探测模块3920获取的探测信息,确定存入物品的权属信息。在一些实施例中,存入物品的权属信息可基于访问信息和识别子模块4121的基于探测信息确定的物品识别信息确定。具体的,基于物品识别信息中的物品的存取信息,可判断可闭合设备3900的物品管理区域在访问期间是否存在存入物品。对于存在存入物品的情况,第一鉴权单元可基于访问信息中的开锁时间和锁止时间以及物品识别信息中的物品存入时间,分析物品存入时间与用户开锁期间的时间重合情况,确定访问期间与物品存入时间重合的用户为存入物品的权属人。In some embodiments, the authentication submodule 4122 may include a first authentication unit configured to determine the ownership information of the deposited item based on the access information and the detection information obtained by the detection module 3920 . In some embodiments, the ownership information of the deposited item may be determined based on the item identification information determined based on the detection information of the access information and identification sub-module 4121 . Specifically, based on the access information of the item in the item identification information, it can be determined whether there is an item deposited in the item management area of the closeable device 3900 during the visit. For the case of depositing items, the first authentication unit may analyze the coincidence of the depositing time of the item and the unlocking period of the user based on the unlocking time and locking time in the access information and the depositing time of the item in the item identification information, It is determined that the user whose access period coincides with the deposit time of the item is the owner of the deposited item.
关于确定存入物品的权属信息的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图43中的步骤4320及其描述,在此不再赘述。For the specific content of determining the ownership information of the deposited item, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as step 4320 in FIG. 43 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,鉴权子模块4122可包括第二鉴权单元,第二鉴权单元被配置为获取可闭合设 备3900的物品管理区域内物品的历史权属信息;基于探测模块3920获取的探测信息和历史权属信息,确定取出物品的权属信息。在一些实施例中,取出物品的权属信息可基于识别子模块4121确定的物品识别信息和历史权属信息确定。具体的,历史权属信息包括可闭合设备3900自初始化状态(如可闭合设备3900首次使用的状态、数据重置的状态、数据丢失的状态)至锁体3930上一次进入锁止状态期间的所有存入物品的权属信息。历史权属信息可存储在存储设备3850中,并且第一鉴权单元可在锁体3930由开锁状态进入锁止状态后基于当前存入物品的权属信息更新历史权属信息。In some embodiments, the authentication submodule 4122 may include a second authentication unit configured to acquire the historical ownership information of the items in the item management area of the closeable device 3900; Detection information and historical ownership information to determine the ownership information of the items taken out. In some embodiments, the ownership information of the retrieved item may be determined based on the item identification information determined by the identification sub-module 4121 and historical ownership information. Specifically, the historical ownership information includes the closing device 3900 from the initialization state (such as the state of the first use of the closeable device 3900, the state of data reset, the state of data loss) to the lock body 3930 entering the locked state last time. Ownership information of deposited items. The historical ownership information can be stored in the storage device 3850, and the first authentication unit can update the historical ownership information based on the ownership information of the currently deposited item after the lock body 3930 enters the locked state from the unlocked state.
在一些实施例中,第二鉴权单元进一步被配置为判断进行物品取出的用户是否为取出物品的权属人,在判断结果为否时发出警报信息。响应于判断用户不是取出物品的权属人而发出的警报信息可用于对非权属人物品取用行为进行警示。In some embodiments, the second authentication unit is further configured to judge whether the user taking out the item is the owner of the item, and send an alarm message if the judgment result is no. The alarm information sent in response to judging that the user is not the owner of the item taken out can be used to warn the non-owner of the item taking behavior.
关于确定取出物品的权属信息、判断进行物品取出的用户是否为取出物品的权属人以及发出警报信息的具体内容可参考本说明书的其他部分,例如图43中的步骤4330和步骤4340及其描述,图40中的安全模块4010及其描述,在此不再赘述。For the specific content of determining the ownership information of the retrieved item, judging whether the user who retrieved the item is the owner of the retrieved item, and issuing an alarm message, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as steps 4330 and 4340 in Figure 43 and their details. Description, the security module 4010 in FIG. 40 and its description will not be repeated here.
鉴权子模块通过对存入物品进行鉴权,并确定权属信息,可增加物品信息的维度,拓展使用场景。鉴权子模块通过对取出物品进行鉴权,以及对非权属人的物品取用行为进行警示,可使可闭合设备3900在多人使用场景中兼顾共享性和安全性。The authentication sub-module can increase the dimension of item information and expand the usage scenarios by authenticating the deposited items and determining the ownership information. The authentication sub-module can make the closeable device 3900 take into account sharing and security in multi-person use scenarios by authenticating the items taken out and warning the non-owner's access behavior of the items.
在一些实施例中,管理模块4120进一步包括索引子模块4123;索引子模块4123被配置为基于访问信息、物品识别信息和权属信息,确定索引信息。其中,物品识别信息包括物品信息和/或物品的存取信息。具体的,该索引信息用于指示访问期间受信用户在物品管理区域内存取物品的情况,以及受信用户与存取物品的权属关系。关于创建索引信息、更新索引信息以及基于索引信息进行查询显示的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图42中的步骤4240及其描述,此处不再赘述。In some embodiments, the management module 4120 further includes an index submodule 4123; the index submodule 4123 is configured to determine index information based on access information, item identification information and ownership information. Wherein, the item identification information includes item information and/or access information of the item. Specifically, the index information is used to indicate the situation of the trusted user accessing the item in the item management area during the access period, and the ownership relationship between the trusted user and the accessed item. For details about creating index information, updating index information, and querying and displaying based on index information, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as step 4240 in FIG. 42 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
索引子模块基于访问信息、物品识别信息和权属信息建立索引信息,可在多人使用场景中实现对个人物品的信息统计、管理、查询,实现物品信息的多维度管理,适应安全性要求更高的应用场景。The index sub-module establishes index information based on access information, item identification information, and ownership information, which can realize information statistics, management, and query of personal items in multi-person usage scenarios, realize multi-dimensional management of item information, and adapt to security requirements. High application scenarios.
图42是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的索引信息管理的示例性流程图。流程4200可以由系统3800执行。例如,流程4200可以被实现为存储在存储设备3850中的指令集合(例如,应用程序)。处理器3812和图39、图40、图41中的模块可以执行该组指令的至少一部分,并且当执行该指令的至少一部分时,处理器3812,这些模块可以被配置为执行流程4200。以下所示流程4200的操作仅出于说明的目的。在一些实施例中,流程4200可以利用未描述的一个或多个附加操作和/或没有在此讨论的一个或多个操作来完成。另外,如图42所示和以下所述流程4200的操作的顺序并非旨在限制。Fig. 42 is an exemplary flowchart of index information management according to some embodiments of the present specification. Process 4200 may be performed by system 3800 . For example, process 4200 may be implemented as a set of instructions (eg, an application program) stored in storage device 3850 . The processor 3812 and the modules in FIG. 39 , FIG. 40 , and FIG. 41 may execute at least a part of the set of instructions, and when executing at least a part of the instructions, the processor 3812 , these modules may be configured to execute the process 4200 . The operations of process 4200 shown below are for illustration purposes only. In some embodiments, process 4200 may be accomplished with one or more additional operations not described and/or one or more operations not discussed herein. Additionally, the order of the operations of process 4200 as shown in FIG. 42 and described below is not intended to be limiting.
步骤4210,获取用户访问物品管理区域的请求。步骤4210可以由处理器3812(如安全模块4010,4110)执行。 Step 4210, obtain the user's request for accessing the item management area. Step 4210 may be performed by processor 3812 (eg, security modules 4010, 4110).
在一些实施例中,处理器3812可通过与用户终端3840通信获取用户的访问请求。在一些实施例中,处理器3812可通过与可闭合设备3900的输入模块3910通信获取用户的访问请求。In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may obtain the user's access request by communicating with the user terminal 3840 . In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may obtain the user's access request by communicating with the input module 3910 of the closeable device 3900 .
步骤4220,基于用户的访问请求,对用户的身份进行安全验证,并生成访问信息,物品管理区域为可闭合空间。步骤4220可以由处理器3812(如安全模块4010,4110)执行。 Step 4220, based on the user's access request, perform security verification on the user's identity, and generate access information, and the item management area is a closable space. Step 4220 may be performed by processor 3812 (eg, security modules 4010, 4110).
在一些实施例中,步骤4220可以包括用户验证步骤。访问请求携带与用户的身份相对应的用户信息,用户验证步骤可基于用户的用户信息判断用户是否为受信用户,在判定结果为否时发出警报信息。用户验证步骤可以由处理器3812(如用户验证子模块4111)执行。In some embodiments, step 4220 may include a user verification step. The access request carries user information corresponding to the user's identity, and the user verification step can judge whether the user is a trusted user based on the user's user information, and send an alarm message when the judgment result is no. The user verification step may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the user verification submodule 4111).
在一些实施例中,用户验证步骤进一步包括:获取用户的用户信息和预设受信用户的用户信息。具体的,处理器3812在获取用户的访问请求时,处理器3812可同时获取用于用户安全验证的用户信息,获取的用户信息的具体类型由存储设备3850中预录入的预设受信用户的用户信息决定。例如,预录入的预设受信用户的用户信息包括数字密码信息和声纹信息,则处理器3812通过输入模块3910或用户终端3840获取用户的数字密码信息和声纹信息中的至少一种,以进行安全验证。In some embodiments, the user verification step further includes: acquiring user information of the user and user information of a preset trusted user. Specifically, when the processor 3812 obtains the user's access request, the processor 3812 may simultaneously obtain user information for user security verification. Information decides. For example, the pre-recorded user information of the preset trusted user includes digital password information and voiceprint information, then the processor 3812 obtains at least one of the user's digital password information and voiceprint information through the input module 3910 or the user terminal 3840, to Perform security verification.
在一些实施例中,用户验证步骤进一步包括:对比用户的用户信息与预设受信用户的用户信息,基于对比结果判断用户是否为受信用户。在一些实施例中,可基于用户信息中的一种信息进行对比。例如,对比用户的指纹信息与预设受信用户的指纹信息,通过指纹图谱相似度分析确定两者相似度,相似度高于阈值(如95%、98%、99%)则可判断用户为受信用户,否则判断用户为非受信用户。在一些实施例中,可基于用户信息中的多种信息进行对比。例如,对比用户和预设受信用户的人脸信息和虹膜信息,处理器3812可基于用户的人脸信息和预设受信用户的人脸信息进行人脸识别分析得到第一匹配度,可基于用户的虹膜信息和预设受信用户的虹膜信息进行虹膜识别分析得到第二匹配度,处理器3812基于打分模型对第一匹配度和第二匹配度进行打分,并计算匹配度总分,匹配度总分高于阈值(如90分、95分、99分)则判断用户为受信用户,否则判断用户为非受信用户。In some embodiments, the user verification step further includes: comparing the user information of the user with that of a preset trusted user, and judging whether the user is a trusted user based on the comparison result. In some embodiments, the comparison may be based on one type of user information. For example, compare the fingerprint information of the user with the fingerprint information of the preset trusted user, and determine the similarity between the two through fingerprint similarity analysis. If the similarity is higher than the threshold (such as 95%, 98%, 99%), the user can be judged as trusted. user, otherwise it is determined that the user is an untrusted user. In some embodiments, the comparison can be made based on various information in the user information. For example, comparing the face information and iris information of the user and the preset trusted user, the processor 3812 can perform face recognition analysis based on the user's face information and the preset trusted user's face information to obtain the first matching degree, which can be based on the user The iris information of the user and the iris information of the preset trusted user perform iris recognition and analysis to obtain the second matching degree. The processor 3812 scores the first matching degree and the second matching degree based on the scoring model, and calculates the total matching score. If the score is higher than the threshold (such as 90 points, 95 points, 99 points), it is judged that the user is a trusted user, otherwise it is judged that the user is an untrusted user.
在一些实施例中,用户验证步骤进一步包括:在判断结果为否时,发出警报信息。其中,警报信 息包括本地警报信息和远程警报信息。In some embodiments, the user verification step further includes: sending out an alarm message when the judgment result is negative. Wherein, the alarm information includes local alarm information and remote alarm information.
关于访问请求、访问信息、用户信息、警报信息的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图40的安全模块4010及其描述,在此不再赘述。For details about the access request, access information, user information, and alarm information, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the security module 4010 in FIG. 40 and its description, and will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,步骤4220还包括位置监测步骤。物品管理区域位于可移动的储物装置内,位置监测步骤可监测物品管理区域的位置是否位于安全区域内,在判断结果为否时发出警报信息。位置监测步骤可由处理器3812(如位置监测子模块4112)执行。关于安全区域的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图41的位置监测子模块4112及其描述,在此不再赘述。In some embodiments, step 4220 also includes a location monitoring step. The item management area is located in the movable storage device, and the position monitoring step can monitor whether the item management area is in a safe area, and send an alarm message when the judgment result is no. The position monitoring step may be performed by the processor 3812 (eg, the position monitoring sub-module 4112). For details about the security area, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the position monitoring sub-module 4112 in FIG. 41 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
处理器3812可通过可闭合设备3900的定位模块3940获取位置信息。在一些实施例中,处理器3812可通过定位模块3940实时获取可闭合设备3900的位置信息。在一些实施例中,处理器3812可通过定位模块3940定期的位置信息,如定位装置每隔10分钟、15分钟或30分钟向处理器3812发送位置信息。在一些实施例中,处理器3812在判断满足触发条件时通过定位模块3940获取位置信息。例如,获取位置信息的触发条件可以为处理器3812接收到访问请求。The processor 3812 may obtain location information through the location module 3940 of the closeable device 3900 . In some embodiments, the processor 3812 can acquire the position information of the closeable device 3900 in real time through the positioning module 3940 . In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may periodically receive location information through the positioning module 3940, for example, the positioning device sends the location information to the processor 3812 every 10 minutes, 15 minutes or 30 minutes. In some embodiments, the processor 3812 obtains the location information through the positioning module 3940 when determining that the trigger condition is met. For example, the trigger condition for acquiring location information may be that the processor 3812 receives an access request.
在一些实施例中,处理器3812在判断可闭合设备3900的位置位于安全区域外时,可通过可闭合设备3900的输出模块3950发出本地警报信息,如通过麦克风发出语音信息,向外部发出返回安全区域或请受信用户解除警报的提示等。在一些实施例中,处理器3812在判断可闭合设备3900的位置位于安全区域外时,可通过受信用户的用户终端3840发出远程警报信息,如通过用户终端3840的显示器发出图文警报,提示受信用户可闭合设备3900的当前位置,以及提示若可闭合设备3900当前的位置移动是可信任的,则可通过受信用户的设置解除警报。In some embodiments, when the processor 3812 determines that the position of the closable device 3900 is outside the safe area, it can send a local alarm message through the output module 3950 of the closable device 3900, such as sending out a voice message through a microphone, and sending a return safety message to the outside. area or prompts for trusted users to cancel the alarm, etc. In some embodiments, when the processor 3812 judges that the position of the closeable device 3900 is outside the safe area, it can send a remote alarm message through the user terminal 3840 of the trusted user, such as sending a graphic alarm through the display of the user terminal 3840, prompting the trusted user The user can set the current position of the closeable device 3900, and prompt if the movement of the current position of the closeable device 3900 is trustworthy, the alarm can be disarmed by the setting of the trusted user.
步骤4230,获取所述受信用户访问期间所述物品管理区域的物品识别信息,物品识别信息包括物品信息和/或物品的存取信息。步骤4230可由处理器3812(如管理模块4020,4120)执行。 Step 4230, acquire item identification information of the item management area during the trusted user's visit, where the item identification information includes item information and/or item access information. Step 4230 may be performed by processor 3812 (such as management modules 4020, 4120).
在一些实施例中,处理器3812可获取物品管理区域的探测信息;基于探测信息,确定用户访问期间物品管理区域的物品识别信息。其中,探测信息可通过可闭合设备3900的探测模块3920获取。在一些实施例中,物品信息至少包括物品的属性和/或物品的价值。In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may acquire detection information of the item management area; based on the detection information, determine item identification information of the item management area during the user's visit. Wherein, the detection information can be obtained through the detection module 3920 of the closeable device 3900 . In some embodiments, the item information includes at least the attributes of the item and/or the value of the item.
在一些实施例中,步骤4230进一步包括存取确定步骤。存取确定步骤可基于探测信息,确定用户访问期间物品管理区域内的物品的存取信息。存取确定步骤可由处理器3812(如识别子模块4021,4121的存取确定单元)执行。在一些实施例中,物品的存取信息可指示物品的存取状态,包括存入、取出和固有。在一些实施例中,物品的存取信息可指示物品的存取时间,包括存入时间和取出时间。In some embodiments, step 4230 further includes an access determination step. The access determination step may determine access information of the items in the item management area during the user's visit based on the probe information. The access determination step may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the access determination unit of the identification sub-module 4021, 4121). In some embodiments, the item's access information may indicate the item's access status, including deposited, withdrawn, and owned. In some embodiments, the item's access information may indicate the item's access time, including deposit time and withdrawal time.
在一些实施例中,处理器3812可在物品管理区域关闭后确定物品的存取信息。例如,处理器3812控制可闭合设备3900的锁体3930执行开锁操作,以允许受信用户访问物品管理区域,受信用户存入和/或取出物品,可闭合设备3900的锁体3930锁止后,物品管理区域关闭,处理器3812可基于可闭合设备3900开锁时间点和关锁时间点的图像数据进行图像识别分析,确定可闭合设备3900的物品管理区域内存在存取状态为存入和/或取出的物品。In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may determine the access information of the item after the item management area is closed. For example, the processor 3812 controls the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlocking operation, so as to allow the trusted user to access the item management area, and the trusted user deposits and/or withdraws items. After the lock body 3930 of the closeable device 3900 is locked, the item When the management area is closed, the processor 3812 can perform image recognition and analysis based on the image data of the closing time point and the closing time point of the closable device 3900, and determine that there is an access status in the item management area of the closable device 3900 as deposit and/or withdrawal items.
在一些实施例中,识别步骤进一步包括属性确定步骤。属性确定步骤可基于探测信息,确定用户访问期间物品管理区域内的物品的属性。属性确定步骤可由处理器3812(如属性确定单元)执行。In some embodiments, the identifying step further includes an attribute determining step. The attribute determining step may determine the attribute of the item in the item management area during the user's visit based on the probe information. The attribute determining step may be performed by a processor 3812 (such as an attribute determining unit).
在一些实施例中,处理器3812可基于探测信息,通过机器学习模型确定物品的属性。其中,机器学习模型可以包括但不限于神经网络模型、决策树模型、支持向量机模型等或其任何组合。例如,处理器3812可调用存储在存储设备3850中的属性识别模型,属性识别模型是使用带标签的探测信息集作为样本训练机器学习模型而生成的,属性识别模型可以以物品的图像数据或激光扫描数据作为输入,识别物品的种类和材质。在一些实施例中,处理器3812可基于探测信息,通过参数计算模型确定物品的属性参数,基于物品的属性参数确定物品的属性。例如,处理器3812可调用存储在存储设备3850中的密度计算模型,基于压力传感数据和超声波传感数据计算物品的密度,通过物品的密度确定物品的材质(如金属、玉石等)。在一些实施例中,处理器3812可基于探测信息,通过图文识别模型确定物品的物品属性。例如,物品可携带指示物品属性的图文标识(如图文标识指示物品种类为戒指,材质为黄金,规格包括重量15g和直径2cm),处理器3812可调用存储在存储设备3850中的图文识别模型(如OCR模型),通过获取物品的带图文标识的图像数据确定物品的种类、材质及规格。In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may determine the attributes of the item through a machine learning model based on the detection information. Wherein, the machine learning model may include but not limited to a neural network model, a decision tree model, a support vector machine model, etc. or any combination thereof. For example, the processor 3812 can call the attribute recognition model stored in the storage device 3850. The attribute recognition model is generated by using the labeled detection information set as a sample to train the machine learning model. The attribute recognition model can be based on the image data of the item or laser The scanned data is used as input to identify the type and material of the item. In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may determine the attribute parameters of the item through a parameter calculation model based on the detection information, and determine the attribute of the item based on the attribute parameters of the item. For example, the processor 3812 can call the density calculation model stored in the storage device 3850, calculate the density of the item based on the pressure sensing data and the ultrasonic sensing data, and determine the material (such as metal, jade, etc.) of the item through the density of the item. In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may determine the item attribute of the item through a graphic-text recognition model based on the detection information. For example, an item may carry a graphic and text mark indicating the attribute of the item (such as a text mark indicating that the type of the item is a ring, the material is gold, and the specification includes a weight of 15g and a diameter of 2 cm), and the processor 3812 may call the graphic and text mark stored in the storage device 3850 Recognition model (such as OCR model), which determines the type, material and specification of the item by obtaining the image data with graphic and text identification of the item.
在一些实施例中,识别步骤进一步包括价值确定步骤。价值确定步骤可基于探测信息,确定用户访问期间物品管理区域内的物品的价值。价值确定步骤可由处理器3812(如价值确定单元)执行。在通过存取确定步骤确定物品管理区域内存在存入物品的情况下,可进一步确定存入物品的价值。可根据存入物品的属性选择确定存入物品价值的具体方式。In some embodiments, the identifying step further includes a value determining step. The value determining step may determine the value of the items in the item management area during the user's visit based on the probe information. The value determination step may be performed by a processor 3812 (eg, a value determination unit). In a case where it is determined by the access determination step that the deposited item exists in the item management area, the value of the deposited item may be further determined. The specific method of determining the value of the deposited items can be selected according to the attributes of the deposited items.
在一些实施例中,可选的,价值确定步骤可进一步包括通过网络检索确定存入物品价值的步骤。例如,处理器3812基于存入物品的图像数据进行网络检索,以确定匹配度高于阈值一个或多个的待选物品。处理器3812将该一个或多个待选物品通过可闭合设备3900的显示器或受信用户的用户终端3840的 显示装置显示上述待选物品,由受信用户从该一个或多个待选物品中确定目标参考物品。若受信用户在预定时间(如1分钟)内未确定目标参考物品,则处理器3812自动确定匹配度最高的待选物品为目标参考物品。处理器3812可基于检索到的目标参考物品的市场价值确定存入物品的价值。In some embodiments, optionally, the step of determining the value may further include a step of determining the value of the deposited item through a network search. For example, the processor 3812 performs a network search based on the image data of the stored items to determine candidate items whose matching degree is higher than one or more thresholds. The processor 3812 displays the one or more items to be selected through the display of the closeable device 3900 or the display device of the user terminal 3840 of the trusted user, and the trusted user determines the target from the one or more items to be selected Reference items. If the trusted user does not determine the target reference item within a predetermined time (eg, 1 minute), the processor 3812 automatically determines the candidate item with the highest matching degree as the target reference item. Processor 3812 may determine the value of the deposited item based on the retrieved market value of the target reference item.
在一些实施例中,可选的,价值确定步骤可进一步包括通过本地数据库检索确定存入物品价值的步骤。本地数据库存储在存储设备3850中。仅作为示例,本地数据库可包含一个或多个预存储的参考物品的信息,该参考物品的信息至少包括物品的图像数据和价值。其中,参考物品的价值可由受信用户设定。通过本地数据库检索确定物品价值的步骤与通过网络检索确定物品价值的步骤相似,此处不再赘述。In some embodiments, optionally, the step of determining the value may further include a step of determining the value of the deposited item by searching a local database. The local database is stored in storage device 3850. By way of example only, the local database may contain one or more pre-stored reference item information including at least image data and a value of the item. Wherein, the value of the reference item can be set by the trusted user. The steps of determining the value of the item through the local database search are similar to the steps of determining the value of the item through the network search, and will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,可选的,价值确定步骤可进一步包括基于用户输入确定物品价值的步骤。例如,在存取确定步骤确定物品管理区域内存在存入物品(如文件或证书)后,处理器3812可通过可闭合设备3900或用户终端3840的显示器显示提示信息,用于提示用户可手动设定存入物品的价值。处理器3812基于获取的受信用户的关于价值设定的设置请求(设置请求携带物品的价值信息),确定存入物品的价值。In some embodiments, optionally, the step of determining the value may further include the step of determining the value of the item based on user input. For example, after the access determination step determines that there are deposited items (such as documents or certificates) in the item management area, the processor 3812 may display a prompt message through the display of the closable device 3900 or the user terminal 3840 to prompt the user to manually set Determine the value of the deposited item. The processor 3812 determines the value of the deposited item based on the acquired setting request of the trusted user on value setting (the setting request carries the value information of the item).
关于存取状态、物品的属性、物品的价值的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图3中的识别子模块4021及其描述,在此不再赘述。For details about the access state, the attributes of the item, and the value of the item, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the identification sub-module 4021 in FIG. 3 and its description, and will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,流程4200还可以包括鉴权步骤。鉴权步骤可基于访问信息和/或物品管理区域的探测信息,确定受信用户访问期间物品管理区域内的物品的权属信息。鉴权步骤可由处理器3812(如鉴权子模块4122)执行。关于鉴权步骤的具体内容可参见图43及其描述,此处不再赘述。In some embodiments, the process 4200 may also include an authentication step. The authentication step can determine the ownership information of the items in the item management area during the trusted user's visit based on the access information and/or the detection information of the item management area. The authentication step can be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the authentication sub-module 4122). For the specific content of the authentication steps, please refer to FIG. 43 and its description, which will not be repeated here.
步骤4240,基于物品识别信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定。在一些实施例中,索引信息还基于鉴权步骤确定的权属信息确定。步骤4240可由处理器3812(如管理模块4020的索引子模块4022,或管理模块4120的索引子模块4123)执行。Step 4240: Determine index information based on the item identification information, where the index information is determined based at least on the access information. In some embodiments, the index information is also determined based on the ownership information determined in the authentication step. Step 4240 may be executed by the processor 3812 (such as the indexing submodule 4022 of the management module 4020, or the indexing submodule 4123 of the management module 4120).
在一些实施例中,步骤4240可进一步包括索引生成步骤。在索引生成步骤中,可在未检测到已创建的索引信息时,至少基于访问信息、物品识别信息和预设规则,创建索引信息。在一些实施例中,索引信息还基于鉴权步骤确定的权属信息创建。索引生成步骤可由处理器3812(如索引子模块4022,4123的索引生成单元)执行。对于未创建索引信息的情况下,以及存储设备3850的数据丢失、数据损坏或数据重置导致已创建的索引信息更新无法和/或查询的情况下,索引生成步骤可新建或重建索引信息。需要说明的是,处理器3812可在物品管理区域无物品存取的情况下创建索引信息。In some embodiments, step 4240 may further include an index generation step. In the index generating step, when no created index information is detected, index information may be created based at least on access information, item identification information and preset rules. In some embodiments, the index information is also created based on the ownership information determined in the authentication step. The step of generating the index may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the index generating unit of the index sub-modules 4022, 4123). In the case of no index information created, and in the case of data loss, data corruption or data reset of the storage device 3850, the created index information cannot be updated and/or queried, the index generation step may create or rebuild index information. It should be noted that the processor 3812 may create index information when there is no item access in the item management area.
在一些实施例中,预设规则可以包括由待统计信息中提取关联物品的信息的提取规则,待统计信息至少包括访问信息和物品识别信息;索引生成步骤进一步包括基于提取规则由待统计信息中提取信息的步骤。例如,提取规则可以为:由待统计信息中提取物品的名称、图像、属性、价值、存取状态、存取时间,以及存取该物品的用户的用户标识(如用户ID、用户名称)。在一些实施例中,待统计信息还包括鉴权步骤确定的权属信息。In some embodiments, the preset rule may include an extraction rule for extracting information of associated items from the information to be counted, and the information to be counted includes at least access information and item identification information; the index generation step further includes extracting information based on the extraction rule from the information to be counted Steps to extract information. For example, the extraction rule can be: extract the name, image, attribute, value, access status, access time, and user identification (such as user ID, user name) of the user who accesses the item from the information to be counted. In some embodiments, the information to be counted also includes ownership information determined in the authentication step.
在一些实施例中,预设规则还可以包括统计关联物品的信息的统计规则,索引生成步骤进一步包括基于统计规则对提取信息进行统计,生成索引信息的步骤。例如,统计规则可以为:按不同的权属人对提取信息进行分类,统计关联各权属人的物品的名称、属性、存取状态、存取时间及当前存储物品总价值。In some embodiments, the preset rules may also include statistical rules for counting the information of related items, and the index generating step further includes a step of counting the extracted information based on the statistical rules to generate index information. For example, the statistical rule can be: classify the extracted information according to different owners, and count the names, attributes, access status, access time, and total value of items currently stored with each owner.
在一些实施例中,预设规则还可以包括基于查询请求查询索引信息的查询规则;索引生成步骤进一步包括基于查询规则,确定索引信息的查询方式的步骤。例如,查询规则可以为:以存取时间、权属人、物品的属性和物品的名称中的一种或多种作为筛选条件进行索引信息查询。In some embodiments, the preset rule may also include a query rule for querying index information based on a query request; the index generating step further includes a step of determining a query method for index information based on the query rule. For example, the query rule may be: querying index information by using one or more of access time, owner, property of the item, and name of the item as filter conditions.
在一些实施例中,预设规则还可以包括基于查询请求显示对应索引信息的显示规则;索引生成步骤进一步包括基于显示规则,确定索引信息的显示方式的步骤。例如,显示规则可以为:以基于物品的名称排序、基于存取时间排序和基于权属人排序中的一种作为显示条件显示索引信息。类似的,显示方式可以包括以基于物品排序的显示方式、基于存取时间排序的显示方式和基于权属人排序的显示方式。In some embodiments, the preset rule may also include a display rule for displaying corresponding index information based on the query request; the step of generating the index further includes a step of determining a display mode of the index information based on the display rule. For example, the display rule may be: displaying index information with one of item-based sorting, access-time-based sorting, and owner-based sorting as a display condition. Similarly, the display manner may include sorting based on items, displaying based on access time and displaying based on owner.
在一些实施例中,索引步骤还可以包括索引更新步骤。索引更新步骤可在检测到已创建的索引信息时,至少基于访问信息和物品识别信息,更新索引信息。在一些实施例中,索引信息还基于鉴权步骤确定的权属信息更新。索引更新步骤可由处理器3812(如索引子模块4022,4123的索引更新单元)执行。在索引更新步骤中,处理器3812可调用存储在存储设备3850中的已创建的索引信息,并对该已创建的索引信息进行更新。In some embodiments, the indexing step may also include an index updating step. The index updating step may update the index information based on at least the access information and the item identification information when the created index information is detected. In some embodiments, the index information is also updated based on the ownership information determined in the authentication step. The index updating step can be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the index updating unit of the index sub-modules 4022, 4123). In the index updating step, the processor 3812 may call the created index information stored in the storage device 3850, and update the created index information.
在一些实施例中,通过新增、修改和删除中一种或多种操作更新索引信息中关联当前存入物品和/或取出物品的索引信息条目。仅作为示例,索引信息可包括多个索引项,每个索引项为关联特定物品的信息的集合。每个索引项可包括多个索引信息条目,如物品的名称、属性、价值、存取状态、存入时间、取出时间、存入用户的用户标识、取出用户的用户标识等。对于需要进行信息累加计算及累加判断分析的索引信息条目,处理器3812更新该索引信息条目时采用修改操作。例如,当存在物品取出时,以修改的操作方式更新关联该物品的包括存取状态在内的索引信息条目,以新增的操作方式更新关联该物品的包括取出时间、取出用户的用户标识在内的索引信息条目,以删除的操作方式更新关联该物品的包括价值在内的索 引信息条目。In some embodiments, one or more operations of adding, modifying and deleting are used to update the index information entries associated with the currently deposited items and/or withdrawn items in the index information. As an example only, the index information may include a plurality of index items, each index item being a collection of information associated with a specific item. Each index item may include a plurality of index information items, such as item name, attribute, value, access status, deposit time, withdrawal time, user ID of the depositing user, user ID of the withdrawing user, and the like. For the index information entry that requires information accumulation calculation and accumulation judgment analysis, the processor 3812 uses a modification operation when updating the index information entry. For example, when there is an item to be taken out, the index information entry associated with the item including the access status is updated in a modified operation mode, and the item is updated in a newly added operation mode, including the time of taking out, and the user ID of the user who took out the item. The index information entry in the item is updated by deleting the index information entry including the value associated with the item.
在一些实施例中,索引步骤还可以包括查询显示步骤。查询显示步骤可基于所述索引信息进行查询显示。在一些实施例中,查询显示步骤可进一步的基于受信用户的查询请求,确定与查询请求相对应的索引信息,以及显示与查询请求相对应的索引信息。查询显示步骤可由处理器3812(如索引子模块4022,4123的查询显示单元)执行。In some embodiments, the indexing step may also include a query display step. The query display step may perform query display based on the index information. In some embodiments, the query displaying step may further determine index information corresponding to the query request based on the query request of the trusted user, and display the index information corresponding to the query request. The query display step can be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the query display unit of the indexing submodules 4022, 4123).
在一些实施例中,查询请求携带用于查询索引信息的筛选条件和用于显示索引信息的显示条件。例如,受信用户的查询请求中,以物品属性包含宝石作为筛选条件,以基于权属人排序作为显示条件,则处理器3812基于受信用户的查询请求确定与该筛选条件相对应的索引信息,该确定的索引信息可包括一个或多个物品属性关联宝石的索引项,每个索引项的索引信息条目可包括名称、属性、价值、存取时间以及权属人;处理器3812基于受信用户的查询请求,确定以基于权属人排序的方式显示该确定的索引信息,即按照权属人对所有索引项进行分类及排列,显示各权属人名下属性关联宝石的物品的名称、属性、价值和存取时间。In some embodiments, the query request carries filtering conditions for querying index information and display conditions for displaying index information. For example, in the query request of the trusted user, if the item attribute includes gemstones as the filtering condition, and the sorting based on the owner is used as the display condition, the processor 3812 determines the index information corresponding to the filtering condition based on the trusted user's query request. The determined index information may include one or more index items associated with gemstones with item attributes, and the index information entries of each index item may include name, attribute, value, access time and owner; the processor 3812 is based on the trusted user's query Request, determine to display the determined index information in a sorted manner based on the owner, that is, classify and arrange all index items according to the owner, and display the name, attribute, value and access time.
图43是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的鉴权步骤的示例性流程图。仅作为示例,流程4300可包括步骤4310至步骤4330。Fig. 43 is an exemplary flowchart of authentication steps according to some embodiments of this specification. For example only, process 4300 may include steps 4310 to 4330 .
步骤4310,基于探测信息确认受信用户访问期间物品管理区域是否有存入物品和取出物品。在一些实施例中,物品管理区域是否有存入物品和取出物品可基于物品识别信息确认。其中,物品识别信息为步骤4230基于探测模块3920获取的探测信息确定的。步骤4310可由处理器3812(如识别子模块4021,4121的存取确定单元)执行。在一些实施例中,处理器3812在确定物品管理区域的物品的存取信息后,即可确认是否有存入物品和取出物品。Step 4310: Based on the detection information, it is confirmed whether there are items deposited and withdrawn from the item management area during the trusted user's visit. In some embodiments, whether there are deposited items and withdrawn items in the item management area can be confirmed based on item identification information. Wherein, the item identification information is determined based on the detection information acquired by the detection module 3920 in step 4230 . Step 4310 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the access determination unit of the identification sub-module 4021, 4121). In some embodiments, after determining the access information of the items in the item management area, the processor 3812 can confirm whether there are deposited items and withdrawn items.
对于存在存入物品的情况,流程4300执行步骤4320。在步骤4320中,基于访问信息和探测信息,确定存入物品的权属信息。在一些实施例中,步骤4320可由处理器3812(如鉴权子模块4122的第一鉴权单元)执行。For the case that there are deposited items, the process 4300 executes step 4320 . In step 4320, based on the access information and the probe information, the ownership information of the deposited item is determined. In some embodiments, step 4320 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the first authentication unit of the authentication submodule 4122).
在一些实施例中,存入物品的权属信息可基于访问信息和步骤4230基于探测信息确定的物品识别信息确定。在一些实施例中,步骤4320可进一步包括:基于物品的存入时间和用户的访问时间,确定存访重合时间;确定存访重合时间对应的用户与对应的存入物品的权属关系。存访重合时间为物品存入与用户访问的重合时间点或时间段。例如,处理器3812基于物品的存入时间和用户的开锁时间、锁止时间建立时间线。其中,存入时间可以为基于探测信息(如压力传感数据)的变化时间确定的存入时间戳。处理器3812确定开锁期间与存入时间戳重合的存访重合时间,并确定该存访重合时间对应的用户为该存访重合时间对应的存入物品的权属人。In some embodiments, the ownership information of the deposited item may be determined based on the access information and the item identification information determined in step 4230 based on the probe information. In some embodiments, step 4320 may further include: based on the deposit time of the item and the user's access time, determining the overlapping deposit and access time; determining the ownership relationship between the user corresponding to the overlapping deposit and access time and the corresponding deposited item. Deposit and access overlapping time refers to the overlapping time point or time period between item deposit and user access. For example, the processor 3812 establishes a timeline based on the deposit time of the item and the user's unlock time and lock time. Wherein, the storage time may be a storage time stamp determined based on a change time of detection information (such as pressure sensor data). The processor 3812 determines that the deposit-access overlap time coincides with the deposit-in time stamp during the unlocking period, and determines that the user corresponding to the deposit-access overlap time is the owner of the deposited item corresponding to the deposit-access overlap time.
在一些实施例中,步骤4320还进一步包括基于用户输入确定存入物品的共同权属人,其中用户为受信用户且用户为该存入物品的权属人。具体的,同一物品的所有权可由多人共同拥有。仅作为示例,处理器3812接收用户的设置请求,请求设置一个或多个其他受信用户为存入物品的共同权属人;处理器3812判断发出设置请求的用户是否为存入物品的权属人;在判断结果为是时,基于设置请求确定该一个或多个其他受信用户为存入物品的共同权属人。In some embodiments, step 4320 further includes determining a joint owner of the deposited item based on user input, wherein the user is the trusted user and the user is the owner of the deposited item. Specifically, the ownership of the same item can be jointly owned by multiple people. As an example only, the processor 3812 receives a user's setting request, requesting to set one or more other trusted users as the joint owner of the deposited item; the processor 3812 determines whether the user who sent the setting request is the owner of the deposited item ; When the judgment result is yes, based on the setting request, it is determined that the one or more other trusted users are joint owners of the deposited items.
对于存在取出物品的情况,流程4300执行步骤4330。在步骤4330中,获取物品管理区域内物品的历史权属信息。在一些实施例中,步骤4330可由处理器3812(如鉴权子模块4122的第二鉴权单元)执行。在一些实施例中,处理器3812获取存储在存储设备3850中的历史权属信息。可以理解的是,历史权属信息中的特定历史存入物品的权属信息可指示当前取出物品的权属信息。For the case that there is an item to be taken out, the process 4300 executes step 4330 . In step 4330, the historical ownership information of the items in the item management area is acquired. In some embodiments, step 4330 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the second authentication unit of the authentication submodule 4122). In some embodiments, processor 3812 retrieves historical title information stored in storage device 3850 . It can be understood that the ownership information of a specific historically deposited item in the historical ownership information may indicate the ownership information of the currently withdrawn item.
步骤4340,基于探测信息和历史权属信息,确定取出物品的权属信息。在一些实施例中,步骤4340可由处理器3812(如第二鉴权单元)执行。 Step 4340, based on the detection information and historical ownership information, determine the ownership information of the retrieved item. In some embodiments, step 4340 may be performed by the processor 3812 (such as the second authentication unit).
在一些实施例中,取出物品的权属信息可基于物品识别信息和历史权属信息确定。在一些实施例中,处理器3812可确定与当前取出物品信息匹配的历史存入物品,并基于历史存入物品的权属信息确定当前取出物品的权属信息。仅作为示例,信息匹配可包括物品的名称匹配、种类匹配、图像匹配等,或其任意组合。In some embodiments, ownership information of the retrieved item may be determined based on item identification information and historical ownership information. In some embodiments, the processor 3812 may determine the historically deposited items that match the information of the currently withdrawn items, and determine the ownership information of the currently withdrawn items based on the ownership information of the historically deposited items. As an example only, information matching may include name matching, category matching, image matching, etc. of items, or any combination thereof.
在一些实施例中,步骤4340进一步包括判断取出物品的用户是否为物品的权属人,在判断结果为否时发出警报信息。具体的说,可能存在取出物品的受信用户并非物品权属人的情况,在发生此情况时向权属人或其他关联人员示警,可提高物品管理的安全性。在一些实施例中,处理器3812基于访问信息和物品识别信息确定进行物品取出的受信用户。确定进行物品取出的受信用户的方式与步骤4320类似,具体内容可参考步骤4320的描述,在此不再赘述。在一些实施例中,基于取出物品的权属信息,判断进行物品取出的受信用户是否为取出物品的权属人。在一些实施例中,处理器3812判断进行物品取出的受信用户不是取出物品的权属人,发出警报信息。In some embodiments, step 4340 further includes judging whether the user who took out the item is the owner of the item, and sending an alarm message if the judging result is no. Specifically, there may be situations where the trusted user who takes out the item is not the owner of the item. When this happens, the owner or other related personnel will be alerted, which can improve the security of item management. In some embodiments, the processor 3812 determines the trusted user for item retrieval based on the access information and the item identification information. The method of determining the trusted user to take out the item is similar to step 4320, and the specific content can refer to the description of step 4320, which will not be repeated here. In some embodiments, based on the ownership information of the retrieved item, it is determined whether the trusted user who retrieves the item is the owner of the retrieved item. In some embodiments, the processor 3812 determines that the trusted user who takes out the item is not the owner of the item, and sends an alarm message.
关于历史权属信息的具体内容可参见本说明书的其他部分,例如图41中的鉴权子模块4122及其 描述,在此不再赘述。For the specific content of historical ownership information, please refer to other parts of this specification, such as the authentication sub-module 4122 in Figure 41 and its description, and will not be repeated here.
图44是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的索引信息管理系统的示例性应用场景图。如图44所示,用户通过可闭合设备3900的输入模块唤醒待机状态的索引信息管理系统并发出访问请求,请求可闭合设备3900的锁体执行开锁操作以允许用户访问物品管理区域,该访问请求携带用于安全验证的指示用户身份的用户信息。索引信息管理系统的安全模块基于该访问请求携带的用户信息,确认当前用户是否为受信用户。在判断结果为否时,安全模块通过可闭合设备3900的显示器发出警报信息,以提示用户验证失败,需重新进行安全验证,并等待用户重新输入用户信息以进行下一轮用户验证;在判断结果为是时,安全模块控制可闭合设备3900的锁体执行开锁操作,并生成访问信息。Fig. 44 is an exemplary application scenario diagram of the index information management system according to some embodiments of this specification. As shown in Figure 44, the user wakes up the index information management system in the standby state through the input module of the closeable device 3900 and sends an access request, requesting the lock body of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlocking operation to allow the user to access the item management area, the access request Carry user information indicating user identity for security verification. The security module of the index information management system confirms whether the current user is a trusted user based on the user information carried in the access request. When the judgment result is no, the safety module sends an alarm message through the display of the closeable device 3900 to prompt the user to verify that the verification has failed, and the safety verification needs to be carried out again, and waits for the user to re-enter the user information to carry out the next round of user verification; If yes, the security module controls the lock body of the closeable device 3900 to perform an unlock operation and generate access information.
用户手动锁止可闭合设备3900的锁体后,物品管理区域关闭,索引信息管理系统的管理模块调用可闭合设备3900的探测模块采集的物品管理区域内物品的探测信息,以及调用安全模块生成的访问信息,用于物品识别、鉴权和索引信息更新。其中:After the user manually locks the lock body of the closable device 3900, the item management area is closed, and the management module of the index information management system calls the detection information of the items in the item management area collected by the detection module of the closable device 3900, and calls the information generated by the security module. Access information for item identification, authentication and index information updates. in:
管理模块的识别子模块基于探测信息确定物品识别信息(包括物品信息和物品的存取信息),并基于物品识别信息判断用户访问期间(开锁期间)物品管理区域是否存入和/或取出物品。The identification sub-module of the management module determines item identification information (including item information and item access information) based on the detection information, and judges based on the item identification information whether to deposit and/or withdraw items from the item management area during user access (during unlocking).
在识别子模块判断不存在存入物品和取出物品时,索引信息管理系统返回待机状态,等待用户唤醒。When the identification sub-module judges that there is no deposit or withdrawal, the index information management system returns to the standby state and waits for the user to wake up.
在识别子模块判断存在存入物品时,跳转至管理模块的鉴权子模块进行存入物品的鉴权:鉴权子模块调用识别子模块确定的物品识别信息和安全模块生成的访问信息,用于确定存入物品的权属信息。鉴权子模块完成鉴权后,跳转至管理模块的索引子模块进行索引信息更新。When the identification sub-module judges that there are deposited items, it jumps to the authentication sub-module of the management module to authenticate the deposited items: the authentication sub-module calls the item identification information determined by the identification sub-module and the access information generated by the security module, Information used to determine ownership of deposited items. After the authentication sub-module completes the authentication, it jumps to the index sub-module of the management module to update the index information.
在识别子模块判断存在取出物品时,跳转至管理模块的索引子模块进行索引信息更新。When the identification sub-module judges that there is an item to be taken out, it jumps to the index sub-module of the management module to update the index information.
管理模块的索引子模块调用识别子模块确定的物品识别信息、鉴权子模块确定的存入物品的权属信息和安全模块生成的访问信息,用于更新关联存入物品的索引信息;索引子模块调用识别子模块确定的物品识别信息和安全模块生成的访问信息,用于更新关联取出物品的索引信息。管理模块的索引子模块完成索引信息更新后,索引信息管理系统返回待机状态,等待用户唤醒。The index sub-module of the management module calls the identification information of the item determined by the identification sub-module, the ownership information of the deposited item determined by the authentication sub-module, and the access information generated by the security module to update the index information of the associated deposited item; the index sub-module The module invokes the item identification information determined by the identification sub-module and the access information generated by the security module to update the index information associated with the retrieved items. After the index sub-module of the management module finishes updating the index information, the index information management system returns to the standby state and waits for the user to wake it up.
本说明书一些实施例所披露的索引信息管理系统3800及可闭合设备3900可能带来的有益效果包括但不限于:(1)能够建立至少用于指示访问期间受信用户的物品的存取信息的索引信息,用户可直观便捷地对物品信息进行综合管理和查询;(2)能够使用户在多人共享使用的应用场景下,便捷地查询物品使用的动向,便于物品的统筹管理和使用分配;(3)能够在储物装置发生非受信的访问行为、未许可的移动行为时,以及物品发生非权属人取用行为时发出本地警报和/或远程警报,多维度提高使用安全性。需要说明的是,不同实施例可能产生的有益效果不同,在不同的实施例里,可能产生的有益效果可以是以上任意一种或几种的组合,也可以是其他任何可能获得的有益效果。The beneficial effects that may be brought about by the index information management system 3800 and the closeable device 3900 disclosed in some embodiments of this specification include but are not limited to: (1) An index that can be used to at least indicate the access information of items of trusted users during access Information, users can intuitively and conveniently carry out comprehensive management and query on item information; (2) It enables users to conveniently inquire about the trend of item usage in the application scenario where multiple people share and use it, which is convenient for the overall management and use allocation of items; ( 3) It can issue local and/or remote alarms when untrusted access behaviors and unauthorized movement behaviors occur on storage devices, and when items are accessed by non-owners, so as to improve the safety of use in multiple dimensions. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the above, or any other possible beneficial effects.
上文已对基本概念做了描述,显然,对于本领域技术人员来说,上述详细披露仅仅作为示例,而并不构成对本说明书的限定。虽然此处并没有明确说明,本领域技术人员可能会对本说明书进行各种修改、改进和修正。该类修改、改进和修正在本说明书中被建议,所以该类修改、改进、修正仍属于本说明书示范实施例的精神和范围。The basic concept has been described above, obviously, for those skilled in the art, the above detailed disclosure is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation to this description. Although not expressly stated here, those skilled in the art may make various modifications, improvements and corrections to this description. Such modifications, improvements and corrections are suggested in this specification, so such modifications, improvements and corrections still belong to the spirit and scope of the exemplary embodiments of this specification.
同时,本说明书使用了特定词语来描述本说明书的实施例。如“一个实施例”、“一实施例”、和/或“一些实施例”意指与本说明书至少一个实施例相关的某一特征、结构或特点。因此,应强调并注意的是,本说明书中在不同位置两次或多次提及的“一实施例”或“一个实施例”或“一个替代性实施例”并不一定是指同一实施例。此外,本说明书的一个或多个实施例中的某些特征、结构或特点可以进行适当的组合。Meanwhile, this specification uses specific words to describe the embodiments of this specification. For example, "one embodiment", "an embodiment", and/or "some embodiments" refer to a certain feature, structure or characteristic related to at least one embodiment of this specification. Therefore, it should be emphasized and noted that two or more references to "an embodiment" or "an embodiment" or "an alternative embodiment" in different places in this specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment . In addition, certain features, structures or characteristics in one or more embodiments of this specification may be properly combined.
此外,除非权利要求中明确说明,本说明书所述处理元素和序列的顺序、数字字母的使用、或其他名称的使用,并非用于限定本说明书流程和方法的顺序。尽管上述披露中通过各种示例讨论了一些目前认为有用的发明实施例,但应当理解的是,该类细节仅起到说明的目的,附加的权利要求并不仅限于披露的实施例,相反,权利要求旨在覆盖所有符合本说明书实施例实质和范围的修正和等价组合。例如,虽然以上所描述的系统组件可以通过硬件设备实现,但是也可以只通过软件的解决方案得以实现,如在现有的服务器或移动设备上安装所描述的系统。In addition, unless explicitly stated in the claims, the order of processing elements and sequences described in this specification, the use of numbers and letters, or the use of other names are not used to limit the sequence of processes and methods in this specification. While the foregoing disclosure has discussed by way of various examples some embodiments of the invention that are presently believed to be useful, it should be understood that such detail is for illustrative purposes only and that the appended claims are not limited to the disclosed embodiments, but rather, the claims The claims are intended to cover all modifications and equivalent combinations that fall within the spirit and scope of the embodiments of this specification. For example, although the system components described above may be implemented by hardware devices, they may also be implemented by a software-only solution, such as installing the described system on an existing server or mobile device.
同理,应当注意的是,为了简化本说明书披露的表述,从而帮助对一个或多个发明实施例的理解,前文对本说明书实施例的描述中,有时会将多种特征归并至一个实施例、附图或对其的描述中。但是,这种披露方法并不意味着本说明书对象所需要的特征比权利要求中提及的特征多。实际上,实施例的特征要少于上述披露的单个实施例的全部特征。In the same way, it should be noted that in order to simplify the expression disclosed in this specification and help the understanding of one or more embodiments of the invention, in the foregoing description of the embodiments of this specification, sometimes multiple features are combined into one embodiment, drawings or descriptions thereof. This method of disclosure does not, however, imply that the subject matter of the specification requires more features than are recited in the claims. Indeed, embodiment features are less than all features of a single foregoing disclosed embodiment.
一些实施例中使用了描述成分、属性数量的数字,应当理解的是,此类用于实施例描述的数字,在一些示例中使用了修饰词“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”来修饰。除非另外说明,“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”表明所述数字允许有±20%的变化。相应地,在一些实施例中,说明书和权利要求中使用的数值参数均为近似值,该近似值根据个别实施例所需特点可以发生改变。在一些实施例中,数值参数应考虑规定的有效数 位并采用一般位数保留的方法。尽管本说明书一些实施例中用于确认其范围广度的数值域和参数为近似值,在具体实施例中,此类数值的设定在可行范围内尽可能精确。In some embodiments, numbers describing the quantity of components and attributes are used. It should be understood that such numbers used in the description of the embodiments use the modifiers "about", "approximately" or "substantially" in some examples. grooming. Unless otherwise stated, "about", "approximately" or "substantially" indicates that the stated figure allows for a variation of ±20%. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the numerical parameters used in the specification and claims are approximations that can vary depending upon the desired characteristics of individual embodiments. In some embodiments, numerical parameters shall take into account the specified significant digits and adopt the general digit reservation method. Although the numerical ranges and parameters used in some embodiments of this specification to confirm the breadth of the range are approximations, in specific embodiments, such numerical values are set as precisely as practicable.
针对本说明书引用的每个专利、专利申请、专利申请公开物和其他材料,如文章、书籍、说明书、出版物、文档等,特此将其全部内容并入本说明书作为参考。与本说明书内容不一致或产生冲突的申请历史文件除外,对本说明书权利要求最广范围有限制的文件(当前或之后附加于本说明书中的)也除外。需要说明的是,如果本说明书附属材料中的描述、定义、和/或术语的使用与本说明书所述内容有不一致或冲突的地方,以本说明书的描述、定义和/或术语的使用为准。Each patent, patent application, patent application publication, and other material, such as article, book, specification, publication, document, etc., cited in this specification is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Application history documents that are inconsistent with or conflict with the content of this specification are excluded, and documents (currently or later appended to this specification) that limit the broadest scope of the claims of this specification are also excluded. It should be noted that if there is any inconsistency or conflict between the descriptions, definitions, and/or terms used in the accompanying materials of this manual and the contents of this manual, the descriptions, definitions and/or terms used in this manual shall prevail .
最后,应当理解的是,本说明书中所述实施例仅用以说明本说明书实施例的原则。其他的变形也可能属于本说明书的范围。因此,作为示例而非限制,本说明书实施例的替代配置可视为与本说明书的教导一致。相应地,本说明书的实施例不仅限于本说明书明确介绍和描述的实施例。Finally, it should be understood that the embodiments described in this specification are only used to illustrate the principles of the embodiments of this specification. Other modifications are also possible within the scope of this description. Therefore, by way of example and not limitation, alternative configurations of the embodiments of this specification may be considered consistent with the teachings of this specification. Accordingly, the embodiments of this specification are not limited to the embodiments explicitly introduced and described in this specification.
Claims (91)
- 一种可闭合设备,所述设备至少包括两个可相对移动的部件,所述两个可相对移动的部件可以通过至少一个连接件构成封闭空间。A closeable device, which includes at least two relatively movable parts, and the two relatively movable parts can form a closed space through at least one connecting piece.
- 根据权利要求1所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述两个可相对移动的部件可以通过锁定装置进行锁定。A closeable device as claimed in claim 1, wherein the two relatively movable parts are lockable by locking means.
- 根据权利要求2所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定装置包括安装支架、第一锁定件、锁定组件、机械解锁组件和智能解锁组件;A closeable device according to claim 2, wherein the locking means comprises a mounting bracket, a first locking member, a locking assembly, a mechanical unlocking assembly and an intelligent unlocking assembly;所述安装支架设于所述两个可相对移动的部件中的其中一个上;所述第一锁定件设于所述两个可相对移动的部件中的另一个上;所述锁定组件可移动的设置在所述安装支架上并能够与所述第一锁定件适配以形成锁定,所述锁定组件能够在锁定状态和解锁状态切换;The mounting bracket is arranged on one of the two relatively movable parts; the first locking member is arranged on the other of the two relatively movable parts; the locking assembly is movable is arranged on the mounting bracket and can be adapted to the first locking member to form a lock, and the locking assembly can be switched between a locked state and an unlocked state;所述机械解锁组件设于所述安装支架上,且所述机械解锁组件能够输出机械解锁动作而使得所述锁定组件解锁;The mechanical unlocking component is arranged on the mounting bracket, and the mechanical unlocking component can output a mechanical unlocking action to unlock the locking component;所述智能解锁组件设置在所述安装支架上,且所述智能解锁组件能够输出智能解锁动作而使得所述锁定组件解锁。The smart unlocking component is arranged on the mounting bracket, and the smart unlocking component can output a smart unlocking action to unlock the locking component.
- 根据权利要求3所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定装置还包括第一传动组件和第二传动组件;所述第一传动组件能够与所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接;所述第二传动组件能够与所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接;The closeable device according to claim 3, wherein the locking device further comprises a first transmission component and a second transmission component; the first transmission component is capable of transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking component and the locking component; The second transmission assembly is capable of transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking assembly and the locking assembly;当所述智能解锁组件输出智能解锁动作时,所述第一传动组件与所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接,所述第二传动组件与所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件脱离传动;当所述机械解锁组件输出机械解锁动作时,所述第一传动组件与所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件脱离传动,所述第二传动组件与所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件传动连接。When the intelligent unlocking component outputs an intelligent unlocking action, the first transmission component is in transmission connection with the intelligent unlocking component and the locking component, and the second transmission component is separated from the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component transmission; when the mechanical unlocking assembly outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the first transmission assembly is separated from the intelligent unlocking assembly and the locking assembly, and the second transmission assembly is connected to the mechanical unlocking assembly and the locking assembly Component drive connections.
- 根据权利要求4所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定组件包括转动片、第二锁定件和牵引件,其中,所述转动片通过第一旋转中心可旋转的设置在所述安装支架上;所述第二锁定件通过第二旋转中心可旋转的设置在所述安装支架上,所述第二锁定件具有与所述第一锁定件适配形成锁定的第一锁舌;所述牵引件的第一牵引点设置在所述转动片上,所述牵引件的第二牵引点设置在所述第二锁定件上,所述牵引件牵引所述转动片和所述第二锁定件以在锁定状态和解锁状态切换。The closeable device according to claim 4, wherein the locking assembly comprises a rotating piece, a second locking member and a pulling member, wherein the rotating piece is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through a first rotation center ; the second locking member is rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through the second rotation center, and the second locking member has a first lock tongue adapted to form a lock with the first locking member; the traction The first traction point of the traction piece is set on the rotating piece, the second traction point of the traction piece is set on the second locking piece, and the traction piece pulls the rotating piece and the second locking piece to Toggle between locked and unlocked states.
- 根据权利要求5所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一旋转中心与所述转动片的重心重合。A closeable device according to claim 5, wherein the first center of rotation coincides with the center of gravity of the rotating piece.
- 根据权利要求5所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述转动片包括第一限位部、第一施力部和传动部,其中,所述第一限位部和所述第一施力部能够与所述第二锁定件相适配以在所述第一锁舌在锁定状态和所述解锁状态切换,所述传动部的不同部位分别与所述第一传动组件和所述第二传动组件传动连接,所述第一限位部和所述第一施力部位于所述第一旋转中心与所述第一牵引点的连线靠近所述第二锁定件的一侧。The closeable device according to claim 5, wherein the rotating piece comprises a first limiting part, a first force applying part and a transmission part, wherein the first limiting part and the first force applying part It can be adapted to the second locking member to switch between the locked state and the unlocked state of the first bolt, and different parts of the transmission part are respectively connected with the first transmission assembly and the second transmission assembly. The components are connected by transmission, and the first limiting portion and the first force applying portion are located on the side of the line connecting the first rotation center and the first traction point close to the second locking member.
- 根据权利要求7所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述传动部包括第一推动部和第二推动部,所述第一推动部能够与所述第一传动组件传动连接,所述第二推动部能够与所述第二传动组件传动连接;所述第一推动部和所述第二推动部位于所述第一旋转中心与所述第一牵引点的连线远离所述第二锁定件的一侧。The closeable device according to claim 7, wherein the transmission part comprises a first push part and a second push part, the first push part can be connected to the first transmission assembly in transmission, and the second push part The part can be connected with the second transmission assembly; the first push part and the second push part are located at the point where the line connecting the first rotation center and the first traction point is away from the second locking member side.
- 根据权利要求8所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一牵引点设置在所述第一施力部上。A closeable device according to claim 8, wherein the first point of traction is provided on the first force applying portion.
- 根据权利要求8所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二锁定件靠近所述转动片的一侧设置有第二限位部和第二施力部,所述第二限位部能够与所述第一限位部相适配,所述第二施力部能够与所述第一施力部相适配。The closeable device according to claim 8, wherein a second limiting portion and a second force application portion are provided on the side of the second locking member close to the rotating piece, and the second limiting portion can be connected with The first limiting part is adapted, and the second force application part can be adapted to the first force application part.
- 根据权利要求10所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一锁舌、所述第二限位部和所述第二施力部均位于所述第二旋转中心与所述第二牵引点的连线靠近所述转动片的一侧。The closeable device according to claim 10, wherein the first locking tongue, the second limiting part and the second force applying part are all located at the second rotation center and the second pulling point The connecting line is close to one side of the rotating piece.
- 根据权利要求5至11中任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定组件还包括缓冲垫板,所述缓冲垫板位于所述转动片与所述安装支架之间和/或所述第二锁定件与所述安装支架之间,所述转动片和所述第二锁定件通过所述缓冲垫板可旋转的设置在所述安装支架上。The closeable device according to any one of claims 5 to 11, wherein the locking assembly further comprises a cushion plate, the cushion plate is located between the rotating piece and the mounting bracket and/or the Between the second locking piece and the mounting bracket, the rotating plate and the second locking piece are rotatably arranged on the mounting bracket through the cushion plate.
- 根据权利要求12所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定组件还包括限位套,所述锁定组件位于解锁状态时,所述限位套与所述第二锁定件抵接。The closeable device according to claim 12, wherein the locking assembly further includes a limiting sleeve, and when the locking assembly is in an unlocked state, the limiting sleeve abuts against the second locking member.
- 根据权利要求13所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述限位套设置在所述缓冲垫板上。A closeable device according to claim 13, wherein the spacer is provided on the bumper plate.
- 根据权利要求8所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一传动组件包括旋转拨块,所述旋转拨块设置在所述智能解锁组件的动力输出端,当所述智能解锁组件的动力输出端输出智能解锁动作时,所述旋转拨块在第一方向旋转,并推动所述第一推动部使得所述转动片在解锁方向转动。The closeable device according to claim 8, wherein the first transmission assembly includes a rotary dial, and the rotary dial is arranged at the power output end of the intelligent unlocking assembly, when the power output of the intelligent unlocking assembly When the smart unlocking action is output from the terminal, the rotary dial rotates in the first direction, and pushes the first pushing part so that the rotating piece rotates in the unlocking direction.
- 根据权利要求8所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二传动组件包括转动拨片和第一连杆,其中,所述转动拨片设置在所述机械解锁组件的动力输出端,所述第一连杆沿第二方向可滑动的设置在所述安装支架,当所述机械解锁组件的动力输出端输出机械解锁动作时,所述转动拨片拨动所述第一连杆在第二方向移动,并拉动所述传动部使得所述转动片在解锁方向转动。The closeable device according to claim 8, wherein the second transmission assembly includes a rotating dial and a first connecting rod, wherein the rotating dial is arranged at the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly, the The first connecting rod is slidably arranged on the mounting bracket along the second direction. When the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly outputs a mechanical unlocking action, the rotating paddle moves the first connecting rod in the second direction, and pull the transmission part so that the rotating piece rotates in the unlocking direction.
- 根据权利要求16所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述转动拨片包括固定在所述机械锁组件的动力输出端的第一固定部和与所述第一固定部偏心设置的凸起部;The closeable device according to claim 16, wherein the rotating plectrum includes a first fixing portion fixed at the power output end of the mechanical lock assembly and a protrusion disposed eccentrically with respect to the first fixing portion;所述第一连杆包括依次连接的动力部、滑动部和拉动部,其中,所述动力部上设置有第一滑槽,所述凸起部可滑动的设置在所述第一滑槽;所述拉动部能够拉动所述第二推动部;所述滑动部和所述安装支架二者中一个设置有沿第二方向延伸的第二滑槽,所述滑动部和所述安装支架二者中的另一个设置有与所述第二滑槽相配合的多个导向件,多个导向件沿第二方向布置。The first connecting rod includes a power part, a sliding part and a pulling part connected in sequence, wherein a first slide groove is provided on the power part, and the protruding part is slidably arranged on the first slide groove; The pulling part can pull the second pushing part; one of the sliding part and the mounting bracket is provided with a second chute extending along the second direction, and both the sliding part and the mounting bracket The other one is provided with a plurality of guide pieces matched with the second chute, and the plurality of guide pieces are arranged along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求3所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能解锁组件可拆卸的设置在所述安装支架上。The closeable device according to claim 3, wherein the smart unlocking component is detachably arranged on the mounting bracket.
- 根据权利要求18所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能解锁组件包括驱动件、控制器和验证信息采集部件,其中,所述驱动件固定在所述安装支架上,当所述验证信息采集部件采集的解锁信息验证通过后,所述控制器控制所述驱动件输出智能解锁动作。The closable device according to claim 18, wherein the intelligent unlocking component includes a driver, a controller and a verification information collection part, wherein the driver is fixed on the mounting bracket, and when the verification information is collected After the unlocking information collected by the component is verified, the controller controls the driver to output an intelligent unlocking action.
- 根据权利要求19所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述验证信息采集部件为键盘和/或生物采集部件。The closeable device according to claim 19, wherein the verification information collection part is a keyboard and/or a biometric collection part.
- 根据权利要求19所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述驱动件通过固定板可拆卸的安装在所述安装支架。The closeable device according to claim 19, wherein the driving member is detachably mounted on the mounting bracket through a fixing plate.
- 根据权利要求19所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能解锁组件还包括为所述智能解锁组件提供电源的电池仓,所述电池仓中电池为替换结构或者可充电结构。The closeable device according to claim 19, wherein the smart unlocking component further includes a battery compartment providing power for the smart unlocking component, and the battery in the battery compartment is a replaceable structure or a rechargeable structure.
- 根据权利要求19所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能解锁组件还包括通讯部件,所述通讯部件接收所述验证信息采集部件的解锁信息验证通过后,所述控制器控制所述驱动件输出智能解锁动作。The closeable device according to claim 19, wherein the intelligent unlocking component further includes a communication part, and after the communication part receives the verification of the unlocking information from the verification information collection part, the controller controls the driving part Output smart unlock action.
- 根据权利要求3所述的可闭合设备,其中,机械解锁组件包括锁芯组件,所述锁芯组件包括安装部件、锁头和锁芯,其中,所述安装部件可拆卸的安装在所述安装支架上,所述锁头固定在所述安装部件上,所述锁芯位于所述锁头的内部,所述锁芯露出所述锁头的部分作为所述机械解锁组件的动力输出端。The closeable device according to claim 3, wherein the mechanical unlocking assembly includes a lock cylinder assembly, the lock cylinder assembly includes a mounting part, a lock head and a lock cylinder, wherein the mounting part is detachably mounted on the mounting On the bracket, the lock head is fixed on the installation part, the lock core is located inside the lock head, and the part of the lock core exposed from the lock head serves as the power output end of the mechanical unlocking assembly.
- 根据权利要求3所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述安装支架包括顶板、侧板、第一支撑板和第二支撑板,其中,所述顶板和所述侧板呈角度连接,所述第一支撑板和第二支撑板相对设置在所述顶板和所述侧板的两端,所述顶板和所述侧板衔接的部位设置有容纳所述第一锁定件通过的锁定通道,且所述顶板、所述侧板、所述第一支撑板和所述第二支撑板围成安装所述智能解锁组件、所述机械解锁组件和所述锁定组件的安装空间。A closeable device according to claim 3, wherein said mounting bracket comprises a top panel, side panels, a first support panel and a second support panel, wherein said top panel and said side panels are connected at an angle, said first A support plate and a second support plate are oppositely arranged at both ends of the top plate and the side plate, and a locking channel is provided at the connecting part of the top plate and the side plate to accommodate the passage of the first locking member, and the The top board, the side boards, the first support board and the second support board enclose the installation space for installing the intelligent unlocking component, the mechanical unlocking component and the locking component.
- 根据权利要求25所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述机械解锁组件设置在所述顶板。A closeable device according to claim 25, wherein said mechanical unlocking assembly is provided on said top panel.
- 根据权利要求25所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能解锁组件和所述锁定组件设置在所述侧板,且所述锁定组件与所述锁定通道相对应。The closeable device according to claim 25, wherein the smart unlocking component and the locking component are arranged on the side panel, and the locking component corresponds to the locking channel.
- 根据权利要求3所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述安装支架还包括和电源适配的应急充电口。The closeable device according to claim 3, wherein said mounting bracket further comprises an emergency charging port adapted to a power source.
- 根据权利要求28所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述安装支架还包括盖板,所述盖板至少一端可拆卸的与所述安装部件或者所述安装支架连接,且所述盖板能够覆盖所述机械解锁组件的锁孔和/或所述应急充电口。The closeable device according to claim 28, wherein the mounting bracket further includes a cover plate, at least one end of the cover plate is detachably connected to the mounting part or the mounting bracket, and the cover plate can cover The lock hole of the mechanical unlocking component and/or the emergency charging port.
- 根据权利要求3-29任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述两个可相对移动的部件包括箱体与门体,所述箱体和所述门体围成用于存储物品的内部隔室;所述门体具有所述第一锁定件;所述锁定装置设置在所述箱体内部,所述箱体和所述门体通过所述锁定装置与所述第一锁定件适配形成锁定。The closeable device according to any one of claims 3-29, wherein the two relatively movable parts comprise a box body and a door body, the box body and the door body enclosing a storage area for storing items. Internal compartment; the door has the first locking piece; the locking device is arranged inside the box, and the box and the door are adapted to the first locking piece through the locking device Match to form a lock.
- 根据权利要求1-30中任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述两个可相对移动的部件为钣金、铝合金和/或塑胶加工而成。The closeable device according to any one of claims 1-30, wherein the two relatively movable parts are made of sheet metal, aluminum alloy and/or plastic.
- 根据权利要求3所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定装置包括传动输出件,所述传动输出件具有可传递开锁作用力的解锁输出端和开锁输出端;A closeable device according to claim 3, wherein the locking device comprises a transmission output having an unlock output and an unlock output capable of transmitting an unlocking force;所述锁定组件包括相适配的转动片和第二锁定件,且两者能够分别在第一面内枢转;所述转动片具有传动部、第一施力部和止动部,所述第二锁定件具有第二施力部和第一锁舌,所述锁定组件被配置为:所述转动片位于关锁工作位时,所述第二锁定件的第一锁舌可与第一锁定件构建关锁限位副,且所述转动片的第一施力部与所述第二锁定件的所述第二施力部相抵形成锁扣限位副,以限制所述第二锁定件转动至开锁工作位;所述转动片的所述传动部与所述传动输出件的所述开锁输出端传动连接,以带动所述转动片的所述第一施力部与所述第二锁定件的所述第二施力部脱离,切换至开锁工作位;The locking assembly includes a matching rotating piece and a second locking piece, both of which can pivot in the first plane respectively; the rotating piece has a transmission part, a first force application part and a stop part, and the The second locking part has a second force application part and a first lock tongue, and the locking assembly is configured such that: when the rotating piece is in the lock working position, the first lock tongue of the second locking part can be connected with the first lock tongue. The locking part constructs a locking limit pair, and the first force applying part of the rotating piece is opposed to the second force applying part of the second locking part to form a lock limit limit pair to limit the second locking The part rotates to the unlocking position; the transmission part of the rotating piece is connected to the unlocking output end of the transmission output part, so as to drive the first force application part of the rotating piece and the second The second force application part of the locking member is disengaged and switched to the unlocking working position;转动片限位机构,包括锁扣限位挡板,所述锁扣限位挡板可沿第三方向滑动切换于解锁工作位和锁扣工作位,所述锁扣限位挡板具有止挡部和联动部,并配置为:所述锁扣限位挡板位于所述锁扣工作位时,其上的止挡部与所述转动片的止动部相抵形成止动限位副,以限制所述转动片转动至开锁工作位;所述锁扣限位挡板的联动部可与所述传动输出件的解锁输出端传动连接,以带动所述锁扣限位挡板的所述止挡部与所述转动片的止动部脱离,切换至解锁工作位;The rotating piece limit mechanism includes a lock limit baffle, the lock limit baffle can be slid along the third direction to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the lock limit baffle has a stopper part and linkage part, and is configured such that: when the lock stopper is located at the lock work position, the stop part on it is opposed to the stop part of the rotating piece to form a stop limit pair, so as to Limit the rotation of the rotating piece to the unlocking position; the linkage part of the lock limit baffle can be connected with the unlocking output end of the transmission output member to drive the stop of the lock limit baffle The blocking part disengages from the stop part of the rotating piece, and switches to the unlocking working position;所述第三方向垂直于所述第一面。The third direction is perpendicular to the first face.
- 根据权利要求32所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定组件还包括牵引件,分别与所述转动片和所 述第二锁定件连接;并配置为:所述转动片转动至开锁工作位的过程中,所述牵引件可产生形变储备弹性变形能,并可在所述第一施力部与所述第二施力部脱离后释放所述弹性变形能,带动所述第二锁定件转动至开锁工作位。The closeable device according to claim 32, wherein the locking assembly further includes a traction member connected to the rotating piece and the second locking member respectively; and is configured to: the rotating piece rotates to an unlocking working position During the process, the traction member can generate deformation reserve elastic deformation energy, and can release the elastic deformation energy after the first force applying part is separated from the second force applying part, driving the second locking member Turn to unlock working position.
- 根据权利要求33所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一施力部包括内凹弧面和锁扣平面,且两者间圆弧过渡连接;所述第二施力部包括顶紧平面和外凸弧面,且两者间圆弧过渡连接;所述转动片位于关锁工作位时,通过所述锁扣平面和所述顶紧平面相抵形成所述锁扣限位副,所述转动片位于开锁工作位时,所述第一施力部的内凹弧面与所述第二施力部的外凸弧面接合适配。The closable device according to claim 33, wherein the first force application part includes a concave arc surface and a locking plane, and the two are connected by a circular arc transition; the second force application part comprises a tightening plane and the convex arc surface, and the two are connected by a circular arc transition; when the rotating piece is in the lock working position, the lock stopper pair is formed by the contact between the lock plane and the tightening plane, the When the rotating piece is at the unlocking working position, the concave arc surface of the first force application part is engaged with the convex arc surface of the second force application part.
- 根据权利要求34所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述止动部为止动平面,在与第一面平行的投影面内,所述转动片位于关锁工作位时,所述锁扣限位副施加在所述转动片上的作用力延长线位于所述转动片的枢转中心的旁侧,以限制所述转动片转动切换至开锁工作位。The closable device according to claim 34, wherein the stop part is a stop plane, and in a projected plane parallel to the first plane, when the rotating piece is at the lock working position, the lock is limited. The extension line of the force applied to the rotating piece is located at the side of the pivot center of the rotating piece, so as to limit the turning of the rotating piece to switch to the unlocking working position.
- 根据权利要求34所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二锁定件的本体开设有避让槽,所述避让槽配置在所述第一锁舌的内侧。The closeable device according to claim 34, wherein the body of the second locking member is provided with an avoidance groove, and the avoidance groove is arranged on the inner side of the first locking tongue.
- 根据权利要求5-17或者33-36中任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述牵引件为拉簧。A closeable device according to any one of claims 5-17 or 33-36, wherein the drawer is a tension spring.
- 根据权利要求32所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁定装置还包括锁芯组件和驱动组件,所述传动输出件包括锁扣拨板和锁扣拨块;所述锁扣拨板与所述锁芯组件传动连接,且具有机械解锁输出端和机械开锁输出端;所述锁扣拨块与所述驱动组件传动连接,且具有电子解锁输出端和电子开锁输出端;相应地,所述锁扣板具有机械开锁传动部和电子开锁传动部,所述机械开锁传动部用于与所述机械开锁输出端传动连接,所述电子开锁传动部用于与所述电子开锁输出端传动连接;所述锁扣限位挡板具有机械解锁联动部和电子解锁联动部,所述机械解锁联动部用于与所述机械解锁输出端传动连接,所述电子解锁联动部用于与所述电子解锁输出端传动连接。The closeable device according to claim 32, wherein the locking device further includes a lock cylinder assembly and a driving assembly, and the transmission output member includes a latch dial and a latch dial; the latch dial and the latch dial The lock cylinder assembly is in transmission connection, and has a mechanical unlocking output end and a mechanical unlocking output end; the lock dial is in transmission connection with the drive assembly, and has an electronic unlocking output end and an electronic unlocking output end; correspondingly, the The strike plate has a mechanical unlocking transmission part and an electronic unlocking transmission part, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is used for transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking transmission part is used for transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end; The lock limit baffle has a mechanical unlocking linkage part and an electronic unlocking linkage part, the mechanical unlocking linkage part is used for transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end, and the electronic unlocking linkage part is used for connecting with the electronic unlocking Output drive connection.
- 根据权利要求38所述的可闭合设备,其中,在所述锁芯组件的带动下,所述锁扣拨板可沿第二方向滑动切换于开锁工作位和关锁工作位之间,所述锁扣拨板自开锁工作位滑动至关锁工作位的行程顺次包括解锁滑动行程和开锁滑动行程,并配置为:在所述解锁滑动行程,所述机械解锁联动部与所述机械解锁输出端传动连接;在所述开锁滑动行程,所述机械开锁传动部与所述机械开锁输出端传动连接;The closeable device according to claim 38, wherein, driven by the lock cylinder assembly, the lock dial can slide along the second direction to switch between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, said The stroke of the lock dial sliding from the unlocking working position to the locking working position includes an unlocking sliding stroke and an unlocking sliding stroke in sequence, and is configured such that: in the unlocking sliding stroke, the mechanical unlocking linkage part and the mechanical unlocking output terminal transmission connection; during the unlocking sliding stroke, the mechanical unlocking transmission part is in transmission connection with the mechanical unlocking output end;在驱动组件的带动下,所述锁扣拨块可转动切换于开锁工作位和关锁工作位之间,所述锁扣拨块自开锁工作位转动至关锁工作位的行程顺次包括解锁转动行程和开锁转动行程,并配置为:在所述解锁转动行程,所述电子解锁联动部与所述电子解锁输出端传动连接;在所述开锁转动行程,所述电子开锁传动部与所述电子开锁输出端传动连接。Driven by the drive assembly, the lock shifting block can be rotatably switched between the unlocking working position and the locking working position, and the stroke of the locking shifting block from the unlocking working position to the locking working position includes unlocking in sequence The rotation stroke and the unlocking rotation stroke are configured as follows: in the unlocking rotation stroke, the electronic unlocking linkage part is in transmission connection with the electronic unlocking output end; in the unlocking rotation stroke, the electronic unlocking transmission part is connected to the Electronic unlock output drive connection.
- 根据权利要求39所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁扣拨板包括压抵斜面和拨头部,所述压抵斜面朝向所述锁扣限位挡板设置以形成所述机械解锁输出端,所述拨头部沿第一方向延伸以形成所述机械开锁输出端,所述锁扣拨块包括导向倒角面和拨柱,所述导向倒角面朝向所述锁扣限位挡板设置以形成所述电子解锁输出端,所述拨柱沿第二方向延伸以形成所述电子开锁输出端;所述锁扣板包括挡筋和拨动内凹圆弧面,所述挡筋在第一面内延伸以形成机械开锁传动部,所述拨动内凹圆弧面朝向所述驱动组件设置以形成电子开锁传动部;所述锁扣限位挡板包括顶升导柱和顶升斜面,所述顶升导柱在第一面内延伸以形成所述机械解锁联动部,所述顶升斜面朝向所述驱动组件设置以形成所述电子解锁联动部。The closable device according to claim 39, wherein the lock dial comprises a pressing inclined surface and a dial head, and the pressing inclined surface is disposed toward the locking stopper to form the mechanical unlocking output. end, the toggle head extends along the first direction to form the mechanical unlock output end, the lock toggle block includes a guide chamfer surface and a dial column, the guide chamfer surface faces the lock stop The plate is arranged to form the output end of the electronic unlocking, and the shifting column extends along the second direction to form the output end of the electronic unlocking; the striker plate includes a retaining rib and a dial concave arc surface, and the retaining rib Extending in the first surface to form a mechanical unlocking transmission part, the toggle concave arc surface is set toward the drive assembly to form an electronic unlocking transmission part; the lock limit baffle includes a jacking guide post and a jacking A lifting slope, the lifting guide post extends in the first plane to form the mechanical unlocking linkage part, and the lifting slope is arranged toward the driving assembly to form the electronic unlocking linkage part.
- 根据权利要求40所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述限位套还包括复位扭簧、导向柱和定位柱,所述导向柱和所述定位柱固定设置,所述锁扣限位挡板的板体具有沿第三方向开设的导向槽和定位槽,且其在第四方向的两侧板沿分别具有承托部;所述导向柱插装在所述导向槽中形成滑动适配副,所述定位柱插装在所述定位槽中且其端部伸出于所述定位槽,所述复位扭簧的簧体套装在所述定位柱的端部,且其两端侧的簧体分别搭抵在两个所述承托部上,并配置为:所述锁扣限位挡板滑动切换至解锁工作位时,所述复位扭簧产生形变并储备弹性变形能,以提供所述锁扣限位挡板的复位作用力。The closeable device according to claim 40, wherein the limit sleeve further comprises a return torsion spring, a guide post and a positioning post, the guide post and the positioning post are fixedly arranged, and the locking stopper The plate body has a guide groove and a positioning groove opened along the third direction, and its two side plates in the fourth direction have supporting parts respectively; the guide post is inserted into the guide groove to form a sliding fitting pair , the positioning post is inserted into the positioning slot and its end protrudes from the positioning slot, the spring body of the return torsion spring is sleeved on the end of the positioning post, and the springs on both ends of the spring The bodies respectively abut on the two supporting parts, and are configured such that when the lock limit baffle slides and switches to the unlocking position, the return torsion spring deforms and stores elastic deformation energy to provide the Describe the reset force of the lock limit baffle.
- 根据权利要求1所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述连接件包括开合装置,所述两个可相对移动的部件通过所述开合装置枢转连接,所述开合装置包括:The closeable device according to claim 1, wherein the connecting member comprises an opening and closing device, and the two relatively movable parts are pivotally connected by the opening and closing device, and the opening and closing device comprises:枢转连接的第一合页和第二合页;a pivotally connected first hinge and a second hinge;设置在所述第一合页和所述第二合页之间的第一弹性件,所述第一弹性件能够驱动所述第一合页和/或所述第二合页在打开方向或者关闭方向转动;以及A first elastic member disposed between the first hinge and the second hinge, the first elastic member can drive the first hinge and/or the second hinge in the opening direction or turn off direction; and缓冲结构,所述缓冲结构设置于所述第一合页的外侧面的全部或部分,且所述缓冲结构延伸出所述第一合页的外侧面的部分能够与所述第二合页的外侧面抵接并产生可恢复的形变。A buffer structure, the buffer structure is arranged on all or part of the outer surface of the first hinge, and the part of the buffer structure extending beyond the outer surface of the first hinge can be connected with the second hinge The outer sides abut and undergo recoverable deformation.
- 根据权利要求42所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述缓冲结构包括第二固定部和第三限位部,其中,所述第二固定部安装在所述第一合页上,所述第三限位部自所述第二固定部向外延伸,并能够与所述第二合页的外侧面抵接并产生可恢复的形变。The closeable device according to claim 42, wherein the buffer structure includes a second fixing part and a third limiting part, wherein the second fixing part is installed on the first hinge, and the first hinge The three limiting parts extend outward from the second fixing part, and can abut against the outer surface of the second hinge to generate recoverable deformation.
- 根据权利要求43所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第三限位部的厚度大于所述第二固定部的厚度。The closeable device according to claim 43, wherein the thickness of the third limiting portion is greater than the thickness of the second fixing portion.
- 根据权利要求43所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第三限位部与所述第二固定部衔接处的内侧面与所述第一合页和所述第二合页的衔接处的外侧面贴合。The closeable device according to claim 43, wherein the inner surface of the joint of the third limiting part and the second fixing part is connected with the joint of the first hinge and the second hinge. Outer side fit.
- 根据权利要求43所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二固定部靠近所述第一合页的边缘设置有包裹部。A closeable device as claimed in claim 43, wherein the second securing part is provided with a wrapping part adjacent the edge of the first hinge.
- 根据权利要求42至46中任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述缓冲结构为弹性材料加工而成,以使得所述缓冲结构与所述第二合页抵接时产生形变,并在抵接消失后逐渐恢复原状。The closeable device according to any one of claims 42 to 46, wherein the cushioning structure is made of elastic material, so that the cushioning structure deforms when abutting against the second hinge, and After the abutment disappears, it gradually returns to its original shape.
- 根据权利要求42至46中任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一合页和所述第二合页通过转轴枢转连接,所述第一弹性件为套设在所述转轴上的至少一个扭簧,所述第一弹性件的第一端与所述第一合页的内侧面抵接,所述第一弹性件的第二端与所述第二合页的内侧面抵接。The closeable device according to any one of claims 42 to 46, wherein the first hinge and the second hinge are pivotally connected by a shaft, and the first elastic member is sleeved on the At least one torsion spring on the rotating shaft, the first end of the first elastic member is in contact with the inner surface of the first hinge, and the second end of the first elastic member is in contact with the inner surface of the second hinge. Side abutment.
- 根据权利要求48所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一合页具有套设在所述转轴上的第一旋转套,所述第二合页具有套设在所述转轴上的第二旋转套。A closable device according to claim 48, wherein said first hinge has a first rotatable sleeve fitted on said shaft and said second hinge has a second swivel sleeve fitted on said shaft. Swivel set.
- 根据权利要求49所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一合页包括第一安装部,和自所述第一安装部呈第一夹角弯折的第一弯折部,所述第一旋转套设置在所述第一弯折部上。The closeable device according to claim 49, wherein the first hinge comprises a first mounting portion, and a first bending portion bent at a first angle from the first mounting portion, the first hinge A rotating sleeve is arranged on the first bending part.
- 根据权利要求50所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二合页包括第二安装部,和自所述第二安装部呈第二夹角弯折的第二弯折部,所述第二旋转套设置在所述第二弯折部上。The closeable device according to claim 50, wherein the second hinge comprises a second mounting portion, and a second bending portion bent from the second mounting portion at a second angle, the first Two rotating sleeves are arranged on the second bending part.
- 根据权利要求2所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述可闭合设备为智能锁盒,所述两个可相对移动的部件包括第一壳体组件,以及能够与所述第一壳体组件共同围成容纳腔的第二壳体组件;The closable device according to claim 2, wherein the closable device is a smart lock box, and the two relatively movable parts comprise a first housing assembly, and can be used together with the first housing assembly a second housing assembly that encloses the receiving chamber;所述锁定装置包括智能锁,所述智能锁设置在所述第二壳体组件上,用于所述第二壳体组件和所述第一壳体组件之间的解锁和锁定;The locking device includes an intelligent lock, and the intelligent lock is arranged on the second housing component for unlocking and locking between the second housing component and the first housing component;其中,所述智能锁具有设置在所述第二壳体组件上的用于输入解锁密码的按键,以及设置在所述第二壳体组件上的电性接口,且所述电性接口在所述第二壳体组件内被隔离件隔离。Wherein, the smart lock has a key set on the second housing component for inputting an unlocking password, and an electrical interface set on the second housing component, and the electrical interface is located on the second housing component. The inside of the second housing assembly is isolated by a spacer.
- 根据权利要求52所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一壳体组件上设置有电动机,所述智能锁包括驱动组件和连接在所述驱动组件上的第二锁舌,所述第二锁舌能够在所述驱动组件的驱动下进出所述电动机以实现所述第一壳体组件和所述第二壳体组件的锁定和解锁。The closeable device according to claim 52, wherein a motor is provided on the first housing component, the smart lock comprises a drive component and a second bolt connected to the drive component, the second The lock tongue can enter and exit the motor under the driving of the drive assembly to realize the locking and unlocking of the first casing assembly and the second casing assembly.
- 根据权利要求53所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述驱动组件包括:A closeable device according to claim 53, wherein said drive assembly comprises:电动机;motor;与所述电动机的输出轴连接的传动件;a transmission member connected to the output shaft of the motor;与所述传动件连接并在所述传动件的带动下往复移动的移动件,所述第二锁舌设置在所述移动件上;a moving part connected to the transmission part and reciprocatingly moved under the drive of the transmission part, the second lock tongue is arranged on the moving part;其中,所述电动机通过驱动所述移动件向远离所述电动机的方向移动,以使所述第二锁舌能够进入到所述电动机中;并且,所述电动机通过驱动所述移动件向靠近所述电动机的方向移动,以使所述第二锁舌能够从所述电动机中移出。Wherein, the motor drives the moving part to move away from the motor, so that the second lock tongue can enter the motor; and, the motor drives the moving part to move closer to the motor. direction of the electric motor to enable the second deadbolt to be removed from the electric motor.
- 根据权利要求54所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述传动件为螺杆,所述移动件套设在所述螺杆上并与所述螺杆螺纹连接,且所述移动件在所述第二壳体组件的限位下仅能够沿所述螺杆的轴向往复移动;所述电动机通过带动所述螺杆正向转动使所述移动件远离所述电动机,并通过带动所述螺杆反向转动使所述移动件靠近所述电动机。The closeable device according to claim 54, wherein the transmission part is a screw, the moving part is sleeved on the screw and screwed with the screw, and the moving part is mounted on the second housing Under the limit of the body assembly, it can only move back and forth along the axial direction of the screw; the motor drives the screw to rotate forward to keep the moving part away from the motor, and drives the screw to rotate reversely to make the moving part The moving member is close to the motor.
- 根据权利要求54所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二锁舌通过第二连杆滑动的设置在所述移动件上,所述第二连杆的滑动方向与所述移动件的移动方向相同,并且所述移动件上设置有第二弹性件,所述第二弹性件在所述第二锁舌向所述移动件靠近时被所述第二连杆压缩。The closeable device according to claim 54, wherein the second locking tongue is slidably arranged on the moving member through a second link, and the sliding direction of the second link is related to the movement of the moving member. The directions are the same, and the moving part is provided with a second elastic part, and the second elastic part is compressed by the second connecting rod when the second lock tongue approaches the moving part.
- 根据权利要求54所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能锁包括检测组件,所述检测组件包括:The closeable device of claim 54, wherein the smart lock includes a detection component, the detection component comprising:相对于所述电动机固定设置的检测件;a detection piece fixedly arranged relative to the motor;连接在所述移动件上并随所述移动件移动的随动件,所述检测件通过检测所述随动件的位置能够得到所述第二锁舌所处的位置。A follower that is connected to the moving member and moves with the mover, and the detection member can obtain the position of the second lock tongue by detecting the position of the follower.
- 根据权利要求57所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述检测件具有接触件,所述随动件上开设有接触槽,所述接触件位于所述接触槽中并通过与所述接触槽的不同侧壁接触使得所述检测件能够测得所述第二锁舌是否位于所述电动机中。The closeable device according to claim 57, wherein the detection part has a contact part, and a contact groove is opened on the follower part, and the contact part is located in the contact groove and passes through the contact groove. The contact of the different side walls enables the detection member to detect whether the second bolt is located in the motor.
- 根据权利要求57所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能锁包括设置在所述第二壳体组件上并与所述按键和所述电性接口电连接的控制组件,所述驱动组件和所述检测件设置在所述控制组件上并与所述控制组件电连接。The closeable device according to claim 57, wherein the smart lock includes a control component disposed on the second housing component and electrically connected to the button and the electrical interface, the drive component and the electrical interface The detection element is arranged on the control assembly and is electrically connected with the control assembly.
- 根据权利要求59所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述智能锁包括生物信息识别件,所述生物信息识别件与所述控制组件电连接,并通过与所述控制组件配合实现对携带生物信息的控制指令的验证。The closeable device according to claim 59, wherein the smart lock includes a biological information identification part, the biological information identification part is electrically connected to the control component, and realizes the identification of the biological information carried by cooperating with the control component. Verification of control instructions.
- 根据权利要求60所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述生物信息识别件包括指纹识别件、人脸识别件、指静脉识别件和掌纹识别件中的至少一个。The closeable device according to claim 60, wherein the biometric information identification element comprises at least one of a fingerprint identification element, a face identification element, a finger vein identification element and a palmprint identification element.
- 根据权利要求59所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述控制组件包括能够与电子设备通信连接的无线通信模块,以使所述电子设备能够控制所述第二锁舌从所述电动机中移出。A closeable device as claimed in claim 59, wherein said control assembly comprises a wireless communication module communicatively linkable to an electronic device to enable said electronic device to control removal of said second bolt from said motor.
- 根据权利要求60所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二壳体组件包括:A closeable device according to claim 60, wherein said second housing assembly comprises:外侧壳体,所述按键和所述生物信息识别件设置在所述外侧壳体上;an outer casing, on which the buttons and the biometric identification piece are arranged;设置有安装槽的安装板,所述第二锁舌、所述驱动组件、所述检测组件和所述控制组件均位于所述安装槽内;A mounting plate provided with a mounting groove, the second deadbolt, the driving assembly, the detection assembly and the control assembly are located in the mounting groove;与所述安装板连接并覆盖所述控制组件以将所述控制组件固定在所述安装板上的固定盖板;a fixed cover connected to the mounting plate and covering the control assembly to fix the control assembly on the mounting plate;与所述外侧壳体连接,以将所述安装板、所述第二锁舌、所述驱动组件、所述检测组件、所述控制组件和所述固定盖板容置在所述第二壳体组件内的内侧壳体。connected with the outer casing to accommodate the installation plate, the second deadbolt, the drive assembly, the detection assembly, the control assembly and the fixed cover in the second casing inner housing inside the body assembly.
- 根据权利要求63所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述电动机为凸出所述第一壳体组件设置的锁扣,所述内侧壳体上开设有允许所述锁扣穿过的通孔。The closable device according to claim 63, wherein the motor is a latch protruding from the first housing component, and a through hole is opened on the inner casing to allow the latch to pass through.
- 根据权利要求52-64中任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一壳体组件上设置有铰链,所述第二壳体组件通过所述铰链与所述第一壳体组件转动连接,并通过相对于所述第一壳体组件转动实现所述容纳腔的开闭。A closeable device according to any one of claims 52-64, wherein a hinge is provided on the first housing component, and the second housing component is connected to the first housing component by the hinge. connected in rotation, and realize the opening and closing of the accommodating cavity by rotating relative to the first housing component.
- 根据权利要求2所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述可闭合设备为智能锁盒,所述两个可相对移动的部件可以包括具有存储空间的第一壳体组件,以及能够与所述第一壳体组件相互对合并锁闭的第二壳体组件;The closable device according to claim 2, wherein the closable device is an intelligent lock box, and the two relatively movable parts may include a first housing assembly having a storage space, and capable of communicating with the second housing assembly. A second housing component that the housing components face and lock together;所述锁定装置包括智能锁,所述智能锁设置在所述第二壳体组件上,所述第二壳体组件包括外侧壳体和安装板,所述智能锁包括设置在所述外侧壳体与所述安装板之间的驱动组件以及由所述驱动组件驱动的第二锁舌,所述第一壳体组件在接近竖向上边沿的位置设有用于与所述第二锁舌相配合的锁扣,所述外侧壳体内设有用于分散冲击力的防敲装置,所述防敲装置位于所述外侧壳体的顶端内侧。The locking device includes a smart lock, the smart lock is arranged on the second housing assembly, the second housing assembly includes an outer housing and a mounting plate, and the smart lock includes a The drive assembly between the installation plate and the second lock tongue driven by the drive assembly, the first housing assembly is provided with a lock for cooperating with the second lock tongue at a position close to the vertical upper edge For the lock buckle, an anti-knock device for dispersing impact force is provided inside the outer casing, and the anti-knock device is located inside the top end of the outer casing.
- 根据权利要求66所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述防敲装置包括安装块和散振销,所述安装块设有竖向的安装孔,所述散振销的底端插入所述安装孔,所述散振销的顶端伸出所述安装孔,所述安装孔内设有套装在所述散振销上的阻尼弹簧,以弹性支撑所述散振销。The closeable device according to claim 66, wherein the anti-knock device comprises a mounting block and a vibration-dissipating pin, the mounting block is provided with a vertical mounting hole, and the bottom end of the vibration-dissipating pin is inserted into the mounting The top end of the vibration-scattering pin protrudes from the mounting hole, and a damping spring fitted on the vibration-scattering pin is provided in the mounting hole to elastically support the vibration-scattering pin.
- 根据权利要求67所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述散振销呈“T”字形,所述阻尼弹簧的顶端支撑于所述散振销的台阶部位,所述阻尼弹簧的底端支撑于所述安装孔的底部。The closeable device according to claim 67, wherein the vibration dissipating pin is in a "T" shape, the top end of the damping spring is supported on the stepped part of the vibration dissipating pin, and the bottom end of the damping spring is supported on bottom of the mounting hole.
- 根据权利要求68所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述安装块上设有左右对称的第一安装孔和第二安装孔,所述第一安装孔内设有第一散振销和第一阻尼弹簧,所述第二安装孔内设有第二散振销和第二阻尼弹簧。The closeable device according to claim 68, wherein the mounting block is provided with a first mounting hole and a second mounting hole which are bilaterally symmetrical, and a first vibration-dissipating pin and a first vibration-dissipating pin are arranged in the first mounting hole. The damping spring, the second mounting hole is provided with a second vibration-dissipating pin and a second damping spring.
- 根据权利要求69所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述安装块的底部设有能够在锁紧状态下能够抵接于所述第二锁舌上端的凸出部,所述凸出部在竖直方向上与所述散振销相对应。The closeable device according to claim 69, wherein the bottom of the mounting block is provided with a protruding portion capable of abutting against the upper end of the second lock tongue in a locked state, and the protruding portion is vertically Corresponding to the vibration-dispersing pin in the vertical direction.
- 根据权利要求66所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二锁舌的尾部带有向下延伸的锁柄。A closeable device as claimed in claim 66, wherein the tail of the second bolt has a downwardly extending shank.
- 根据权利要求71所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第二锁舌的主体部分呈块状结构,其上端为斜面形状。71. A closeable device as claimed in claim 71, wherein the main part of the second locking bolt is block-shaped with an upper end in the shape of a bevel.
- 根据权利要求72所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述锁扣为垂直于所述第一壳体组件扣合面设置的“U”形。A closeable device according to claim 72, wherein said latch is in the shape of a "U" disposed perpendicularly to said engaging surface of said first housing component.
- 根据权利要求73所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述第一壳体组件的顶部设有锁梁。A closeable device as claimed in claim 73, wherein the top of the first housing component is provided with a locking beam.
- 根据权利要求66至74中任一项所述的可闭合设备,其中,所述驱动组件包括电动机、电机压块、移动件以及锁舌弹簧,所述电动机由所述电机压块定位于所述外侧壳体,所述移动件与所述电动机的动力输出端传动连接并能够在所述电动机的带动下沿竖直方向移动,所述锁舌弹簧设于所述移动件与所述第二锁舌之间。A closeable device according to any one of claims 66 to 74, wherein the drive assembly comprises an electric motor, a motor pressure block, a moving member and a bolt spring, the motor being positioned by the motor pressure block in the The outer casing, the moving part is connected to the power output end of the motor and can move vertically under the drive of the motor, and the bolt spring is arranged between the moving part and the second lock between tongues.
- 一种索引信息管理方法,用于对如权利要求1-75任一项所述的可闭合设备进行索引信息管理,其中,所述方法包括:An index information management method, used for index information management of the closeable device according to any one of claims 1-75, wherein the method includes:获取用户访问物品管理区域的请求,所述物品管理区域至少由所述两个可相对移动的部件合围形成;Obtaining a user's request for accessing an item management area, the item management area being at least surrounded by the two relatively movable parts;基于所述访问请求,对所述用户的身份进行安全验证,并生成访问信息,所述物品管理区域为可闭合空间;Based on the access request, security verification is performed on the identity of the user, and access information is generated, and the item management area is a closable space;获取所述受信用户访问期间所述物品管理区域的物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息;Obtaining item information in the item management area and/or access information of the item during the trusted user's visit;基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定。Based on the item information and/or access information of the item, index information is determined, the index information is also determined at least based on the access information.
- 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其中,所述基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定包括:The method according to claim 76, wherein said determining index information based on said item information and/or said item's access information, said index information determined based at least on said access information includes:在未检测到已创建的索引信息时,基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,创建所述索引信息, 所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息和预设规则创建。When the created index information is not detected, the index information is created based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, and the index information is created based at least on the access information and preset rules.
- 根据权利要求77所述的方法,其中,所述基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定还包括:The method according to claim 77, wherein said determining index information based on said item information and/or said item's access information, said index information being determined based at least on said access information further comprises:在检测到已创建的索引信息时,基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,更新所述索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息更新。When the created index information is detected, the index information is updated based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, and the index information is updated at least based on the access information.
- 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 76, wherein the method further comprises:基于所述索引信息进行查询显示。Perform query display based on the index information.
- 根据权利要求76-79中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述获取所述受信用户访问期间所述物品管理区域的物品信息和/或物品的存取信息包括:The method according to any one of claims 76-79, wherein said acquiring item information and/or access information of items in said item management area during said trusted user's visit comprises:获取所述物品管理区域的探测信息;Acquiring detection information of the item management area;基于所述探测信息,确定所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息。Based on the detection information, the item information and/or the access information of the item is determined.
- 根据权利要求80所述的方法,其中,所述物品信息至少包括物品的属性和/或物品的价值。The method of claim 80, wherein the item information includes at least an attribute of the item and/or a value of the item.
- 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其中,所述探测信息通过传感器采集获得,所述传感器包括图像传感器、激光传感器、红外传感器、超声波传感器以及压力传感器中的至少一种。The method according to claim 76, wherein the detection information is collected by a sensor, and the sensor includes at least one of an image sensor, a laser sensor, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor and a pressure sensor.
- 根据权利要求80所述的方法,其中,在所述基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 80, wherein, before determining the index information based on the item information and/or the access information of the item, the method further comprises:至少基于所述访问信息和/或所述探测信息,确定物品的权属信息。Based at least on the access information and/or on the probe information, ownership information of the item is determined.
- 根据权利要求83所述的方法,其中,所述至少基于所述访问信息和/或所述探测信息,确定物品的权属信息进一步包括:The method according to claim 83, wherein said determining ownership information of an item based at least on said access information and/or said detection information further comprises:基于所述访问信息和所述探测信息,确定存入物品的权属信息。Based on the access information and the detection information, ownership information of the deposited item is determined.
- 根据权利要求83所述的方法,其中,所述至少基于所述访问信息和/或所述探测信息,确定物品的权属信息进一步包括:The method according to claim 83, wherein said determining ownership information of an item based at least on said access information and/or said detection information further comprises:获取所述物品管理区域内物品的历史权属信息;Obtain historical ownership information of items in the item management area;基于所述探测信息和所述历史权属信息,确定取出物品的权属信息。Based on the detection information and the historical ownership information, determine the ownership information of the retrieved item.
- 根据权利要求83-85中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述索引信息还基于所述权属信息确定。The method according to any one of claims 83-85, wherein the index information is also determined based on the ownership information.
- 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其中,所述访问请求携带与所述用户的身份相对应的用户信息;所述对所述用户的身份进行安全验证包括:The method according to claim 76, wherein the access request carries user information corresponding to the identity of the user; and performing security verification on the identity of the user comprises:基于所述用户的用户信息判断所述用户是否为受信用户,在判定结果为否时发出警报信息。Judging whether the user is a trusted user based on the user information of the user, and sending an alarm message when the judging result is no.
- 一种索引信息管理系统,其中,所述系统包括:An index information management system, wherein the system includes:安全模块,被配置为:A security module, configured to:获取用户访问物品管理区域的请求;Obtain the user's request to access the item management area;基于所述访问请求,对所述用户的身份进行安全验证,并生成访问信息,所述物品管理区域为可闭合空间;以及Based on the access request, perform security verification on the identity of the user, and generate access information, the item management area is a closable space; and管理模块,被配置为:Management module, configured to:获取所述受信用户访问期间所述物品管理区域的物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息;Obtaining item information in the item management area and/or access information of the item during the trusted user's visit;基于所述物品信息和/或所述物品的存取信息,确定索引信息,所述索引信息至少还基于所述访问信息确定。Based on the item information and/or access information of the item, index information is determined, the index information is also determined at least based on the access information.
- 一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,其中,所述程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求76-87中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, wherein the program implements the method according to any one of claims 76-87 when executed by a processor.
- 一种处理器,所述处理器用于运行程序,其中,所述程序运行时实现如权利要求76-87中任一项所述的方法。A processor, the processor is used to run a program, wherein the program implements the method according to any one of claims 76-87 when running.
- 一种电子设备,包括:An electronic device comprising:一个或多个处理器;one or more processors;存储装置,其上存储有一个或多个程序;a storage device having one or more programs stored thereon;当所述一个或多个程序被所述一个或多个处理器执行时,使得所述一个或多个处理器实现如权利要求76-87中任一项所述的方法。When the one or more programs are executed by the one or more processors, the one or more processors are made to implement the method according to any one of claims 76-87.
Applications Claiming Priority (14)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202121213576.8U CN216974452U (en) | 2021-06-01 | 2021-06-01 | Structure for locking and unlocking door body and box body equipment |
CN202121213576.8 | 2021-06-01 | ||
CN202121213530.6 | 2021-06-01 | ||
CN202110608615.2A CN115419327A (en) | 2021-06-01 | 2021-06-01 | Structure for locking and unlocking door body and box body equipment |
CN202110608615.2 | 2021-06-01 | ||
CN202121213530.6U CN216974512U (en) | 2021-06-01 | 2021-06-01 | Opening and closing structure and box equipment |
CN202121316470.0U CN216255870U (en) | 2021-06-11 | 2021-06-11 | A kind of container |
CN202121316470.0 | 2021-06-11 | ||
CN202210100036.1 | 2022-01-27 | ||
CN202210100036.1A CN114139021B (en) | 2022-01-27 | 2022-01-27 | Index information management method and system |
CN202220303485.1 | 2022-02-15 | ||
CN202220303485.1U CN216974456U (en) | 2022-02-15 | 2022-02-15 | Intelligent lock box |
CN202220453254.9U CN217380070U (en) | 2022-03-02 | 2022-03-02 | Locking device |
CN202220453254.9 | 2022-03-02 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022253274A1 true WO2022253274A1 (en) | 2022-12-08 |
Family
ID=84323920
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2022/096621 WO2022253274A1 (en) | 2021-06-01 | 2022-06-01 | Closable device and index information management method and system |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2022253274A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20240191542A1 (en) * | 2022-12-13 | 2024-06-13 | Primax Electronics Ltd. | Electronic lock components |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110229296A1 (en) * | 2010-03-20 | 2011-09-22 | Van Ooyen Wes | Apparatus, system and method for storage and dispensing of items |
CN107832629A (en) * | 2017-11-03 | 2018-03-23 | 深圳市前海安测信息技术有限公司 | Area medical information access control system and method |
CN109441251A (en) * | 2018-11-09 | 2019-03-08 | 东莞东晟工业技术有限公司 | Cabinet door smart lock |
CN210828703U (en) * | 2019-06-21 | 2020-06-23 | 周雨俊 | Suitcase fingerprint latch mechanism |
CN211422151U (en) * | 2019-11-06 | 2020-09-04 | 深圳市铭乾智能科技有限公司 | Fingerprint storage box |
-
2022
- 2022-06-01 WO PCT/CN2022/096621 patent/WO2022253274A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110229296A1 (en) * | 2010-03-20 | 2011-09-22 | Van Ooyen Wes | Apparatus, system and method for storage and dispensing of items |
CN107832629A (en) * | 2017-11-03 | 2018-03-23 | 深圳市前海安测信息技术有限公司 | Area medical information access control system and method |
CN109441251A (en) * | 2018-11-09 | 2019-03-08 | 东莞东晟工业技术有限公司 | Cabinet door smart lock |
CN210828703U (en) * | 2019-06-21 | 2020-06-23 | 周雨俊 | Suitcase fingerprint latch mechanism |
CN211422151U (en) * | 2019-11-06 | 2020-09-04 | 深圳市铭乾智能科技有限公司 | Fingerprint storage box |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20240191542A1 (en) * | 2022-12-13 | 2024-06-13 | Primax Electronics Ltd. | Electronic lock components |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US9767632B2 (en) | Intelligent door lock system retrofitted to existing door lock mechanism | |
US12045774B2 (en) | Inventory management system | |
US9470018B1 (en) | Intelligent door lock system with friction detection and deformed door mode operation | |
CN107578519A (en) | A kind of intelligent access control system and intelligent entrance guard method for unlocking | |
CN202266112U (en) | Safe with face and palm print identification function | |
CN106296897A (en) | The intelligent active electronic key of finger print identifying and passive smart lock and its implementation | |
US20050219360A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for biometric access control with fully integrated digital video storage and retrieval | |
WO2022253274A1 (en) | Closable device and index information management method and system | |
CN201974845U (en) | Comprehensive identity authentication device | |
CN207198943U (en) | Finger vein identification access control system based on intelligent management | |
US20200002977A1 (en) | Door access device | |
CN109854125A (en) | A kind of safety cabinet and its method for unlocking | |
AU757159B2 (en) | Biometric key | |
US20210381276A1 (en) | Lock and control methods and systems thereof | |
CN101858168A (en) | Fire engine access lock | |
CN210666918U (en) | Safe type thing networking intelligence lock | |
CN203217641U (en) | Intelligent tool and instrument cabinet | |
CN109410371A (en) | Finger vein identification access control system based on intelligent management | |
CN206193944U (en) | Drug management system that fingerprint was reinspected | |
CN210858383U (en) | Safe deposit box | |
CN108198311A (en) | A kind of home security intelligent anti-theft door based on Internet of Things | |
CN114861007A (en) | Index information management method and system | |
CN210377499U (en) | Safety lock of type-C interface that charges based on biological feature recognition | |
CN209637549U (en) | The machine tool door of high safety performance | |
CN211473710U (en) | Intelligent lock |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22815316 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 22815316 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |